Cakewalk Sonar X3 User guide

Cakewalk Sonar X3 User guide
SONAR X3
Reference Guide
Information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of Cakewalk, Inc. The software described in this document is furnished under a
license agreement or nondisclosure agreement. The software may be used or copied only in accordance of the terms of the agreement. It is against the law to copy this software on any medium
except as specifically allowed in the agreement. No part of this document may be reproduced or
transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying and
recording, for any purpose without the express written permission of Cakewalk, Inc.
Copyright © 2013 Cakewalk, Inc. All rights reserved.
Program Copyright © 2013 Cakewalk, Inc. All rights reserved.
ACID is a trademark of Sony Creative Software, Inc.
Cakewalk is a registered trademark of Cakewalk, Inc. and the Cakewalk logo are trademarks of
Cakewalk, Inc. Other company and product names are trademarks of their respective owners.
Visit Cakewalk on the World Wide Web at www.cakewalk.com.
Getting started
If you want to get up and running quickly, please use the following tutorials, which are tailored to
learning specific tasks in SONAR. If you are new to Cakewalk products, you may want to start at
Tutorial 1. If you have used previous versions of Cakewalk, or you want to do a specific task, choose
from the following tutorials:
“Tutorial 1 – Creating, playing, and saving projects” on page 99
“Tutorial 2 – Using the Browser” on page 113
“Tutorial 3 – Recording vocals and musical instruments” on page 119
“Tutorial 4 – Playing and recording software instruments” on page 125
“Tutorial 5 – Working with music notation” on page 133
“Tutorial 6 – Editing your music” on page 143
“Tutorial 7 – Mixing and adding effects” on page 151
“Tutorial 8 – Working with video” on page 161
“Tutorial 9 – Exporting, CD burning and sharing” on page 171
“Glossary” on page 2043. A list of defined terms.
“Introduction” on page 53. An overview of SONAR’s features and functionality.
“Troubleshooting” on page 1363. Answers to frequently asked questions.
“New features in SONAR X3” on page 1423. Descriptions of new features in SONAR X3.
Note: This documentation covers SONAR X3 base version, SONAR X3 Studio and SONAR X3
Producer. The documentation indicates if a feature only applies to a specific edition of SONAR
X3. For a list of key differences between each edition, see “Comparison” on page 1465.
3
Getting started
4
Getting started
Table of contents
Getting started. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
About SONAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Publish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Music composition and exploration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remixing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Game sound development . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sound production and engineering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Web authoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Film and video scoring and production . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Publishing music on the Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Burning audio CDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flexibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Computers, sound and music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MIDI connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing I/O devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting SONAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SONAR basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SONAR file types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening a file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Working on a project. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Screen colors and wallpaper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Color presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
54
54
54
54
55
55
55
55
56
56
56
56
56
57
58
59
63
64
68
72
73
74
75
92
92
94
5
Installing SONAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Starting to use SONAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
2 Tutorial 1 – Creating, playing, and saving projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Creating a new project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Opening project files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Playing project files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Configuring your sound device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Setting the track outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Playing the project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Looping project files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Saving project files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
3 Tutorial 2 – Using the Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Finding and previewing audio loops. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Previewing MIDI groove clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Adding audio loops to your project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
4 Tutorial 3 – Recording vocals and musical instruments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
5 Tutorial 4 – Playing and recording software instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Adding an instrument track to your project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Recording MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Manually entering MIDI notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
6 Tutorial 5 – Working with music notation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Printing your notation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
7 Tutorial 6 – Editing your music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Undo and Redo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Moving clips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Splitting clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Cropping clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
6
Table of contents
8 Tutorial 7 – Mixing and adding effects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Volume and pan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Adding effects (FX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Using Automation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
9 Tutorial 8 – Working with video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Importing video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What if I don’t see the Video Thumbnail pane or Video view? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the video properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Working with markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exporting your video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
162
164
164
166
168
10 Tutorial 9 – Exporting, CD burning and sharing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Burning an audio CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Uploading audio to SoundCloud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Uploading your songs to YouTube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
11 Controlling playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
The Now time and how to use it . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Now time marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Track view Now Time display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying the Now time in large print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Time ruler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controlling the transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handling stuck notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Looping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Transport, Markers, Punch and Loop modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Track-by-track playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Mix module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Silencing tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Soloing tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dim Solo mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exclusive Solo mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Solo Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inverting the phase of a track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing tracks’ mono/stereo status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of contents
182
184
185
186
188
190
193
194
195
200
201
203
204
205
206
207
207
208
7
Changing track settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Setting up output devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Assigning Inputs & Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Assigning tracks to mono hardware outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Choosing the instrument sound (bank and patch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Adding effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Adjusting volume and pan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Configuring panning laws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Adjusting volume trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Assigning a MIDI channel (Chn) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Adjusting the Key/transposing a track (Key+) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Adjusting the note velocity (Vel+) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Adjusting the time alignment of a MIDI track (Time+) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Other MIDI playback settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Customizing track/bus colors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Controlling live MIDI playback—MIDI echo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Local control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Playing files in sequence with the Play List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
The Play List interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Using the Play List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Video playback, import, and export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Importing and playing back videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Exporting video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Uploading your songs to YouTube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Optimizing video performance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Using the Video Thumbnails pane. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Video playback on a FireWire DV device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Exporting a project to a FireWire DV device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Synchronizing external video playback to audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Locating missing audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
The Find Missing Audio dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Restoring missing audio files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Managing shared and external files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
12 Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Creating a new project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Using per-project audio folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Creating a new project file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Setting the Meter and Key signatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Setting the Metronome and Tempo settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Setting the audio sampling rate and bit depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
8
Table of contents
Sony Wave-64 support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the MIDI timing resolution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preparing to record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recording modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Choosing an input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Arming tracks for recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auto arming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Arming tracks during playback/recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recording music from a MIDI instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input quantizing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Arpeggiator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the arpeggiator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recording audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Confidence recording and waveform preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Live Input PDC override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Audio Engine button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loop recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Punch recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step record keyboard Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step pattern recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recording specific ports and channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Importing music and sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Importing audio files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Importing audio CD Tracks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Importing material from another SONAR project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Importing OMF projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Importing MIDI files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Importing audio / MIDI files from the Clips pane. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving your work. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Labeling your projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
File statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of contents
275
276
277
278
279
281
282
282
283
284
286
289
293
295
296
300
302
303
305
308
314
315
316
317
318
318
321
321
322
324
324
325
327
328
9
13 Arranging and editing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Arranging tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Changing the order of tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Inserting tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Configuring the display of tracks in the Track view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Copying tracks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Erasing tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Working with track templates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Track icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Configuring Track view controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Arranging clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Displaying clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Using the Navigator view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Opening views by double-clicking clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Selecting clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Using the Select tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Moving and copying clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Aim Assist line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Reverting clip(s) to original time stamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Locking Clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Auto scroll lock in Clips pane. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Clip groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Nudge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Nudge settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Working with partial clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Markers and the snap grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Showing grid lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Defining and using the Snap Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Snap offsets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Creating and using markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
TAB to transients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Working with linked clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Splitting and combining clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Take lanes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Take lane controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Using Take lanes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Clip muting and isolating (clip soloing). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Toggling a clip’s mute status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Audition (selection playback). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Isolating (clip soloing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
10
Table of contents
Comping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic comping workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recording takes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auditioning takes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Comping methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjusting crossfades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing Comp clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Finalizing the comp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing all unused takes and empty Take lanes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Track folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding effects in the Track view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing tempos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Transport module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Tempo commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Tempo view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Undo, redo, and the undo history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Slip-editing (non-destructive editing). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using slip-editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Slip-editing multiple clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fades and crossfades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using fades and crossfades in real-time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enhanced editing with keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Navigating with a keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting with a keyboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing with a keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
391
393
394
396
397
407
408
411
413
414
417
418
419
419
421
425
426
427
429
430
430
434
436
438
439
14 Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Selecting tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the data type to edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Smart tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Select tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Move tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Edit tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Timing tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Comping tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Split tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Freehand tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pattern tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of contents
445
450
456
464
469
473
478
480
482
486
490
492
11
Erase tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
Mute tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Scrub tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Zoom tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
Snap to Grid settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Specifying note durations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Mouse cursors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Using tools to perform common tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
Working with audio clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Working with MIDI clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Working with MIDI notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Working with automation envelopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
Working with AudioSnap transients. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
15 Control Bar overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Tools module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
Snap module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
Transport module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
Loop module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
Mix module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
ACT module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
Screenset module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
Performance module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
Punch module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
Select module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
Markers module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
Event Inspector module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
Sync Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
Gobbler module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
16 Inspectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
Track Inspector overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
Track Inspector controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
Properties Inspector overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
Properties Inspector - Clip Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594
Properties Inspector - Track Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600
Properties Inspector - Bus Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
12
Table of contents
17 Browser. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
Docking/undocking and resizing the Browser window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Media Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding Browser objects to your project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Content Location presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyboard navigation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Plug-in Browser. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding effects and instruments to a project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using FX Chain presets (.fxc). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Synth Rack Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Managing instruments in a project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
608
610
613
618
619
620
622
626
628
632
18 AudioSnap (Producer and Studio only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
Using global tools on AudioSnap transient markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
Editing transient markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643
Enabling/disabling AudioSnap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651
Using the AudioSnap palette. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652
Synchronizing audio and the project tempo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656
Editing a clip’s tempo map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659
Changing a project’s tempo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662
Fixing timing problems in audio clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663
Adjusting the timing of a solo performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664
Adjusting the timing of a multi-track performance while maintaining phase relationships
665
Synchronizing the rhythms of out-of-sync tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670
Making multiple clips/tracks groove together . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670
Quantizing audio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671
Extracting MIDI timing information from audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679
General editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681
Snapping edits to audio beats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681
Splitting beats into clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683
Slip-stretching audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687
Adding automation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688
Using the Pool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 689
Groove Quantize and Quantize to Pool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690
Algorithms and rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 692
Table of contents
13
19 Working with loops and Groove Clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 697
The Loop Construction view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698
Loop Construction controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699
Using loops with the Browser. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 703
Working with loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 705
Working with Groove Clip audio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 706
How Groove Clips work in SONAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 706
Using Groove Clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 707
Creating and editing Groove Clips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 708
Editing slices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711
Saving Groove Clips as Wave files/ACIDized Wave files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 712
Using pitch markers in the Track view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 712
Working with REX files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 714
MIDI Groove Clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715
Exporting and importing MIDI Groove clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717
Importing Project5 patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719
20 Editing MIDI events and continuous controllers (CC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721
Event Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723
The Piano Roll view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724
Note Map pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726
Drum Grid pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726
Notes pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726
Controller pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726
Track List pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727
Opening the view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727
Working with multiple tracks in the Piano Roll view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728
Note names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 730
Displaying notes and controllers (Piano Roll view only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 731
Adding and editing notes in the Piano Roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 732
Selecting notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 732
Editing notes with the global tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 734
Piano Roll view snap resolution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 740
Show velocity on selected notes (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 741
Selection sensitive velocity drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 742
Hiding events in muted clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 742
Adding and editing controllers in the Piano Roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743
Multiple automation controller lanes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 744
Adding controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 747
14
Table of contents
Selecting controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Select controllers within note duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Piano Roll Microscope mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Inline Piano Roll view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying the Inline Piano Roll view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The MIDI scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying notes and controllers in the Inline Piano Roll view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting and editing events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copying and pasting MIDI data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transposing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inserting time or measures into a project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stretching and shrinking events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reversing notes in a clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding crescendos and decrescendos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the timing of a recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quantizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fit Improvisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Snap to Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Searching for events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Event filters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controllers, RPNs, NRPNs, and automation data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Event List view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Event List buttons and overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting events in the Event List view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Event List display filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing events and event parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additional event information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MIDI effects (MIDI plug-ins) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MIDI effects presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quantizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding Echo/Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Filtering events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding Arpeggio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analyzing chords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing velocities with the Velocity effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transposing MIDI notes with the Transpose MIDI effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of contents
749
749
750
753
753
754
755
757
757
758
760
762
765
765
766
767
775
778
781
782
786
788
790
792
792
793
794
796
797
797
798
800
801
803
804
805
15
21 Drum maps and the Drum Grid pane. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 807
The basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808
Creating and editing a drum map. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808
The Drum Map Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808
Working in the Drum Map Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 811
The Map Properties dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 811
Saving a drum map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812
Using drum maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 813
Assigning a MIDI track to a drum map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 813
Opening a drum map. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 814
Displaying tracks in the Drum Grid pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 814
Velocity tails. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815
Editing note velocities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815
Previewing a mapped sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 816
The Note Map pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 817
Changing mapped-note settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 817
The Drum Grid pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 819
Grid lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 819
22 Editing audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 821
Digital audio fundamentals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 822
Basic acoustics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 822
Example—a guitar string . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 823
Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 825
Recording a sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 827
The decibel scale. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 828
Audio clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 828
Managing audio data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 829
Basic audio editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 829
Editing clip properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 830
Moving, copying, pasting and deleting audio clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 831
Audio scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 831
Splitting audio clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 834
Bouncing to clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 835
Scrubbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 836
Basic audio processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 837
Using the Normalize and Gain commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 838
Reversing audio data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839
16
Table of contents
Advanced audio processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing silence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing DC offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Applying fades and crossfades offline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio effects (audio plug-ins) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Real-time audio effects processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Destructive audio effects processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
840
840
842
843
846
846
847
23 Software instruments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 849
Synth Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Synth tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inserting soft synths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using instrument tracks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening a soft synth’s property page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Synth Rack icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Playing a soft synth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Muting and soloing soft synth tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rename synths in the Synth Rack view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multi-port soft synths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Converting your soft synth tracks to audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Assignable Controls feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automating controls from the Synth Rack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying Synth Rack automation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote control of the Synth Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drawing soft synth automation in the Clips pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Soft synth MIDI output support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recording a soft synth’s MIDI output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ReWire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ReWire instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inserting a ReWire instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Routing MIDI data to ReWire instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mixing down ReWire instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automating ReWire instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ReWire troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stand-alone synths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Playing a stand-alone synth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recording a stand-alone synth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of contents
850
852
853
856
859
860
861
863
863
864
864
866
867
867
868
868
869
869
870
870
871
873
874
874
874
876
876
877
17
24 Mixing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 879
Preparing to mix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 881
Configuring the Console and Track views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 883
Mixing MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 886
Mixing a MIDI track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 886
Converting MIDI to audio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 887
Signal flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 888
Sidechaining signal flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 890
Routing and mixing digital audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 891
Stereo buses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 892
Surround buses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 893
Main outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 895
Insert Send Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 896
Metering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 899
What the meters measure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900
Hiding and showing meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900
Changing the meters’ display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 901
Segmented and non-segmented meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 904
Changing the meters’ performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 904
MIDI activity indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 906
Peak markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 906
Waveform preview for buses and synth tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 908
Freeze tracks and synths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 909
Using real-time effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 913
Effects parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 914
How to use real-time effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 914
Presets and property pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 917
Bypassing effects globally . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 920
Effects on clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921
Sidechaining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 923
External Insert plug-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 926
Effects chains. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 932
Using FX Chain presets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 933
Using assignable controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 938
Customizing the FX Chain UI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 942
Organizing plug-ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 944
VST configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 944
Using the per-track EQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 948
Applying audio effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 950
18
Table of contents
Applying MIDI effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using control groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quick Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Learn option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bouncing tracks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Real-time bounce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preparing to create an Audio CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preparing audio for distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exporting OMF files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dithering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Burning audio CDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
950
951
954
956
957
958
960
962
963
972
973
974
25 Surround Mixing (Producer and Studio only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 975
Surround basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring SONAR for surround mixing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using surround format templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Choosing a surround format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Surround buses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Routing in surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Downmixing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Panning in surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controlling surround panning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automating surround panning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Joystick support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Surround metering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bass management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Surround effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The SurroundBridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Effect property pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Effect presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to patch and configure surround effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Importing surround mixes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exporting surround mixes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of contents
976
976
977
979
980
981
982
983
984
989
989
990
991
992
992
993
994
994
997
998
19
26 ProChannel (Producer and Studio only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 999
Using ProChannel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1003
ProChannel modules and controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1008
PC76 U-Type Channel Compressor module (Producer only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1014
PC4K S-Type Bus Compressor module (Producer only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1016
QuadCurve Equalizer module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1019
Tube Saturation module (Producer only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1026
Console Emulator module (Producer only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1027
FX Chain module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1031
Tape Emulator module (Producer only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1039
27 Using Region FX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1043
ARA Audio Random Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1046
Melodyne (Producer and Studio only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1048
Using Melodyne. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1049
V-Vocal Region FX clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1063
V-Vocal Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1065
Playing back V-Vocal Region FX clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1067
Pitch editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1068
Editing time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1071
Editing formants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1072
Editing dynamics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1073
Context menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1073
V-Vocal pitch-to-MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1074
Keyboard shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1075
28 Sharing your songs on SoundCloud. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1077
The Cakewalk SoundCloud interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1078
Uploading audio to SoundCloud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1083
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1087
29 Sharing and backing up your projects on Gobbler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1089
The Gobbler interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1090
Uploading files to Gobbler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1092
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100
20
Table of contents
30 Automation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1101
Quick automation guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automation methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automation write modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automation time base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automation Read and Automation Write buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recording individual fader or knob movements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automation lanes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automation lane controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Automation lanes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating and editing automation envelopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automating track and bus mute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Envelope mode and Offset mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Converting MIDI controllers to envelopes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Snapshots. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automating effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automating individual effects parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recording automation data from an external controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1103
1104
1105
1107
1108
1109
1111
1113
1115
1119
1130
1131
1134
1135
1136
1136
1138
31 Window management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1141
Docking windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MultiDock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Floating views and using dual video monitors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Locking views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tiling windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Screensets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Screensets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
X-Ray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1142
1146
1150
1152
1153
1154
1155
1159
32 Templates and key bindings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1163
Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Template example: three MIDI instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key bindings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Importing key bindings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exporting key bindings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1164
1165
1167
1169
1170
33 Multi-touch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1171
Table of contents
21
34 Notation and lyrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1179
The Staff view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1180
Opening the Staff view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1181
Staff pane layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1181
The Staff pane right-click menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1182
The Fretboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1183
Fretboard pop-up menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1184
Basic musical editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1186
Inserting notes on the staff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1187
Inserting notes with the Fretboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1188
Selecting notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1189
Moving, copying, and deleting notes on the staff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1190
Moving notes from within the Fretboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1191
Auditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1192
Changing note properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1192
Deglitch dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1194
Working with triplets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1195
Beaming of rests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1195
Changing the way notes are displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1196
Using enharmonic spellings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1197
MIDI Channels and the Fretboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1198
Chords and marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200
Adding chord symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200
Adding expression marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1203
Adding hairpin symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1205
Adding pedal marks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1206
Tablature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1208
Tablature settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1208
Changing Fretboard texture and orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1209
Quick TAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1210
Regenerate TAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1210
Entering notes from the TAB staff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1211
Single note editing from the TAB staff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1211
Editing chords or groups of notes from the TAB Staff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1211
Editing notes and chords from the Fretboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1212
Working with percussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1213
Setting up a percussion track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1214
Setting up a percussion staff or line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1214
Ghost strokes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1216
Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1216
Export to MusicXML (Producer only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1218
22
Table of contents
The Meter/Key view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What Is meter? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What Is key?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening the Meter/Key view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding and editing meter/key changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Music notation for non-concert-key instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Working with lyrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding and editing lyrics in the Staff view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening the Lyrics view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding and editing lyrics in the Lyrics view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1219
1219
1220
1220
1221
1222
1224
1225
1226
1226
35 Instrument definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1229
Assigning instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Importing instrument definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating instrument definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating and editing patch name and other lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copying name lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assigning the Bank Select method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assigning patch names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assigning note names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assigning controller, RPN, and NRPN names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SONAR flags in instrument definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument definition tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Why use instrument definitions?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What can they do and not do? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Where do instrument definitions come from? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Start of tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1230
1233
1234
1238
1239
1240
1241
1243
1245
1246
1247
1247
1247
1247
1248
36 System exclusive data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1251
What is System Exclusive? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sysx events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the System Exclusive view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sending Sysx banks at startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Importing, creating, and dumping Sysx banks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
More about Dump Request Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing Sysx banks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sysx view menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmitting banks during playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Real-time recording of System Exclusive messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of contents
1252
1252
1253
1254
1255
1257
1258
1258
1260
1260
23
Sysx echo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1261
Sysx .ini file settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1262
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1263
37 Synchronizing your gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1265
Synchronization overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1266
Choosing clock sources: SONAR as master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1268
MIDI synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1270
SONAR as the slave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1271
SONAR as the master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1272
Using MIDI Sync with drum machines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1273
Troubleshooting MIDI Sync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1273
SMPTE/MIDI time code synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1274
Playing digital audio under SMPTE/MTC sync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1278
SMPTE/MTC sync and full chase lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1279
Troubleshooting SMPTE/MTC sync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1280
MIDI Machine Control (MMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1281
38 Audio file management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1283
The Project Files dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1284
Project files and bundle Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1285
Audio folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1286
Global audio folders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1286
Per-project audio folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1287
Imported audio files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1288
Backing up projects with digital audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1290
Deleting unused audio files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1292
39 Improving audio performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1293
System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1294
The Wave Profiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1294
Enabling and disabling audio devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1295
Sampling rates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1296
Bit depths and float resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1297
Bit depths for playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1298
Bit depths for recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1299
Bit depths for importing audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1299
Bit depths for exporting audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1300
Bit depths for rendering audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1300
24
Table of contents
Preparing higher-quality audio for CD burning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SONAR project file compatibility notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Improving performance with digital audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Getting the most out of your computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mixing latency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ASIO drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Minimize driver state changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Queue buffers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multiprocessor load balancing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reduce GUI updates to improve playback performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24-bit tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dropouts and other audio problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optimized picture cache redrawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Improving recording performance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MIDI Prepare Buffer Size and automation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using audio devices in Windows 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WASAPI support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MMCSS task profile support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WaveRT updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1300
1301
1302
1302
1305
1305
1306
1306
1308
1309
1309
1311
1318
1319
1319
1320
1320
1321
1322
40 External devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1323
Roland A-PRO controllers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1324
Setting up control surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1326
ACT MIDI Controller plug-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1330
Using the ACT MIDI Controller property page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1330
ACT presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1331
Assigning controls on your controller/surface to cells in the ACT MIDI property page .
1332
Cakewalk Generic Surface plug-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1333
Loading Cakewalk Generic Surface presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1333
Assigning faders and knobs to control SONAR parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1334
Controlling different tracks or groups of tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1337
The Cakewalk Generic Surface property page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1338
Euphonix EuCon control surface support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1343
The WAI display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1344
ACT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1346
Importing ACT data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1347
OPT panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1348
Table of contents
25
Working with StudioWare. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1349
StudioWare panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1349
Using StudioWare panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1350
Grouping controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1352
Recording control movements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1354
Control settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1357
StudioWare Panel drawing speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1357
41 Using CAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1359
Running CAL programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1359
Sample CAL files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1360
SPLIT NOTE TO TRACKS.cal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1360
SPLIT CHANNEL TO TRACKS.cal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1360
RANDOM TIME.cal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1360
THIN CONTROLLER DATA.cal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1361
THIN CHANNEL AFTERTOUCH.cal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1361
THIN PITCH WHEEL.cal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1361
MAJOR CHORD.cal, MINOR CHORD.cal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1361
42 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1363
Installation Error: DeleteFile Failed; code 5 Access Denied . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1365
Setting up an internal audio card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1366
Configuring an audio interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1367
Audio dropouts or crashes during playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1368
My MP3 encoder stopped working. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1368
When I play a file I don't hear anything (MIDI project) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1369
I can't record from my MIDI device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1370
I can't record any audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1371
I hear an echo when I record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1371
Dropouts happen at high bit-depths or high sample rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1372
Patching an effect into SONAR causes a dropout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1372
I can’t open my project / File Recovery mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1373
No sound from my software instrument/synth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1375
SONAR doesn't recognize new plug-ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1375
My waveforms are gone, but I still hear audio; it says Busy in the corner of the clip . . 1377
I get an error message when I change a project to 24-bit audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1377
Bouncing tracks takes a long time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1378
The Now time is not smooth during playback or scrolls out of view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1378
26
Table of contents
Plug-in windows flicker or don't display properly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1379
I get a Burn Error or No Drive is Detected error when burning a CD directly from SONAR
1380
Known issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1381
Session Drummer 3 performance (Producer only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1381
Session Drummer 2 issues (Studio only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1381
HLP files cannot be opened in Windows 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1382
TTS-1 DXi does not support 88.2 kHz sample rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1382
Plug-in delay compensation re-sync. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1383
SONAR x64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1383
Backwards compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1384
Windows 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1385
43 Hardware setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1387
Connect your MIDI equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1387
Set up to record digital audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1390
44 MIDI files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1395
Timebases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Supported MIDI file meta-events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Features not supported by MIDI files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other MIDI file handling notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special handling of GM, GS, and XG MIDI files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If you have problems playing MIDI files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If you plan to publish your songs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1396
1397
1397
1397
1398
1398
1399
45 Initialization files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1401
Initialization files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Initialization file format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cakewalk.ini . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TTSSEQ.INI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUD.INI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of contents
1402
1403
1403
1412
1416
27
46 New features in SONAR X3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1423
SONAR X3 base program enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1424
VST enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1424
Region FX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1429
ARA Audio Random Access support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1430
Pitch correction: Celemony Melodyne essential (Producer and Studio only). . . . . . . . 1432
Audio-to-MIDI conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1433
Take lane and comping enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1434
Toast notifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1444
QuadCurve Equalizer fly-out panel (Producer only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1445
Skylight enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1447
Media Browser enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1448
Track color customization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1449
YouTube Publisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1450
Overloud Tape Emulator ProChannel module (Producer only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1453
Tone2 BiFilter2 (Producer only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1454
XLN Audio Addictive Drums (Producer only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1455
AAS Lounge Lizard Session SONAR Edition (Producer only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1456
AAS Strum Acoustic Session SONAR Edition (Producer only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1457
Nomad Factory Blue Tubes bundle (Producer and Studio only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1458
Nomad Factory BlueVerb DRV-2080 (Producer and Studio only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1459
Nomad Factory Blue Tubes Analog TrackBox (Producer and Studio only) . . . . . . . . . 1460
Gobbler integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1461
Misc. enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1462
47 Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1465
48 Included plug-ins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1471
Audio effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1475
MIDI effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1497
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1501
28
Table of contents
49 Cyclone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1519
Cyclone toolbar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1520
Pad groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1521
Pad inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1522
Loop bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1523
Loop view and Key Map view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1524
Pad editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1524
Slice inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1525
Using Cyclone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1525
Controlling individual pads—volume, pan, mute, solo, sync, looping, and content 1528
Mixing down Cyclone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1529
Loop editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1529
Keyboard shortcuts in Cyclone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1531
Undo and redo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1531
50 Menu reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1533
File > New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
File > Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
File > Revert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
File > Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
File > Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
File > Save As. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
File > Import > Audio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
File > Import > Audio CD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
File > Import > Video. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
File > Import > MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
File > Export > Audio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
File > Export > Video. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
File > Export > MIDI Groove Clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
File > Export > OMF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
File > Export > Track Template. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
File > Print. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
File > Print Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
File > Print Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
File > Send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
File > Recent File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
File > Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of contents
1533
1533
1533
1533
1534
1534
1534
1535
1535
1535
1536
1536
1536
1536
1536
1537
1537
1537
1537
1537
1537
29
Edit > Undo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1538
Edit > Redo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1538
Edit > History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1538
Edit > Select > All. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1538
Edit > Select > None . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1538
Edit > Select > All AudioSnap/Stretched Clips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1539
Edit > Select > By Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1539
Edit > Select > By Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1539
Edit > Select > From = Now . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1539
Edit > Select > Thru = Now . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1540
Edit > Select > From = Start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1540
Edit > Select > Thru = End. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1540
Edit > Select > Select Track Envelopes with Clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1540
Edit > Aim Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1540
Edit > Cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1541
Edit > Cut Special . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1541
Edit > Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1541
Edit > Copy Special . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1542
Edit > Paste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1542
Edit > Paste Special. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1542
Edit > Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1543
Edit > Delete Special . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1543
Edit > Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1543
Groove Clip Looping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1544
Clip Mute/Unmute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1544
Split . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1544
Split Clip(s) at AudioSnap Pool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1544
Clip Lock > Lock Position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1544
Clip Lock > Lock Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1544
Views > Control Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1545
Views > Track View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1545
Views > Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1545
Views > Inspector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1545
Views > Console View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1545
Views > Piano Roll View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1546
Views > Step Sequencer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1546
30
Table of contents
Views > Matrix View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Views > Staff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Views > AudioSnap Palette. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Views > Loop Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Views > Event List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Views > Lyrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Views > Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Views > Big Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Views > Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Views > Tempo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Views > Meter/Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Views > Sysx. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Views > Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Views > Surround Panner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Views > Icons > Show Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Views > Icons > Track View > Show Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Views > Icons > Track View > Large Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Views > Icons > Track View > Small Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Views > Icons > Track View > Show in Header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Views > Icons > Track View > Show Custom in Header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Views > Icons > Track View > Show in Strip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Views > Icons > Track Inspector > Show Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Views > Icons > Track Inspector > Show Large Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Views > Icons > Track Inspector > Show Small Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Views > Icons > Console > Show Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Views > Icons > Console > Show Large Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Views > Icons > Console > Show Small Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Views > Icons > Synth Rack > Show Large Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Views > Screensets > Screenset 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Views > Screensets > Screenset 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Views > Screensets > Screenset 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Views > Screensets > Screenset 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Views > Screensets > Screenset 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Views > Screensets > Screenset 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Views > Screensets > Screenset 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Views > Screensets > Screenset 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of contents
1546
1547
1547
1547
1548
1548
1548
1548
1549
1549
1549
1549
1549
1550
1550
1550
1550
1550
1550
1550
1551
1551
1551
1551
1551
1551
1551
1552
1552
1552
1552
1552
1553
1553
1553
1553
31
Views > Screensets > Screenset 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1553
Views > Screensets > Screenset 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1554
Views > Screensets > Revert Current Screenset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1554
Views > Screensets > Lock/Unlock Current Screenset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1554
Views > Screensets > Rename Current Screenset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1554
Views > Screensets > Duplicate Current Screenset to > Screenset 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1555
Views > Screensets > Duplicate Current Screenset to > Screenset 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1555
Views > Screensets > Duplicate Current Screenset to > Screenset 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1555
Views > Screensets > Duplicate Current Screenset to > Screenset 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1555
Views > Screensets > Duplicate Current Screenset to > Screenset 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1556
Views > Screensets > Duplicate Current Screenset to > Screenset 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1556
Views > Screensets > Duplicate Current Screenset to > Screenset 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1556
Views > Screensets > Duplicate Current Screenset to > Screenset 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1556
Views > Screensets > Duplicate Current Screenset to > Screenset 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1557
Views > Screensets > Duplicate Current Screenset to > Screenset 10. . . . . . . . . . . . 1557
Views > Screensets > Import Screensets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1557
Insert > Audio Track. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1557
Insert > MIDI Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1557
Insert > Soft Synth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1558
Insert > Soft Synth > Plug-in Layouts > Manage Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1558
Insert > ReWire Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1558
Insert > Multiple Tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1558
Insert > Track Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1558
Insert > Track Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1559
Insert > Stereo Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1559
Insert > Surround Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1559
Insert > Bank/Patch Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1559
Insert > Series of Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1559
Process > Apply Effect > Audio Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1560
Process > Apply Effect > MIDI Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1560
Process > Apply Effect > Remove Silence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1560
Process > Apply Effect > Extract Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1561
Process > Apply Effect > Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1561
Process > Apply Effect > Normalize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1561
Process > Apply Effect > Remove DC Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1561
Process > Apply Effect > Fade/Envelope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1562
32
Table of contents
Process > Apply Effect > Crossfade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Process > Apply Effect > Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Process > Quantize. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Process > Groove Quantize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Process > Transpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Process > Slide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Process > Nudge > Left 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Process > Nudge > Right 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Process > Nudge > Left 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Process > Nudge > Right 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Process > Nudge > Left 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Process > Nudge > Right 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Process > Nudge > Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Process > Nudge > Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Process > Nudge > Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Process > Find/Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Process > Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Process > Scale Velocity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Process > Retrograde . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Process > Deglitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Process > Fit to Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Process > Fit Improvisation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Process > Run CAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Project > Info. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Project > Audio Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Project > Insert Meter/Key Change. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Project > Insert Tempo Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Project > Insert Series of Tempos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Project > Insert Time/Measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Project > Insert Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Project > Set Default Groove Clip Pitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Project > Set Timecode at Now . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Project > Set Measure/Beat at Now . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Utilities > Consolidate Project Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Utilities > Clean Audio Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Utilities > Change Audio Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of contents
1562
1563
1563
1563
1564
1564
1564
1565
1565
1565
1565
1565
1566
1566
1566
1566
1567
1567
1568
1568
1568
1569
1569
1569
1569
1570
1570
1570
1570
1570
1571
1571
1571
1571
1572
1572
33
Utilities > Share with SoundCloud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1572
Utilities > Burn Audio CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1573
Utilities > CWAF Tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1573
Utilities > External Encoder Configuration Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1573
Utilities > Cakewalk Plug-in Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1573
Time Ruler Format > M:B:T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1573
Time Ruler Format > H:M:S:F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1574
Time Ruler Format > Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1574
Time Ruler Format > Milliseconds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1574
Window > Full Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1574
Window > Cascade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1574
Window > Tile in Rows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1574
Window > Tile in Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1574
Window > Arrange Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1575
Help > Keyboard Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1575
Help > SONAR Online > Support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1590
Help > SONAR Online > User’s Forum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1590
Help > SONAR Online > Videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1590
Help > Audio > Configuring your audio interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1590
Help > Troubleshooting > Problems with registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1591
Help > Troubleshooting > Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1591
Help > Download Latest Help File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1591
Help > View ReadMe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1591
Help > Quick Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1591
Help > Usage Logger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1591
Help > Register Online. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1592
Help > Time Trial Activator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1592
Help > About SONAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1592
Delete Track. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1592
Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1592
Remove From Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1592
Set Start = Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1593
Set End = Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1593
Insert Audio Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1593
Insert MIDI Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1593
Hide Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1594
34
Table of contents
Set Snap-to = Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
90 dB Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
78 dB Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
60 dB Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
42 dB Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24 dB Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12 dB Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set As Current Track. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Loop Points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Select Loop Region. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Punch Points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Punch On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loop On/Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Punch Points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Select Punch Region. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Linear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fast Curve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Slow Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drag and Drop Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Associated Audio Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mirror Fretboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rosewood Hi. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rosewood Lo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ebony Hi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ebony Lo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maple Hi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maple Lo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Animate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Original Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stretch to Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preserve Aspect Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Integral Stretch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of contents
1594
1594
1594
1594
1595
1595
1595
1595
1595
1596
1596
1596
1596
1596
1596
1597
1597
1597
1597
1597
1598
1598
1598
1598
1598
1598
1598
1599
1599
1599
1599
1599
1599
1600
1600
1600
35
Full Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1600
Time Display Format > M:B:T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1600
Time Display Format > SMPTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1600
Time Display Format > Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1601
Time Display Format > None . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1601
Time Display Format > Font. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1601
Background Color > Black . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1601
Background Color > White . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1601
Video Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1601
Add Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1602
Reset Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1602
Delete Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1602
Lock Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1602
Enable Floating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1602
Zoom tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1603
Previous Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1603
Show All Tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1603
Record Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1603
Playback Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1603
Output Bus Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1604
Record Meter Options > Peak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1604
Record Meter Options > RMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1604
Record Meter Options > Peak + RMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1604
Record Meter Options > Show Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1604
Record Meter Options > Hold Peaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1604
Record Meter Options > Lock Peaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1605
Playback Meter Options > Peak. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1605
Playback Meter Options > RMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1605
Playback Meter Options > Peak + RMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1605
Playback Meter Options > Show Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1605
Playback Meter Options > Hold Peaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1605
Playback Meter Options > Lock Peaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1606
Output Bus Meter Options > Peak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1606
Output Bus Meter Options > RMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1606
Output Bus Meter Options > Peak + RMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1606
Output Bus Meter Options > Show Labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1606
36
Table of contents
Output Bus Meter Options > Hold Peaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Bus Meter Options > Lock Peaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Playback Meter Options > Pre Fader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Bus Meter Options > Pre Fader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Playback Meter Options > Post Fader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Bus Meter Options > Post Fader. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Bus Meter Options > Pre Fader Post FX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Percentage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
dB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Zoom Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Show and Fit Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Show only Selected Tracks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hide Selected Tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Show All Tracks and Buses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Undo View Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Redo View Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create Track Envelopes Using Linear Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Snap to Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Select tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Erase tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Draw tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Open Clip Effects Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Insert New Track(s) or Bus(es) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Split tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mute tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exclusive Solo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add Clip to Pool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Show Pool Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add MBT to Pool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quantize to Pool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Track view] View > Navigator Show/Hide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Track view] View > Video Thumbnail Show/Hide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Track view] View > Auto Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Track view] View > Display > Display Ghosted Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Track view] View > Display > Display Track Separators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Track view] View > Display > Display Clip Names. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of contents
1606
1607
1607
1607
1607
1607
1607
1607
1608
1608
1608
1608
1608
1608
1608
1609
1609
1609
1609
1609
1610
1610
1610
1610
1611
1611
1611
1611
1612
1612
1613
1613
1613
1614
1614
1614
37
[Track view] View > Display > Display Clip Contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1614
[Track view] View > Display > Show Audio Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1614
[Track view] View > Display > Maximize Waveform Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1614
[Track view] View > Display > Vertical Grid Lines > None . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1615
[Track view] View > Display > Vertical Grid Lines > Behind Clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1615
[Track view] View > Display > Vertical Grid Lines > In Front of Clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1615
[Track view] View > Fit Tracks and Buses to Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1615
[Track view] View > Fit Project to Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1615
View > Fit MIDI Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1615
View > MIDI Microscope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1616
[Track view] View > View Undo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1616
[Track view] View > View Redo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1616
[Track view] Options > Auto crossfade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1616
[Track view] Options > Crossfade Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1616
[Track view] Options > Crossfade Type > Default Fade-In Curve > Linear . . . . . . . . . 1617
[Track view] Options > Crossfade Type > Default Fade-In Curve > Slow Curve . . . . . 1617
[Track view] Options > Crossfade Type > Default Fade-In Curve > Fast Curve . . . . . 1617
[Track view] Options > Crossfade Type > Default Fade-Out Curve > Linear. . . . . . . . 1617
[Track view] Options > Crossfade Type > Default Fade-Out Curve > Slow Curve . . . 1617
[Track view] Options > Crossfade Type > Default Fade-Out Curve > Fast Curve . . . . 1618
[Track view] Options > Crossfade Type > Default Crossfade Curves > Linear Out - Linear
In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1618
[Track view] Options > Crossfade Type > Default Crossfade Curves > Fast Out - Fast In .
1618
[Track view] Options > Crossfade Type > Default Crossfade Curves > Slow Out - Slow In
1618
[Track view] Options > Crossfade Type > Default Crossfade Curves > Fast Out - Slow In.
1618
[Track view] Options > Crossfade Type > Default Crossfade Curves > Slow Out - Fast In.
1619
[Track view] Options > Crossfade Type > Default Crossfade Curves > Linear Out - Fast In
1619
[Track view] Options > Crossfade Type > Default Crossfade Curves > Linear Out - Slow In
1619
[Track view] Options > Crossfade Type > Default Crossfade Curves > Fast Out - Linear In
1619
[Track view] Options > Crossfade Type > Default Crossfade Curves > Slow Out - Linear In
1619
38
Table of contents
[Track view] Options > Click Behavior > Left Click Sets Now . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1620
[Track view] Options > Click Behavior > Right Click Sets Now. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1620
[Track view] Options > Click Behavior > Left Click Locks Scroll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1620
[Track view] Options > Click Behavior > Double-Click > MIDI Clips > -Nothing- . . . . 1620
[Track view] Options > Click Behavior > Double-Click > MIDI Clips > Event List View 1620
[Track view] Options > Click Behavior > Double-Click > MIDI Clips > Staff View . . . . 1620
[Track view] Options > Click Behavior > Double-Click > MIDI Clips > Piano Roll View 1621
[Track view] Options > Click Behavior > Double-Click > MIDI Clips > Inline Piano Roll View
1621
[Track view] Options > Click Behavior > Double-Click > Audio Clips > -Nothing-. . . . 1621
[Track view] Options > Click Behavior > Double-Click > Audio Clips > Loop Construction
View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1621
[Track view] Options > Meter Options > Track Record Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1621
[Track view] Options > Meter Options > Track Playback Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1621
[Track view] Options > Meter Options > Bus Meters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1622
[Track view] Options > Meter Options > Horizontal Meters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1622
[Track view] Options > Meter Options > Vertical Meters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1622
[Track view] Options > Meter Options > Show Numeric Peak Values . . . . . . . . . . . . 1622
[Track view] Options > Meter Options > Show Track Peak Markers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1622
[Track view] Options > Meter Options > Show Bus Peak Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1622
[Track view] Options > Meter Options > Reset All Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1623
[Track view] Options > Meter Options > Record Meter Options > Peak . . . . . . . . . . . 1623
[Track view] Options > Meter Options > Record Meter Options > RMS . . . . . . . . . . . 1623
[Track view] Options > Meter Options > Record Meter Options > Peak + RMS . . . . . 1623
[Track view] Options > Meter Options > Record Meter Options > -12 dB. . . . . . . . . . 1623
[Track view] Options > Meter Options > Record Meter Options > -24 dB. . . . . . . . . . 1624
[Track view] Options > Meter Options > Record Meter Options > -42 dB. . . . . . . . . . 1624
[Track view] Options > Meter Options > Record Meter Options > -60 dB. . . . . . . . . . 1624
[Track view] Options > Meter Options > Record Meter Options > -78 dB. . . . . . . . . . 1624
[Track view] Options > Meter Options > Record Meter Options > -90 dB. . . . . . . . . . 1624
[Track view] Options > Meter Options > Record Meter Options > Show Labels . . . . . 1625
[Track view] Options > Meter Options > Record Meter Options > Hold Peaks . . . . . . 1625
[Track view] Options > Meter Options > Record Meter Options > Lock Peaks . . . . . . 1625
[Track view] Options > Meter Options > Track Meter Options > Peak . . . . . . . . . . . . 1625
[Track view] Options > Meter Options > Track Meter Options > RMS . . . . . . . . . . . . 1625
[Track view] Options > Meter Options > Track Meter Options > Peak + RMS . . . . . . 1626
[Track view] Options > Meter Options > Track Meter Options > Pre Fader . . . . . . . . 1626
Table of contents
39
[Track view] Options > Meter Options > Track Meter Options > Post Fader . . . . . . . . 1626
[Track view] Options > Meter Options > Track Meter Options > -12 dB . . . . . . . . . . . 1626
[Track view] Options > Meter Options > Track Meter Options > -24 dB . . . . . . . . . . . 1626
[Track view] Options > Meter Options > Track Meter Options > -42 dB . . . . . . . . . . . 1627
[Track view] Options > Meter Options > Track Meter Options > -60 dB . . . . . . . . . . . 1627
[Track view] Options > Meter Options > Track Meter Options > -78 dB . . . . . . . . . . . 1627
[Track view] Options > Meter Options > Track Meter Options > -90 dB . . . . . . . . . . . 1627
[Track view] Options > Meter Options > Track Meter Options > Show Labels . . . . . . 1627
[Track view] Options > Meter Options > Track Meter Options > Hold Peaks. . . . . . . . 1628
[Track view] Options > Meter Options > Track Meter Options > Lock Peaks . . . . . . . 1628
[Track view] Options > Meter Options > Bus Meter Options > Peak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1628
[Track view] Options > Meter Options > Bus Meter Options > RMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1628
[Track view] Options > Meter Options > Bus Meter Options > Peak + RMS . . . . . . . . 1628
[Track view] Options > Meter Options > Bus Meter Options > Pre Fader . . . . . . . . . . 1628
[Track view] Options > Meter Options > Bus Meter Options > Post Fader . . . . . . . . . 1629
[Track view] Options > Meter Options > Bus Meter Options > Pre Fader Post FX . . . 1629
[Track view] Options > Meter Options > Bus Meter Options > -12 dB . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1629
[Track view] Options > Meter Options > Bus Meter Options > -24 dB . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1629
[Track view] Options > Meter Options > Bus Meter Options > -42 dB . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1629
[Track view] Options > Meter Options > Bus Meter Options > -60 dB . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1630
[Track view] Options > Meter Options > Bus Meter Options > -78 dB . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1630
[Track view] Options > Meter Options > Bus Meter Options > -90 dB . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1630
[Track view] Options > Meter Options > Bus Meter Options > Show Labels . . . . . . . . 1630
[Track view] Options > Meter Options > Bus Meter Options > Hold Peaks . . . . . . . . . 1630
[Track view] Options > Meter Options > Bus Meter Options > Lock Peaks . . . . . . . . . 1631
[Track view] Options > Drag and Drop Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1631
[Track view] Options > Mouse Wheel Zoom Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1631
[Track view] Options > On Stop, Rewind to Now Marker. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1631
[Track view] Options > Set Now Time With Full Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1631
[Track view] Options > Stop at Project End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1632
Make Instrument Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1632
Split Instrument Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1632
[Track view] Tracks > Bounce to Track(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1632
[Track view] Tracks > Clone Track(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1632
Delete Track(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1632
[Track view] Tracks > Wipe Track(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1633
40
Table of contents
[Track view] Tracks > Copy Track Name(s) to Clip Name(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Track view] Tracks > Hide Track(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Track Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Track view] Tracks > Sort Tracks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Track view] Tracks > Selected Track Input Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Track view] Tracks > Selected Track Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Track view] Tracks > Selected Track Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Track view] Clips > Apply Trimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Track view] Clips > Bounce to Clip(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Track view] Clips > Convert to Mono . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Track view] Clips > Fade clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Track view] Clips > Add to Clip Group > New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Track view] Clips > Remove from Clip Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Track view] Clips > Revert Original Time Stamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Track view] Clips > Set Snap Offset to Now Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Track view] Clips > Select All Siblings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Track view] Clips > Unlink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Track view] Clips > Unlink Step Sequencer Clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Track view] Clips > Convert MIDI Clip(s) to Step Sequencer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Track view] Clips > Convert MIDI Controllers to Envelopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Show Notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Show Velocity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Show/Hide Velocity Tails. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Show Velocity on Selected Notes Only. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Show All Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Track view] MIDI > Select Controllers Along With Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Show Controller Handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Show Clip Outlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hide Muted Clips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Track view] Region FX > Melodyne > Create Region FX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Track view] Region FX > Melodyne > Remove Region FX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Track view] Region FX > Melodyne > Open Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Track view] Region FX > Melodyne > Bypass Selected Region FX . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Track view] Region FX > Bypass All Region FX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Track view] Region FX > Melodyne > Follow Host Tempo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Track view] Region FX > Melodyne > Copy MIDI Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of contents
1633
1633
1633
1633
1634
1634
1634
1634
1635
1635
1635
1635
1636
1636
1636
1636
1636
1636
1637
1637
1637
1637
1638
1638
1638
1638
1638
1638
1639
1639
1639
1639
1639
1639
1640
1640
41
[Track view] Region FX > V-Vocal > Create Region FX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1640
[Track view] Region FX > V-Vocal > Remove Region FX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1640
[Track view] Region FX > V-Vocal > Open Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1641
[Track view] Region FX > V-Vocal > Bypass Selected Region FX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1641
Save as groove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1641
Copy as MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1641
Set project tempo from clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1642
Clip follows project tempo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1642
Edit clip tempo map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1642
Show/Hide Track Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1642
[Piano Roll] View > Show/Hide Controller Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1642
[Piano Roll] View > Show/Hide Drum Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1643
[Piano Roll] View > Show Vertical Gridlines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1643
[Piano Roll] View > Grid Resolution > Quarter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1643
[Piano Roll] View > Grid Resolution > Quarter Triplet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1643
[Piano Roll] View > Grid Resolution > Eight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1643
[Piano Roll] View > Grid Resolution > Eight Triplet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1643
[Piano Roll] View > Grid Resolution > Sixteenth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1643
[Piano Roll] View > Grid Resolution > Sixteenth Triplet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1644
[Piano Roll] View > Grid Resolution > 32nd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1644
[Piano Roll] View > Grid Resolution > 32nd Triplet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1644
[Piano Roll] View > Grid Resolution > 64th . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1644
[Piano Roll] View > Grid Resolution > Follow snap settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1644
Pick Tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1644
Show Next Track(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1644
Show Previous Track(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1645
Show All Tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1645
Hide All Tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1645
Invert Tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1645
[Staff view] Print > Export to ASCII Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1645
[Staff view] Print > Export to MusicXML. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1645
[Staff view] Edit > Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1645
[Staff view] Edit > Quick TAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1646
[Staff view] Edit > Regenerate TAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1646
[Staff view] Edit > Play Previous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1646
[Staff view] Edit > Play Next. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1646
42
Table of contents
[Staff view] View > Show/Hide Fret Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Staff view] View > Display Resolution > 1/4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Staff view] View > Display Resolution > 1/8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Staff view] View > Display Resolution > 1/16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Staff view] View > Display Resolution > 1/32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Staff view] View > Fill Durations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Staff view] Edit > Trim Durations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Console view] Strips > Tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Console view] Strips > Buses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Console view] Strips > Mains. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Console view] Strips > Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Console view] Strips > MIDI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Console view] Strips > Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Console view] Strips > Muted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Console view] Strips > Archived . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Console view] Strips > Frozen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Console view] Strips > Widen All Strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Console view] Strips > Narrow All Strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Event List view] View > Event Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Event List view] View > Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Event List view] View > Key Aftertouch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Event List view] View > Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Event List view] View > Patch Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Event List view] View > Channel Aftertouch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Event List view] View > Pitch Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Event List view] View > RPN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Event List view] View > NRPN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Event List view] View > Sysx Bank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Event List view] View > Sysx Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Event List view] View > Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Event List view] View > Lyrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Event List view] View > MCI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Event List view] View > Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Event List view] View > Shape. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Event List view] View > Expression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Event List view] View > Hairpin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of contents
1646
1646
1646
1647
1647
1647
1647
1647
1647
1647
1648
1648
1648
1648
1648
1648
1648
1648
1649
1649
1649
1649
1649
1649
1650
1650
1650
1650
1650
1650
1651
1651
1651
1651
1651
1651
43
[Event List view] View > Chords. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1652
[Event List view] Tracks > Show cropped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1652
[Lyrics view] Fonts > Font A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1652
[Lyrics view] Fonts > Font B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1652
[Lyrics view] Fonts > Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1652
[Lyrics view] Fonts > Hyphenate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1652
[Lyrics view] Tracks > Pick Track. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1652
[Sysx view] File > Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1653
[Sysx view] File > Send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1653
[Sysx view] File > Send All. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1653
[Sysx view] File > Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1653
[Sysx view] File > Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1653
[Sysx view] File > Clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1653
[Sysx view] Edit > Edit Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1654
[Sysx view] Edit > Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1654
[Sysx view] Settings > Auto Send on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1654
[Sysx view] Settings > Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1654
Left Click Positions Rectangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1655
Horz Zoom Level 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1655
Horz Zoom Level 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1655
Horz Zoom Level 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1655
Horz Zoom Level 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1656
Horz Zoom Level 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1656
Horz Zoom to Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1656
Track Height Short . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1656
Track Height Medium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1656
Track Height Tall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1657
Insert Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1657
Remove Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1657
Replace Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1657
Post-FX bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1658
Set Modules as Default for Tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1658
Set Modules as Default for Buses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1658
Add knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1658
Add button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1659
Edit control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1659
44
Table of contents
Remove control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Write Enable Automation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Default Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
All Parameters - Set Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
All Parameters - Set End. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Learn Knobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Learn Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customize UI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delete Muted Takes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flatten Comp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remove Empty Take Lanes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1659
1659
1660
1660
1660
1660
1661
1661
1661
1661
1662
51 Beginner’s guide to Cakewalk software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1663
MIDI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MIDI channels, interfaces, inputs, and outputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MIDI drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MIDI files, projects, tracks, and clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controlling which sounds you hear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio playback in SONAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tracks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Track-by-track playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting an instrument, home stereo, or microphone to your sound card . . . .
Choosing inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio hardware (sound cards) and drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Consumer and professional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How do I know if I have a hardware conflict? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation and drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1665
1666
1668
1669
1671
1673
1674
1676
1677
1678
1680
1680
1686
1689
1689
1690
1691
52 Dialog box reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1695
About SONAR dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Apply Audio Effects dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Apply MIDI Effects dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assign Series of Inputs dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio CD Burner dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio Mixdown Options dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of contents
1695
1695
1696
1696
1696
1698
45
Automation Read/Write Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1699
Auto-Send Sysx dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1699
AVI Encoder Options dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1700
Bank Name dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1702
Bank Output dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1702
Bank/Patch Change dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1702
Bounce to Track(s) dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1703
Change Audio Format dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1706
Chord Fret Number dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1706
Chord Properties dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1706
Choose Track Type dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1707
Clean Audio Folder dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1707
Associated Audio Files dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1708
Clone Track(s) dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1709
Complete Registration dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1710
Controller/Surface Settings dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1711
Convert MIDI To Shapes dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1711
Convert MIDI Clip(s) To Step Sequencer dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1712
Copy dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1712
Create Fx Envelopes dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1713
Crossfade dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1714
Controller/Surface Settings dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1714
Cut dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1715
Define Groove dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1716
Define Instruments and Names dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1716
Deglitch dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1717
Delay dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1718
Delete dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1719
Delete dialog (with multiple selection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1719
Drag and Drop Options dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1720
Dump Request Macro needs your input—Channel/Unit Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1721
Dump Request Macro needs your input--Patch/Voice/Config Number . . . . . . . . . . . . 1721
Edit Node dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1721
Edit System Exclusive Bytes dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1722
Event Filter dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1722
Event Filter Select Some/Search/Replace dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1722
46
Table of contents
Event Manager dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Export Audio dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dump Request Macro needs your input—Channel/Unit Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dump Request Macro needs your input--Patch/Voice/Config Number. . . . . . . . . . . .
Duration dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Edit Node dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Edit System Exclusive Bytes dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Event Manager dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Export Color Set dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Export MIDI Groove Clip dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Export OMF dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Expression Text Properties dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Export Track Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fade/Envelope dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fade Selected Clips dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
File Info dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
File Statistics dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
File Options dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Find Missing Audio dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fit to Time dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Folder Properties dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Freeze Options dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gain dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Go dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Groove Quantize dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Group Attributes dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Group Manager dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hairpin Properties dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Import Audio dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Import Audio CD Tracks dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Import Color Set dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Import Instrument Definitions dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Import MIDI dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Import Video File dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Insert Pitch Change dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Insert Series of Controllers dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of contents
1724
1725
1729
1729
1729
1730
1730
1730
1731
1732
1732
1733
1734
1734
1735
1736
1736
1737
1737
1738
1739
1740
1741
1742
1743
1745
1745
1747
1747
1749
1750
1750
1751
1751
1753
1753
47
Insert Series of Tempos dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1754
Insert Soft Synth Options dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1754
Insert Time/Measures dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1756
Insert Tracks dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1757
Find/Change and Event Filter dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1757
Kind of Event dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1757
Length dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1758
Load Pattern dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1759
Lyric Properties dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1759
Map Properties dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1759
Marker dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1761
Markers dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1761
Measure Beat/Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1761
Meter/Key Signature dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1762
Microsoft Media Format Encode Options dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1762
MIDI Envelope dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1763
MIDI Event Type dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1763
MIDI Input Presets dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1764
Migrate Cakewalk Preferences dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1764
Missing Plug-ins dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1765
MP3 Export Options dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1765
Rename Screenset dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1767
New Project File dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1767
No MIDI Inputs—SONAR dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1768
No MIDI Outputs—SONAR dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1768
Normalize dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1768
Note Names dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1769
Note Properties dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1769
Online Registration dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1769
Open dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1770
Open Groove File dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1770
Paste dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1771
Patch Browser dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1773
Pedal Properties dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1774
Percent Done dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1774
Percussion Notation Key dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1775
48
Table of contents
Pick Track(s) dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preferences dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio - Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio - Driver Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio - Playback and Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio - Audio Profiles (Advanced) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio - Configuration File (Advanced) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio - Sync and Caching (Advanced). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MIDI - Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MIDI - Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MIDI - Control Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MIDI - Playback and Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MIDI - Drum Map Manager (Advanced) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
File - Folder Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
File - Audio Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
File - VST Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
File - Initialization File (Advanced) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
File - Advanced (Advanced) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Project - Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Project - MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Project - Metronome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Project - AudioSnap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Project - Clock (Advanced) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Project - Surround (Advanced) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customization - Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customization - Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customization - Nudge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customization - Snap to Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customization - Editing (Advanced) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customization - Keyboard Shortcuts (Advanced). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customization - Audio Meter (Advanced) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Print dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Print Preview dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Print Setup dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Project Files dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quantize dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fast Zoom Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reassign Envelopes dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Receive System Exclusive dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Regenerate Tablature dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Control dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of contents
1776
1777
1780
1782
1786
1789
1791
1793
1796
1798
1800
1803
1805
1807
1810
1812
1816
1818
1820
1823
1826
1828
1830
1832
1836
1838
1854
1856
1858
1862
1865
1867
1867
1868
1869
1870
1872
1872
1873
1873
1875
49
Remove DC Offset dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1876
Remove Silence dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1877
Retain Cakewalk Preferences dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1878
Revert dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1878
Safe Mode dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1879
Save As dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1879
Save Pattern dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1881
Scale Defaults dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1881
Scale Manager dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1882
Scale Velocity dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1882
Search for Missing Audio dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1883
Select By Time dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1884
Set Default Velocities for Steps dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1884
Select Fretboard Track dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1884
Set Timecode at Now Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1885
Slide dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1885
SONAR Quick Start dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1886
Sort Tracks dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1887
Split Clips dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1888
Staff View Layout dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1889
Staff View Print Configure dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1890
Step Record dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1890
Step Size dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1892
SurroundBridge Plug-in Linker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1892
Sysx Bank Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1893
Tablature Settings dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1893
Tempo dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1894
Track Inputs dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1895
Track Manager dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1896
Track Outputs dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1896
Transpose dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1897
Undo History dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1898
Unlink Clips dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1899
Unpack Bundle dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1899
Unpack OMF dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1900
Unreadable Files dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1901
50
Table of contents
Video Export dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Video Properties dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Track Control Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windows Media Format Encode Options dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WMV Encoder Options dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Insert Send Assistant dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Missing MIDI Ports dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Silent Buses Detected dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rename Cell dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjust Velocity Multiplier dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Matrix Options dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quantize to AudioSnap Pool dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Choose File Type dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Usage Logging dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loop Properties dialog—Audio Stretching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loop Properties dialog—Audio Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Properties dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fault Reporter dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rename Effect dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Extra Encoding Options dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Quantize dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Snap Scale Settings dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1901
1902
1903
1904
1905
1906
1907
1907
1908
1908
1908
1909
1909
1910
1910
1913
1913
1914
1914
1914
1915
1918
1919
53 View reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1921
Track view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SONAR empty view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Piano Roll view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Piano Roll view menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Note Map pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drum Grid pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Notes pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controller pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Track List pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step Sequencer view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step sequencer interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step Sequencer view menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1922
1931
1932
1933
1934
1935
1935
1936
1936
1937
1937
1939
1940
51
Rows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1942
Notes pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1945
Controllers pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1946
Keyboard shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1947
Using the Step Sequencer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1949
Working with rows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1950
Working with steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1952
Working with Controller events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1959
Working with patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1961
Using the Step Sequencer with drum maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1963
Working with Step Sequencer clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1965
Event List view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1967
Staff view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1968
Lyrics view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1970
Console view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1971
The Console view interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1972
Channel strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1974
Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1987
Console view menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1993
Customizing the Console view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1996
Using the Console view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1999
Video view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2005
Tempo view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2006
Meter/Key view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2008
Markers view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2008
SYSX view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2008
Big Time view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2008
Loop Construction view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2009
Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2013
Matrix view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2014
Matrix view user interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2015
Using the Matrix view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2025
Matrix view shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2038
Navigator view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2038
Play List view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2039
Surround panner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2040
54 Glossary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2043
52
Introduction
SONAR is a professional tool for authoring sound and music on your personal computer. It’s
designed for musicians, composers, arrangers, audio and production engineers, multimedia and
game developers, and recording engineers. SONAR supports Wave, MP3, ACIDized waves, WMA,
AIFF and other popular formats, providing all the tools you need to do professional-quality work
rapidly and efficiently.
SONAR is more than an integrated MIDI and digital audio authoring software package—it’s an
expandable platform that can function as the central nervous system of your recording studio. With
drivers for common high-end audio hardware, full support for audio plug-ins, software synthesizers,
StudioWare, MFX MIDI plug-ins, and MIDI Machine Control (MMC) of external MIDI gear, SONAR
can handle your most demanding projects.
In This Chapter
About SONAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Computers, sound and music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Starting SONAR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
SONAR basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Screen colors and wallpaper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Installing SONAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
53
About SONAR
SONAR is the flagship product of the Cakewalk line of integrated MIDI and digital audio sequencers
for the Windows platform. SONAR has a comprehensive feature set that makes it the single most
productive tool for sound and music authoring. Here are some of the ways you can use SONAR.
Next topic: “Publish” on page 54
Publish
Publishing usually means printing your music; it’s one way to share your finished product with other
performers. After you’ve recorded and arranged a song in SONAR, you can produce printed lead
sheets and small scores with lyrics for sharing. You can also share the music files themselves.
SONAR will save your music in a format that you can put on a web site or email to other people.
Next topic: “Music composition and exploration” on page 54.
Music composition and exploration
SONAR is a powerful music-composition application, providing tools to record your own musical
performances; enhance or improve the quality of those performances; and edit, arrange, and
experiment with the music. With a few simple clicks of the mouse, you can arrange, orchestrate, and
audition your composition. Fully integrated sequencing allows you to combine the convenience and
flexibility of MIDI composition with the high-quality sound and subtlety of digital audio sound
recording and reproduction. Change the feel of a piece by locking it to a musical groove, or add
delicate delays, anticipations, or echoes that add richness to the music.
SONAR displays and lets you edit your music using standard musical notation and guitar tablature,
so you can adjust individual notes, add performance markings, and print individual parts or full
scores. You can graphically draw tempo and volume changes, or add lyrics to display on-screen or
to include with printed scores.
Next topic: “Remixing” on page 54.
Remixing
SONAR’s Groove clips allow you to import, create, export and edit loops, making it possible to
quickly change tempos and keys for an entire project. The Browser view lets you preview loops in
the project’s tempo and key before dragging and dropping them onto a track.
Next topic: “Game sound development” on page 55.
54
Introduction
About SONAR
Game sound development
There’s no better tool than SONAR for composing music for electronic games. Clip-based
sequencing lets you create and reuse musical themes freely, so you can associate musical sections
with game characters, locations, objects, and actions. Your creations can be saved and replayed
using the compact MIDI file format, which adapts its sound automatically to the target hardware for
the best possible sound reproduction.
Next topic: “Sound production and engineering” on page 55.
Sound production and engineering
If you want to produce music CDs or master tapes, SONAR has virtually everything you need from
recording to mixing and mastering. Multichannel recording lets you capture studio or live
performances track by track. Reconfigurable buses provide full control over your mix. Real-time
stereo effects like chorus, flange, reverb, and delay/echo can be applied as track inserts, in effects
loops, or to the master mix. SONAR supports 44.1 KHz sampling for CD-quality sound, 24-bit/96
kHz sound for DVD-quality sound, and lets you choose from lower or higher sample rates as well. All
audio effects are 32-bit floating point for faster processing and high-quality sound reproduction.
Many effects now support 64-bit processing for pristine quality.
Next topic: “Web authoring” on page 55.
Web authoring
SONAR is the ideal tool for developing and producing music and sound for the World Wide Web,
because it lets you save your work in the formats that are most commonly used on web sites: MIDI,
MP3, and Windows Media Advanced Streaming Format. Any SONAR project—musical composition,
audio clip, commercial spot, jingle with voice-over—can be stored in a web-compatible format with a
few simple mouse clicks.
Next topic: “Film and video scoring and production” on page 55.
Film and video scoring and production
SONAR has many of the tools you need to execute audio post-production projects quickly and
efficiently. SONAR provides chase lock sync to time code for frame-by-frame accuracy when
synchronizing audio or MIDI to film or video. Or, you can turn chase lock off to conserve CPU power.
SONAR provides high-quality time stretching and sample-accurate editing with zero-crossing
detection so you can make the fine adjustments you need very quickly and easily. In addition,
SONAR’s support for video files gives you convenient synchronized access to digitized video,
making film and video scoring easier than ever.
Next topic: “Publishing music on the Internet” on page 56.
Introduction
About SONAR
55
Publishing music on the Internet
SoundCloud is an online music sharing service that allows you to upload and share your music with
others online. The integrated Cakewalk SoundCloud application enables you to upload sounds,
artwork, and metadata to the SoundCloud service directly from SONAR.
Next topic: “Burning audio CDs” on page 56.
Burning audio CDs
SONAR has integrated Audio CD burning, which allows you to write your audio tracks to an audio
CD that can be played in any standard CD player.
Next topic: “Flexibility” on page 56.
Flexibility
SONAR works the way you want to work—you can customize screen layouts and audio and MIDI
system configurations to make your work more efficient. SONAR integrates with other sound editing
tools so you can access them in an instant without leaving SONAR. There are custom software
modules to support specialized audio devices from Roland and Yamaha. SONAR’s unique
StudioWare technology provides software interfaces for common studio hardware.
Next topic: “Computers, sound and music” on page 56.
Computers, sound and music
This section provides some background on the different ways that computers store and play sound
and music. Computers work with sound and music in two different forms: MIDI and digital audio.
Next topic: “MIDI” on page 56.
MIDI
MIDI (short for Musical Instrument Digital Interface) is the way computers communicate with most
sound cards, keyboards, and other electronic instruments. MIDI refers to both the type of cables and
plugs used to connect the computers and instruments, and to the language those computers and
instruments use to talk to each other. The MIDI standard is accepted and used worldwide. Almost
any electronic instrument you buy today will have MIDI connectors and can be used with other MIDI
instruments and with your computer’s MIDI interface. To record MIDI in SONAR, you have to have a
MIDI cable connecting the MIDI OUT port on your MIDI instrument to a MIDI IN port on either your
sound card or your MIDI interface. You must also make sure that you have installed the software
MIDI driver that came with your sound card or MIDI interface.
56
Introduction
Computers, sound and music
The MIDI language conveys information and instructions, both from the computer to the instrument
and from the instrument to the computer. For example, if your computer wants your keyboard to play
a note, it sends a MIDI “Note On” message and tells the keyboard which note to play. When your
computer wants the keyboard to stop playing that note, it sends another message that stops the note
from playing.
The MIDI language has many other instructions, such as messages to change the sound that is
used to play the notes (the bank and patch), messages that enable working with the sustain pedal
and the pitch-bend wheel, and others. By sending the right messages at the right times, your
computer can control your electronic instrument and make it play music.
MIDI information can be sent on 16 different channels. You can set up your MIDI equipment to listen
for messages on all channels or on only a few.
MIDI files contain all the MIDI messages and timing information that are needed to play a song. MIDI
files can be read and played by many different programs, including SONAR, and can even be played
by programs on other types of computers. MIDI files have the extension .mid.
There are several important advantages of the MIDI format:
• Large amounts of music can be stored in a very compact form
• Different parts of a piece can easily be assigned to any instrument you can imagine
• The music contains information on notes, tempos, and key signatures that makes it possible to
display and edit the piece using standard musical notation
The primary disadvantage of MIDI is that the quality of the sound a listener hears will vary depending
on the MIDI equipment the listener is using. For example, MIDI usually sounds much better on an
expensive synthesizer than it does on an inexpensive sound card.
Next topic: “Digital audio” on page 57.
Digital audio
Digital audio (frequently referred to here as just “audio”) is a simple way to record and play sounds of
any type. It works like a tape recorder—you record something, then later play it back. Digital audio
stores the sound as a long series of numbers. To record audio in SONAR, you have to have an audio
cable connecting the audio output of your electronic instrument to the audio input on your sound
card or audio hardware. If you’re recording vocals or an acoustic instrument, you need to connect a
microphone to the audio input on your sound card or audio hardware.
Sound Waves
Sound waves are vibrations in the air. Sound waves are generated by anything that vibrates; a
vibrating object causes the air next to it to vibrate, and the vibration is passed through the air in all
directions. When the vibrating air enters your ear, it makes your eardrum vibrate, and you hear a
sound. Likewise, if the vibrating air hits a microphone, it causes the microphone to vibrate and send
electrical signals to whatever it's connected to.
These vibrations are very fast. The slowest vibration frequency you can hear is about 20 vibrations
per second, and the fastest is around 16,000 to 20,000 vibrations per second.
Introduction
Computers, sound and music
57
Recording digital audio
To record digital audio, your computer monitors the electrical signal generated by a microphone, an
electric guitar, or another source. At equal intervals of time (for CD-quality sound, this means 44,100
times a second), the computer measures and saves the strength of the electrical signal from the
microphone, on a scale from 0 to 65,535.
That's it. Digital audio data is just a long series of numbers. The computer sends these numbers, in
the form of electrical signals, to a speaker. The speaker then vibrates and generates the same
sound that was recorded.
The primary advantage of digital audio is the quality of the sound. Unlike MIDI, a digital audio
recording is very rich, capturing all the nuances, overtones, and other characteristics of the sound
exactly as performed. The main drawback of digital audio is that it takes up a lot of disk space. To
record a 1-minute segment of stereo, CD-quality digital audio, you need about 10 megabytes of disk
space. On the computer, digital audio is usually stored in Wave files (extension .wav). There are
many programs available that let you create, play, and edit these files. SONAR reads, writes, and
lets you edit Wave files.
Next topic: “Setup” on page 58
Setup
You can install SONAR on any computer that runs Windows 7 and has a sound card or built-in
sound module. If you want to hook up other devices, like a MIDI keyboard, an electric guitar, or a
microphone, you need the right cables, and you need to find the right connectors on your computer.
Before you install SONAR, take a minute to register the software so we can let you know when
updates become available and provide you with technical support. To register anytime log onto
www.cakewalk.com/register, or call 1.888.CAKEWALK (+1.617.423.9004 outside the U.S.) between
1 PM and 6 PM Eastern Standard Time. If you live outside of North America, please visit our
distributor’s page at www.cakewalk.com/Dealers/International.asp to get the telephone number of
your local distributor. You’ll need to supply your serial number, your name, and a valid email
address.
To connect a MIDI keyboard to your computer you will need a MIDI interface. Some sound cards
include a built-in MIDI interface. If your model does not, there are many options available at your
local music store. Many of these will connect to your computer via USB.
If you have a dedicated MIDI interface, lots of electronic music gear, or work with many different
music software packages, see “Hardware setup” on page 1387. Before you attach or detach any
cables from your computer, you should shut down your computer and turn off the power to all your
equipment. This greatly reduces the chance of electrical damage to your equipment while plugging
and unplugging cables.
58
Introduction
Setup
User accounts
Previous versions of SONAR required a user to have Windows Administrator status. This is no
longer the case. Any level of user can now install and run SONAR. Only one copy of SONAR per
machine is necessary for multiple users to run SONAR with each user’s personal settings.
When you first install SONAR, all application data files and .ini files are installed to the systemspecified “all users” application data folders:
Windows 7:
C:\ProgramData\Cakewalk
When you launch SONAR for the first time, all content files (such as track templates and project
templates) will be copied from the global application data folder (All Users) to the user application
data folder (User Account), before the program launches.
If you install a SONAR patch on top of the original installation, any updated content files in the patch
will not overwrite existing content files in your personal user application data folder. However, you
can force SONAR to update the default content files in your personal user data folder.
Warning: The following action will overwrite any SONAR data files such as track templates and
project templates that you may have customized. A message box will prompt you if you want to
continue or cancel. Only proceed if you are certain that you will not overwrite any important
customized files.
To force SONAR to update and overwrite any default content files, hold down the CTRL key while
starting SONAR. Data in the Program Files folder will be common to all users.
Next topic: “Audio connections” on page 59
Audio connections
There are several types of audio interfaces (sound cards). CardBus (PCI), USB/USB2 and FireWire
are the most common. Laptops can use an audio PCMCIA card. Many audio interfaces also have
MIDI inputs and some have built in MIDI synthesizers as well. This section covers the various audio
connection options.
Analog and digital Inputs
There are two basic types of audio inputs, analog and digital. Analog inputs allow you to connect a
guitar, mic or other instrument to your computer directly. The audio interface converts the analog
input to digital. Digital inputs allow other digital devices to connect directly to your computer.
Common digital inputs include external analog to digital converters, popular guitar processors like
the Line 6 POD, and other digital recording systems like the ADAT decks. Analog inputs are very
common, and are standard in virtually all consumer sound cards (the ones that come with your
computer). Digital inputs are becoming more popular and are very common on professional and midlevel, “prosumer” interfaces. Analog inputs allow you to record a mono or stereo signal (assuming
you have a stereo input) while digital inputs allow you to record 1 to 8 signals depending on the type
of digital connection.
Introduction
Setup
59
The following table describes the various types of analog and digital connections you may
encounter.
Cable
Type
Description
1/4 inch TRS
Balanced analog connection
XLR
Balanced analog connection
Microphones, professional audio equipment
1/4 inch TS
Unbalanced analog connection Guitar cable,
“Hi-Z”
1/8 inch “Mini” Plug
Balanced analog connection
Headphones, desktop computer speakers
RCA - Phono
Phono analog connection
Turntables, analog cassette recorders
SPDIF
Stereo digital connection
Optical (Lightpipe)
Stereo digital connection
MIDI
MIDI connection
Read your hardware documentation carefully to determine what kind of connections you have on
your audio interface.
60
Introduction
Setup
To connect an electric guitar or keyboard to your computer
• If your sound card has a 1/8 inch input jack (built-in sound cards that come with your computer
usually do), plug your 1/4 inch mono guitar or audio cable into a 1/8 inch stereo adapter, and then
plug the 1/8 inch adapter into the microphone input or line input jack on your computer sound
card. If you are connecting a keyboard, the audio cable must go from the keyboard’s audio out or
line out jack to the sound card input jack. 1/8 inch stereo adapters are available at consumer
electronic supply stores.
Or
• If you use a professional or “prosumer” sound card, there is probably a 1/4 inch input jack on your
sound card or audio hardware interface that you can plug your guitar cable or audio cable into.
Guitar
Introduction
Setup
DI Box
Computer Sound Card
(or external audio interface)
Headphones or Speakers
61
To connect a microphone to your computer
• If your sound card has a 1/8 inch input jack (built-in sound cards that come with your computer
usually do), and your microphone cable has a 1/4 inch plug on the end, plug the mic cable into a
1/8 inch stereo adapter, and then plug the 1/8 inch adapter into the microphone input jack on your
computer sound card. 1/8 inch stereo adapters are available at consumer electronic supply
stores.
• If you use a professional or “prosumer” sound card, there is probably a 1/4 inch input jack on your
sound card or audio hardware interface that you can plug your mic cable into.
• If your mic has a cable with an XLR plug on the end, and your sound card or audio hardware
interface has a 1/4 inch input jack, plug the mic cable into an XLR-to-quarter inch adapter, and
then plug your mic cable into your audio hardware. If your audio hardware has an XLR input, of
course it’s better to use that.
• You can also plug your mic into a mixer or pre-amp, and connect the mixer or pre-amp to an input
jack on your audio hardware. This is usually the best method.
Microphone input
Microphone
Computer Sound Card
(or external audio interface)
Headphones or Speakers
USB connection
USB Microphone
Computer Sound Card
(or external audio interface)
Headphones or Speakers
That's it! Now that your instruments are all set to go, you can restart your computer and turn on your
keyboard, guitar, and microphone.
For a complete description of audio input options, see “Hardware setup” on page 1387.
Next topic: “MIDI connections” on page 63
See:
“Changing I/O devices” on page 64
62
Introduction
Setup
MIDI connections
There are three types of MIDI cables in common use. Here’s how to connect each of the three types:
• USB cable. This is extremely common. Many electronic keyboards and stand-alone MIDI
interfaces use this type of connection. To use this type of connection, simply plug one end of the
USB cable into the USB jack on your MDI keyboard or stand-alone MIDI interface, and plug the
other end into your computer. If you are using a stand-alone USB MIDI interface, you then need to
connect standard MIDI cables between your MIDI keyboard and your stand-alone MIDI interface
(see the following procedure). If you haven’t already installed the software MIDI driver that came
with your keyboard or interface, make sure you do so.
• Standard MIDI cable. This is also very common. MIDI keyboards usually have jacks for these
cables even if they have a USB connection. You need two of these cables. To use this type of
cable, use one cable to connect the MIDI OUT jack on your MIDI instrument to the MIDI IN jack
on your stand-alone MIDI interface or sound card, and one to connect the MIDI IN jack on your
MIDI instrument to the MIDI OUT jack on your stand-alone MIDI interface or sound card. Many
stand-alone MIDI interfaces and audio interfaces use this type of connector.
Note: If you are only using an external MIDI controller to trigger software instruments, you only
need to connect a single MIDI cable from the MIDI controller’s MIDI OUT jack to the MIDI IN jack
on your MIDI interface.
Figure 1.
Standard MIDI cable—use this if your MIDI interface has standard 5-pin input and output ports
• Joystick connector. This is becoming less common. This is the type of connection seen on
older SoundBlaster type sound cards. To use this type of connection, find the end of one of the
MIDI cables that is labeled OUT. Plug this connector into the MIDI IN jack on your electronic
keyboard. The other 5-pin connector on the MIDI cable is labeled IN. Plug this connector into the
MIDI OUT jack on your electronic keyboard. Plug the 15-pin connector on the MIDI cable into the
MIDI/joystick port on your sound card. If you have a joystick, unplug it, plug in the MIDI cable, and
plug the joystick into the pass-through connector on the MIDI cable.
Introduction
Setup
63
Figure 2.
Joystick connector—use this if your MIDI interface is the joystick port on your sound card.
A
C
B
A. Insert this MIDI IN plug into the MIDI OUT port on your MIDI instrument B. Insert this MIIDI OUT plug into the
MIDI IN port on your MIDI instrument C. Insert this plug into the joystick port on your sound card
USB connection
USB MIDI Keyboard
Microphone input
Microphone
Computer Sound Card
(or external audio interface)
Headphones or Speakers
See:
“Changing I/O devices” on page 64
Changing I/O devices
You can add or remove USB/FireWire audio and MIDI devices while SONAR is running, and the
audio and MIDI engines will dynamically respond to any changes.
When a device is added or removed, SONAR prompts you to confirm or cancel the change. If you
click Yes, playback stops and the audio and MIDI engines reload.
Preserve selected audio devices on device changes
Enabled inputs and outputs are persisted per device and per driver mode. This prevents audio ports
from shifting around and causing unwanted devices to become selected as active audio inputs and
outputs. You can add a device back at any time and SONAR will remember the last set of enabled
inputs and outputs for that device.
You can freely add or remove devices without impacting the current working set of enabled devices.
Adding a device back will remember its last selected inputs and outputs. You can also switch driver
64
Introduction
Setup
modes and the existing enabled devices will be remembered for the next time when you switch back
to that mode.
Loading a project after changing audio devices
When loading a project after changing audio devices, SONAR will attempt to automatically remap
any missing device to an equivalent new device. If an equivalent match is not found, the Missing
Audio Outputs dialog box appears, allowing you to manually reassign any unresolved output ports.
The Missing Audio Outputs dialog box will suggest default assignments for any missing devices.
You can click OK to accept the assignments, or click Cancel to preserve the original missing device
assignments. You can also preserve the original missing device by selecting [Unassigned] from the
Available Devices list. If you choose not to reassign a missing device, the Output port selection in
SONAR will show the missing device name prefixed by MISSING.
Note: The Missing Audio Outputs dialog box is not shown if there is only a single missing output
port and only one available output port. In this case, SONAR will automatically assign the
missing output port to the available output port.
Introduction
Setup
65
Remapping using friendly driver names
When Use friendly names to represent audio drivers is selected in Edit > Preferences > Audio Devices, SONAR can intelligently remap devices across different hardware configurations or driver
models by using your assigned friendly driver names, even if the hardware names do not match.
This can be very useful if you switch driver modes and load projects you worked on earlier in another
driver mode, or if you collaborate with other people who have different hardware configurations. As
long as you set up friendly names that match, all outputs will be automatically remapped.
Note: Remapping with friendly names takes precedence over the actual hardware device
names.
Changing MIDI Output devices
Changing MIDI output ports in Edit > Preferences > MIDI - Devices has the following effect:
• Enabling a new output port. All MIDI tracks and control surfaces retain their current output
port assignments.
• Disabling an unassigned output port.
output port assignments.
All MIDI tracks and control surfaces retain their current
• Disabling an assigned output port. The result is different for MIDI tracks and control surfaces:
• MIDI tracks. The Missing MIDI Ports dialog box appears and lets you remap the missing
output ports to available output ports.
Note: If you do not remap a missing device, the track’s Output control will display MISSING:
<name of missing device>. If the missing device becomes available in the future, the track will
automatically be assigned to the correct device.
• Control surfaces.
Figure 3.
66
The control surface output port is assigned to None.
The Missing MIDI Ports dialog box lets you remap missing output devices
Introduction
Setup
Figure 4.
A track’s Output control shows the name of the missing device
Opening projects after MIDI configuration has changed
If any assigned MIDI output devices are missing when you load a project, which is likely to happen if
you transfer projects between different computers, SONAR will do the following:
• MIDI tracks. The Missing MIDI Ports dialog box appears and lets you remap the missing
devices to available devices.
Note: If you do not remap a missing devices, the track’s Output control will display MISSING:
<name of missing device>. If the missing device becomes available in the future, the track will
automatically be assigned to the correct device.
• Control surfaces.
Control surface output ports are assigned to None.
Automatic MIDI port remapping for control surfaces
SONAR persists the names of MIDI ports that are assigned to control surfaces. This ensures that the
correct MIDI ports are assigned to control surfaces, even if you add or remove other MIDI devices.
Introduction
Setup
67
Starting SONAR
There are many different ways to start SONAR. Here are a few:
• Double-click the SONAR icon on your desktop.
• Click the Start button, and choose Programs > Cakewalk > SONAR X3 (Producer or Studio) >
SONAR X3 (Producer or Studio).
• Click the Start button, point to Documents, and choose a SONAR project from the menu.
• Double-click the SONAR program or any SONAR document from the Windows Explorer or the
Find menu.
When starting SONAR, you will see the Quick Start dialog box.
Figure 5.
The Quick Start dialog
The Quick Start dialog box has several options.
Option
How to use it
Open a Project
Choose a project from the Open File dialog box to open it
Open a Recent Project
Select a project from the list, and click this button to open it
Create a New Project
Click here to create a new project.
Table 1.
68
Introduction
Starting SONAR
Option
How to use it
Online Videos and more
Click this link to view our tutorial videos online. An active Internet
connection is needed in order to access this content.
Getting Started
Click here to view the “Getting started” on page 3 topic in the Help file.
This topic has links to a glossary of terms, as well as some basic
procedures.
Table 1.
If you don’t want to see the Quick Start dialog box in the future, uncheck the box at the bottom of
the dialog box, and click Close. You can see the Quick Start dialog box later by choosing Help >
Quick Start.
RIFF/MID will not launch SONAR when double-clicked
Note: Double-clicking RIFF MIDI files and Standard MIDI files will fail to launch SONAR even if
these file types are associated with SONAR.
Migrating preferences
If you have a previous version of Cakewalk installed, SONAR will detect it and give you the option of
migrating certain preferences from a single earlier version.
When you choose to migrate preferences, SONAR migrates the following settings from an earlier
Cakewalk version.
Setting
Description
Global Options
Global settings in the Preferences dialog box. Open by selecting Edit >
Preferences.
Key Bindings
Your customized key bindings for controlling SONAR using your MIDI
keyboard or computer keyboard.
Instrument Definitions
Files used to control specific MIDI instruments.
Audio data directory (WaveData
folder) and Picture Cache directory
locations
SONAR uses the Data directory and Picture Cache directories from the
previous Cakewalk version for storing project wave files and their
waveform image files.
Table 2.
Introduction
Starting SONAR
69
Running Wave Profiler
The first time you start SONAR, it automatically attempts to detect and configure any ASIO audio
devices on your computer. If no ASIO devices are found, it next attempts to detect any MME audio
devices, then automatically runs the Wave Profiler utility to determine the proper MIDI and Audio
settings for your audio device.
When the Wave Profiler determines the kind of card you have, always accept the default settings.
You can run the Wave Profiler again if you install a new audio device or driver by choosing Edit >
Preferences > Audio - Driver Settings in SONAR and clicking the Wave Profiler button (or ASIO
Panel button if you are using an ASIO audio device).
For more information about Wave Profiler, WDM, and MME, see “The Wave Profiler” on page 1294.
When Wave Profiler determines the kind of card you have, always accept the default settings.
Note: You can run the Wave Profiler again at a later time (for example, if you install a new sound
card or driver) by choosing the Edit > Preferences > Audio - Driver Settings command and
clicking Wave Profiler.
Setting up the MIDI In and MIDI Out devices
When you start SONAR for the first time, it checks your computer to find all the MIDI input and
output devices you have installed (such as sound cards and MIDI interfaces). However, sometimes
you need to tell SONAR exactly which devices you want it to use. If you’re not getting sound from
your sound card or MIDI keyboard, or if you just want to change the MIDI outputs and devices that
you are using, follow the steps in this section.
Choose Edit > Preferences > MIDI - Devices to open a dialog box in which you select the MIDI In
and MIDI Out devices that SONAR will use. Each item in the list is a MIDI Input or MIDI Output from
drivers installed using the Windows Control Panel. Select Edit > Preferences to open the
Preferences dialog box, then click MIDI - Devices. This dialog box lets you choose instruments on
MIDI inputs and outputs.
70
Introduction
Starting SONAR
Figure 6.
The MIDI - Devices section
1. Look at the top window. Notice that it shows devices on MIDI Inputs; make sure that all devices
in this window are checked. If a device isn’t checked, click on it once to select it for MIDI Input.
2. Look at the window on the bottom. Notice that it shows devices on MIDI Outputs. SONAR
numbers its MIDI Outputs by the order of the devices in this window. The device on top is on
Output 1, the one below it is on Output 2, and so on.
3. Check one device at a time in the Outputs window and click Move Checked Devices to Top to
change its order. Then check all the devices that appear in the window to select them for output.
Tip: Be sure to select MIDI output devices in Edit > Preferences > MIDI - Devices. If you don’t do
this, you won’t hear any of your MIDI instruments when you play songs in SONAR. You do not need
to enable any MIDI output devices if you are strictly using software instruments.
See “MIDI - Devices” on page 1796.
Introduction
Starting SONAR
71
Using MIDI devices after making driver changes
If you later add or remove drivers using the Drivers icon of the Windows Control Panel, SONAR
reacts in the following way:
• If you remove a Control Panel driver, SONAR will not use the device it belongs to the next time
you run the program. Any other devices you had selected using the Edit > Preferences > MIDI Devices command will remain selected.
• If you add a driver through the Control Panel, SONAR does not automatically use it. You must use
the Edit > Preferences > MIDI - Devices command to enable the new driver in SONAR’s list.
Note: After you add or remove a driver with the Drivers icon in the Windows Control Panel, you
must restart Windows for the change to take effect.
Defining your MIDI instrument or sound card
Once you have selected your MIDI Input and Output devices, SONAR, by default, plays back MIDI
sequences using a General MIDI instrument definition. If you are using a synthesizer or sound card
that does not adhere to the General MIDI standard, you may want to define that instrument. For
more information, see “Instrument definitions” on page 1229.
SONAR basics
SONAR’s menus and tools give you quick access to all the features of SONAR. Some menu choices
and tools display dialog boxes that let you choose among various options, or type in the values you
want. If you click in most views, in time rulers, or on certain other items with the right mouse button,
you see a pop-up menu that provides quick access to many common operations.
The project is the center of your work in SONAR. If you’re a musician, a project might contain a
song, a jingle, or a movement of a symphony. If you’re a post-production engineer, a project might
contain a 30-second radio commercial or a lengthy soundtrack for a film or videotape production. By
default, every project is stored in a file (known as a project file). The normal file extension for a
SONAR work file is .cwp.
SONAR organizes the sound and music in your project into tracks, clips, and events.
Tracks are used to store the sound or music made by each instrument or voice in a project. For
example, a song that is arranged for four instruments and one vocalist may have 5 tracks—one for
each instrument and one for the vocals. Each project can have an unlimited number of tracks. Some
of these tracks may be used in your finished project, while others can hold alternate takes, backup
tracks, and variations that you might want to keep for future use. Each track can be made up of one
or many clips.
Clips are the pieces of sound and music that make up your tracks. A clip might contain a horn solo,
a drum break, a bass or guitar riff, a voice-over, a sound effect like the hoot of an owl, or an entire
keyboard performance. A track can contain a single clip or dozens of different clips, and you can
easily move clips from one track to another.
72
Introduction
SONAR basics
Groove clips are audio clips which have tempo and pitch information embedded within them,
allowing them to follow changes to the project tempo or project pitch. You can click on either edge of
a Groove clip and drag out repetitions in the track.
Events are MIDI data (in MIDI tracks) or automation data.
See:
“SONAR file types” on page 73
“Opening a file” on page 74
“Views” on page 75
“Working on a project” on page 92
SONAR file types
Projects in SONAR can be saved as a project file with the extension .cwp or as a Bundle file with the
extension .cwb. For a complete description of the differences between project files and bundle files,
see “Project files and bundle Files” on page 1285.
Other types of files
SONAR lets you create and work with several other types of files, in addition to project (.cwp) and
bundle (.cwb) files that store your projects.
File type
Description
MIDI files (extension .mid)
Standard MIDI files.
Template files (extension .tpl)
Templates for new files you create
StudioWare (extension .CakewalkStudioware) To control external MIDI devices from SONAR
OMF (extension .omf)
Open Media Framework format files.
Table 3.
Introduction
SONAR basics
73
Opening a file
Use the following procedure to open a file.
To open a file in SONAR
1. If you haven't already done so, start SONAR.
2. Choose File > Open.
3. In the Open dialog box, navigate to the directory where the project you want to open is located
and select it.
4. Click the Open button.
5. If you are opening an OMF file, the Unpack OMF dialog box appears. Set the initial tempo and
specify the directory where you want to save the file and its audio. For more information about
opening OMF files, see “Unpack OMF dialog” on page 1900.
SONAR loads the project.
See:
“Working on a project” on page 92
“I can’t open my project / File Recovery mode” on page 1373
74
Introduction
SONAR basics
Views
SONAR displays your project in windows on the screen that are known as views. You can have
many views open at once, all showing the same project. When you edit a project in one view, the
other related views are updated automatically.
The Track view
Track view is the main window that you use to create, display, and work with a project. When you
open a project file, SONAR displays the Track view for the project. When you close the Track view
for a project, SONAR closes the file.
The Track view is divided into several sections: menu bar (at the top), the Navigator pane, the
Video Thumbnails pane, the Track pane, the Inspector pane, the Clips pane, the Bus pane, the
Browser pane, and the MultiDock.
Figure 7.
The Track view.
C
D
E
A
F
B
G
A. Control Bar B. Inspector pane C. Track pane D. Clips pane E. Video Thumbnail
pane F. Browser G. MultiDock
All of the current track’s controls are contained in the Track Inspector, which is an expanded version
of the current track’s controls located on the far left side of the Track view. You can hide or show the
Track Inspector by pressing I on your keyboard (see “Inspectors” on page 571, for more
information).
Introduction
SONAR basics
75
The Track pane lets you see and change the initial settings for each track. To change the current
track, move the highlight using the mouse or the keyboard as follows.
What it does
Key
Moves the highlight to the next or previous control.
LEFT/RIGHT ARROW
Moves to the same control in the adjacent track, or the next track of the same type
if the control only applies to a specific track type (for example, the Patch control
only applies to MIDI tracks).
UP/DOWN ARROW
Displays the next page of tracks.
PAGE DOWN
Displays the previous page of tracks.
PAGE UP
Moves the focus to the first track.
HOME
Moves the focus to the last track.
END
Table 4.
The Clips pane shows the clips in your project on a horizontal timeline called the time ruler that
helps you visualize how your project is organized. Clips contain markings that indicate their
contents. The Clips pane lets you select, move, cut and copy clips from place to place to change the
arrangement of music and sound in your project.
The Bus pane shows the buses in the project, and also shows any editing views that are in tabbed
(docked) format. The Show/Hide Bus pane button
the bottom of the Track view.
allows you to show or hide the Bus pane at
The Navigator pane displays a large part of your project so you can see an overview of your song.
The Navigator pane displays all of your project’s tracks.
The Track view makes it easy to select tracks, clips, and ranges of time in a project.
For more information, see “Track view” on page 1922 and “Configuring the display of tracks in the
Track view” on page 334.
76
Introduction
SONAR basics
Inspector pane
When working on a project, you will frequently need to access track and clip parameters and mix
controls. The Track Inspector and Properties Inspector provide easy access to relevant settings for
the selected track(s) or clip(s).
Figure 8.
Use the Track Inspector and Properties Inspector to configure track and clip settings.
A
B
C
D
H
E
F
G
I
A. Dock/undock Inspector B. Show/hide Clip Properties Inspector C. Show/hide Track Properties
Inspector D. Show/hide ProChannel E. Display area for Properties Inspector F. Display area for Track
Inspectors G. Show/hide/configure Track Inspector modules H. Section header bars (click to show
controls) I. Show audio output or MIDI settings (Instrument tracks only)
Introduction
SONAR basics
77
The Inspector pane appears to the left of the Track view, but can also be moved to the right side.
There are three separate inspectors:
• Track Inspector. The Track Inspector shows mix settings for the current track, bus, or main,
and is essentially identical to a channel strip in the Console view. Advanced MIDI settings are also
available for MIDI tracks and Instrument tracks. For details, see “Track Inspector overview” on
page 576.
• Properties Inspector. The Properties Inspector shows properties for the selected clip(s) or
track(s). For details, see “Properties Inspector overview” on page 592. The Properties Inspector
has two modes:
• Clip. The Clip Properties Inspector displays settings for the currently selected clip(s). For
details, see “Properties Inspector - Clip Properties” on page 594.
• Track. The Track Properties Inspector lets you type a track name, specify an audio track’s
AudioSnap render modes, specify the default clip colors, and enter a text description. For
details, see “Properties Inspector - Track Properties” on page 600.
• ProChannel (Producer only). ProChannel combines compression, equalization, and tube
saturation modeling in one convenient processor. ProChannel is available on each audio track,
Instrument track and bus. For details, see “ProChannel (Producer and Studio only)” on page 999.
For more information about the Inspector pane, see “Inspectors” on page 571.
78
Introduction
SONAR basics
Control Bar
Much of your time in SONAR is spent recording and listening to your project as it develops. The
Control Bar contains the most important tools and other pieces of information you will need to
record, edit and play back your project.
The Control Bar consists of several modules that each contain various related controls. You can rearrange and show/hide each individual module, which allows you to only show the functions you
need most often. By default, the Control Bar is docked at the top of SONAR’s screen, but can also
be undocked or docked at the bottom.
Figure 9.
The Control Bar.
For more information about the Control Bar, see “Control Bar overview” on page 537.
Introduction
SONAR basics
79
The Console view
The Console view is where you can mix the sounds on all the different tracks to create the final mix
of your project. While the Track view provides most of the same controls, you may want to use the
more familiar interface of the Console view for mixing. You use the Console view to adjust the levels
of sound for the different tracks in your project, to change the stereo panning, and to apply real-time
effects to an individual track, combinations of tracks, or the final mix.
The Console view contains several modules of controls. There is one channel strip for each track
and bus in your project. You can use bus sends to direct certain tracks to special modules that are
known as buses.
Figure 10.
The Console view
B
C
A
D
E
F
A. Console view menu B. ProChannel (Producer only) C. Pane splitter bars D. Track channel strips E. Bus
channel strips F. Main channel strips
As in the Track view, you can change track settings or record new music or sound in the Console
view. You may choose to use one view or the other, or the choice you make may depend on which
project you are working on.
80
Introduction
SONAR basics
Other views
SONAR has a number of other views you can use to display and work on your project. To display
these view, choose the desired view from the Views menu, or press the view’s keyboard shortcut.
The Piano Roll view shows the notes from a MIDI track or tracks as they would appear on a playerpiano roll. You can move the notes around, make them longer or shorter, and change their pitches
by just dragging them with the mouse. You can also use the Piano Roll view to display and edit MIDI
velocity, controllers, and other types of information. The Piano Roll view also contains the Drum
Editor, which allows you to play different drum modules from a single track. For more information,
see “Piano Roll view” on page 1932.
Figure 11.
The Piano Roll view
C
A
B
A. Piano Roll view menu B. Key/Pitch pane C. Note pane
Introduction
SONAR basics
81
The Staff view displays the notes from one or more MIDI tracks using standard music notation,
similar to the way the notation would appear on a printed page. You can add, edit, or delete notes;
create percussion parts; add guitar chords and other notation markings; display guitar tablature;
display the Fretboard pane; and print whole scores or individual parts to share with other musicians.
Figure 12.
The Staff view
D
E
A
B
F
G
C
H
A. Staff view menu B. Zoom in/out C. Staff pane D. Editing tools E. Time and pitch locator F. Dock/undock and
expand/collapse G. Track list pane H. Fretboard pane
The Loop Construction view allows you to create and edit Groove clips (SONAR loops that “know”
the tempo and key in which they were recorded), and export these clips as ACIDized files. For more
information, see “Loop Construction view” on page 2009.
Figure 13.
82
The Loop Construction view
Introduction
SONAR basics
The Browser lets you find and import various types of content into your projects, including audio and
MIDI files, track and project templates, track icons, FX Chain presets, effect plug-ins and
instruments. You can drag content and plug-ins directly into tracks.
Figure 14.
A
The Browser.
B
C
A. Media Browser B. Plug-in Browser C. Synth Rack Browser
The Event List view displays the events in a project individually, so that you can make changes at a
very detailed level. For more information, see “Event List view” on page 1967.
Figure 15.
The Event List view
Introduction
SONAR basics
83
SONAR has several other views that are used for very specific purposes.
View
How you use it
Meter/Key
To change the meter (time signature) or key signature, or to insert changes
in the meter or key signature at specific times in a project. For more
information, see “Meter/Key view” on page 2008.
Big Time
To display the Now time in a large, resizable font that you can read more
easily. For more information, see “Big Time view” on page 2008.
Markers
To add, move, rename, or delete labels for parts of your project that make it
easier to move from one point to another. For more information, see
“Markers view” on page 2008.
Lyrics
To add and display lyrics for a track. For more information, see “Lyrics view”
on page 1970.
Video
To display a loaded video file. For more information, see “Video view” on
page 2005.
Navigator
Manage the Now Time in a project
Surround Panner
Pan a surround track
Sysx
To create, display, store, and edit System Exclusive MIDI messages used to
control instruments and other gear that are MIDI capable. For more
information, see “SYSX view” on page 2008.
Tempo
To view and edit the project's tempo changes. For more information, see
“Tempo view” on page 2006.
Step Sequencer
Lets you compose patterns by clicking cells in a grid to turn notes on or off.
For more information, see “Step Sequencer view” on page 1937.
Matrix
Lets you trigger multiple audio and MIDI patterns, either with a mouse or via
MIDI remote control. For more information, see “Matrix view” on page 2014.
Table 5.
84
Introduction
SONAR basics
Zoom controls
Many of the views contain Zoom tools that let you change the horizontal and vertical scale of the
view.
Figure 16.
Zoom controls
A
B
C
D
E
F
I
H
G
A. Zoom Clips pane out vertically B. Vertical Zoom fader for Clips pane C. Zoom Clips pane in
vertically D. Zoom Bus pane out vertically E. Vertical Zoom fader for Bus pane F. Zoom Bus pane in
vertically G. Zoom in horizontally H. Horizontal zoom fader I. Zoom out horizontally
The Zoom tools are used as described in the following table.
Tool
How you use it
Zoom out (Clips pane or Bus pane)
Click to zoom out incrementally, or press SHIFT and click to zoom all the
way out
Zoom in (Clips pane or Bus pane)
Click to zoom in incrementally, or press SHIFT and click to zoom all the
way in
Zoom fader
Click and drag to zoom continuously
Table 6.
Introduction
SONAR basics
85
You can also zoom with the keyboard.
Key
What it does
CTRL+UP ARROW
Zoom out vertically
CTRL+DOWN ARROW
Zoom in vertically
CTRL+RIGHT ARROW
Zoom in horizontally
CTRL+LEFT ARROW
Zoom out horizontally
Hold down Z
Arm the Zoom tool
ALT+Z
Undo the current zoom
ALT+SHIFT+Z
Redo the previous zoom
F
Fit tracks to window
A
Show all tracks
SHIFT+F
Fit project to window
SHIFT+double-click a clip
Maximize track height
F11
Full Screen mode
Table 7.
To undo/redo zoom with mouse buttons
To undo zoom (same as ALT+Z), press and hold down the right mouse button, then click the left
mouse button.
To redo zoom (same as ALT+SHIFT+Z), press and hold down the left mouse button, then click the
right mouse button.
Auto Zoom the current track
When Auto Zoom is enabled, the current track will automatically zoom and any lanes will be shown
at their minimum height, and all other tracks will be minimized. When a new track is focused, it
swaps heights with the previously focused track.
Auto Zoom allows you to show more tracks or buses simultaneously as a result of having all but one
zoomed out vertically.
Note: When Auto Zoom is enabled, it is not possible to resize individual tracks. All non-focused
tracks always have the same track height. If a non-focused track is resized, all others resize with
it. All Minimize Strip and Restore Strip buttons are also hidden.
86
Introduction
SONAR basics
To enable/disable Auto Zoom
Do one of the following:
• Click the Track view Views menu and select Auto Zoom.
• Press SHIFT+Z.
To specify the default Auto Zoom track height
Resize the current track.
Zooming and scrolling in the time ruler
1. Point the mouse pointer at the top half of the Clips pane or Piano Roll view time ruler until the
mouse pointer looks like this:
.
2. Do one of the following:
• Drag up/down to zoom horizontally. Zooming is centered around the Aim Assist line. To zoom
faster, hold down the SHIFT key while dragging.
• Right-click and drag up/down to zoom tracks vertically. The current track is centered.
• Drag left/right to scroll horizontally.
• Double-click to show and fit selection (or fit project if there is no selection).
Note 1: If multiple time rulers are showing, drag in the top half of the topmost ruler.
Note 2: The Clips pane will stop scrolling while zooming in the time ruler, or if you stop zooming
while the Now time is off-screen. To resume scrolling, right-click in the time ruler.
Introduction
SONAR basics
87
Docking views in the MultiDock
You can dock any view other than the Console view in the MultiDock by enabling a view’s Dock in
MultiDock option. You can have as many views open in tabbed format as you want. You can toggle
through the different views by clicking the tab of the view you want to see (or use the
CTRL+SHIFT+LEFT/RIGHT ARROW shortcut). You can also maximize the pane to do detailed work
in a view, or drag the splitter bar at the top of the view to enlarge the tabbed view area.
Figure 17.
The MultiDock.
A
B
C
A. Each docked window has its own tab B. Click to the right of the tabs and drag the MultiDock away from the
bottom of the screen in order to undock the MultiDock C. Dock/undock and expand/collapse the MultiDock
For more information about docking view, see “MultiDock” on page 1146.
Locking views
By default SONAR allows only one instance of each view, but you can lock the contents of most
views, preserving the current view by forcing a new instance of the view to appear if necessary.
Locking views is the only way you can have multiple instances of the same view open. Only the
Track and Console views cannot be locked.
To lock a view, do one of the following:
• Click the upper left corner of a window, and choose Lock Contents from the pop-up menu.
• If the view is docked in the MultiDock, right-click the view’s tab and choose Lock Contents.
For more information about locking view, see “Locking views” on page 1152.
Floating views
When a view is float enabled, you can move it outside of the confines of SONAR. This is particularly
useful if you take advantage of SONAR’s dual monitor support. Using dual monitor support, you can
keep the Track or Console view on one monitor and “float” other views to the other monitor by
dragging them to the second screen.
For more information about floating view, see “Floating views and using dual video monitors” on
page 1150.
88
Introduction
SONAR basics
X-Ray windows
The X-Ray Windows feature eliminates the need to constantly minimize, move, or close windows in
order to work in other windows. It works by decreasing the opacity of the current window enough so
that you can see and work with the window that’s behind the current window. You activate the
feature by pressing a keyboard shortcut (default shortcut is SHIFT+X) when the mouse cursor is
over a window you want to x-ray. You can choose to X-Ray whichever window is underneath the
mouse cursor, or automatically X-Ray all FX/synth property pages in one step (Note: the mouse
cursor does not need to be over any plug-in property pages).
The X-Ray Windows feature works on the following windows:
• AudioSnap palette
• Piano Roll view (when float-enabled)
• Plug-in effects and synths
• Controller/Surface plug-ins
To select key bindings for X-Ray windows
1. Use the Edit > Preferences command to open the Preferences dialog box, then select
Keyboard Shortcuts.
2. If you want to use currently unassigned keys or key combinations, scroll through the options in
the Key window until the Assigned to field that is just under the window reads Unassigned. It’s
a good idea to find two unassigned options that are next to each other or easy to remember.
Note: For best results with X-Ray Windows, avoid using ALT key combinations.
3. Once you’ve decided on two keys or key combinations that you want to use, select Global
Bindings in the Area field, and scroll to the bottom of the list of commands that are in the window
below that field.
4. In the Key window, highlight the key or key combination that you want to use for the X-Ray
command, then highlight X-Ray in the function column of the list of commands, then click the
Bind button to bind them together.
5. Now highlight the key or key combination that you want to use for the X-Ray All FX/Synths
command, then highlight X-Ray All FX/Synths in the function column of the list of commands,
then click the Bind button to bind them together.
6. Click OK to close the dialog box.
To use X-Ray windows
1. Use the Edit > Preferences command to open the Preferences dialog box, click
Customization - Display and make sure the Enable X-Ray check box is selected.
2. Make sure that the view windows you want to X-Ray are in the Floating-enabled state: to check
this, click the view or fx icon that’s in the upper left corner of a window, and select Enable
Introduction
SONAR basics
89
Floating from the drop-down menu. If Disable Floating is in the menu, then the Floating option
is already enabled.
Note: All FX/Synth/Control surface property pages are float-enabled by default.
3. To X-Ray or un-X-Ray a single window, move the mouse cursor over the window, and press the
keyboard shortcut (default is SHIFT+X) for the X-Ray command. The window does not need to
have focus (does not need to be the highlighted window).
4. To X-Ray or un-X-Ray all plug-in windows at once, press the key binding for the X-Ray All FX/
Synths command.
Note: If a window has focus, and the window’s Give All Keystrokes To Plug-in button
enabled, X-Ray keyboard commands won’t work.
is
To Adjust X-Ray Windows Options
1. Use the Edit > Preferences command to open the Preferences dialog box, then click
Customization - Display.
2. On the General tab, you can adjust these options:
• Enable X-Ray. Enable or disable this check box to turn the X-Ray Windows feature on or
off.
• Opacity. Adjust this value by typing in a value, or by clicking and holding the + or - button to
adjust the final opacity percentage value that an X-Rayed window reaches.
• Fade Out Time. Adjust this value by typing in a value, or by clicking and holding the + or button to adjust the amount of time that an X-Rayed window takes to reach its final opacity
percentage value.
• Fade In Time. Adjust this value by clicking and holding the + or - button to adjust the amount
of time that an X-Rayed window takes to restore its original opacity.
3. Click OK to close the dialog box and accept your changes.
To exclude a plug-in from X-Ray capability
Some plug-ins (very few) use DirectDraw to create their windows. These windows appear jittery
when x-rayed.
To exclude a plug-in from X-Ray capability, follow these steps:
1. Open the Cakewalk Plug-in Manager: use the Utilities > Cakewalk Plug- in Manager
command.
2. In the Plug-in Categories window, select the category that the plug-in you want to exclude is in.
3. In the Registered Plug-ins window, select the plug-in that you want to exclude.
4. If the plug-in is a DirectX effect or an MFX, write down (or select and copy) the CLSID value
that’s in the CLSID field at the bottom of the dialog box.
90
Introduction
SONAR basics
5. If the plug-in is a VST or VSTi, write down the VST ID value that’s in the VST ID field at the
bottom of the dialog box.
6. Close the Plug-in Manager dialog box.
7. Open the Xrayexclude.ini file that’s in your SONAR program folder (use Notepad).
8. At the end of the file, find the [EffectProps View] section.
You will see entries such as the following:
; Waves SSL EQ Stereo
XRayExclude11=1397510483
XRayExclude12={E451379E-F7E1-4E82-98D9-BEB87AC45E90}
9. Exclude your plug-in by creating a blank line below the last entry in the [EffectProps View]
section, and then typing:
;[name of your plug-in, but without brackets]
XRayExclude[type the next available number in XRayExclude list, but without brackets]=[VST ID
number, with no brackets, or CLSID number, with curly braces at start and finish]
For example, if the last entry in the [EffectProps View] section was:; Waves SSL EQ
Stereo
XRayExclude11=1397510483
XRayExclude12={E451379E-F7E1-4E82-98D9-BEB87AC45E90}
And you wanted to exclude the Cakewalk FxDelay from the X-Ray Windows feature, after
creating a blank line you would type:
; Cakewalk FxDelay
XRayExclude13={985DAF67-589F-4B8D-8BBC-D7AD651B9022}
If there was also a VST version of the Cakewalk FxDelay, you would add another line:
XRayExclude14=[some VST ID number, with no brackets]
10. Save and close the Xrayexclude.ini file, and restart SONAR to implement your changes.
Screensets
You may spend a lot of time making sure that all the views are laid out on the screen just the way
you want. When you save your work, SONAR automatically saves the screen layout along with it.
You can create up to 10 screensets per project and freely switch between screensets at any time.
For more information, see “Screensets” on page 1154.
Next topic: “Working on a project” on page 92.
Introduction
SONAR basics
91
Working on a project
Every project has a current time, known as the Now time (see: “The Now time and how to use it” on
page 182). As you record or play back a project, the Now time shows your current location in the
project. When you create a project, the Now time is set to the beginning of the project. The current
Now time is saved with your project.
As you work with a project, you can use SONAR’s mute and solo features to choose which tracks
are played, or you can create loops to play a particular section over and over again. You can also
create markers, which are named time points you add to your project to make it easy to jump to a
particular location.
Next topic: “SONAR file types” on page 73.
Screen colors and wallpaper
SONAR lets you customize the colors that are used for virtually all parts of the program using the
Edit > Preferences > Customization - Colors command. This command also lets you change the
background bitmap that is displayed in the SONAR window.
For any SONAR screen element, you can assign a color in two ways:
• Choose one of the colors that is part of your Windows color scheme.
• Assign a custom color.
To assign custom colors
1. Choose Edit > Preferences to display the Preferences dialog box, then click Customization Colors.
2. Choose the screen element whose color you want to change from the Screen Element list.
3. Assign a color to the screen element in one of two ways:
• To use a color from the Windows color scheme, choose one of the options in the Follow
System Color list
• To use a custom color, check Use Specific Color, click the Choose Color button, and select
the color you want
4. To save these changes from session to session, check the Save Changes for Next Session
box.
5. Click OK when you are done.
SONAR uses the colors you have chosen.
92
Introduction
Screen colors and wallpaper
To restore the default colors
1. Choose Edit > Preferences to display the Preferences dialog box, then click Customization Colors.
2. In the Screen Elements window, select the elements that you want to restore; you can CTRLclick or SHIFT-click to select multiple elements.
3. Click the Defaults button.
4. Click OK.
SONAR uses the default colors for all selected screen elements.
To change the wallpaper
1. Choose Edit > Preferences to display the Preferences dialog box, then click Customization Colors.
2. Choose the desired wallpaper according to the table.
To do this
Do this
Use the default wallpaper
Check Default in the Wallpaper list
Not use any wallpaper
Check None in the Wallpaper list
Use a custom bitmap
Check Custom, choose a bitmap, and click Open
Table 8.
3. Click OK when you are done.
See also:
“Customization - Colors” on page 1838
“Color presets” on page 94
Introduction
Screen colors and wallpaper
93
Color presets
Once you create a color arrangement that you like, you can save it as a preset, and then load it
whenever you want to use that arrangement. You can also load any of the many factory presets,
some of which duplicate the colors of earlier versions of SONAR. You can also import and export
color arrangements in the form of .clr files so that SONAR users can share color layouts. And you
can back up or export all of your presets with a single command, and import a group of presets that
you or another SONAR user created.
Note: Both single color presets, and collections of presets use the file extension .clr, so when
you export either the current color arrangement, or all of your presets at once, give the exported
file a name that clearly labels it as either a single preset, or as a collection of presets.
Figure 18.
The Colors section
A
A. Presets menu B. Import and Export buttons
94
Introduction
Screen colors and wallpaper
B
To load a color preset
1. Choose Edit > Preferences to display the Preferences dialog box, then click Customization Colors.
2. Click the drop-down arrow on the Presets menu to display the list of presets, then click the name
of the preset you want to load.
To save a color preset
1. Choose Edit > Preferences to display the Preferences dialog box, then click Customization Colors.
2. Adjust the color settings you want to save.
3. Type a name for your preset in the Presets menu.
4. Click the floppy disk icon
that’s next to the Presets menu to save your preset.
To export the current color arrangement
1. Choose Edit > Preferences to display the Preferences dialog box, then click Customization Colors.
2. Arrange or load the color arrangement you want to export.
3. Click the Export Colors button
.
The Export Color Set dialog box appears.
4. Navigate to the folder where you want to store your new color set file.
5. Type a name for your color set file in the File Name field.
6. Make sure that the Export Current Color Set check box is enabled.
7. Click the Save button.
To import one or more color presets
1. Choose Edit > Preferences to display the Preferences dialog box, then click Customization Colors.
2. Click the Import Colors button
.
The Import Color Set dialog box appears.
3. Navigate to the folder where the color set file you want to import is. Both single presets and
groups of presets are stored in color set files, which use the .clr file extension.
4. Click the file that you want to import.
5. Click the Open button.
6. If your Preset menu in SONAR already contains a preset that is included in the preset collection
file you are importing, SONAR asks you if you want to overwrite the file. This happens for each
file that has the same name as a preset in the preset collection you are importing. Click Yes or
No for each file in question, or Yes All or No All to either overwrite or protect all of your current
preset files.
Introduction
Screen colors and wallpaper
95
To export all your color presets
1. Choose Edit > Preferences to display the Preferences dialog box, then click Customization Colors.
2. Click the Export Colors button
.
The Export Color Set dialog box appears.
3. Navigate to the folder where you want to store your the exported file. This file will contain all or
your color presets.
4. Type a name for your file in the File Name field. Use a file name that you will recognize as a
collection of presets, rather than as a single color arrangement.
5. Make sure that the Export Color Presets check box is enabled.
6. Click the Save button.
Note: A file of color presets can be large, and might take a minute or so to export.
96
Introduction
Screen colors and wallpaper
Installing SONAR
SONAR is easy to install. All you need to do is choose the folder where the program and sample
project files should be stored. Before you start, make sure you have your serial number handy. Your
serial number is located on the back of your DVD case.
To install SONAR
Note: If you choose to not install the Sample files, you will not have the necessary content to
use the tutorials in Chapter 2.
1. Start your computer.
2. Close any open programs you have running.
3. Place the SONAR installation disc in your disc drive.
If you have AutoRun enabled, the SONAR AutoRun menu opens automatically, showing you a
dialog box with several buttons. If AutoRun is not enabled, you can open the SONAR AutoRun
menu by selecting Start > Run and entering d:\AutoRun.exe (where d:\ is your disc drive).
4. Click the Install SONAR button.
Note: If you exit Setup without completing the installation, choose Start > Run, type
D:\AutoRun.exe (where D:\ is your DVD drive), and click OK. This will reopen the AutoRun
window, and you can click Install to start installation again.
5. Follow the installation instructions on the screen.
You can also install SONAR by choosing Start > Run and running the application named SETUP.EXE
from the DVD.
Uninstalling SONAR
When you installed SONAR, the setup program placed an Uninstall icon in the Start menu. To
uninstall SONAR, click the Start button and choose Programs > Cakewalk > SONAR X3 (Producer
or Studio) > Uninstall SONAR X3 (Producer or Studio).
Introduction
Installing SONAR
97
Starting to use SONAR
This chapter has provided you with an overview of SONAR and basic information on how to install
the software and configure your system.
The following tutorials will give you some hands-on practice in playing, recording, and mixing your
projects. If you have not already done so, you may want to refer to “SONAR basics” on page 72 to
get the most out of these tutorials.
Note: If, during installation, you chose in the Select Components dialog box not to install the
Tutorials folder (part of the Sample files), you will not have access to the sample tutorial files
needed to follow the tutorials in this chapter. If you didn’t install these files, insert your product
disc and copy the files to your hard drive.
“Tutorial 1 – Creating, playing, and saving projects” on page 99
“Tutorial 2 – Using the Browser” on page 113
“Tutorial 3 – Recording vocals and musical instruments” on page 119
“Tutorial 4 – Playing and recording software instruments” on page 125
“Tutorial 5 – Working with music notation” on page 133
“Tutorial 6 – Editing your music” on page 143
“Tutorial 7 – Mixing and adding effects” on page 151
“Tutorial 8 – Working with video” on page 161
“Tutorial 9 – Exporting, CD burning and sharing” on page 171
98
Introduction
Starting to use SONAR
Tutorial 1 – Creating, playing, and saving
projects
Understanding and managing project files is central to your workflow in SONAR. In this tutorial, we are
going to cover the basics of getting started with project files and some of the operations that can be
performed with them. Whenever you write or record music in SONAR, you are writing it to be saved into
a project. A project can contain a variety of elements, including:
• Audio tracks
• MIDI tracks
• Instrument tracks
• Audio effects
• Project settings such as Tempo, Key and Meter changes
• Lyrics and notation
See:
“Creating a new project” on page 100
“Opening project files” on page 102
“Playing project files” on page 104
“Looping project files” on page 109
“Saving project files” on page 110
99
Creating a new project
There are several ways to get started with a project in SONAR. When SONAR is opened, you will be
greeted with the Quick Start dialog box. Let’s take a look at the options available in this dialog box.
Open a Project. Opens a standard File Open dialog box, which lets you select the project that you
want to open.
Open a Recent Project. The drop-down list shows the most recent projects that have been
opened in SONAR. Select the desired project from the list and click the button to the left of the list to
open the project.
Create a New Project. Click this button to open the New Project File dialog box, which lets you
create a new project based on any available template.
Online Videos and more. Click this link to view our tutorial videos online. An active Internet
connection is needed in order to access this content.
Getting Started.
Click this button to open the SONAR online Help.
Show this at Startup. Clear this check box if you don’t want the Quick Start dialog box to launch
the next time you start SONAR.
Close. Use this button to close the Quick Start dialog box.
For this tutorial, we want to create a new project.
• Click the Create a New Project button
.
Tip: You can also perform this same operation by clicking File > New from the main menu across
the top of SONAR’s screen.
100
Tutorial 1 – Creating, playing, and saving projects
Creating a new project
The New Project File dialog box appears. Whenever you create a new project, you will be
presented with this dialog box.
Let’s explore some of the things you can do in this window.
Note: The list of available project templates shown may vary depending on your version of
SONAR (SONAR X3, SONAR X3 Studio, or SONAR X3 Producer).
Name. Type the name of your project in the Name box. For this exercise, let’s name your project
Tutorial 1.
Location. Use the Location box to specify where the project should be saved. Click
to
browse to a specific location. For this tutorial, use the default, as shown in the preceding figure.
Audio Path.
Click
Use the Audio Path box to specify where to save audio recordings for your project.
to browse to a specific location.
Store Project Audio in its own Folder. Select this check box if you want to store the project’s
audio files in a separate folder. It is recommended that you select this option.
Template. This list shows all available pre-made templates included with SONAR. This list will also
include any custom templates that you create. Your Template list may vary from the preceding
figure. For this tutorial, select the template named Normal.
OK. Click OK to create a new project based on the specified settings.
Cancel.
Help.
Click Cancel to close the New Project File dialog box.
Click Help to open the online Help topic for the New Project File dialog box.
Click OK now to move forward with this tutorial.
Congratulations, you have just created a new project in SONAR!
Tutorial 1 – Creating, playing, and saving projects
Creating a new project
101
See:
“Opening project files” on page 102
“Playing project files” on page 104
“Looping project files” on page 109
“Saving project files” on page 110
Opening project files
Next, we are going to cover how to open existing project files. There are two ways this can be done
in SONAR:
• Click the Open a Project button in the Quick Start dialog box that is first presented when
SONAR starts.
Note: You can open the Quick Start dialog box at any time by going to Help > Quick Start.
• Select File > Open from the menu bar across the top of SONAR’s screen.
Let’s go ahead and try one of the above methods. Either of them will bring you to the Open dialog
box as shown in the following figure. The Open dialog box functions like any other file browsing
dialog box in Microsoft Windows.
102
Tutorial 1 – Creating, playing, and saving projects
Opening project files
• The vertical navigation buttons let you jump to popular locations on your computer’s hard disk.
• The browsing pane lists all the project files and folders that are available in the selected folder.
• The Go to Folder drop-down list allows you to quickly move to commonly used folders for
project files in SONAR. Typically, you can get to your projects by selecting Project Files.
• For more detailed information about all the options and functions in this dialog box, click Help.
For this tutorial we want to open one of the sample project files that are included with SONAR.
Navigate to the Cakewalk Content folder (default location is C:\Cakewalk Content\SONAR
X3 [Producer or Studio]\Tutorial Projects\Tutorial Projects) and locate the
project named SONAR_AudioDemo.cwb.
You can load project files into SONAR in one of two ways:
• Select a file by clicking on it so that it is selected, then click Open.
• Double-click the file from the browsing pane.
Note: If prompted to unpack the bundle, accept the default locations and click OK.
Let’s now use one of these methods to open the project file SONAR_AudioDemo.cwb. When the
project opens, the File Information window appears. This window can be used for storing notes,
comments, credits and other helpful information about a project. For now, close File Information
window by clicking the Close button
in the upper right corner of the window.
See:
“Creating a new project” on page 100
Tutorial 1 – Creating, playing, and saving projects
Opening project files
103
“Playing project files” on page 104
“Looping project files” on page 109
“Saving project files” on page 110
Playing project files
For this next section we are going to configure the project named SONAR_AudioDemo.cwb for
playback in SONAR. If you have not opened the project yet, do so before continuing by using the
steps in “Opening project files” on page 102.
See:
“Configuring your sound device” on page 104
Configuring your sound device
Before we can get any sound, we need to ensure that SONAR is communicating with your
computer’s sound card or audio interface. To do so, click on the Edit menu across the top of
SONAR’s screen, choose Preferences, then click Audio - Devices.
Before you can hear any sound play in SONAR, you have to ensure that the devices you want to use
are selected. A Roland audio interface is used in the following example, so all the Input Drivers and
Output Drivers check boxes for the Roland device are selected. Your device list will most likely be
different from the following image.
104
Tutorial 1 – Creating, playing, and saving projects
Playing project files
After you have selected the desired Input and Output devices that you plan to use with SONAR, click
the Audio - Driver Settings page. In the Playback Timing Master list, select the audio output
device that you want SONAR to treat as the default or main output device. This should be the output
on your sound card that has either speakers or headphones connected to it. In the Record Timing
Master list, select the input on your sound card that you plan to plug devices into, such as a
microphone, keyboard or other instrument.
If you are having trouble with any of the steps in the last section thus far, we have created a helpful
set-up guide on our web site that provides step-by-step instructions for configuring your audio
hardware. You can find it here: www.cakewalk.com/Support/hardwaresetup/
See:
“Setting the track outputs” on page 106
Tutorial 1 – Creating, playing, and saving projects
Playing project files
105
Setting the track outputs
The next important step is telling SONAR which output on your sound device you would like audio
tracks to play on. In some cases, it is desirable to have tracks playing different outputs (such as if
you are using external hardware processing for effects). In this scenario, you’ll want to set all of the
audio tracks to the same output.
Let’s start with the Bass track. Locate the track named Bass in the project. Let’s take a closer look at
a few of the track’s controls. If the track controls are not all visible, you may need to expand the track
to see them all.
To expand a track to make all of its controls visible
1.
Point the cursor to the bottom edge of the track.
2.
Click and drag down to reveal all track controls.
Tip: You can also double-click an empty space in the track strip to maximize/restore the track strip.
Tip: If you do not see all the track controls, click the Track Control button to the left of the Track view
time ruler, and select All from the menu. You can also hold down the SHIFT key and press the Left
ARROW and RIGHT ARROW keys to cycle through the available control layouts. For details, see “To
configure track and bus control layouts” on page 340.
Control
Description
This is the Mute button. It is used to silence a track during playback. Any tracks that are
muted will not be heard.
This is the Solo button. It is used to silence every track except the one that is soloed. This
can be handy for isolating a particular performance or recording for monitoring or mixing
purposes. SONAR allows you to solo multiple tracks simultaneously.
This is the Arm or Record Enable button, which must be enabled on any track that you want
to record onto. For more details, see Tutorial 3 – Recording vocals and musical instruments.
This is the Input Echo or Input Monitor button. When clicked, this enables the track’s input
to be heard directly through its output. For more details, see Tutorial 3 – Recording vocals
and musical instruments.
This is the Read Automation button. It is used to enable/disable automation playback.
106
Tutorial 1 – Creating, playing, and saving projects
Playing project files
Control
Description
This is the Write Automation button. When enabled, changes to adjustable track
parameters during playback are recorded. For more details, see Tutorial 7 – Mixing and
adding effects.
This is the Freeze button. It is used to temporarily convert a synth or instrument track into an
audio track to conserve CPU power.
Locate the drop-down list for Output and click the small arrow to show all available outputs. Select
the output that your speakers or headphones are connected to. If you can’t find the Output dropdown list, make sure you have expanded the track fully by dragging it down.
Note: Your options will be different from the preceding image. Select the output that
corresponds to your sound card or audio device.
Next, you will want to repeat the above process for all of the tracks in your project.
Tip: If you need to change multiple outputs simultaneously, select the tracks, then hold down the
CTRL key while you change the Output setting in any selected track. You can also click a track’s
Output control and choose Selected Track Outputs, which opens a dialog box that allows you to
change the Audio and MIDI outputs of all selected tracks.
See:
“Playing the project” on page 108
Tutorial 1 – Creating, playing, and saving projects
Playing project files
107
Playing the project
Now that all of the track’s outputs are set to the appropriate device, the next step is to play the
project to make sure it can be heard and sounds right.
Locate the Control Bar at the top of SONAR’s screen.
The Control Bar contains many useful functions related to projects in SONAR. To learn more about
the Control Bar, see “Control Bar overview” on page 537. For now, simply click the Play button
to hear the project.
Experiment with the Mute
and Solo
buttons on each track. If you solo multiple tracks, you will
hear all the soloed tracks. If you mute any tracks, they will not be heard.
Tip: You can also use your keyboard’s SPACEBAR key to start and stop playback in SONAR.
Once you are done listening, click the Stop button
.
See:
“Creating a new project” on page 100
“Opening project files” on page 102
“Looping project files” on page 109
“Saving project files” on page 110
“Troubleshooting” on page 1363
108
Tutorial 1 – Creating, playing, and saving projects
Playing project files
Looping project files
SONAR features a really handy tool that allows you to repeat specified sections of a project file. You
may want to do this to rehearse a part or phrase or to listen closely to a specific section. Perhaps
you might set up a loop just because it’s your favorite part of the song and you want to hear it over
and over again. For all of the above, you need to loop a section of the song.
You may have noticed this demo file is an example of rock music. Let’s pretend for a second that you
are the guitar player and you want to practice your solo section right before measure 10. This
requires you to do two things:
1. Create a looped section of the GTR_Rhythm, Bass and Drums tracks for you to practice with.
2. Mute the existing GTR_Lead 1 track.
Enabling looping in SONAR is easy. Simply click the Loop button
module. When enabled, the Loop button is lit
in the Control Bar’s Loop
.
Take note of the measure numbers displayed in the following image. The first number (10:01:000)
indicates the start of the loop region and second number (19:01:000) indicates the end of the loop
region. When looping is enabled, the time ruler across the top of SONAR's Track view displays
yellow flag markers that indicate where the loop region starts and ends. If you want to change the
loop region, you can drag the loop markers to a new location. Drag the loop start marker to measure
10 and the loop end marker to measure 19. This will create a loop of the first solo section.
Finally, mute both the GTR_Lead 3 and GTR_Lead 2 tracks and click Play
to audition the loop
region. You will now hear only the Bass and GTR_Rhythm tracks so that you, the guitarist in our
scenario, can practice your solo section.
Tip: To toggle the Now time between the start of the loop region and the beginning of the project,
press the W key or click the RTZ button
.
See:
“Creating a new project” on page 100
“Opening project files” on page 102
“Playing project files” on page 104
“Saving project files” on page 110
Tutorial 1 – Creating, playing, and saving projects
Looping project files
109
Saving project files
SONAR offers you many options for saving your work. To investigate these options, click on the File
menu and choose Save As. This opens the Save As dialog box. Before doing anything in this
window, the first thing you should do is select Project Files in the Go to Folder list. Even if it already
says Project Files, click it anyway.
You will notice this window looks very familiar to the Open dialog box we looked at earlier in this
tutorial. The Save As dialog box navigates files much in the same way as Windows does. If you
would like to read the finer points and in-depth information about using this window, click the Help
button. For this exercise, we are going to look at the different types of project files you can save with
SONAR.
Take a look at the drop-down list labeled Save as type. Click the Save as type arrow to see a list of
supported file formats. Let’s look at these different files formats now:
• Normal. This is the first option listed and the most common format used for saving project files.
Choosing this will create a Cakewalk Project file with the .cwp file extension. It is important to
remember that Cakewalk Project files do not actually store any audio data, but rather reference
audio files from where they are saved on your computer’s hard drive. You can choose where the
audio files are stored by using the Audio Path field in the Save As dialog box.
• Template. Template files are used as a starting point for new projects. Templates can store
layout information about your project, such as how many audio and MIDI tracks there are and
110
Tutorial 1 – Creating, playing, and saving projects
Saving project files
which Output ports they are assigned to. For more information about using templates, see
“Templates” on page 1164.
• Cakewalk Bundle. This format is typically used when transferring projects to other people or
other computers. Cakewalk Bundle files use the .cwb file extension and are similar to Cakewalk
Project files. The main difference is that Cakewalk Bundle files actually contain all of a project’s
audio data. Cakewalk Bundle files are much larger in size than regular Cakewalk Project files
because they contain all of the audio data for a project, so try to avoid using this format unless
you need to move a project between computers. When opening a Cakewalk Bundle file, SONAR
will “unpack” the embedded audio data and save it to a new audio folder on your computer.
• MIDI. This option lets you save a standard MIDI file of your project. MIDI files do not contain any
embedded audio or references to external audio files, so any audio data in a project will be
discarded when you save a MIDI file. MIDI files can be either Format 0 or Format 1. Format 0
combines all the MIDI events into a single track. This is compatible with many older sequencers
and keyboards. MIDI Format 1 files can store up to 7256 tracks and are a better choice if you plan
to use your MIDI file with another computer-based sequencing application. Although not as
common, SONAR also allows you to save in the RIFF MIDI format. Unless you are positive that
the playback system requires a RIFF MIDI file, you want to use the MIDI format.
In most cases, the best choice for saving your files is Normal. To save this project, do the following:
1. In the Go to Folder list, select Project Files. Even if Project Files is already selected, select it
again for good practice.
2. In the Save as type list, select Normal.
3. Type a name in the File Name box.
4. Click Save to save the project.
This completes the tutorial.
See:
“Creating a new project” on page 100
“Opening project files” on page 102
“Playing project files” on page 104
“Looping project files” on page 109
See also:
“Tutorial 2 – Using the Browser” on page 113
“Tutorial 3 – Recording vocals and musical instruments” on page 119
“Tutorial 4 – Playing and recording software instruments” on page 125
“Tutorial 5 – Working with music notation” on page 133
“Tutorial 6 – Editing your music” on page 143
“Tutorial 7 – Mixing and adding effects” on page 151
“Tutorial 8 – Working with video” on page 161
“Tutorial 9 – Exporting, CD burning and sharing” on page 171
Tutorial 1 – Creating, playing, and saving projects
Saving project files
111
112
Tutorial 1 – Creating, playing, and saving projects
Saving project files
Tutorial 2 – Using the Browser
The Browser lets you find and import various types of content into your projects, including audio and
MIDI files, track and project templates, track icons, FX Chain presets, effect plug-ins and
instruments. You can drag content and plug-ins directly into tracks. By default, the Browser is
docked on the right side of the screen.
To show or hide the Browser, click the Views menu and choose Browser, or press B.
Now that we know how to show and hide the Browser, let’s take a closer look at some of its features,
starting with the controls that span across the top of the Browser. Locate the section on your
computer screen that looks like the following image.
113
First, let’s review the controls at the top of the Browser.
Control
Description
This is the Move up button. It is used to open the folder one level above the
active folder.
Stop is used to stop play back of the selected loop.
Play is used to listen to the currently selected loop.
Allows you to save and recall presets to quickly access your favorite folders.
The Content Location drop-down list shown in the following figure allows you to quickly jump to
popular locations on your hard drive.
Figure 19.
Media Browser
A
B
C
DE F
G
J
H
K
L
I
A. Show Media Browser B. Browser menu C. Content Location menu D. Dock/undock E. Docking
options F. Expand/collapse G. Move up one level to the parent directory H. Search filter I. File list J. Play/
Stop K. Delete content preset L. Save content preset
114
Tutorial 2 – Using the Browser
To specify the output device to use for previewing loops and files from the Browser, click the Media
button
, point to Audio Preview Bus, and choose an output device from the submenu.
To work with software instruments, click the Synth button
Rack contains the following controls.
Figure 20.
to open the Synth Rack. The Synth
Synth Rack Browser
A
B
C
D
E
FGH
J
I
A. Insert Synth B. Delete Synth C. Insert Synth Options D. Show Synth Rack Browser E. Synth Settings
menu F. Dock/undock G. Docking options H. Expand/collapse I. Instrument list J. Synth Automation menu
See:
“Finding and previewing audio loops” on page 116
“Previewing MIDI groove clips” on page 117
“Adding audio loops to your project” on page 118
Tutorial 2 – Using the Browser
115
Finding and previewing audio loops
Now that we have a general idea of how the Browser is laid out, let’s find some of the content that is
included with SONAR and give it a listen.
1. Create a new project using the Normal Template as explained in the previous tutorial titled
“Saving project files” on page 110.
2. Make sure the Browser is open and visible. If it is not, click the Views menu and choose
Browser, or press the B key.
3. Click the Media button
to show the Media Browser.
4. In the Browser, click the Content Location drop-down list and select Audio Library.
5. Double-click the Loops folder to open the folder.
6. Double-click the Loopmasters folder.
7. Double-click the ROCK AND FUNK folder.
8. Double-click the RAW POWER and click the loop named RP_Baggy_140.rx2.
The Browser should look something like the following image.
9. Click the Play button
in the Browser.
The selected file is previewed.
If you don’t hear anything, revisit the settings of your Audio Preview Bus, as discussed above, and
ensure that it is set to the audio device that your headphones or speakers are connected to.
If you need to preview a lot of loops quickly, click the Media button
and enable the AutoPreview option. When enabled, an audio loop will start playing as soon as you select it.
See:
“Previewing MIDI groove clips” on page 117
“Adding audio loops to your project” on page 118
116
Tutorial 2 – Using the Browser
Finding and previewing audio loops
Previewing MIDI groove clips
In addition to audio loops, the Browser also allows you to preview MIDI groove clips. Let’s try this
now with one of the clips included with SONAR. Unlike audio loops, MIDI groove clips require a soft
synth or instrument track to play through.
1. Click the Browser’s Synth button
2. Click the Insert button
to open the Synth Rack.
, point to Insert Synths and select Cakewalk TTS-1.
The Insert Soft Synth Options dialog box appears.
3. Clear all of the check boxes except for Simple Instrument Track, Recall Assignable Controls,
and Ask This Every Time.
4. Click OK.
Cakewalk TTS-1 is added to your project.
Now that we have a synth in our project that we can preview MIDI groove clips with, let’s find some
and give them a listen.
1. Click the Media button
to show the Media Browser.
2. In the Browser, click the Content Location drop-down list and select MIDI Library.
3. Double click the Smart Loops folder and select the file named Bangin 10.mid.
Before we can preview a MIDI groove clip, we need to tell SONAR what instrument or synth we
would like to preview it with.
4. Click the Media button
the submenu.
, point to Synth Preview Output and select Cakewalk TTS-1 1 on
5. Now that SONAR knows what synth to play MIDI groove clips through, select the groove clip
named Bangin 10.mid just as you did with the audio loop previously.
6. Click the Play button
in the Browser.
Just like with audio loops, you can set MIDI groove clips to auto-preview by clicking the Media
button
and enabling the Auto-Preview option.
In addition to using soft synths to preview MIDI groove clips, soft synths also have many other useful
and powerful features. For more details and instructions on using them, see “Tutorial 4 – Playing and
Tutorial 2 – Using the Browser
Finding and previewing audio loops
117
recording software instruments” on page 125.
See:
“Adding audio loops to your project” on page 118
Adding audio loops to your project
Once you have found an audio loop or MIDI groove clip that you would like to use in your project, the
next important step is to add it to your project. Adding loops is easy with SONAR’s intuitive drag and
drop interface.
To add a loop to your project, do the following:
1. In the Browser, locate the loop you would like to use in your project.
2. Drag the loop to a track. If you are selecting an audio loop, you must drag it to an audio track. If
you would like to use a MIDI groove clip, be sure you drag it to a MIDI track.
3. When you drag a loop or groove clip into a project, it will only show one repetition. You can
extend how long a loop is by pointing the mouse pointer to the clip’s right edge, then drag the clip
edge to the desired duration. When you point the mouse pointer to the right clip edge, a blue
vertical line appears and the mouse pointer looks like this
.
This completes the tutorial. You should now be able to drag loops into your projects and loop them.
See also:
“Tutorial 1 – Creating, playing, and saving projects” on page 99
“Tutorial 3 – Recording vocals and musical instruments” on page 119
“Tutorial 4 – Playing and recording software instruments” on page 125
“Tutorial 5 – Working with music notation” on page 133
“Tutorial 6 – Editing your music” on page 143
“Tutorial 7 – Mixing and adding effects” on page 151
“Tutorial 8 – Working with video” on page 161
“Tutorial 9 – Exporting, CD burning and sharing” on page 171
118
Tutorial 2 – Using the Browser
Finding and previewing audio loops
Tutorial 3 – Recording vocals and musical
instruments
One of the most important aspects of creating music in SONAR is digital audio recording. This is the
process of taking the sound from a microphone or an instrument and recording it to an audio track. Once
this step is completed, you can edit and mix the song to prepare it to share with the world.
This tutorial will walk you through the steps involved and provide you with some insight on how to get the
best possible audio recordings.
Adding an audio track
In Tutorial 1, you learned about opening project templates. Let's open a blank project for this tutorial:
1. On the File menu, click New.
2. Select the Normal template and click OK.
A new blank project is created.
With the blank project open, you can insert new tracks as you need them. For the task of recording
digital audio you'll need a new audio track. Follow these steps to insert one:
3. Do one of the following:
• Click Insert and then click Audio Track.
• Right-click on the Tracks pane and select Insert Audio Track on the pop-up menu.
A new audio track is added to your project.
4. In the new audio track, expand the track to expose all of its controls (for details, see “To expand a
track to make all of its controls visible” on page 106).
5. The track's controls are exposed.
6. Click the Input drop-down menu to select the track’s input.
The available inputs for the track are displayed.
7. Select the physical jack that your instrument is plugged into. If you know, for instance, that your guitar
is plugged into input 1, click the Input control and select the first option. Some audio interfaces refer
to their stereo inputs as pairs, like 1/2, 3/4 or 5/6. Most often left channels are represented by odd
numbers and right channels are represented by even numbers.
Note: Most microphones and guitars are mono, so you'll want to select either the left or right
channel accordingly.
119
8. Click the Output drop-down menu to select the track’s output.
The available outputs for the track are displayed.
9. Select the output that you want the audio track to play through during playback. You will usually
choose 1 and 2, because these are most commonly the outputs that speakers or audio monitors
are connected to.
10. Click the track's Record Enable button
.
Note: SONAR only allows recording to tracks that have been record enabled. This is necessary
since SONAR allows for multi-track recording. This tells SONAR what track you want your new
material recorded to. Otherwise, every track would be recorded to during every take.
11. Click the Input Echo button
if you want to hear the input during recording. Many sound cards
and audio interfaces have an option to do this automatically at the hardware level. If you can
already hear the input signal, simply move on to the next section.
Getting ready to record
At this point, we need to check the input levels to make sure they are sufficient and not distorting.
Perform as you would if you were recording and watch the meter on the track respond to the sounds
you produce.
If the meter never even comes close to the maximum, increase the input level. If the meter even
occasionally reaches the maximum, decrease the input level. Input levels are usually adjusted via a
knob next to the input jack on the sound card, but features like this may vary slightly between
devices. So, if you have never recorded an instrument or microphone with your sound card, you may
want to read about doing so in the device's manual.
Figure 21.
The record meter shows the input level
Input may be too low
Input is too loud
Recording your performance
Now that everything is set up, let's record something! Go to Edit > Preferences > Project Metronome to access metronome settings. You can also right-click the Playback Metronome on/
off button
or Record Metronome on/off button
access metronome settings.
in the Control Bar’s Transport module to
12. Set the metronome for a 2 measure count-in.
120
Tutorial 3 – Recording vocals and musical instruments
• Click Use Audio Metronome, select the Recording check box and set Record Count-in to 2
Measures. For details about each metronome option, click Help.
13. Make sure the track has been record enabled by clicking the track’s Record Enable button. The
Record Enable button on the track should be lit in red like this:
.
14. Click the Record button in the Control Bar’s Transport module, or press R on your computer
keyboard.
You'll hear two measures counted in by the metronome and then recording will begin. Start
performing at the beginning of the third count.
15. When you finish recording, click the Stop button
or press the SPACEBAR.
A new audio clip appears.
16. Press Play to play back the project. If you would like to redo the take, go to Edit > Undo to undo
the previous recording, then repeat steps 3, 4 and 5 above until you get a perfect take.
Now that your first track has been recorded, you can “over-dub” another part. To do so, disable
recording on track 1 and repeat the steps in this tutorial. After repeating the steps, you will have
recorded to track 2. Both recorded tracks will play during playback. Each will also have its own
exclusive volume and pan control, effects bin, and can be muted or soloed. You'll learn more about
this in future tutorials.
See:
“Troubleshooting” on page 122
Tutorial 3 – Recording vocals and musical instruments
121
Troubleshooting
If you weren't able to record successfully by following this tutorial, please check the following:
I only get one side of my guitar or microphone recorded
You may be recording a mono signal through a stereo input. Guitars and microphones produce
mono signals. Click the tracks Input control and select the appropriate side of your stereo pair, either
left or right as opposed to stereo.
Also, make sure you don't have a mono adapter going into the Line-in and that you have the Left
side of your sound card (mono) chosen for input in SONAR.
Previously recorded tracks are mixed into my new recordings
This can happen when your soundcard is set to record everything that comes out of your computer
speakers.
1. Open the Windows Volume Control window:
• Windows 7: Click the Windows Start button and go to Control Panel > Hardware and
Sound > Volume Control.
The Volume Control window appears.
2. On the Options menu, click Properties.
The Properties dialog box appears.
3. In the Adjust Volume For section, click Recording.
4. Click OK to close the Properties dialog box.
The Record Mixer appears.
5. Make sure What You Hear or Stereo Mix (exact name various depending on the sound card
manufacturer) is not selected. If this option is enabled, click the Select check box below the
desired input (normally Line In or Mic).
This problem can also occur when you are using an analog mixer in your setup. Carefully follow all
of your signal paths to ensure that your sound cards audio output is not being looped back into itself.
You should also consider the possibility of your microphone picking up the signal from your speakers
or headphones.
Only a flat line or silence is recorded
Open the Windows Volume Control window:
• Windows 7: Click the Windows Start button and go to Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >
Manage audio devices.
The Windows Mixer controls the volume levels of your sound card inputs and can also mute any
input or output device.
122
Tutorial 3 – Recording vocals and musical instruments
The Windows Mixer looks like this:
When you open the Windows Mixer it may be labeled Playback or Recording. We want to see the
recording controls.
See also:
“Tutorial 1 – Creating, playing, and saving projects” on page 99
“Tutorial 2 – Using the Browser” on page 113
“Tutorial 4 – Playing and recording software instruments” on page 125
“Tutorial 5 – Working with music notation” on page 133
“Tutorial 6 – Editing your music” on page 143
“Tutorial 7 – Mixing and adding effects” on page 151
“Tutorial 8 – Working with video” on page 161
“Tutorial 9 – Exporting, CD burning and sharing” on page 171
Tutorial 3 – Recording vocals and musical instruments
123
124
Tutorial 3 – Recording vocals and musical instruments
Tutorial 4 – Playing and recording software
instruments
Software instruments, also referred to as soft synths, are a major part of computer music. Our goal in this
tutorial is to add a software instrument to a project. We'll explore a few different ways they can be used
with SONAR and look at some options to make the most of them.
A brief history
Note: Feel free to skip to the next section if you want to start using synths right away.
For our purposes, a synth has two basic functions:
• Receive a digital message
• Make a sound based on the information contained in that message
In the early 1980's, all of the major manufacturers of keyboards and drum machines got together to
decide on a way for their products to work well with each other. Since they all operated under some
version of the two functions listed above, it was a simple goal. They needed to standardize what
messages were used to represent particular expressions. For example: if it was a drum machine,
everyone would need to use the C note for the bass drum, the D note for the snare drum and so on. That
way, messages sent from one drum machine can be fed to another made by a different company. It will
play the same beat, but using the drum sounds from the different module. The standard they established
is known as MIDI (usually pronounced [mid-ee]). As soon as computers entered the scene, it was clear
that there should be a way to connect a synth and send MIDI messages to it from a software sequencer.
That's how Cakewalk was born. Our first application was a DOS program that would allow a user to edit
the MIDI data in detail, and play it out to a connected synth. You could also record the events from a
performance into the computer.
Things have evolved a lot since then. As computers have grown more powerful, the capabilities of
Cakewalk software have expanded. Computers are now so fast that software companies are able to
make synths and drum machines that are completely software-based. They are essentially the guts of a
keyboard in a computer program.
See:
“Adding an instrument track to your project” on page 126
“Recording MIDI” on page 128
“Manually entering MIDI notes” on page 128
125
Adding an instrument track to your project
Adding instrument tracks to your project is easy and something you’ll find yourself doing often, so
let’s explore some of the basics. For this exercise, we'll start with a blank project.
1. On the File menu, click New.
2. Select the Normal template and click OK.
A new project opens.
3. Click Insert >Soft-Synths.
A menu lists all available software synths that are installed on your computer.
4. Click DropZone.
The Insert Soft Synth Options dialog box appears.
5. Select the following options:
• Simple Instrument Track
• Synth Property Page
• Recall Assignable Controls
• Ask This Every Time
A new track is inserted in your project. This track is a combination of the two types of tracks you
have learned about in the previous tutorials. It holds MIDI data and accepts a MIDI input, but it
outputs the sound of the synth, like an audio track would. The DropZone window may also open.
If not, you can open it manually by double-clicking on the track icon.
A
B
A. Track header icon B. Track icon
Note: You can always launch a given software instrument's window by double-clicking its track
icon.
126
Tutorial 4 – Playing and recording software instruments
Let's take a quick look at DropZone.
One of the first things you'll typically need to do is choose a sound. In DropZone and most other
Cakewalk synths, a sound preset is referred to as a program.
1. In DropZone's Program window, click default.
The Program Browser appears.
Note: It may take a minute the first time the Program Browser opens. This is because DropZone
is building a list of all available sounds. Once the list has been built, the Program Browser will
open faster the next time.
2. Select a program by double-clicking its name. For this tutorial we'll use Acid Quinda from the
Basses section.
DropZone loads the program and displays the program name.
3. Click the keyboard image to hear what the program sounds like.
Note: Each soft synth uses a different method of choosing and auditioning sounds. This is often
outlined in the synth's documentation. You can press the F1 key to open the online Help for a
synth.
Now that we have inserted an instrument and selected one of its sounds we can make use of these
sounds in our project. This is where you can get creative. You have the option of recording a
performance that you play on a MIDI keyboard (also referred to as a controller) or manually entering
notes and events to play out to the software synth. We'll explore each method in the following
sections.
See:
“Recording MIDI” on page 128
“Manually entering MIDI notes” on page 128
Tutorial 4 – Playing and recording software instruments
127
Recording MIDI
First, we'll try recording. This only works if you have a MIDI controller. If you do not have a MIDI
controller, skip ahead to the next section of this tutorial.
For recording, you don't need the DropZone window open. You can close an instrument by clicking
in the upper right corner. This doesn't cause the synth to stop functioning—it will continue to
work in the background.
Note: If you need to see the DropZone window again, just double-click the track icon.
In the Track view, we can assign the input port. If you only have one MIDI keyboard this should be
set up already. Try playing some notes to see if it works. If not, go to Edit > Preferences > MIDI Devices and make sure your keyboard is enabled in the Inputs list.
The next step is arming the track for recording. Click the track's Record Enable button
enables recording on the track. Now, click the Record button
. This
in the Control Bar’s Transport
module. The Now Time cursor starts to roll. Play some notes and click the Stop button
when
you're done. You have just recorded your first MIDI performance through a software instrument.
Press the Play button
to hear it play back.
See:
“Adding an instrument track to your project” on page 126
“Manually entering MIDI notes” on page 128
Manually entering MIDI notes
Using this method, you can manually draw notes on a grid called the Piano Roll view (often referred
to as the PRV). This is the preferred method if you're not much of a keyboard player or don't have
access to a MIDI controller. It allows you to edit every detail of a performance.
To get to the PRV, you first need to select the track you would like to see in it. Simply click the track
icon once so that it changes color. Next, go to Views > Piano Roll View to open the PRV. The PRV
opens in the MultiDock below the Track view. To expand the MultiDock, double-click the PRV tab in
the MultiDock, or press SHIFT+D.
128
Tutorial 4 – Playing and recording software instruments
The ruler at the top of this view represents musical measures and beats. The keyboard image on the
left represents what notes are being played.
Click on the Smart tool
in the Control Bar. You can also enable this tool by pressing the F5 key
on your computer keyboard. To draw a note with the Smart tool, drag on the grid, or hold down the
ALT key and click on the grid.
To create a note, click on the grid at measure 1.
If you click on various sections of a note, the Smart tool performs a different function:
• Left edge.
Adjusts the start time.
• Right edge. Adjusts the end time or the duration.
• Top.
Adjusts the velocity of the note, which indicates how hard the note is played.
• Bottom. Allows you to move the note to another location on the PRV grid.
Try to create a melody using this technique. You might find that you can only create 16th notes or
longer. If you want 32nd notes or triplets, specify the desired Musical Time resolution in the Control
Bar’s Snap module.
Tutorial 4 – Playing and recording software instruments
129
The Snap module contains the following settings.
Figure 22.
The Snap module.
You can now draw notes at shorter distances from each other.
To specify the duration of new notes, select the desired duration in the Control Bar’s Tools module.
Figure 23.
The Tools module.
What if I already have a project that contains MIDI tracks?
If you already have a MIDI track that you would like to play through a software instrument, the steps
are a bit different.
Let's start by opening a sample project.
1. On the File menu, click Open.
2. Navigate to C:\Cakewalk Content\SONAR X3 [Producer or Studio]\Tutorial
Projects\Tutorial Projects.
3. Click on the file named Latin.cwp and click OK.
If you press Play, you are not likely to hear anything. That's because this project does not contain a
software synth for the MIDI tracks to play through. Since there are 11 tracks in this project, it would
be best to use one synth track and route them all to the same instrument. Some instruments, such
as the Cakewalk TTS-1 can output more than one type of sound. These instruments are known as
multi-timbral synths. They know what notes are played through each sound based on the MIDI
channel they are sent over. If you examine each track in this project in the Track Inspector or
Console view, you'll notice that each one is set to its own channel. No two tracks share the same
channel.
Let's insert the Cakewalk TTS-1.
1. Go to Insert > Soft Synths > Cakewalk TTS-1.
The Insert Synth Options dialog box appears.
2. In the Create These Tracks area, click First Synth Audio Output.
130
Tutorial 4 – Playing and recording software instruments
3. In the Open These Windows area, click Synth Property Page.
Note: If you would like a detailed explanation of each option, click Help.
4. Click OK.
A new synth track is inserted in your project.
On some computers, the tracks may play back through the TTS-1 at this point. However, on
computers that have hardware MIDI outputs available, you may need to specify the TTS-1 as each
track's output. Here's a fast way to do that:
1. Hold down the CTRL key and click each track to select them.
The tracks are highlighted to indicate they are selected.
2. Hold down the CTRL key and click any selected track’s Output control and select Cakewalk
TTS-1.
All selected tracks are assigned to the same output.
Press Play to play back the project. If you'd like to add your own track to play through the TTS-1,
click Insert menu and select MIDI Track. On your new MIDI track, set the output to Cakewalk TTS1. Remember, it needs to be on its own discreet MIDI channel. In this project, MIDI channels 1-11
are already used, so let's assign this track to channel 12 in the Track Inspector or Console view. You
can also select the sound via the track's Patch control. Then use one of the methods described
above to create MIDI data. You can also add MIDI data to your new track from the Browser. See
Tutorial 2 for details about the Browser. Another option is using the Staff view as an alternative to the
Piano Roll view. That will be covered in the next tutorial: Tutorial 5 - Working with music notation.
See also:
“Tutorial 1 – Creating, playing, and saving projects” on page 99
“Tutorial 2 – Using the Browser” on page 113
“Tutorial 3 – Recording vocals and musical instruments” on page 119
“Tutorial 5 – Working with music notation” on page 133
“Tutorial 6 – Editing your music” on page 143
“Tutorial 7 – Mixing and adding effects” on page 151
“Tutorial 8 – Working with video” on page 161
“Tutorial 9 – Exporting, CD burning and sharing” on page 171
Tutorial 4 – Playing and recording software instruments
131
132
Tutorial 4 – Playing and recording software instruments
Tutorial 5 – Working with music notation
A great way to compose in SONAR is by using the Staff view. The Staff pane displays MIDI note events
as musical notation. For some musicians, this may be the most familiar and comfortable view in which to
work. The Staff pane provides many features that make it easy for you to compose, edit, and print music.
You can add notes to your composition with simple point-and-click techniques.
This tutorial will introduce you to the tools and features that SONAR provides for working with notation.
Let’s start by opening the Staff view in a new project:
1. On the File menu, click New.
The New Project File dialog box appears.
2. Select the Normal template, specify a project name and save location, then click OK.
SONAR loads the new blank project.
3. Click the Insert menu and select MIDI Track to insert a new MIDI track.
4. Click on track 1 labeled Track 1.
5. On the Views menu, click Staff View.
The Staff view opens.
Next we need to configure the Staff view tools for the purpose of this tutorial:
1. Click the Staff view View menu, point to Display Resolution and select the smallest note value on
the submenu.
2. Click the Staff view View menu and disable the Fill Durations and Trim Durations options.
133
3. Select the Smart tool
in the Control Bar.
For this tutorial, we will also change the time signature to ¾, the key to G and the staff layout to
display a treble and bass clef.
1. On the Project menu, click Insert Meter/Key Change.
The Meter/Key Signature dialog box appears.
2. Change Beats per Measure to 3 and Key Signature to 1 Sharp (G), then click OK to close the
Meter/Key Signature dialog box.
3. Click the Staff view Edit menu and choose Layout.
The Staff View Layout dialog box appears.
4. In the Clef list, select Treble/Bass, then click OK to close the Staff View Layout dialog box.
The Staff view now looks like this:
134
Tutorial 5 – Working with music notation
Now that you know how to set up the Staff view, it's time to play! You can either record a MIDI track
in this project or manually add notes. The rest of this tutorial will provide you with a basic overview of
the notation tools. For more in depth information about all the features and functionality of the Staff
view, including using the Fretboard and the Lyrics view, see “Notation and lyrics” on page 1179.
Selecting the note value
In the Control Bar’s Tools module, click the Duration button and hold the mouse button pressed, then
select the desired note duration from the pop-up menu.
Figure 24.
The Tools module.
Adding a note
To add a note:
1. Select the Smart tool
or Freehand tool
in the Control Bar.
2. Do one of the following:
• With the Smart tool
• With the Freehand tool
, click where you want to draw a new note.
, click where you want to insert a new note
A note event is inserted.
Tutorial 5 – Working with music notation
135
Selecting notes
To select notes:
1. Select the Smart tool
or Select tool
in the Control Bar.
2. Do one of the following:
• To select a single note, click the note head.
• To select multiple adjacent notes, drag with the right mouse button to draw a rectangle around
the desired notes.
• To select discontiguous notes, hold down the CTRL key and click the desired notes.
Moving notes by time or pitch
To move notes:
1. Select the Smart tool
or Move tool
in the Control Bar.
2. Do one of the following:
• With the Smart tool
, position the pointer over the bottom half center of the note, then drag
the note to the desired location.
• With the Move tool
, drag the note or selection to the desired location.
Tip: When moving a note, hold down the SHIFT key to constrain vertical or horizontal movement,
depending on the direction you first move.
Copying notes
To copy notes:
1. Press and hold the CTRL key down while you click the desired note(s).
2. While still holding the CTRL key and the left mouse button, drag the note(s) to the desired
location, then release the mouse button.
The note(s) is copied.
136
Tutorial 5 – Working with music notation
Changing the duration of a note
1. Right click the note head to open the Note Properties dialog box.
2. In the Duration field, enter in the number of ticks you want for the note, then click OK to close
the Note Properties dialog box.
The following table shows the relationship between note durations and ticks (with the default
timebase of 960 ticks per quarter note).
Note
Duration in ticks
Whole
4:000
Half
2:000
Quarter
1:000
Eighth
480
Sixteenth
240
Thirty-second
120
Deleting a note
1. Select the Smart tool
or the Erase tool
in the Control Bar.
2. Do one of the following:
• With the Smart tool
, right-click a note to erase a single note, or keep the right mouse
button pressed and drag over notes to erase multiple notes.
• With the Erase tool
multiple notes.
, click a note to erase a single note, or drag over notes to erase
Tutorial 5 – Working with music notation
137
Adding lyrics
To add a lyric event below a note:
1. Select the Smart tool
or the Freehand tool
2. Click the Lyric button
in the Control Bar.
in the Staff view.
3. Position the pointer just below the note and click.
A box appears where lyrics can be typed.
4. Press the space bar to quickly jump to the next note.
Adding chord symbols
To add a chord symbol above a note:
1. Select the Smart tool
2. Click the Chord button
or the Freehand tool
in the Control Bar.
in the Staff view.
3. Position the pointer above the note you want to add the chord to and click.
A chord symbol is added above the note.
4. To change the chord properties or show a guitar chord grid, right-click the chord name.
The Chord Properties dialog box appears.
138
Tutorial 5 – Working with music notation
Adding expressions
1. Select the Smart tool
or the Freehand tool
2. Click the Expression button
in the Control Bar.
in the Staff view.
3. Position the pointer just below a note and click.
A box appears where expressions can be entered.
Adding a crescendo or decrescendo/diminuendo
1. Select the Smart tool
2. Click the Hairpin button
or the Freehand tool
in the Control Bar.
in the Staff view.
3. Position the pointer just below a note and click.
A hairpin event (crescendo or decrescendo) is inserted.
4. To change the hairpin type and duration, right-click the hairpin event.
The Hairpin Properties dialog box appears.
Note: Hairpin events are ornamental only and do not affect playback.
Tutorial 5 – Working with music notation
139
Adding pedal marks
1. Select the Smart tool
or the Freehand tool
2. Click the Pedal button
in the Control Bar.
in the Staff view.
3. Position the pointer below the staff and click.
Pedal down
and Pedal up
marks are inserted.
4. Click and drag to move the marks to a new time if needed.
See:
“Printing your notation” on page 140
Printing your notation
Once you are finished entering and editing notes you can print out the score or individual parts.
1. Select the MIDI track or tracks you want to print the notation for.
2. On the Views menu, click Staff View.
The Staff view opens.
3. On the Staff view Print menu, click Print Preview.
The Print Preview window opens, allowing you to see how the printed score will look.
4. To change the rastral size of the score, click Configure.
The Staff View Print Configure dialog box appears. For more information about the different
rastral sizes, see “Printing” on page 1216.
5. To print the score, click Print.
Tip: To change the title, composer and copyright information, select Project > Info to open the File
Info window.
140
Tutorial 5 – Working with music notation
See:
“Notation and lyrics” on page 1179
See also:
“Tutorial 1 – Creating, playing, and saving projects” on page 99
“Tutorial 2 – Using the Browser” on page 113
“Tutorial 3 – Recording vocals and musical instruments” on page 119
“Tutorial 4 – Playing and recording software instruments” on page 125
“Tutorial 6 – Editing your music” on page 143
“Tutorial 7 – Mixing and adding effects” on page 151
“Tutorial 8 – Working with video” on page 161
“Tutorial 9 – Exporting, CD burning and sharing” on page 171
Tutorial 5 – Working with music notation
141
142
Tutorial 5 – Working with music notation
Tutorial 6 – Editing your music
While working on your music, you are likely to find that editing is a major part of the song creation
process. Before people started making music on computers, all of the editing was done by cutting tape
with a razor blade and piecing it together. You can imagine how difficult it could become. In SONAR, you
can actually select a part of your music with the mouse and delete/copy/paste/move it all very easily. This
tutorial will introduce some of SONAR's tools for making some common edits and offer a few tips to make
it faster and more fun.
See:
“Selection” on page 144
“Moving clips” on page 146
“Splitting clips” on page 146
“Cropping clips” on page 147
“Undo and Redo” on page 143
Undo and Redo
While editing a project, you might make mistakes or experiment with an idea that doesn't produce the
desired results. SONAR has unlimited Undo for such occasions. You can undo one step at a time by
selecting Edit > Undo or by pressing CTRL+Z. You can also look at your edit history and select a time to
go back to. To do so, go to Edit > History, choose the edit you'd like to return to and click OK.
Note: When you close a project, the Undo history is erased.
If you change your mind and want to revert to the previous undo state, select Edit > Redo or press
CTRL+SHIFT+Z.
See:
“Selection” on page 144
“Moving clips” on page 146
“Splitting clips” on page 146
“Cropping clips” on page 147
143
Selection
Let's start by opening the tutorial project Cakewalk Audio Demo.cwb that we used in earlier
tutorials.
One of the most important things to understand in order to edit your music successfully is selection.
Once you become familiar with selecting, the rest is easy. There are two aspects of selection:
• Time Range
• Tracks
Let's say you'd like to delete the second measure of a certain track. The time range specifies that the
edit will need to occur between measures 2 and 3. The track selection specifies what track's clips will
be deleted, while leaving its surrounding tracks unchanged.
In order to edit clips, you must set the track’s Edit Filter control to Clips.
Figure 25.
Assign the track’s Edit Filter to Clips in order to edit clips with the global tools.
Let's explore some different ways to do this in a sample project. All of the tools described are
available in the Tools module in the Control Bar. For a complete description of each tool in the Tools
module, see “Tools” on page 441.
Figure 26.
The Tools module.
Note: If you would like to try both of the following methods, select Edit > Undo after completing
the first method. Doing so will revert the project to its previous state.
144
Tutorial 6 – Editing your music
Method 1:
1. Select the track that you want to delete measure 1 through measure 6 from. For this tutorial, let’s
use the track named GTR_Lead 1.
Tip: Click in the Tracks pane on the left, not the Clips pane on the right.
2. Drag in the time ruler from measure 1 through measure 6.
The selected time range is highlighted.
3. Press DELETE or select Edit > Delete.
Measures 1 through 6 are deleted from the selected track.
Method 2:
1. Select the Select tool
in the Control Bar.
2. Click in the center of the clip and drag to select the section you want to delete.
The selected section is highlighted.
3. Press DELETE or select Edit > Delete.
You might have noticed that you're only able to select full measures. What if you need to edit a
smaller amount of time? You'll need to turn off Snap To Grid. To do so, click the Snap to Grid
button
in the Control Bar’s Snap module. With this button disabled, you will be able to make
finer selections. You can also choose different Snap To Grid options in the Snap module.
See:
“Moving clips” on page 146
“Splitting clips” on page 146
“Cropping clips” on page 147
“Undo and Redo” on page 143
Tutorial 6 – Editing your music
145
Moving clips
Another common editing task is to move a selected part of a clip, or an entire clip around in a project.
If you understand selection, you're half way there. Let's undo the previous edit (go to Edit > Undo or
press CTRL+Z), and turn on Snap to Grid. If you changed the snap resolution, make sure you
change it back to Whole Note.
1. Select the section you want to move. Let's go back to the track named GTR_Lead 1 and select
measures 6 through 10.
2. With the Smart tool selected, click the top part of the selection and drag the clip to the desired
location. For this tutorial, let’s drag the selection to the bottom of the project and create a new
Audio track that contains the selected clip.
The Drag and Drop Options dialog box appears, which lets you specify what to do with any
existing data in the target location. You can either replace the existing data or blend the old and
new data.
See:
“Selection” on page 144
“Splitting clips” on page 146
“Cropping clips” on page 147
“Undo and Redo” on page 143
Splitting clips
In some cases, you might want to split a clip. As described later in this tutorial, it can be beneficial to
have clip borders at different points on a track. You can split a clip with the Smart tool
tool
or Split
.
To split a clip, do one of the following:
• With the Smart tool
, position the pointer where you want to split the clip, then hold down ALT
and click (or lasso to split a region).
• With the Split tool
146
, position the pointer where you want to split the clip, then click (or drag to
Tutorial 6 – Editing your music
split one or more clips at the mousedown and mouseup points).
Note: The Split tool obeys the Snap to Grid settings. If a split does not occur exactly where you
click, disable Snap to Grid and try again.
Tip: You can also press the S key to split the selected clip(s) at the current Now time.
For this tutorial, select the Split tool
, position the Now time at measure 10 in the track named
GTR_Lead1, then click to split the clip.
See:
“Selection” on page 144
“Moving clips” on page 146
“Cropping clips” on page 147
“Undo and Redo” on page 143
Cropping clips
You can crop a clip by using a gesture called slip editing. Slip editing lets you “roll out” the beginning
or the end of a clip to different places without changing the position of the music. Imagine that the
clips are “windows” that allow you to see and hear pieces of audio or MIDI. You can change the size
of that window so that less of the data is visible. If it's not visible, it won't be heard during playback.
The data still exists, so you can enlarge the “window” by slip editing the clip. The visible data will
then be audible.
Select the Smart tool
or Edit tool
in the Control Bar to use slip editing.
Now, if you point to the left or right clip edge, the cursor changes and you can drag the clip edge to a
new location.
Tutorial 6 – Editing your music
147
Fading clips
You can fade individual clips by using the Smart tool
or Edit tool
. Drag the upper left corner
of a clip to create a fade-in. Drag the upper right corner of a clip to create a fade-out.
To change the fade characteristics, right-click an existing fade and select the desired fade type from
the pop-up menu.
Tip: When cropping clips, you can choose to also move clip fades proportionally, or retain the original
fade position. To move the fade position, click the top three quarters of the clip edge when cropping.
To retain the clip fade position, click the bottom quarter of the clip edge when cropping. You can also
hold down the ALT key while cropping in order to move a clip fade.
This tutorial has shown you how to use different tools to shape your recordings into well-organized
and great sounding projects. The next step is mixing, which is covered in “Tutorial 7 – Mixing and
adding effects” on page 151.
See:
“Selection” on page 144
“Moving clips” on page 146
“Splitting clips” on page 146
“Undo and Redo” on page 143
148
Tutorial 6 – Editing your music
See also:
“Tutorial 1 – Creating, playing, and saving projects” on page 99
“Tutorial 2 – Using the Browser” on page 113
“Tutorial 3 – Recording vocals and musical instruments” on page 119
“Tutorial 4 – Playing and recording software instruments” on page 125
“Tutorial 5 – Working with music notation” on page 133
“Tutorial 7 – Mixing and adding effects” on page 151
“Tutorial 8 – Working with video” on page 161
“Tutorial 9 – Exporting, CD burning and sharing” on page 171
Tutorial 6 – Editing your music
149
150
Tutorial 6 – Editing your music
Tutorial 7 – Mixing and adding effects
Mixing is an important part of recording that can really help the music you create in SONAR sound its
best. Mixing involves placing different instruments and sounds in layers of the frequency spectrum,
adjusting levels so that tracks blend nicely, spreading them across the stereo field and adding effects
where appropriate.
There are many important decisions to make when mixing, things that are sometimes not considered
while writing a song. The choices you make can have a major effect on how pleasurable the listening
experience is for your audience.
In this tutorial, we'll discuss some general guidelines. But, it's important to remember that there are no
rules. This is another artistic stage of song creation.
We'll start by opening the MixingTutorial project:
1. Go to File > Open and select the file named MixingTutorial.cwb.
Note: Tutorial files are located in the C:\Cakewalk Content\SONAR X3 [Producer or
Studio]\Tutorial Projects\Mixing Tutorial folder, by default. If you specified
another location during installation, navigate to the tutorial folder you specified during
installation.
2. Go to File > Save As and save it under a new name. This way, you can save your work without
overwriting the original, in case you'd like to start over.
See:
“Volume and pan” on page 152
“Adding effects (FX)” on page 153
“Using Automation” on page 158
151
Volume and pan
Adjusting volume and pan is always a good place to start when mixing. One of the biggest benefits
of SONAR's Console view is that you can easily see the volume and pan controls for many tracks
simultaneously, in addition to large meters. Some people also enjoy working in the Console view
because it doesn't offer a graphical representation of what the music “looks like”. Since the final
outcome will be an audio file, the listener will not be distracted by the visual cues that are shown in
the project's Track view. You may find that you are better able to focus on the actual sound when not
seeing the clips.
To open the Console view
• Do one of the following:
• Click Views > Console View.
• Press ALT+2.
Here, we'll be shaping the song's foundation. If you listen to the project as it is, you'll probably notice
that it sounds “muddy”. This usually happens because all of the instruments are fighting each other
for space in the frequency spectrum and stereo field. They're also all trying to be heard at the same
level in the same location.
Normally, when recording a track, it is common to try to get a relatively loud signal. This is done to
achieve the best level, knowing that you will eventually adjust the final levels during the mixing
stage.
• Some people like to begin “mixing” by turning down every track and then gradually turning up one
track at a time, starting with the rhythm section. Begin by increasing the volume of the bass drum
to the desired level. Continue with the snare, the rest of the drums and finally the bass guitar,
moving on in order of importance. If there was a lead vocal in the song, that would come last, so
that it sits on top of the instrumental foundation you have established.
Other people approach mixing the opposite way, turning things down a bit one at a time. If one
method doesn't seem more appealing than the other, try both to see which one is more comfortable
for you.
Important: Pay close attention to the master bus meter while mixing. You never want the meter
to reach the very top, which will result in undesirable audible noise. This is called clipping.
152
Tutorial 7 – Mixing and adding effects
Note: You can find the Mains meters on the far right side in the Console view. If you don’t see
the Mains meters, click the Console view Strips menu and make sure Mains is selected.
The next thing we'll try is panning. As with mixing in general, there are no rules when it comes to
panning. Be creative, trying different ideas to see how they sound. One important thing to consider is
that when you pan two tracks that share the same frequency range away from each other they will
become clearer. This especially applies to instruments that have been double-tracked. Try it with the
two tracks labeled Cymbals Left and Cymbals Right. Notice how you can hear more definition and
detail in the two tracks as you pan them away from each other. When panning double-tracked
instruments, try to avoid panning them all the way to the left or right. Doing so may cause the tracks
to sound too “separated”, which can take away from the fullness of the sound.
See:
“Adding effects (FX)” on page 153
“Using Automation” on page 158
Adding effects (FX)
At this point, you should have a basic mix. Everything is generally where you want it to be and it's
time to use some audio effects to tweak it all to perfection. Effects placed directly on an audio track
are called inserts.
Choose an audio track you would like to start with:
1. In the Console view, locate the effects bin for the track you’d like to work with. If you don’t see the
effects bin, click the Console view Modules menu and make sure FX Bin is selected.
2. Right-click the effects bin to open the pop-up menu.
Tutorial 7 – Mixing and adding effects
153
3. Point to Audio FX, then point to Cakewalk or Sonitus:fx and choose any one of the available
effects.
The selected effect is inserted into the track’s effects bin. Experiment with the controls on the
plug-in while the music is playing back. You will hear noticeable changes to the sound.
4. Right-click on the effect in the effects bin and choose Delete to remove the effect.
Each of the effect plug-ins listed is designed to change the sound in some specific way. Here's a
quick list of some of the included plug-ins and what they're typically used for:
Compressor/Gate. This plug-in affects the loudness of the sound. It can limit how loud a sound
can get. It can also limit how soft a sound can get before it's completely turned off.
EQ. EQ can accentuate or turn down a certain frequency range in a sound. For example, if you
have an unwanted high-pitched buzz on one of your tracks, an EQ may be able to turn that high
frequency down without affecting the sound of the instrument.
Reverb. Reverb creates an artificial space. It produces echoes that are similar to the natural
echoes that happen when a sound bounces off the walls in a room.
Delay. Delay plug-ins have the ability to create an echo. However, it's typically more distinct than
that of a reverb. It makes a sound repeat, often in a rhythmic, musical manner.
These are the effects we'll be focusing on in this tutorial. However, other effects are available and
you should experiment with each one to discover how they can be used in your mixes. To get online
Help for a particular plug-in, simply click one of its controls and press the F1 key on your computer
keyboard.
Compression
While adjusting track levels in a song, you might notice that some tracks are too dynamic.
Sometimes they're too loud, other times too soft. In most modern music, the important elements in a
mix are focused in a specific volume range. This is done with a compressor.
The purpose of a compressor is to limit the dynamic range of music or sound. Compression will
make the loud parts of the signal quieter, resulting in a more or less even level. That even level can
then be increased to fit more specifically in the mix.
Many compressors have an option to allow that loud peak to remain untouched for a certain time,
which can add some “punch”.
Let's try it on the bass drum:
1. Add the Compressor plug-in to the track labeled Kick.
2. Adjust the Threshold. The Threshold value represents the dB level at which compression starts
to take place.
3. Adjust Attack. The Attack value represents the time the compressor takes to respond to an
increase in the input audio's level once the threshold level has been reached.
4. Adjust the level to the desired output volume.
This approach can be applied to any track you like. It's especially useful when trying to get vocals to
stand out in a mix.
154
Tutorial 7 – Mixing and adding effects
Equalization
Each audio track has a dedicated, built-in equalizer (EQ). It is located just above the effects bin in
both the Inspector and in the Console View.
Figure 27.
ProChannel EQ module (Producer and Studio only).
A
A. Equalizer graph
Figure 28.
Per-track EQ (SONAR X3 base version only).
A
A. EQ plot
One of the primary uses for EQ is to prevent different instruments from stepping on each other in the
frequency spectrum. One instrument might be intended for a certain frequency range, but extends
into another instrument's frequency range. This can easily happen with drums and bass. If you turn
down the overlapping frequency range for one of the instruments, it will allow the other instrument to
stand out better in the mix.
Let's give it a try:
1. Solo the tracks named Tension Climbing and Chirppy Synth.
2. Add the Sonitus:fx Equalizer plug-in to the Tension Climbing track.
The Sonitus:fx Equalizer interface appears.
3. Grab one of the numbered nodes and drag it around. Boost the selected band until you find the
frequency range that interferes with Chirppy Synth. When you find it, turn down the selected
band by dragging the node downward.
Tip: Try to cut the band around 1kHz.
Experiment with the other controls on the EQ to get the best possible results. As with the
compressor plug-in, this approach can be applied to any track you like.
Tutorial 7 – Mixing and adding effects
155
Reverb and Delay
Next, we'll add some space to the song. This is done by using time-based effects.
The first thing we'll do is add a delay effect. A delay effect can really enhance an instrument. In our
tutorial project, we will add the Delay effect to the track name Chirppy Synth, which sounds very dry
and lifeless. Applying a delay might give it more depth.
1. Add the Sonitus:fx Delay plug-in to Chirppy Synth.
2. Configure the controls as follows:
• Tempo Sync = Host
• Factor = 1/2 (set for both Left & Right channels)
This is a good starting point. Sometimes the best way to familiarize yourself with a new effect plug-in
is to dig in and start tweaking. Next, we'll apply some reverb to the project. Think of a reverb effect
as an artificial room. We could add a separate reverb to each track, but when multiple reverbs are
running at the same time it can sound “cloudy”. This might be because our ears are used to hearing
sounds bounce of walls naturally. A reverb on each track would sound like you have one instrument
in one room, another instrument in another room, and so on.
Instead, we will add a single reverb effect to a bus, then send each track to that bus, at varying
levels. This is where SONAR's advanced mixing environment offers a lot of flexibility. We will add a
control to each track, which adjusts how loud a copy of the track's sound is sent to the bus. This will
sound more natural since it's similar to the behavior of an actual acoustic space. All of the different
sounds can interact with each other in the “virtual room” we're creating with the reverb.
Note: If you are unfamiliar with the term “bus” see “Stereo buses” on page 892.
Follow these steps to create your reverb send from the Console view:
1. We want to add this send to all tracks, so go to Edit > Select > All to select all tracks.
2. Right-click on one of your tracks in the Sends section of the strip and choose Insert Send
Assistant. If you don’t see the Sends section in your Console view, click the Console view
Modules menu and make sure Sends/Bank/Patch is selected.
The Insert Send Assistant appears.
3. Configure the Send Assistant as follows:
• Click New Bus. This will create a new reverb bus instead of routing the tracks to an existing
bus.
• Select Stereo
• In the Name box, type Reverb.
• Click Choose Effect and select Audio Effects > Sonitus:fx > Reverb.
• Make sure Pre Fader is not selected.
• Select the Show Effects Property Page check box.
• In the Bus Output list, select Master.
156
Tutorial 7 – Mixing and adding effects
4. Click OK.
The Reverb property page appears.
5. Set the Reverb control to 0.0 dB and the Dry control to -Inf.
Notice that a send control named Reverb has been added to each track. To enable or disable a
send, click the On/Off button located on each track’s Send control.
Tutorial 7 – Mixing and adding effects
157
When a send is enabled, you will hear the reverb effect during playback. To adjust how much reverb
is applied to each track, use the send's LEVEL control.
Enable the send control for each track that you want reverb on. You'll probably want at least a little
reverb on every track except for the kick drum and the bass guitar.
See:
“Volume and pan” on page 152
“Using Automation” on page 158
Using Automation
Another feature that is important to mixing is automation. Automation lets you record changes to
almost any parameter in SONAR, including track parameters, effects, synths and buses. SONAR
makes this very easy.
1. Click a track's Write Automation button
2. Press Play
to enable automation writing for that track.
to start playback.
3. During playback, simply make the changes to the parameters in realtime, using either your
mouse or a control surface.
4. To disable automation writing, stop playback and click the track's Write Automation button
again.
When you play back, the parameters will update automatically.
Automation allows you to make gradual or sudden changes to make your song more dynamic. For
example, in the tutorial project, you might find that Whiney Synth should become lower in volume at
measure 25, when the drums and bass change. Try it:
1. Click the Write Automation button
2. Click Play
on the Whiney Synth track.
or press SPACEBAR to start playback.
3. At measure 25, turn the track volume down to the desired level.
4. At measure 33, turn the track volume back up.
5. Press Stop
158
to stop playback.
Tutorial 7 – Mixing and adding effects
6. Disable Write Automation by clicking the
button again.
7. Press Play
and notice how the track volume changes automatically. Repeat this process
with any other automation you feel the project needs. For more information, see “Automation” on
page 1101.
That concludes this tutorial. But don't stop here. Continue to experiment by adding different effects,
adding loops through the Media Browser view, etc.
Be creative and listen closely to the mix details in your favorite songs and albums. It's sure to
provide you with inspiration for your own projects. There are also many books available on the topic,
as well as thousands of add-on plug-ins that can expand your arsenal of FX. For more information,
visit www.cakewalk.com.
Tips: www.cakewalk.com/Support
Videos: www.cakewalk.com/CakeTV
See also:
“Tutorial 1 – Creating, playing, and saving projects” on page 99
“Tutorial 2 – Using the Browser” on page 113
“Tutorial 3 – Recording vocals and musical instruments” on page 119
“Tutorial 4 – Playing and recording software instruments” on page 125
“Tutorial 5 – Working with music notation” on page 133
“Tutorial 6 – Editing your music” on page 143
“Tutorial 8 – Working with video” on page 161
“Tutorial 9 – Exporting, CD burning and sharing” on page 171
Tutorial 7 – Mixing and adding effects
159
160
Tutorial 7 – Mixing and adding effects
Tutorial 8 – Working with video
SONAR allows you to add music and sound to your videos. This tutorial will guide you through the
basics of working with video inside SONAR. If you are new to SONAR, it is highly recommended you
review “Tutorial 1 – Creating, playing, and saving projects” on page 99 before going any further.
See:
“Importing video” on page 162
“Working with markers” on page 166
“Exporting your video” on page 168
161
Importing video
Before you can start working with video, you first need to import a video file. Let’s try this out with a
new project.
1. On the File menu, click New to open the New Project File dialog box.
2. Select the Normal template, give your project a name and then click OK.
If you are having trouble with this, please refer to “Tutorial 1 – Creating, playing, and saving
projects” on page 99.
3. On the File menu, point to Import and select Video.
The Import Video dialog box appears.
Let’s explore some of the options in the Import Video dialog box.
The first thing you will notice is that this dialog box is very similar to the Open dialog box that was
discussed in Tutorial 1. The Import Video dialog box functions in very much the same way with the
exception of two sections.
162
Tutorial 8 – Working with video
Importing video
First, outlined in the preceding image is the drop-down box Files of type. Making a selection here
will determine which video formats are displayed in the dialog box. SONAR supports the following
digital video formats:
• Windows Media (.wmv and .asf)
• Video For Windows (.avi)
• MPEG Video (.mpg)
• QuickTime Video (.mov)
The file we are interested in for this tutorial is a Windows Media file, so let’s select Windows Media
(*.wmv, *.asf) in the Files of type list.
Next, outlined in the above image you will see the File info area on the left and three options on the
right. Let’s review what each of these options do.
Option
What it does
Show file info
When selected, this tells SONAR to display video information about the
selected file in the File info area of the dialog box.
Import Audio Stream
Select this option if you want to import the video file’s embedded audio
into a new audio track in SONAR.
Import as mono tracks
Select this option if you want to import the video file's embedded audio
data as one or more mono tracks.
Table 9.
For now, let’s leave the Import Audio Stream and Show file info check boxes selected.
Just as you would with the Open dialog box, navigate to the following location:
C:\Cakewalk\SONAR X3 [Producer or Studio]\Tutorial Projects\Video Tutorial
Locate and import the file named Boarding.wmv. You can open it by either double-clicking on it or
highlighting it and then clicking the Open button.
Notice that SONAR imported any audio that is a part of the video as well. If the video does not have
any audio already associated with it, then SONAR will create a silent audio track like in our example.
You should now see the Boarding video in the Video view as well as the Video Thumbnail pane in
the Track view.
Note: If you do not see any video frames in the Video Thumbnails pane, click the Show/Hide
Video Thumbnails button
Tutorial 8 – Working with video
Importing video
in the Video Thumbnails track strip.
163
What if I don’t see the Video Thumbnail pane or Video view?
To show or hide the Video Thumbnail pane, drag the splitter bar that separates the Video Thumbnail
pane from the Clips pane.
To restore the Video Thumbnail pane, point the mouse pointer over the splitter bar (the mouse
pointer will look like
), then drag the splitter bar down to restore and resize the Video Thumbnail
pane to your liking. You can also press the V key to show or hide the Video Thumbnail pane.
If you closed the Video view, or if it did not open automatically when you imported the video, you can
open it by selecting Views > Video or pressing ALT+SHIFT+2.
Changing the video properties
SONAR allows you to make some useful changes to a video's settings for film scoring purposes. To
access these settings, simply right-click in the Video view and choose Video Properties from the
pop-up menu to open the Video Properties dialog box.
The Video Properties dialog box has three tabs: the Video Settings tab, the Info tab and the
Render Quality tab. For detailed information about all of these options and settings, see “Video
Properties dialog” on page 1902. For this tutorial, we are only going to look at the tools on the Video
Settings tab.
164
Tutorial 8 – Working with video
Importing video
There are three options on this tab that are very important to understand and extremely helpful when
working with video. Let's take a closer look at them.
Option
What it does
Start Time
The time in your SONAR project at which you want the video file to start playing.
Trim-in Time
The time in the video file at which you want video playback to start, this is useful if
you don’t want to see the opening credits or the first few scenes. This is expressed
in SMPTE time code.
Trim-out Time
The time in the video file at which you want video playback to stop, this is also
expressed in SMPTE time code.
Table 10.
Let’s change the Start Time value to measure 2. To do this, enter the number 2 in the Start Time
box.
Now, click the RTZ button
in the transport and then click Play. Notice how the video doesn’t
start playing until measure 2 in your project.
See:
“Working with markers” on page 166
“Exporting your video” on page 168
Tutorial 8 – Working with video
Importing video
165
Working with markers
When syncing up audio events to film cues or video, it is common to use markers. Markers are a
powerful feature in SONAR that helps to simplify the task of identifying major events in a song or
video. They can be used to clarify where a verse or chorus begins in a rock tune or, in the case of
film scoring, they can be used to identify hit points (points in the film where you want a musical event
to synchronize with a visual event). Before we get started on this next exercise, return to the Video
Properties dialog box and click the Video Settings tab. Set Start Time to 1:01:000, Trim-in Time
to 00:00:00:00 and Trim-out Time to 00:00:44:23.
Let’s say we want our music to start at the beginning of the video right when the sun comes out. This
occurs about 4 seconds into the movie. Taking a closer look, this happens at 4 seconds and 10
frames into the clip, which, expressed in SMPTE time code, is 00:00:04:10.
There are several ways to add markers in SONAR:
• Place the Now Time at the location where you would like a marker, then select Project > Insert
Marker or press M.
• Click the Insert Marker
button in the Control Bar’s Markers module.
• Click the Add Marker button in the Markers view.
Let’s open the Markers view by selecting Views > Markers.
The Markers view is very handy when working with events in a film. The first thing we want to do is
add a new marker to the project, indicating the start of the project. To do this, click the Insert
Markers button
166
to open the Marker dialog box.
Tutorial 8 – Working with video
Working with markers
From this dialog box, you can do a lot of very important things. First, let’s name this marker by typing
Intro in the Name field.
Next, select the Lock to SMPTE (Real World) Time check box. This option is very important when
working with video. If a marker is not locked to SMPTE time, its position in relation to events on the
video will change with tempo and meter changes in the project.
You might also notice that the Time value changes to the SMPTE format after you selected the
check box. This determines where the location of the marker will be. We know in the video that the
sun comes out at about four seconds and ten frames into the video. Let’s set the Time value to
00:00:04:10.
Click OK to insert the marker and close the Marker dialog box. You can place as many markers as
you need for a project to sync up all of your events. The Markers view will now display the marker
you just created, with the name Intro assigned to it. The Marker view toolbar contains the following
commands that apply to selected markers.
Control
Description
Click the Delete Marker button to delete the currently selected marker.
Click the Change Marker Properties button to open the Marker dialog box for the selected
marker. This is useful if you want to change the location of a marker.
Click the Lock/Unlock Marker button to lock or unlock the marker to SMTPE time.
Table 11.
Close the Markers view now and take a look at the time ruler in SONAR, which spans the top of the
Clips pane in the Track view. You will notice there is now a flag named Intro indicating where your
new marker is in the project.
See:
“Importing video” on page 162
“Exporting your video” on page 168
Tutorial 8 – Working with video
Working with markers
167
Exporting your video
Once you have finished with all of your music and have your video synced up as you would like it,
you’ll want to mix it down to a video file that you can share with the world.
1. Select everything in the project that you want to export. If you want to export the entire project,
simply select Edit > Select > All or press CTRL+A. On the File menu, point to Export and click
Video.
The Export Video dialog box opens. You will notice this is very similar to both the Save As and
Export Audio dialogs that were explored in Tutorial 1 and Tutorial 9.
2. Similar to saving project files, you will first want to give your video a name by typing one into the
File name field.
168
Tutorial 8 – Working with video
Exporting your video
3. Choose the desired video format by selecting it from the Save as type list.
Clicking the Encoding Options button at the bottom will allow you to explore some advanced
settings for your video. From this dialog box, you will be able to change the quality and size of
your video. This is particularly important if you plan to upload your video to the web. Some
codecs work better than others and are more appropriate for different scenarios. Click the Help
button in this dialog box for more specific details about different formats.
The Audio Mixdown Options button will bring up settings specific to the audio in your project.
Click the Help button for detailed instructions on how to use these settings.
4. Specify the location you want to save the file to and click Save to export it.
See also:
“Tutorial 1 – Creating, playing, and saving projects” on page 99
“Tutorial 2 – Using the Browser” on page 113
“Tutorial 3 – Recording vocals and musical instruments” on page 119
“Tutorial 4 – Playing and recording software instruments” on page 125
“Tutorial 5 – Working with music notation” on page 133
“Tutorial 6 – Editing your music” on page 143
“Tutorial 7 – Mixing and adding effects” on page 151
“Tutorial 9 – Exporting, CD burning and sharing” on page 171
Tutorial 8 – Working with video
Exporting your video
169
170
Tutorial 8 – Working with video
Exporting your video
Tutorial 9 – Exporting, CD burning and
sharing
Once your SONAR project is complete, you will want to share it with the world or burn a CD. SONAR
offers many tools to help you do this. In this tutorial, we are going to explore some of the basics of these
tools.
Before we get started, let’s open one of the example audio projects included with SONAR. If you have
your own project that already contains audio, you can load that instead. However, your screen will look
different from the images in this tutorial.
1. On the File menu, click Open.
The Open dialog box appears.
2. In the Go to Folder list, select Template Files and then open the Tutorials folder.
3. Browse to the project named SONAR_AudioDemo.cwb and click Open to load the project.
Note: You may have to rename the file if you saved it with the same name during Tutorial 1.
Now that you have opened the demo project (or your own audio project), click the Play button
or
press SPACEBAR listen to it. If you do not hear any audio, review the steps in Tutorial 1 to ensure
SONAR and your audio device are configured correctly.
Cakewalk Project Files are different from the audio you hear on a CD in that they are often multi-track. In
this example, you will notice that there are four audio tracks. In order to burn this mix to a CD or prepare
it for distribution, we need to export or mix it down to a stereo track.
First, we need to click File > Export > Audio.
This will bring us to the Export Audio dialog box. This has many useful functions. Let’s explore some of
them in detail.
171
You should notice that the top half of this window is very similar to the Open and Save dialogs that
were discussed in “Tutorial 1 – Creating, playing, and saving projects” on page 99. This is used to
navigate to locations on your computer’s hard drive and tell SONAR where you want to store the
exported audio.
172
Tutorial 9 – Exporting, CD burning and sharing
For this Tutorial, we are only going to explore some of the more common settings. If you would like
to read about all of the options and settings click the Help button.
Control
Function
Channel Format
Specifies if the audio should be exported as stereo or mono.
Sample Rate
Allows you to set the sample rate of your export. 44100 Hz is used for CD
quality audio.
Bit-Depth
Allows you to set the bit-depth of your export. 16-bit is used for CD quality
and 24-bit is often used for DVD quality audio.
Send with Gobbler
Select this option if you want to share the exported audio on the cloudbased Gobbler service. For details, see “Sharing and backing up your
projects on Gobbler” on page 1089.
Table 12.
To burn an audio CD of your music
1. Click File > Export > Audio to open the Export Audio dialog box.
2. In the Channel Format list, select Stereo.
3. In the Sample Rate list, select 44100.
4. In the Bit-Depth list, select 16.
5. Enter a name for you mix in the File name box.
6. In the File type list, select Wave.
7. Specify where you want to save the file. Make note of this location, because you will need to use
it later.
8. Click Export.
A progress bar appears across the bottom of SONAR’s screen while a CD quality audio file is
exported. When the progress bar disappears, SONAR has finished exporting your project.
Now we need to burn our mix to a CD. SONAR features a powerful built-in CD burning application
that can do this for us. Let’s open Audio Creator LE and briefly explore its features and how to use it.
See:
“Burning an audio CD” on page 174
“Uploading audio to SoundCloud” on page 175
Tutorial 9 – Exporting, CD burning and sharing
173
Burning an audio CD
Select Utilities > Burn Audio CD to open the Audio CD Burner dialog box.
Simply browse to the audio files you want to burn and click the Add Track button. You can also drag
audio files into the Burner track list.
Note: Any files that are not in 16 bit, 44.1kHz wav files will automatically be converted to the
proper CD format.
Depending on the type of blank CD you are using, you can fit up to 80 minutes of audio on one CD.
Make note of the Space Available and Space Used fields. These will let you know how many more
tracks you can fit on your CD. For the best compatibility with most consumer CD players, you should
use a CD-R disc. CD-RW discs, while compatible with some newer CD players, may not play back in
all systems.
Once you have finished adding all the songs you would like to burn to a CD, the final step is to burn
your disc. To do so, do the following:
1. Insert the writable CD into the CD-R drive.
The drive containing the writable CD should automatically be detected. If for some reason it isn’t
detected, manually select the drive letter of your CD Burner from the Target Drive drop-down
list.
2. Click Burn CD.
174
Tutorial 9 – Exporting, CD burning and sharing
If you want to share your music online
SONAR features a powerful upload utility powered by the online service SoundCloud.
See:
“Uploading audio to SoundCloud” on page 175
“Uploading your songs to YouTube” on page 178
“Troubleshooting” on page 1087
Uploading audio to SoundCloud
SONAR lets you easily mix down and upload the current project directly to SoundCloud, or you can
choose to upload an existing audio file.
Cakewalk SoundCloud lets you upload one audio file at a time. Multiple audio files can be uploaded
directly from the SoundCloud web site.
SONAR checks to see if there is an active Internet connection before attempting to export and
upload files to SoundCloud.
Tip: By default, Cakewalk SoundCloud lets you upload either a .wav file or an .mp3 file. If you want
to upload a different audio format, first use the File > Export > Audio command to export to the
desired format, then go to Utilities > Share with SoundCloud and select the exported file.
To share the current project with SoundCloud
1. Select the audio track(s) you want to share with SoundCloud.
2. Go to File > Export > Audio to open the Export Audio dialog box.
3. In the Files of type list, select one of the following:
• SoundCloud - CD Quality. Creates a 16-bit 44.1kHz .wav file.
• SoundCloud - MP3. Creates a 256kBit/s .mp3 file.
• SoundCloud - FLAC. FLAC is a royalty-free high quality lossless audio compression codec.
Files compressed with FLAC can be 30-50% smaller than the original wav file and, unlike
MP3, there is no loss of audio quality.
4. Under Bounce Settings, select the desired settings, such as channel format, sample rate and
bit depth.
5. Enter a name in the File name box.
6. Click Export.
7. SONAR exports the selected audio to the specified format, then launches Cakewalk SoundCloud
(see “The Cakewalk SoundCloud interface” on page 1078). In Cakewalk SoundCloud, the Title,
Artwork and File Location fields are pre-populated.
8. Specify the desired settings in Cakewalk SoundCloud. All tags are remembered so you don’t
have to re-enter the same information the next time you upload another song.
Tutorial 9 – Exporting, CD burning and sharing
175
9. Click Share.
The Share with SoundCloud dialog box appears and shows a progress bar along with the
name of the file that is being uploaded. To cancel the upload, click the Cancel button.
The Upload Successful dialog box appears when the file has been uploaded successfully. Click
the displayed link to view the uploaded file on SoundCloud.com.
The Upload Failed dialog box appears if the upload is not successful. There are various reasons
why an upload may have failed. For troubleshooting help, click the Help button or see
“Troubleshooting” on page 1087.
Note: By default, Cakewalk SoundCloud lets you upload either a .wav file or an .mp3 file. If you
want to upload a different audio format, first use the File > Export > Audio command to export
to the desired format, then go to Utilities > Share with SoundCloud and select the exported
file. SoundCloud supports the following file formats; WAV, MP3, MP3, OGG, FLAC, AIFF and
AAC.
To share existing audio files with SoundCloud
1. Go to Utilities > Share with SoundCloud to open Cakewalk SoundCloud.
2. Click the Browse button
and select the audio file you want to upload. SoundCloud supports
MP3, WAVE, FLAC, OGG, AIFF, MP2 and AAC files.
3. Specify the desired settings in Cakewalk SoundCloud.
4. Click Share.
The Share with SoundCloud dialog box appears and shows a progress bar along with the
name of the file that is being uploaded. To cancel the upload, click the Cancel button.
The Upload Successful dialog box appears when the file has been uploaded successfully. Click
the displayed link to view the uploaded file on SoundCloud.
The Upload Failed dialog box appears if the upload is not successful. There are various reasons
why an upload may have failed. For troubleshooting help, click the Help button or see
“Troubleshooting” on page 1087.
To share your music on Facebook and Twitter
When you upload a song to SoundCloud, you can choose to also send automatic “push” notifications
to your linked Facebook and/or Twitter accounts. You must configure your Facebook and/or Twitter
setting using the account management tools at SoundCloud.com first before being able to share on
Facebook and/or Twitter.
To link your Facebook and/or Twitter account(s), click the corresponding Setup link in Cakewalk
SoundCloud.
To include a short message with the push notification, enter text (up to 119 characters, no HTML) in
the Message field. If this field is empty, the text in the Description field will accompany the song
post.
To send push notifications to your Facebook account, select the Share on Facebook check box.
176
Tutorial 9 – Exporting, CD burning and sharing
To send push notifications to your Twitter account, select the Share on Twitter check box.
Note: You can not share a track on Facebook or Twitter if the track is private.
Figure 29.
Cakewalk SoundCloud sharing options
A
B
C
A. Message B. Share on Facebook (click Setup to configure) C. Share on Twitter (click Setup to configure)
Note: If you have multiple Facebook and/or Twitter accounts that you would like to send push
notifications to, you can link to multiple Facebook and Twitter accounts via the account
management tools at SoundCloud.com.
See:
“Sharing your songs on SoundCloud” on page 1077
“The Cakewalk SoundCloud interface” on page 1078
“Troubleshooting” on page 1087
Tutorial 9 – Exporting, CD burning and sharing
177
Uploading your songs to YouTube
You can publish audio and video directly to YouTube from within SONAR.
You must have an existing YouTube account before you can use this feature. If you do not already
have a YouTube account, you can sign up for a free account at www.youtube.com.
To publish audio to YouTube
1. Open the SONAR project you want to publish to YouTube.
2. Go to File > Export > Audio.
3. In the Files of type list, select YouTube Publish.
4. Enter a file name in the File name box.
5. Click Export.
Cakewalk YouTube Publisher opens.
6. Enter the required settings in Cakewalk YouTube Publisher (see “Cakewalk YouTube Publisher
interface” on page 179), then click Upload.
To publish video to YouTube
1. Open the SONAR project you want to publish to YouTube.
2. Go to File > Export > Video.
3. In the Files of type list, select YouTube Publish.
4. Enter a file name in the File name box.
5. Click Export.
Cakewalk YouTube Publisher opens.
6. Enter the required settings in Cakewalk YouTube Publisher (see “Cakewalk YouTube Publisher
interface” on page 179), then click Upload.
178
Tutorial 9 – Exporting, CD burning and sharing
Cakewalk YouTube Publisher interface
Figure 30.
Cakewalk YouTube Publisher
Cakewalk YouTube Publisher contains the following controls:
• Account (required). Enter your YouTube account name or e-mail address.
• Password.
Enter your YouTube account password.
• Save Login Credentials.
settings for future use.
Select this check box to remember the Account and Password
• Title (required). Enter a name for the video.
• Description. Type a description of the video.
• Private. Enable this option if you want your video to be private. A public video can be viewed by
anybody, while a private video can only be seen by you and up to 50 other people who you invite
to view the video. A private video will not appear on your channel, search results, or playlists and
will be invisible to other users.
Tutorial 9 – Exporting, CD burning and sharing
179
• Video preview image. The preview image shows a frame of the video. If you are uploading an
audio-only project, you can drag an image to the preview display in order to load a new image.
• Load Image (Only for audio export). When uploading an audio-only project, you can load a
static image to be used for video frames. This option is unavailable when uploading video
projects.
• Test Video. Click to show a preview of the video in the default media player.
• Upload.
Upload the video to YouTube.
• Cancel. Cancel the operation and close Cakewalk YouTube Publisher.
Note: If you use Google two-step verification, you may need to assign Cakewalk YouTube
Publisher an “Application Specific Password”. For details, see https://support.google.com/mail/
answer/1173270?hl=en.
See:
“Preparing audio for distribution” on page 963
“Export Audio dialog” on page 1725
“Exporting your video” on page 168
“Exporting video” on page 256
“Video playback, import, and export” on page 251
See also:
“Tutorial 1 – Creating, playing, and saving projects” on page 99
“Tutorial 2 – Using the Browser” on page 113
“Tutorial 3 – Recording vocals and musical instruments” on page 119
“Tutorial 4 – Playing and recording software instruments” on page 125
“Tutorial 5 – Working with music notation” on page 133
“Tutorial 6 – Editing your music” on page 143
“Tutorial 7 – Mixing and adding effects” on page 151
“Tutorial 8 – Working with video” on page 161
180
Tutorial 9 – Exporting, CD burning and sharing
Controlling playback
When you play your SONAR project, you have full control over the tempo or speed of playback,
which tracks are played, which sound cards or other devices are used to produce the sound, and
what the tracks sound like. You can access all of the playback functions from the Control Bar (see
“Control Bar overview” on page 537).
SONAR’s multi-MIDI enhancements give you the ability to play multiple synths or tracks from a
single keyboard or controller, or let multiple performers play the same or different tracks. You have
total control over MIDI echo (MIDI echo refers to where MIDI input signals are sent once SONAR
receives them).
Note: SONAR has a button called the Audio Engine button
in the Control Bar’s Transport
module, which you click to stop any feedback you may experience if there is a loop somewhere
in your mixer setup. Whenever you play a project, SONAR automatically enables the audio
engine.
See also:
“The Now time and how to use it” on page 182
“Using the Transport, Markers, Punch and Loop modules” on page 195
“Controlling the transport” on page 190
“Track-by-track playback” on page 200
“Changing track settings” on page 209
“Video playback, import, and export” on page 251
“Locating missing audio” on page 265
“Controlling live MIDI playback—MIDI echo” on page 241
“Local control” on page 244
“Playing files in sequence with the Play List” on page 245
181
The Now time and how to use it
Every project has a current time, known as the “Now time” on page 2055, which keeps track of
where you are in a project. The Now time appears as a vertical line in the Track view and is
displayed in the Transport module in the Control Bar (see “Transport module” on page 547).
Figure 31.
The Transport module in the Control Bar.
A
B
C
A. Current Now time (click to cycle through the available display formats) B. Position C. Meter
The Transport module can show the Now time in several formats. Click the time display to toggle
between the following time formats:
• MBT. Display time as Measure:Beat:Tick.
• HMSF. Display time as Hour:Minute:Second:Frame. This format is also referred to as SMPTE
time.
• Milliseconds. Display time in milliseconds.
• Samples. Display time in samples.
The measure, beat, and tick number (MBT) identifies the Now time in musical time units. Ticks are
subdivisions of quarter notes and indicate the timebase of the project. For more information about
the timebase, see “Setting the MIDI timing resolution” on page 276. Here are some examples of
times expressed in measure, beat, and tick (MBT) format:
Time
What it means
1:01:000
First beat of the first measure
9:04:000
Fourth beat of the ninth measure
4:02:060
The 60th tick of the second beat of the fourth measure
Table 13.
The hours-minutes-seconds-frames format is commonly referred to as the SMPTE time. SMPTE is
the acronym for the Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers. In this format, time is
measured in hours, minutes, seconds, and frames. It’s not necessary for a project to begin at time
zero in this format—any time can be used to represent the start of a project. If you are synchronizing
SONAR with an external device whose start time is not 0, you must offset SONAR to match the
182
Controlling playback
The Now time and how to use it
external device’s start time. For more information, see “Synchronizing your gear” on page 1265.
Here are some examples of times expressed in this format (assuming that zero is the start time):
Time
What it means
00:00:00:00
The beginning of the project
00:05:10:00
Five minutes and ten seconds from the beginning of the project
01:30:00:00
One hour and thirty minutes into the project
00:00:00:05
Five frames into the project
Table 14.
SONAR provides many ways to set the Now time. Here are just a few:
To change the Now time
• Click the desired time on the Time Ruler in the Track view, Piano Roll view, or Staff view.
• In the Navigator pane, click anywhere in the view while holding down the CTRL key to change the
Now Time to that location.
• Drag the Position slider in the Transport module.
• Click the transport buttons in the Transport module.
• Click on an event in the Event List view.
You can also set the Now time by right-clicking in the Clips pane if you enable the Right Click Sets
Now option in Track view Options > Click Behavior menu.
When entering a time in MBT format, the beat and tick values are optional. You can use a colon,
space, decimal point, or vertical bar to separate the parts of the Now time:
You enter
The Now time is set to
2
2:01:000
420
4:02:000
9
9:01:000
5|1:30
5:01:030
Table 15.
When entering a time in SMPTE format, you can enter a single number (hour), two numbers (hour
and minutes), three numbers (hour, minutes, and seconds), or all four numbers.
Controlling playback
The Now time and how to use it
183
If you click in the Time Ruler while the snap grid is enabled, the Now time will be snapped to the
nearest point in the grid. By setting the grid size to a whole note or quarter note, you can easily set
the Now time to a measure or beat boundary.
Note: The Time Ruler only obeys snap when Musical Time or Absolute Time is selected in
the Control Bar’s Snap module.
When playback or recording is stopped, the Now Time either remains at the point where the project
stopped or snaps back to the Now Time Marker. This behavior is specified with the Track view
Options > On stop, Rewind to Now Marker command (or by pressing CTRL+W). For more
information, see “The Now time marker” on page 184.
MIDI note will continue to play If Now time is moved
Changing the Now time while a MIDI note is sounding will cause SONAR to play the full duration of
the note. This behavior was introduced in SONAR 4.0.3, and is necessary as a result of addressing
various gapping issues when editing MIDI data during playback.
If you prefer a slight hiccup instead of hearing the full note duration, you can change the default
behavior with the Set Now Time with Full Restart option in the Track view Options menu.
Note: Moving a MIDI note event during playback is affected by this same issue.
See:
“Displaying the Now time in large print” on page 186
“Other ways to set the Now time” on page 187
The Now time marker
In the Track view, the Now time appears as a solid vertical line that follows playback. When you set
the Now time in the Track view, the Now time marker appears in the Time Ruler. This marker
represents the point at which the Now time will snap back to after you stop playback or recording.
Figure 32.
The Now Time marker
You can drag the Now Time marker during playback. When the mouse button is released, the
transport immediately jumps to the new location.
Note: You can only drag the Now Time marker during playback, not while recording.
184
Controlling playback
The Now time and how to use it
The Now Time marker changes appearance to indicate if playback is stopped, paused, running, or
recording.
Figure 33.
A
The Now Time marker indicates the playback state
B
C
D
A. Stopped B. Paused C. Playback D. Recording
You can change the Now time marker behavior so that the marker moves to the current Now time
when playback or recording is stopped (on the Track view Options menu, clear the On Stop,
Rewind to Now Marker option or press CTRL+W).
To change the Now time marker behavior
On the Track view Options menu, clear the On Stop, Rewind to Now Marker option to have the
Now time marker move to follow the current Now time when you stop playback.
Or
On the Track view Options menu, select the On Stop, Rewind to Now Marker option to have the
Now time snap back to the Now time marker when you stop playback.
The Track view Now Time display
The Track view displays the Now Time above the track strips in a large and configurable format.
Figure 34.
The Track view Now time display
Click the display to display the following time formats:
• M:B:T (Measure:Beat:Tick). Example: 8:01:000.
• SMPTE (Hours:Minutes:Seconds:Frames).
Example: 00:00:21:00.
• Frames. Example: 629 (only available if project contains video).
• Milliseconds (Hours:Minutes:Seconds:Milliseconds).
Controlling playback
The Now time and how to use it
Example: 00:00:21:000.
185
• Samples. Example: 926100.
You can also right-click the display, and choose time formats from the pop-up menu.
The pop-up menu also lets you choose the following display options:
• To hide the time display, choose None.
• To show the time display, right-click the empty area and choose one of the available time formats
from the pop-up menu.
The time display settings are global and persist between sessions.
Displaying the Now time in large print
SONAR can display the Now time in large print so that it’s easier to see when you are far from your
monitor (for example, when you’re at your keyboard or another instrument) or when several people
need to read the Now time from a distance. Here’s how:
To display the Big Time view
1. Choose Views > Big Time to display the Big Time view.
Figure 35.
The Big Time view
2. Change the settings according to the table:
To do this
Do this
Switch time format
Click on the view to toggle between MBT and SMPTE time
Change font or color
Right-click on the view, choose the font and color you want,
and click OK
Change the size of the view
Drag any corner of the view to change its size
Table 16.
Note that SONAR ignores font styles and effects such as strikeout and underline.
186
Controlling playback
The Now time and how to use it
Other ways to set the Now time
There are a variety of commands and keyboard shortcuts you can use to set the Now time:
Shortcut
What it does
G
Lets you enter the Now time in the Position toolbar or in a dialog box
SHIFT+G
Sets the Now time to the From time (the start time of the current time selection)
CTRL+HOME
Sets the Now time to the beginning of the project
CTRL+END
Sets the Now time to the end of the project
CTRL+PAGE UP Sets the Now time to the start of the current measure if the Now time is not on a barline, or
to the start of the previous measure if the Now time is on a barline.
CTRL+PAGE
DOWN
Sets the Now time to the start of the next measure
Table 17.
If your project has markers, you can use Markers module in the Control Bar to set the Now time:
To do this
Do this
Skip to the next marker
Click
on the Markers module (or press CTRL+SHIFT+PAGE
DOWN).
Skip to the previous marker
Click
Jump to any marker
on the Markers module (or press CTRL+SHIFT+PAGE UP).
Click the drop-down menu on the Markers module and select the
marker you want to jump to.
Table 18.
Figure 36.
A
The Markers module.
B
C
D
A. Jump to previous marker B. Jump to next marker C. Insert marker D. Current marker
For more information about markers, see “Creating and using markers” on page 372.
Controlling playback
The Now time and how to use it
187
The Time ruler
The Time ruler appears in the Track view, Tempo view, Staff view and Piano Roll view. It has several
functions, including:
• Making a time selection.
The Time ruler follows the Snap to Grid settings, if enabled.
• Changing the Now time
• Adding loop, punch, and pitch markers.
You can right-click in the Time ruler to add markers.
• Zooming and scrolling. Point the mouse pointer at the top half of the Clips pane or Piano Roll
view time ruler until the mouse pointer looks like
, then drag up/down to zoom horizontally, or
left/right to scroll. For details, see “Zooming and scrolling in the time ruler” on page 87.
In the Track view and Piano Roll view, the Time ruler has the following time display options or
formats:
• Measures, Beats and Ticks (M:B:T)
• Hours, Minutes, Seconds and Frames (H:M:S:F—also called SMPTE)
• Samples
• Milliseconds
Figure 37.
The Time ruler
A
B
C
D
E
F
A. M:B:T B. H:M:S:F C. Samples D. Milliseconds E. Remove ruler F. Add ruler
The M:B:T setting follows your settings in the Meter/Key view. If you project is set to 4/4 time, you
have four beats in the Time ruler for each measure. If your project is set to 6/8 time, you have six
beats in the Time ruler for each measure.
Note: When Smart Grid is enabled in the Control Bar’s Snap module, the M:B:T time rulers in
the Clips pane and Piano Roll view are optimized to show relevant snap locations.
If there is only one format displayed in the Time ruler, you can switch the format by right-clicking in
the Time ruler and selecting the format you prefer.
To switch the Time ruler format to M:B:T
1. Right-click in the Track view Time Ruler.
2. In the menu that appears, select Time Ruler Format > M:B:T.
188
Controlling playback
The Now time and how to use it
To switch the Time ruler format to H:M:S:F (SMPTE)
1. Right-click in the Track view Time Ruler.
2. In the menu that appears, select Time Ruler Format > H:M:S:F.
To switch the Time ruler format to samples
1. Right-click in the Track view Time Ruler.
2. In the menu that appears, select Time Ruler Format > Samples.
To switch the Time ruler format to milliseconds
1. Right-click in the Track view Time Ruler.
2. In the menu that appears, select Time Ruler Format > Milliseconds.
Additionally, you can add or remove Time ruler formats using the Plus/Minus buttons located just
outside the right edge of the Time ruler.
Note: If only one Time ruler format is being used, only the Plus button is displayed.
To add or remove Time ruler formats using the Plus/Minus buttons
• Click the Plus button and select a Time ruler format from the pop-up menu.
• Click the Plus button and select a Time ruler format you would like to add from the pop-up menu.
• Click the Minus button and select from the pop-up menu to remove an active Time ruler format.
• Right-click in the Time ruler and move the cursor to Time ruler format in the pop-up menu. A list of
all Time ruler formats appears. Active formats are checked, inactive formats are unchecked.
• Click a checked format to move it down one row.
• Click an unchecked format to replace the topmost displayed format.
Note: Selecting the Display All Times as SMPTE check box in Edit > Preferences >
Customization - Display forces all times in the project to be displayed in SMPTE time,
regardless of your setting in the Time ruler.
See:
“Controlling the transport” on page 190
“Zooming and scrolling in the time ruler” on page 87
Controlling playback
The Now time and how to use it
189
Controlling the transport
To control playback, you have your choice of tools, menu commands, and shortcut keys for most
common operations.
When you start playback, the Now time updates continuously to show the current time. When you
stop playback, the Now time rewinds to the Now Time Marker. When you start playback again, it
continues from the same point.
If the Now time is advancing but you don’t hear any sound, see “Troubleshooting” on page 1363. If
you are using MIDI sync or syncing to MIDI time code, SONAR waits to receive external timing data
before it begins playing. If the various views are not updating during playback, make sure the
SCROLL LOCK key on your computer keyboard is not enabled. For more information, see
“Synchronizing your gear” on page 1265.
Note: If your Windows setup uses any system sounds that are associated with any typical
activity, such as minimizing a window, etc., you should disable these sounds. They can sound
extremely loud through your monitors, and also interrupt playback and recording, if you open
any dialog boxes or do anything that has a system sound attached to it while a project plays.
The quickest way to disable all system sounds is to open the Control Panel (Start > Control
Panel), double-click the Sound icon to open the Sound dialog box, click the Sounds tab, and
in the Sound Scheme field select No Sounds. Click Apply, and then click OK.
To start and stop playback
To do this
Start playback
Stop playback
Rewind to the start of the project
Skip to the end of the project
Do this
Press the SPACEBAR key, click
in the Transport module, or doubleclick the bottom half of the Time Ruler
Press the SPACEBAR key or click
in the Transport module
Click
in the Transport module, or press the W key
Click
in the Transport module, or press SHIFT+G
Table 19.
Note: The default behavior for the Now time when you click the Stop button is for it to return to
the Now time marker where playback began. If you want the Now time to remain where it is when
you stop playback, you can use the keyboard shortcut CTRL+SPACEBAR. If you want to
change the default behavior, clear the On Stop, Rewind to Now Marker option on the Track
view Options menu or press CTRL+W.
190
Controlling playback
Controlling the transport
To pause playback
• Click the Pause button
.
Playback stops, but the Now Time cursor and the Now Time marker do not move.
To resume playback again
• Do one of the following:
• Click the Pause button
• Click the Play button
.
.
• Press SPACEBAR.
Playback resumes.
Rewinding and fast forwarding
The Transport module has dedicated Rewind
and Fast Forward
to rewind and fast forward smoothly during playback.
To rewind or fast forward, click the Rewind
pressed until you want to resume playback.
or Fast Forward
buttons, which allow you
button and keep the button
To audition a selection
1. Select the clips that you want to audition.
2. Press SHIFT+SPACEBAR.
Only the selected clips play back.
Allow playback with no data
SONAR is able to start playback even if there is no data in a project. This is useful in various cases,
such as:
• If you need to trigger playback of external devices.
• If you need to continue playback beyond the end of the project, for example, to allow MIDI notes
and sustains to decay naturally and not end abruptly.
To allow playback with no data:
On the Track view Options menu, make sure Stop at Project End is not selected.
Controlling playback
Controlling the transport
191
Stop at Project End option
The Track view Options > Stop at Project End option determines whether or not playback is
allowed beyond the last event in a project. This option is enabled by default.
When enabled (default setting):
• Playback will not engage if there is no data present in the project at all.
• Playback will stop when no more data is present going forward.
When disabled:
• Playback will engage if there is no data present in the project at all.
• Playback will continue past the end of a project until the user manually stops playback.
Auto fade when starting/stopping playback
SONAR makes it possible to render a smooth fade in/out whenever audio playback is interrupted.
This can be useful to smooth out abrupt transitions while stopping and starting the transport rapidly
and will reduce ear fatigue during long sessions.
The fade is only applied during playback and is ignored while recording or bouncing audio.
To configure the auto fade times
1. Select Edit > Preferences to open the Preferences dialog box, then click Audio - Playback
and Recording.
2. Adjust the following options:
• Fade On Start (milliseconds). When this option is set to a value greater than zero, starting
playback will cause a gradual fade in of the audio for the specified duration. The valid range is
0–100000 and the default value is 0.
• Fade On Stop (milliseconds). When this option is set to a value greater than zero,
stopping playback will cause a gradual fade out of the audio for the specified duration. The
valid range is 0–100000 and the default value is 0.
192
Controlling playback
Controlling the transport
Handling stuck notes
Under MIDI, the events that turn notes on are separate from the events that stop notes from playing.
Normally, when you stop playback, SONAR attempts to turn off all notes that are still playing.
Depending on how your equipment is configured, it’s possible for notes to get stuck in the On
position. The Reset MIDI and Audio button
in the Transport module is used to stop all notes
from playing. The Reset MIDI and Audio command also stops feedback from input monitoring.
Note: You can control the MIDI messages that are sent by the Reset MIDI and Audio button
by changing the Panic Strength variable in the Cakewalk.ini file. See “Initialization
files” on page 1401 for more information.
To clear stuck notes
Click the Reset MIDI and Audio button
in the Transport module.
See:
“Transport module” on page 547
Controlling playback
Controlling the transport
193
Looping
Sometimes you want to listen to one portion of a project over and over, either so you can play along
and rehearse or because you want to edit that section of the project while it is playing and hear the
results as you make changes. SONAR has a playback looping feature that makes this simple.
Looping is defined in the Loop module in the Control Bar.
Figure 38.
The Loop module.
A
C
B
D
A. Loop On/Off B. Set Loop Time to Select C. Loop Start Time D. Loop End Time
To set up a loop, you do three things:
• Set the start time of the loop
• Set the end time of the loop
• Enable looping
From then on, SONAR will automatically jump back to the start of the loop when it reaches the end.
When looping is enabled, the loop times are indicated by special markers in the Time ruler.
A
B
A. Loop From B. Loop Thru
To move a loop in the Time ruler
1. Click the yellow bar that connects the two loop markers
The cursor becomes a horizontal double-headed arrow.
2. Drag the loop to the desired location in the Time ruler.
With the default option settings, SONAR will play the loop over and over again, continuously.
If you start playback before the loop start time, SONAR will play until the loop end time is reached,
then jump back to the loop start time.
Note: If you stop playback while looping is enabled, the Now time jumps to the Now time marker.
If you disable the On Stop, Rewind to Now Marker option in the Track view Options menu, the
Now time stays wherever you stopped playback.
194
Controlling playback
Controlling the transport
The Rewind command operates slightly differently when looping is in effect. The first time you
rewind, the Now time is set to the start of the loop. If the Now time is already at the start of the loop,
Rewind takes you to the beginning of the project. From then on, Rewind switches back and forth
between the loop start time and the start of measure 1.
To set up a playback loop
• Set the loop start and end times in one of the following ways:
• Drag the mouse between two points in the Time Ruler of the Track view, Staff, or Piano Roll
view to select a range of times, then click
selection time to the loop time.
in the Control Bar’s Loop module to copy the
• Click between two markers in the Track, Staff, or Piano Roll view to select a range of times,
then click
in the Control Bar’s Loop module to copy the selection time to the loop time.
• Type the loop start and end times directly into the Loop module.
• Select a range of times, then right-click in the Time ruler and choose Loop > Set Loop
Points.
Looping is automatically turned on when you use the Set Loop to Selection command.
To cancel a playback loop
• Click
in the Control Bar’s Loop module, or press the L key, to disable looping.
Using the Transport, Markers, Punch and Loop modules
The Control Bar contains various modules that provide powerful control over playback. To show the
Control Bar, click the Views menu and choose Control Bar, or press the C key.
For controlling playback, the most important Control Bar modules are the Transport, Markers, Punch
and Loop modules. For detailed information about all Control Bar modules, see “Control Bar
overview” on page 537.
Figure 39.
The Transport module.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
Q
R
S
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
A. Rewind B. Stop C. Play D. Pause E. Fast Forward F. Record G. Dropout indicator H. Current Now time
(this space is also used for progress bars and “Waiting for sync” messages) I. Return to zero
(RTZ) J. Position K. Jump to project end L. Audio Engine on/off M. Reset/Panic N. Sample rate and bit
depth O. Tempo P. Meter Q. Metronome during record R. Metronome during playback S. Click to open
metronome settings
Controlling playback
Controlling the transport
195
Using the Markers module
The Markers module lets you navigate by markers and insert new markers. Inserting markers at
important milestones in your project makes it easy to navigate through your project.
To insert a marker, do one of the following:
• Click the Insert Marker button
in the Markers module.
• Click the Project menu and choose Insert Marker.
• Press the M key when the Now time is in the desired location for your marker.
• Hold down the CTRL key and click the top half of the time ruler.
To jump to a marker, do one of the following:
• Click the Previous Marker button
or Next Marker button
in the Markers module.
• Click the Marker list in the Markers module and select a marker from the drop-down menu.
• Press the G key twice and select a marker from the list.
Figure 40.
A
The Markers module.
B
C
D
A. Jump to previous marker B. Jump to next marker C. Insert marker D. Current marker
To set options for punch and loop recording
1. Right-click the Record button
in the Transport module to open recording settings.
2. Specify how newly recorded data should affect existing data. Choose either Sound in Sound
(Blend) or Overwrite (Replace).
3. Select between storing looped takes in a single track or storing looped takes in separate tracks.
For more information see “Loop recording” on page 303.
196
Controlling playback
Controlling the transport
To use the Punch module
Figure 41.
The Punch module.
A
C
B
D
A. Auto-Punch On/Off B. Set Punch Time to Select C. Punch In Time D. Punch Out Time
The Punch module contains the following controls:
• Auto-Punch on/off
. Enable/disable punch recording. Toggles punch recording on/off.
• Set Punch Time to Selection
. Set the Punch In time to the start (From) time of the
selection, and the Punch Out time to the end (Thru) time of the selection.
• Punch In Time. The current Punch In time. Click to modify.
• Punch Out Time. The current Punch Out time. Click to modify.
Tip: If a numeric time field has focus, you can press G to access a list of marker positions.
To punch record:
1. Click the Auto-Punch Toggle button
in the Punch module to activate Auto Punch.
2. To set the auto punch region, do one of the following:
• Drag in the time ruler to make a time selection, then click the Set Punch Time to Selection
button
in the Punch module.
• Click the Punch In Time field in the Punch module and specify the desired punch in location,
then click the Punch Out Time field and specify the punch out location.
3. Set the Now Time far enough ahead of the Punch In point for you to be ready for it.
4. Click the Record button in the Transport module or press the R key.
SONAR plays the project, and begins recording on the selected track at the Punch In time you
entered, then stops recording at the Punch Out time.
Controlling playback
Controlling the transport
197
To use the Transport module
The Transport module contains the following controls:
• Rewind
.
Gradually rewind the project.
• Stop
. Stop playback.
• Play
. Start/stop playback.
• Pause
. Pause/resume playback.
• Fast Forward
.
Gradually fast forward the project.
• Record
. Start recording (requires at least one track to be armed for recording). Right-click
to access global record options. Click and keep the mouse button pressed for a brief moment to
enable step recording.
• Step Record. Open the Step Record window. For details, see “Step recording” on page 308.
• RTZ
. Rewind to the start of the project.
• Progress Bar
• Go to End
.
.
Current position in the project. Drag to skip around in the project.
Skip to the end of the project.
• Time Display. The time display section shows useful information about the current project,
including the Now time, sample rate and bit depth, tempo and meter. The following information is
shown:
• Current Now Time. The Now time shows your current location in the project. For details,
see “The Now time and how to use it” on page 182. Click the time display to toggle between
the following time formats:
• MBT. Display time as Measure:Beat:Tick.
• HMSF. Display time as Hour:Minute:Second:Frame. This format is also referred to as
SMPTE time.
• Milliseconds. Display time in milliseconds.
• Samples. Display time in samples.
• Current Tempo.
tempo.
The current tempo at the Now time. Double-click to change the current
• Current Meter. The number of beats per measure and the note value of each beat at the
current Now time. Click to change the meter. For details, see “Setting the Meter and Key
signatures” on page 270.
• Metronome Record on/off
access Metronome settings.
198
. Enable/disable the metronome during recording. Right-click to
Controlling playback
Controlling the transport
• Metronome Playback on/off
access Metronome settings.
• Metronome settings
. Enable/disable the metronome during playback. Right-click to
. Click the metronome icon to open the metronome preferences.
To use the Loop module
Figure 42.
The Loop module.
A
C
B
D
A. Loop On/Off B. Set Loop Time to Select C. Loop Start Time D. Loop End Time
The Loop module contains the following controls:
• Loop on/off
.
Enable/disable playback looping.
• Set Loop Times to Selection
. Set the Loop Start time to the start (From) time of the
selection, and the Loop End time to the end (Thru) time of the selection.
• Loop Start Time. The current Loop Start time. Click to modify.
• Loop End Time.
The current Loop End time. Click to modify.
Tip: If a numeric time field has focus, you can press the G key to access a list of marker positions.
See:
“Track-by-track playback” on page 200
Controlling playback
Controlling the transport
199
Track-by-track playback
SONAR lets you play back any combination of tracks at one time by changing each track’s status.
You can control the status of each track with the individual controls that are on every track, or with
the global controls in the Control Bar’s Mix module. For more information about the Mix module, see
“Mix module” on page 552.
Figure 43.
The Mix module.
A
B
C
D
E
K
F
G H
I
J
A. Mute B. Solo C. Arm D. Input Echo E. Live Input PDC Override F. Bypass All Effects G. Exclusive
Solo H. Dim Solo I. Automation Read (playback) J. Automation Write (recording) K. Offset mode
There are several different status settings for each track:
Status
What it means
Normal
The track plays unless one or more of your other tracks is soloed.
Muted
The track is not played, but you can turn it on while playback is in progress.
Archived
The track is not played, and you must stop playback to re-enable it. Archived
tracks do not tax your CPU during playback so they can be used to store
alternate takes.
Soloed
Only those tracks that are designated as solo tracks are played; all others are
muted.
Armed
The track is armed for recording.
Mono/Stereo (audio tracks
only)
The track plays back in either mono or stereo, depending on what the
individual track setting is in the Track Inspector (see “Track Inspector
overview” on page 576).
Phase normal or inverted
(audio tracks only)
If a track was accidentally recorded out of phase with another track, the Phase
button in the Track Inspector lets you reverse the phase of a track.
Table 20.
200
Controlling playback
Track-by-track playback
While playback is in progress, you can mute and unmute tracks in any combination, which means
you can hear only the tracks that you want. You can change the status of a track in the Track view,
the Console view, the Track Inspector, or the Mix module in the Control Bar. If a track is both muted
and soloed, it does not play. Mute has precedence.
The track status is saved with the SONAR project file. If you save a SONAR project as a standard
MIDI File, however, all tracks are saved without mute, solo, or archive indicators.
See:
“The Mix module” on page 201
“Silencing tracks” on page 203
“Soloing tracks” on page 204
“Inverting the phase of a track” on page 207
“Changing tracks’ mono/stereo status” on page 208
The Mix module
The Mix module lets you configure various playback settings. You can quickly mute/unmute, solo/
unsolo and arm/disarm all tracks. You can also configure automation settings and specify the solo
behavior.
To show/hide the Mix module
Right-click the Control Bar and select Mix Module.
Figure 44.
The Mix module.
A
B
C
D
E
K
F
G H
I
J
A. Mute B. Solo C. Arm D. Input Echo E. Live Input PDC Override F. Bypass All Effects G. Exclusive
Solo H. Dim Solo I. Automation Read (playback) J. Automation Write (recording) K. Offset mode
The Mix module contains the following controls:
• Mute / Unmute All Tracks
track is muted.
• Solo / Unsolo All Tracks
track is soloed.
Controlling playback
Track-by-track playback
. Click to mute/unmute all tracks. The button is lit if at least one
. Click to solo/unsolo all tracks. The button is lit if at least one
201
• Dim Solo enable/disable . Enable/disable Dim Solo mode. Dim Solo is a mode in which
non-soloed audio tracks/buses are still audible but at a reduced level. For details, see “Dim
Solo mode” on page 205.
• Exclusive Solo enable/disable . Enable/disable Exclusive Solo mode. With Exclusive
Solo mode, you can only solo one track and one bus at a time. For details, see “Exclusive
Solo mode” on page 206.
• Arm / Disarm All Tracks
is armed.
. Click to arm/disarm all tracks. The button is lit if at least one track
• Input Monitor On/Off All Tracks
• Bypass all Effects
on page 920.
. Enable/disable Input Monitoring on all tracks.
. Bypass all effects globally. For details, see “Bypassing effects globally”
• Live Input PDC Override
. Enable/disable delay compensation on live tracks, thereby
removing the latency during playback and recording of such tracks. Because it's a toggle, you can
quickly turn it on to complete your tracking at low latency, and turn it off when finished to hear the
track compensated as normal. For details, see “Live Input PDC override” on page 300.
• Allow Automation Writing
. Globally enable/disable the ability to write automation.
• Global Automation Playback
. Globally enable/disable all automation playback.
• Offset mode . Enable/disable Offset mode. In Offset mode, you “offset” the current
automation in a track using a parameter’s controls. For details, see “Envelope mode and Offset
mode” on page 1131.
See:
“Silencing tracks” on page 203
“Soloing tracks” on page 204
202
Controlling playback
Track-by-track playback
Silencing tracks
When a track is muted, SONAR processes the track while playback is in progress so that you can
unmute the track without stopping playback. If you have lots of muted tracks, this can place a heavy
load on your computer. Archived tracks, on the other hand, don’t place any load on your computer.
Therefore, if there are tracks you want to keep but don’t need to play, you should archive them
instead. When you mute or unmute a track while playback is in progress, there may be a slight delay
before you hear the effect of the change. This is to be expected and does not indicate a hardware or
software problem.
To mute or unmute individual tracks
• To mute or unmute a track, click its Mute button
in the Track, Console view or Track Inspector.
• To mute or unmute several tracks at once, select the tracks and do one of the following:
• Right-click a track strip and choose MSR > Mute on the pop-up menu.
•
To mute all selected tracks of the same track type, hold down the CTRL key and click any
selected track’s Mute button
.
• To mute all tracks, hold down the CTRL key and click any non-selected track’s Mute button
.
To unmute all tracks
Click the Mute / Unmute All Tracks button
in the Control Bar’s Mix module.
To mute all tracks
Do one of the following:
• Click the Mute / Unmute All Tracks button
in the Control Bar’s Mix module.
• Hold down the CTRL key and click any track’s Mute button
.
To archive or unarchive tracks
1. Select one or more tracks in the Track view.
2. Do one of the following:
• Click the track’s Archive button
.
• Right-click a track strip and choose MSR > Archive on the pop-up menu.
Note: A track can not be archived during playback.
Controlling playback
Track-by-track playback
203
Soloing tracks
Sometimes you want to hear a single track, or a few tracks at once, without having to mute all the
other tracks. You can do this by soloing the tracks you want to hear.
As soon as any track is marked as a solo track, SONAR ignores all mute settings (unless a soloed
track is also muted—mute takes precedence over solo) and plays only the track or tracks that are
set to solo. Any number of tracks at one time can be marked as solo. All these tracks will play
together. As soon as the solo status of the final solo track is turned off, SONAR once again plays
back tracks based on their mute settings.
To solo or unsolo individual tracks
• To solo or unsolo a track, click its Solo button
in the Track, Console view or Track Inspector.
• To solo or unsolo several tracks at once, select the tracks and do one of the following:
• Right-click a track strip and choose MSR > Solo on the pop-up menu.
•
To solo all selected tracks of the same track type, hold down the CTRL key and click any
selected track’s Solo button
.
• To solo all tracks, hold down the CTRL key and click any non-selected track’s Solo button
See also:
“Dim Solo mode” on page 205
To unsolo all tracks
Click the Solo / Unsolo All Tracks button
in the Control Bar’s Mix module.
To solo all tracks
Do one of the following:
• Click the Solo / Unsolo All Tracks button
in the Control Bar’s Mix module.
• Hold down the CTRL key and click any track’s Solo button
See also:
“Dim Solo mode” on page 205
“Exclusive Solo mode” on page 206
“Solo Override” on page 207
204
Controlling playback
Track-by-track playback
.
.
Dim Solo mode
Normally when you solo a track/bus in SONAR, the tracks or buses which are not soloed are
essentially muted. Dim Solo is a mode in which non-soloed audio tracks/buses are still audible but at
a reduced level. The default gain reduction is -6dB, but can also be configured for -12dB and -18dB.
Dim Solo is useful when you want to focus on a specific track but you still want to edit/mix the track
in context with the entire mix. This allows you to hear all tracks while the soloed track stands out
from non-soloed tracks.
Note: Dim Solo mode only applies to audio tracks and buses, not MIDI tracks.
To enable/disable Dim Solo
Click the Dim Solo button
Figure 45.
in the Control Bar’s Mix module.
The Mix module.
When Dim Solo is enabled, non-soloed audio tracks will play at a reduced gain rather than 0 gain
(mute).
The Dim Solo enable/disable state is saved with each project.
To configure Dim Solo level
When Dim Solo mode is enabled, the amount of gain reduction applied to non-soloed tracks or
buses is specified in the Preferences dialog box.
1. Go to Edit > Preferences > Audio - Driver Settings.
2. Set the Dim Solo Gain setting to either -6dB, -12dB or -18dB and click OK.
The Dim Solo dB setting is saved with each project.
See:
“Soloing tracks” on page 204
“Exclusive Solo mode” on page 206
“Solo Override” on page 207
“The Mix module” on page 201
“Audio - Playback and Recording” on page 1786
“Key bindings” on page 1167
Controlling playback
Track-by-track playback
205
Exclusive Solo mode
By default, SONAR allows you to solo multiple tracks and buses simultaneously. With Exclusive Solo
mode, you can only solo one track and one bus at a time.
When you solo a track or bus in Exclusive Solo mode, all other soloed tracks or buses are
automatically unsoloed. This allows you to quickly listen to individual tracks and buses in isolation
without having to manually unsolo other tracks or buses.
To enable/disable Exclusive Solo mode
Click the Exclusive Solo button
Figure 46.
in the Control Bar’s Mix module.
The Mix module.
Note: When you enable Exclusive Solo mode, currently soloed tracks and buses are not
affected until the next time you solo a track or bus.
There are several situations where soloing one track actually solos more than one track, even when
Exclusive solo mode is enabled:
• If you solo a track folder, all tracks within the folder are soloed.
• If you solo a track that is assigned to a soft synth, all other tracks that are assigned to the same
soft synth are also soloed.
• If you solo a track or bus that belongs to a Quick Group, all other tracks or buses are also soloed.
See:
“Soloing tracks” on page 204
“Dim Solo mode” on page 205
“Solo Override” on page 207
206
Controlling playback
Track-by-track playback
Solo Override
When you enable Solo Override on a track or bus, that track/bus will never be muted as a result of
soloing any other track/bus.
This is a very useful feature when you want to always hear a particular track regardless of which
other tracks are soloed. For example, you may want to always hear the vocal track while you solo
other instrument tracks. This can be accomplished easily by using Exclusive Solo mode (see
“Exclusive Solo mode” on page 206) and enabling Solo Override on the vocal track.
To enable/disable Solo Override
• Hold down the SHIFT key and click a track’s or bus’ Solo button
.
The Solo button is displayed as
to indicate that Solo Override is enabled. Solo Override
prevents the track or bus from being muted when other tracks or buses are soloed.
Note: Mute always takes precedence over Solo. A track or bus can still be muted even if Solo
Override is enabled.
See:
“Soloing tracks” on page 204
“Dim Solo mode” on page 205
“Exclusive Solo mode” on page 206
Inverting the phase of a track
A waveform’s exact opposite is called an inversion. It is a shift of 180 degrees. A waveform and its
inversion cancel each other out completely, so it is usually not desirable to have two track recordings
of the same source if one is phase inverted. It can lead to reduced volume, lowered or distorted
response in certain frequencies, or even silence in the case of two tracks which are exactly identical
(i.e. cloned tracks).
Occasionally, for example when recording a source using two microphones, one of the microphones
may be recording an inversion of the other, the resulting tracks may, to some degree, be cancelling
each other out. SONAR allows you to invert the phase of a track to match another.
To invert the phase of a track
1. Open the Track Inspector or Console view.
2. In the track you want to invert the phase, click the Phase inversion button
Controlling playback
Track-by-track playback
.
207
Changing tracks’ mono/stereo status
SONAR has a Mono/Stereo button
in each track module in the Track Inspector and Console
view. The buttons in the track modules force each track to play in either stereo or mono, but
preserve the tracks’ pan positions in the stereo mix. The Mono/Stereo button
in each track
forces the track’s audio signal to enter any patched plug-ins as either mono or stereo, whether or not
the tracks are mono or stereo. This allows you to use either mono effects on a stereo track or stereo
effects on a mono track.
To use a track’s Stereo/Mono button
Note: You may lose important stereo data by using mono effects with stereo tracks because
your stereo tracks are summed to mono in order to pass through the effect. If you never want
your stereo data to be summed to mono, select stereo.
1. Open the Track Inspector or Console view.
2. In the track you want to force to either mono or stereo for processing effects, click the Stereo/
Mono button
to the desired position:
• When the button is lit, the track streams in stereo.
• When the button is unlit, the track streams in mono.
Note: It is not possible to set a track’s Stereo/Mono button to Stereo if a mono plug-in is the
first effect in the track’s FX bin.
Mono audio clips may be increased by 3 dB in certain scenarios
There are some situations where the level of a mono clip will be increased by 3 dB if the track's
output interleave (mono/stereo toggle) is set to mono:
• If the track has mixed stereo and mono clips
• The track has a synth selected as its input source
• Input Echo is enabled or the track is armed for recording
In summary, whenever the track output interleave is mono and the data interleave is stereo, mono
data will be increased in level by 3 dB.
Using mono VST plug-ins on stereo tracks may cause out of sync audio
When using a mono VST plug-in on a stereo track (interleave set to Stereo), the left and right
channels will be out of sync. The left channel is processed by the mono effect, and delay
compensation is applied, while the right channel is not processed and does not have delay
compensation applied. The signal will look something like this:
• Left channel: Wet signal (delayed)
• Right channel: Dry signal (no delay)
208
Controlling playback
Track-by-track playback
A mono VST plug-in will work correctly if Enable Mono Processing is checked in the VST Plug-in
Properties dialog box and the track interleave is set to mono.
Note: Enable Mono Processing is enabled by default in SONAR. If you are playing back a
legacy project in SONAR and notice the project does not sound the same, try to disable Enable
Mono Processing for any mono plug-ins used in the project.
See:
“Changing track settings” on page 209
Changing track settings
Each track in a project contains MIDI or audio information and has a variety of settings (also called
parameters) that determine how the track sounds. By changing these parameters, you can change
the sound of your project. For audio tracks, you control parameters such as volume, stereo panning,
and the output device that is used to produce the sound. For MIDI tracks, you control many
additional parameters, including the type of instrument sound that is used to play the notes stored in
the track. Both kinds of tracks contain an Automation Read button
button
and an Automation Write
, which enable or disable automation playback and recording, respectively.
Note 1: You can control all sliders and knobs in the Console and Track views by clicking a
control, then hover over it with the mouse and manipulate the mouse wheel. If you move the
mouse cursor away from the slider or knob while using the mouse wheel, you will lose control
of the slider or knob you are adjusting.
Note 2: You can show and hide controls in track and bus strips in the Track view, and even
create presets for your favorite control layouts. For details, see “Configuring Track view controls”
on page 340 for more information.
Controlling playback
Changing track settings
209
Audio track parameters
The following figures show the various parameters in audio track strips. The figures are of an audio
track that is located in the Track view, however most of these parameters can also be adjusted in the
Console view and Track Inspector. Some parameters are only available in the Console view or Track
Inspector.
Figure 47.
Audio track
Figure 48.
Audio track header controls
A
B
C
D
E
F G
A. Track color B. Track number C. Header icon D. Track name E. Peak value F. Maximize/restore G. Meter
Note: MSR buttons may appear in the header bar if the Track pane is wide.
Figure 49.
Audio track controls
A
B
C
D E F G H I J K
L
M
N
O
X
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
A. Track number B. Track name C. Edit Filter D. Mute E. Automation Read F. Solo G. Automation
Write H. Arm for recording I. Freeze J. Input echo K. Archive L. Peak level M. Expand/collapse
track N. Track icon O. WAI display P. Track color Q. Expand/collapse Take Lanes R. Expand/collapse
Automation Lanes S. Volume slider T. Input U. Output V. Pan slider W. Effects bin X. Meter
210
Controlling playback
Changing track settings
Figure 50.
Audio track effects bin, meter, and track scale
B
A
C
A. Enable/disable plug-in B. Plug-in name C. Right-click to insert new plug-in
Here is a summary table of the different audio track parameters and how they are used.
Parameter
What it means
Number
A sequential track number used for reference.
Name
A name that you assign the track for easy reference. Note that if you do not
assign a name to a track, the default name is the track number. This track
number will change if you change the order of your tracks.
Mute
When enabled, mutes the track.
Solo
When enabled, solos the track.
Arm
When enabled, arms the track for audio recording.
Input Echo
Turns input monitoring on or off.
Automation Read and Write Enable/disable automation playback and recording, respectively.
buttons
Peak value
Displays the Peak value, which is the amplitude of the latest audio peak in the
track.
Expand/collapse Take Lanes
Hides or shows Take lanes.
Expand/collapse Automation
Lanes
Hides or shows Automation lanes.
Expand/collapse
Expands the track to show more controls, or collapses the track to only show
the header bar.
Edit Filter
Specify which data type the global tools should operate on.
Vol (volume)
The current volume level for the track, ranging from -INF (silent) to +6 dB
(maximum volume).
Table 21.
Controlling playback
Changing track settings
211
Parameter
What it means
Pan
The stereo distribution of the output, ranging from 100% left (hard left) to 100%
right (hard right); a value of “C” indicates sound that is centered left-to-right. On
stereo tracks, pan acts as balance.
Trim (volume trim) (Track
Inspector and Console view
only)
Volume Trim is a pre-fader control which allows the fine tuning of a single
track’s volume.
For example, let’s say you have four tracks, three tracks have their volume
fader set to 0 dB while the fourth track’s fader is set to +10 dB. You want to
group the faders and do a slow fade out, but the slightly higher level of the
fourth track causes its volume to be higher in relation to the other tracks
towards the end of the fade out. To balance the fader levels, reduce the fader
level for the fourth track to 0 dB and raise the Volume Trim value for that track to
+10 dB. The resulting volume levels for the project are the same, but now you
can group the faders and perform a fade out with no track standing out
disproportionately at the end of the fade out.
Input
The input source for the track, used in recording
Output
The output bus through which the track is played
Send Enable (Track
Inspector and Console view
only)
Activates a send module, which sends a copy of the track signal to a bus.
Send Level (Track Inspector
and Console view only)
Controls volume of audio data sent by this send module.
Send Pan (Track Inspector
and Console view only)
Adjusts the send pan setting.
Send Pre/Post switch (Track
Inspector and Console view
only)
Pre (pre-fader) means that the Send signal goes to the bus prior to the track’s
volume fader; post means the Send signal goes to the bus after the volume
fader.
Send destination (Track
Inspector and Console view
only)
Displays name of bus that the Send is sending data to.
Mono/Stereo (Track
Inspector and Console view
only)
A switch that determines whether a track’s signal enters an effect or chain of
effects as mono or stereo, regardless of the nature of the track.
Phase In/Out (Track
Inspector and Console view
only)
A switch that inverts the phase of the track.
Effects bin
The patch point for a track’s plug-ins or soft synths.
Table 21.
212
Controlling playback
Changing track settings
Parameter
What it means
Meters
The recording and playback levels are displayed in the Playback and Record
meters.
WAI display
Shows a color-coded bar if the track is being controlled by a control surface.
Track color
Opens the Track Color palette, where you can specify a custom color for each
track.
Table 21.
For more information about audio track controls in the Track Inspector, see “Audio track controls” on
page 583.
For more information about audio track controls in the Console view, see “Audio track controls” on
page 1981.
Controlling playback
Changing track settings
213
MIDI track parameters
The following pictures illustrate MIDI track parameters:
Figure 51.
A
B
MIDI track header controls
C
D
E
F
A. Track color B. Track number C. Header icon D. Track name E. Maximize/restore F. Meter
Note: MSR buttons may appear in the header bar if the Track pane is wide.
Figure 52.
MIDI track controls
B
A
C
D E F G H
I
J
K
L
Z
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T U V
W
X
Y
A. Track number B. Track name C. Edit Filter D. Mute E. Automation Read F. Solo G. Automation
Write H. Arm for recording I. Input echo J. Archive K. Expand/collapse track L. Track icon M. WAI
display N. Track color O. Expand/collapse Take Lanes P. Expand/collapse Automation Lanes Q. Volume
slider R. Input S. Channel T. Patch U. Velocity+ V. Output W. Bank X. Pan slider Y. Effects bin Z. Meter
214
Controlling playback
Changing track settings
Figure 53.
MIDI track effects bin and track scale
A
B
A. Track scale B. MIDI effects bin
Here is a summary table of the different MIDI track parameters and how they are used:
Parameter
What it means
Track number
A sequential track number used for reference
Track name
A name that you assign the track for easy reference. Note that if you do not
assign a name to a track, the default name is the track number. This track
number will change if you change the order of your tracks.
Mute
When enabled, mutes the track
Solo
When enabled, solos the track
Arm
When enabled, arms the track for MIDI recording.
Input Echo
Controls whether the track will echo MIDI data or not.
Automation Read and Write
buttons
Enable/disable automation playback and recording, respectively
Expand/collapse Take Lanes
Hides or shows Take lanes.
Expand/collapse Automation
Lanes
Hides or shows Automation lanes.
Expand/collapse
Expands the track to show more controls, or collapses the track to only show
the header bar.
Edit Filter
Specify which data type the global tools should operate on.
Vol (volume)
The current volume level for the track, ranging from 0 (silent) to 127
(maximum volume).
Pan
The stereo distribution of the output, ranging from 100% left (hard left) to
100% right (hard right); a value of “C” indicates sound that is centered left-toright.
Table 22.
Controlling playback
Changing track settings
215
Parameter
What it means
Velocity trim (Track Inspector
and Console view only)
The change in velocity (volume) that will be applied to notes in this track on
playback; ranges from –127 to +127
Input
The input source for the track, used in recording
Output
The output device through which the track is played
Ch (channel) (Track Inspector
and Console view only)
The MIDI channel through which the notes will be played
Bank (Track Inspector and
Console view only)
The set of patch names available for the track
Patch (Track Inspector and
Console view only)
The instrument sound that will be used for playback.
Time+ (Track Inspector only)
An offset applied to the start time of the events in the track
Key+ (Track Inspector only)
The number of steps by which the notes in the track are transposed on
playback (e.g., 12 to transpose up one octave)
Chorus (Track Inspector only)
Adds MIDI chorus effect to the track
Reverb (Track Inspector only)
Adds MIDI reverb effect to the track
Snap to Scale scale type
(Track Inspector only)
Displays current scale for Snap to Scale feature
Snap to Scale root note (Track
Inspector only)
Displays root note of current Snap to Scale scale
Snap to Scale on/off (Track
Inspector only)
Turns Snap to Scale feature on or off
WAI display
Shows a color-coded bar if the track is being controlled by a control surface.
Track color
Opens the Track Color palette, where you can specify a custom color for each
track.
Table 22.
For more information about MIDI track controls in the Track Inspector, see “MIDI track and
Instrument track controls” on page 585.
For more information about MIDI track controls in the Console view, see “MIDI track controls” on
page 1982.
216
Controlling playback
Changing track settings
To change a track name
1. Double-click on the current track name.
2. Enter the new track name.
3. Press ENTER.
The default track names (Track 1, Track 2, etc.) are not actually names, but placeholders until you
name a track. If you reorder the tracks these placeholders change.
You can rearrange and resize the panes in the Track view as shown in the following table.
To do this
Do this
Change the width of the Track pane and Bus pane Drag the divider that separates the Track pane from the
Clips panes to the left or right
Change the height of the Mains/Buses pane
Drag the divider that separates the Track and Clip panes
from the Bus pane up or down
Table 23.
You can customize which tracks are displayed or not displayed, and enlarge or maximize individual
tracks while other tracks remain minimized. You can also manually set the exact size of a track’s
display. The following table shows how to customize the appearance of tracks in the Track pane.
To do this
Do this
Hide or show a track
Open the Track Manager dialog box (press H), and check
or uncheck a track’s check box in the dialog box.
Expand/collapse a track
Click the Expand/collapse button in the track
Change the height of a track using splitter bars
Move the cursor over the gap below a track until the
cursor looks like this
the size you want.
Lock or unlock the height of a track
. Click and drag until the track is
Right-click an empty area in the track’s controls and
choose Lock Height from the menu.
Table 24.
You can display subsets of the Track pane’s controls (the title bar controls are always displayed) by
selecting a Control preset from the Track Control drop-down list above the track strips. To choose
which controls are displayed in track strips, see “Configuring the display of tracks in the Track view”
on page 334.
Controlling playback
Changing track settings
217
Changing track settings in the Track pane
You can change the values in the Track pane in a number of ways:
Control
How to change the setting
Volume and Pan
Click on the control and move your cursor left or right to adjust values,
or press ENTER and type a value.
Input and Output
Click on the black arrow on the right of the control and select a driver
from the menu that appears, or double-click on the control and select a
driver from the menu.
Buttons
Click to enable or disable
Table 25.
You can also edit Track properties in the Track Inspector. To show or hide the Inspector, select
Views > Inspector or press the I key.
Figure 54.
218
The Track Inspector
Controlling playback
Changing track settings
You can change the value of a track parameter for several tracks at once by using Quick Groups:
• To adjust the same control in all tracks, hold down the CTRL key and adjust a control in a nonselected track.
• To adjust the same control in all selected tracks of the same type, hold down the CTRL key and
adjust a control in any selected channel strip.
For example, to assign a group of tracks to the same output, select the tracks you want to assign,
then hold down the CTRL key and assign the Output control in any selected track. All selected tracks
will be assigned to the same output.
All track parameters are saved with a SONAR project. However, if you export a project to a standard
MIDI File, several of the parameters (Key+, Vel+, Time+, and Chan) are applied to the MIDI data as
the file is being exported. Other parameters, including Input, Output, Mute, Solo, and Archive, are
lost when you export the project to a MIDI file. The following sections contain more information about
many of the parameters in the Track view. For more information about the track inputs and the track
Arm button, see “Preparing to record” on page 277.
Setting up output devices
The output setting for a track determines which piece of hardware or software synthesizer will be
used to produce the sound stored in your project. In a very simple equipment setup, you might have
only a computer equipped with a basic sound card. In this case, you want to play all MIDI and audio
output through the sound card on your computer.
If your equipment setup also includes a MIDI keyboard attached to the MIDI port on your sound card,
you can choose to route MIDI data directly to the sound card or through the sound card MIDI port to
the keyboard. If you choose the former, the music will play from your computer speakers. If you
choose the latter, the sound will play from the speaker attached to your keyboard. You can even
choose to send some MIDI information to each of these devices so that they both play at once.
You can purchase MIDI interfaces that plug into your parallel, serial, or USB port to add MIDI ports to
your computer. For more information about complex system configurations, see the online Help topic
“Hardware setup” on page 1387.
If your computer has several MIDI outs, select Edit > Preferences > MIDI - Devices and put them
in the desired order. The order in which your MIDI devices appear in the Output menus in the Track
and Console views is based solely on the order in which the selected outs appear in Edit >
Preferences > MIDI - Devices. As a result, the order in which your devices appear in a track’s
output control may not match the port numbers that appear on your external multiport MIDI device.
Controlling playback
Changing track settings
219
Figure 55.
The MIDI - Devices section
A
A
A. These devices are not selected
When you first run SONAR it asks you to select MIDI devices. You may want to change these
selections in the future. You can do so by selecting different devices in Edit > Preferences > MIDI Devices.
Your computer is usually equipped with at least one audio device—your computer sound card. Your
setup may have several different audio output devices, or you may have a multichannel sound card
that presents itself to your computer as though it were several different devices, one for each stereo
pair. In SONAR, audio tracks are assigned to main outs or buses. Each main out represents a
hardware device. You use the Output control to assign a track in a project to the main or bus you
want to use. While you need to choose the MIDI output devices you want to use before you assign
them to tracks, all of your audio devices can be assigned to tracks freely. You do not need to
configure them the way you do MIDI devices. If you have a voice modem or speaker-phone in your
computer, however, you might want to set up SONAR so that it won’t use those devices. Also, note
that some dedicated audio equipment has specific setup requirements. For more information, see
“Improving audio performance” on page 1293.
220
Controlling playback
Changing track settings
To choose MIDI devices
1. Go to Edit > Preferences > MIDI - Devices.
2. Click on any MIDI device in the Outputs list.
3. To move any device to the top of the list, deselect all other devices and click Move to Top to
move the selected device to the top of the list.
4. When all devices are selected in the order you want, click OK.
See:
“MIDI - Devices” on page 1796
Creating friendly names for MIDI output and input devices
You may find that a name you make up yourself for a MIDI device is easier to remember or more
descriptive than a device’s original name. The friendly name for a MIDI device is the name you will
see places such as MIDI track Input and Output menus, and the Controllers/Surfaces dialog box,
if you enable the Use Friendly Names To Represent MIDI Devices check box at the bottom of the
MIDI Devices dialog box.
To make up a friendly name:
1. Go to Edit > Preferences > MIDI - Devices.
2. Double-click the name of a device in the Friendly Name column, type a new name, and press
ENTER.
3. Select the Use Friendly Names To Represent MIDI Devices check box.
4. Click OK.
Assigning Inputs & Outputs
You assign each track to a MIDI or an audio output using the Output drop-down in the Track view.
From then on, material on that track will be sent to the appropriate output device.
Note: If you rearrange your MIDI output devices after making output assignments, you may find
MIDI information being sent to different instruments than you expect. Also, SONAR allows you
to define instruments that are associated with certain outputs and channels. If you use this
feature, the name of the output will change to reflect the instrument you have chosen.
Controlling playback
Changing track settings
221
To assign a track to an output
1. Click the Output drop-down of the track you want to assign.
2. Select the output you want to use.
To assign a group of tracks to the same output, select the tracks you want to assign, then hold down
the CTRL key and assign the Output control in any selected track. All selected tracks will be
assigned to the same output.
Note: Outputs that are used by the External Insert plug-in (see “External Insert plug-in” on page
926) cannot be assigned to track and bus outputs. The only exceptions are master buses that
have other instances of the External Insert plug-in routed to them.
Notification when track/bus outputs are assigned to silent output
When you load a project, SONAR checks to see if the exact same output ports are assigned as
when the project was saved. SONAR’s port assignments can change if you load the project on a
different hardware configuration or change driver models. If there is any discrepancy between the
port assignments that were saved and the ports that are used in the current configuration, the ports
are set to “None” and the Silent Buses Detected dialog box displays all track and bus outputs from
the current project that have been assigned to a silent output.
The Silent Buses Detected dialog box also appears if any track or bus output is assigned to None
as a result of changing the audio configuration. For more information, see “Silent Buses Detected
dialog” on page 1907.
To assign the same audio input port to multiple tracks
1. In the Track view, select the tracks whose audio input port you want to assign.
2. Click the small drop-down arrow in any selected track’s Input control
.
The Input Port menu appears.
3. Choose Selected Track Inputs from the context menu.
The Track Inputs dialog box opens with the selected tracks initially highlighted. You can modify
the track selection from within the Track Inputs dialog box. For more information, see “Track
Inputs dialog” on page 1895.
4. Select the desired audio input port and click OK.
The audio input port is assigned to all selected audio tracks.
To assign different audio input ports to multiple tracks
1. In the Track view, select the tracks whose audio input port you want to assign.
2. Click the small drop-down arrow in the first selected track’s Input control
The Input Port menu appears.
3. Choose Selected Track Input Series from the context menu.
222
Controlling playback
Changing track settings
.
The Assign Series of Inputs dialog box opens, which lets you choose the first input port in the
series.
Figure 56.
The Assign Series of Inputs dialog
4. Select the audio input port that should be assigned to the first selected track and click OK.
SONAR will assign consecutive mono input ports to the selected audio tracks, beginning with the
track that was clicked in step 2. If a left or right input is selected, then mono inputs will be
assigned. If a stereo input is selected, then stereo inputs will be assigned.
To assign the same audio output port to multiple tracks
1. In the Track view, select the tracks whose audio output port you want to assign.
2. Click the small drop-down arrow in any selected track’s Output control
.
The Output Port menu appears.
3. Choose Selected Track Outputs from the context menu.
The Track Outputs dialog box opens.
4. Select the desired audio output port and click OK.
The audio output port is assigned to all selected audio tracks.
To assign the same audio output port to all stereo buses
1. In the Track view, click the small drop-down arrow in any stereo bus’ Output control
.
The Output Port menu appears.
Note: Surround buses are ignored.
2. Choose Set All Bus Outputs from the context menu.
The Output port submenu appears.
3. Select the desired audio output port.
The audio output port is assigned to all stereo buses
Note: Only hardware main outputs may be assigned, not other buses.
Controlling playback
Changing track settings
223
Assigning tracks to mono hardware outputs
SONAR lets you assign audio track and bus outputs to individual (mono) hardware outputs in
addition to stereo pairs.
This is very useful, for example, if you record in SONAR but want to use an external mixing console
to mix.
To show mono hardware outputs
SONAR does not show mono hardware outputs by default. To show mono outputs, do the following:
1. Go to Edit > Preferences > Audio - Devices.
2. Select the Show Mono Outputs check box and click OK.
Mono hardware outputs are now available in all locations that display audio output ports, with the
exception of the Media Browser view, Loop Construction view and Import Audio dialog box.
Each available audio port exposes Left, Right and Stereo channels.
Note: The Show Mono Outputs option only affects the display of mono hardware outputs in
SONAR; it does not affect current output port assignments on tracks and buses. Existing mono
output assignments are retained even if you disable the Show Mono Outputs option.
Assigning stereo tracks to mono outputs
When a stereo track is assigned to a mono hardware output, the left and right channels are
downmixed to mono. All track/bus gain and pan settings are applied prior to mono conversion.
Backward compatibility
Loading a SONAR X3 project with mono output assignments in an earlier version SONAR will cause
the mono assignments to be lost.
224
Controlling playback
Changing track settings
Choosing the instrument sound (bank and patch)
Electronic keyboards and synthesizers often contain hundreds or thousands of different sounds.
Each sound is known as a patch. The name comes from the early days of synthesizers, for which
you physically rewired (using patch cords) the oscillators and modulators to produce different
sounds. Patches are normally organized into groups of 128, called banks. Most instruments have
between 1 and 8 banks, but MIDI supports up to 16,384 banks of 128 patches each (that’s over 2
million patches).The Bank and Patch controls in the Console view and Track Inspector control the
initial bank and patch of a track during playback. Every time SONAR starts playback at the beginning
of a project, the bank and patch settings for the track are set to these initial values. Many
instruments have descriptive names for their banks and patches. SONAR stores these names in an
instrument definition. If you are using an instrument that supports General MIDI, your patch list will
contain the 128 sounds that are defined by the General MIDI specification.
Note: Different MIDI instruments use different types of commands to change banks. SONAR
supports four common methods for changing banks. For information about the bank selection
method you should use with your MIDI gear, see your MIDI equipment’s documentation.
Tip: If your bank name is too long to fit in the Bank field, hold your cursor over the bank name. A
tooltip appears with the complete bank name.
Note that a single MIDI channel can only play one patch at a time on each instrument assigned to
that channel. Therefore, if two or more MIDI tracks are set to the same output and channel but have
different bank and patch settings, the patch of the highest-numbered track will be used for all the
tracks. In some projects you want the sound played by a track to change while playback is in
progress. You can accomplish this using the Insert > Bank/Patch Change command. When you
start playback in the middle of a project, SONAR searches back through the track to find the correct
patch to use—either the initial bank and patch or the most recent bank/patch change. Note that the
Console view and Track Inspector only show the initial bank and patch, even while a different bank
and patch are being played back. The only way to see and edit a bank/patch change is in the Event
List view. For more information, see “The Event List view” on page 788.
To assign an initial bank and patch to a track
1. Open the Track Inspector or Console view and select the MIDI track you want to configure.
2. Select the desired settings in the Bank and Patch controls.
3. To search for a patch containing specific text, click the Patch Browser button in the Track
Inspector. You can also open the Patch Browser by right-clicking a bank or patch control in the
Track Inspector or Console views.
Controlling playback
Changing track settings
225
To insert a bank/patch change
1. Highlight the track whose bank and patch you want to change by clicking on the track number.
2. Set the Now time to the time at which you want the change to occur.
3. Choose Insert > Bank/Patch Change to display the Bank/Patch Change dialog box.
4. Choose a bank and patch from the lists.
5. Click OK.
SONAR inserts a change in bank and patch. When you play back the project, the initial bank and
patch shown in the Track view will be used to the point at which the bank/patch change takes place.
You can remove a bank/patch change in the Event List view.
To choose patches with the Patch browser
1. Do one of the following:
• In the Track Inspector or Console view, right-click the patch name in the track module you
want to change patches in.
• In the Track Inspector, click the Patch Browser button in the track you want to change
patches in.
The Patch browser dialog box appears, displaying a list of all the Instrument patch names that
have been installed.
2. Search for a patch name, if desired, by filling in text in the Search field at the top of the dialog
box.
3. When you find the right patch, click its name and click OK.
SONAR changes the patch of the track you selected.
See:
“Patch Browser dialog” on page 1773
226
Controlling playback
Changing track settings
Adding effects
You can add both MIDI and audio effects directly from the Track view. SONAR adds these effects in
real-time, preserving your track’s original data.
To add an audio effect in the Track pane
Do one of the following:
• In an audio track, right-click in the effects bin and choose a plug-in from the pop-up menu.
• Click the Insert Plug-in button at the top of the effects bin and choose a plug-in from the pop-up
menu. Use the effects bin to add real-time effects
B
A
C
A. Enable/disable plug-in B. Plug-in name C. Right-click to insert new plug-in
You can also drag plug-ins from the Browser to an effects bin. For details, see “Adding effects and
instruments to a project” on page 622.
See:
“Audio effects (audio plug-ins)” on page 846
Controlling playback
Changing track settings
227
Adjusting volume and pan
The Volume and Pan settings control the initial volume and pan of a track during playback. Every
time SONAR starts playback, the Volume and Pan settings for the track are set to these initial levels.
SONAR allows you to choose different panning laws if you want (see “Configuring panning laws” on
page 229).
In some projects you want the volume or panning of a track to change while playback is in progress.
You can accomplish this by drawing a volume or pan envelope in the Track view, or by recording
automation. For more information, see “Automation” on page 1101.
Note: For MIDI tracks, SONAR processes the volume and pan settings by transmitting MIDI
volume and pan events (controllers 7 and 10, respectively) when playback starts. If two or more
MIDI tracks are set to the same output and channel but have different volume or pan settings,
the settings for the highest-numbered track will prevail.
Note also that not all keyboards and synthesizers respond to these events. Check your instrument’s
manual for more information.
To set the initial volume setting
1. Move your cursor to the Volume control of the track you want to change.
2. Click and drag to the left to lower the volume or the right to raise the volume.
You can also change the volume settings in a variety of other ways, as described under “Changing
track settings in the Track pane” on page 218.
To set the initial Pan setting
1. Move your cursor to the Pan control of the track you want to change.
2. Click and drag to the left to adjust the pan to the left or to the right to adjust the pan to the right.
Hard left is 100% left. Hard right is 100% right. Pan is centered at C.
You can also change the pan and volume settings in a variety of other ways, as described under
“Changing track settings in the Track pane” on page 218.
See also:
“Configuring panning laws” on page 229
228
Controlling playback
Changing track settings
Configuring panning laws
You can choose from six different panning laws. A panning law is the mathematical formula that a
sequencer or mixer uses to control panning.
To change panning laws
1. Go to Edit > Preferences > Audio - Driver Settings.
2. In the Stereo Panning Law field, choose one of these options:
• (Default) 0 dB center, sin/cos taper, constant power. This choice causes a 3 dB boost in
a signal that’s panned hard left or right, and no dip in output level in either channel when the
signal is center panned.
• -3dB center, sin/cos taper, constant power. This choice causes no boost in a signal that’s
panned hard left or right, and 3dB dip in output level in either channel when the signal is
center panned.
• 0dB center, square-root taper, constant power. This choice causes a 3 dB boost in a
signal that’s panned hard left or right, and no dip in output level in either channel when the
signal is center panned.
• -3dB center, square root taper, constant power. This choice causes no boost in a signal
that’s panned hard left or right, and 3dB dip in output level in either channel when the signal is
center panned.
• -6dB center, linear taper. This choice causes no boost in a signal that’s panned hard left or
right, and 6dB dip in output level in either channel when the signal is center panned.
• 0 dB center, balance control. This choice causes no boost in a signal that’s panned hard
left or right, and no dip in output level in either channel when the signal is center panned.
3. Click OK.
Pan Law compatibility mode
When using a non-default pan law with floating point or 24-bit audio, SONAR would previously apply
the pan law twice; once at the clip level and once more at the track level.
In SONAR 8.5.2 and later, pan laws are only applied once at the track level and only for mono
tracks. Any clip pan envelopes will continue to work, but behave strictly as a balance control.
If you have existing projects that use a non-default pan law (i.e. other than 0dB center sin/cos
taper), the mix might sound louder in SONAR X3. To address backwards compatibility with projects
that were mixed in previous versions of SONAR, the following Aud.ini variable is available to set the
pan law compatibility mode:
PanLawCompatMode=<0 or 1> (default=0)
This variable should be set in the [Wave] section. For example:
[Wave]
PanLawCompatMode=1
Controlling playback
Changing track settings
229
When the value is 0 (default), non-default pan laws are not applied at the clip level. Clip pan
envelopes always use the 0dB center sin/cos taper law.
When the value is 1, pan laws are applied at the clip level. It is not recommended that you use this
value unless you need to retain backwards compatibility with pre-SONAR X3 projects that use a
non-default pan law.
Adjusting volume trim
Volume Trim acts like the trim control on a mixer, raising or lower the level prior to the volume fader.
Volume trim is useful for calibrating your faders to match a dB reference level or for aligning your
faders for grouping. The Volume Trim control has a range of -18dB to +18dB. Raising or lowering
the Volume Trim raises or lowers the apparent volume of the track by that amount without affecting
the actual fader level.
To set the volume trim level
In the Track Inspector or Console view, adjust the Gain control at the top of the channel strip.
Assigning a MIDI channel (Chn)
MIDI transmits information on 16 channels, numbered 1 through 16. Every MIDI event is assigned to
a particular channel. Some MIDI equipment can accept MIDI information on only a single channel.
This channel may be preassigned, or you may be able to change it. Other MIDI equipment, including
many electronic keyboards and synthesizers, can accept information on several different MIDI
channels at once. Usually, these devices use a different instrument sound for each channel.
On playback, the channel number is used to direct the MIDI information to a particular piece of
equipment.
The Chn control in the Track Inspector and Console view redirects all events in the track to the
specified channel, ignoring the channel number stored with each event. If this parameter is left
blank, all events in the track are sent to their original channels. This parameter does not affect the
channel information that is stored with each MIDI event. When the track is displayed in other views,
like the Piano Roll or Event List view, you will see the original channel that is stored in the file. You
can edit the channel values in those views or use the Process > Find/Change command.
To set the channel for a track
In the Track Inspector or Console view, click the Chn control and select a MIDI channel.
230
Controlling playback
Changing track settings
Adjusting the Key/transposing a track (Key+)
Each MIDI note event has a key number, or pitch. On playback, the key offset (Key+) parameter
transposes all notes in the track by the designated number of half-steps. The value can range from
-127 to +127. A value of 12 indicates that notes will be played back one octave higher than they are
written. This parameter does not affect the note number that is stored for each note event. When the
clip is displayed in other views, like the Piano Roll, Staff, or Event List view, you will see the original
notes as they are stored in the file. To permanently change the pitches, you can edit them
individually or use the Process > Transpose command.
If the key offset value transposes the key number (MIDI note) outside the allowable MIDI range (0–
127), the key number will be transposed to the lowest or highest octave within that range.
You can use the Key+ parameter to assist in preparing scores for instruments whose music is written
in something other than “concert” key (such as Bb trumpet). For more information, see “Music
notation for non-concert-key instruments” on page 1222.
When you edit the Key+ parameter, pressing [ or ] changes the value by 12 instead of by 10. This
makes it easy to transpose by octaves.
To set the key offset for a track
1. Select the track and open the Track Inspector.
2. In the Track Inspector, click the Key+ control.
3. Enter a value (1 = a semitone), or press the + or – key to change the key by a single semitone.
Use the [ or ] key to change the key by 12 semitones (one octave).
Figure 57.
The Track Inspector contains advanced MIDI controls.
Controlling playback
Changing track settings
231
Adjusting the note velocity (Vel+)
Each MIDI note event has a velocity, which represents how fast the key was struck when the track
was recorded. On playback, the velocity offset parameter adjusts the velocity data for all notes in the
track by the designated amount. The value can range from -127 to +127. The effect of changing
velocities depends on the synthesizer. Some synthesizers do not respond to velocity information.
For others, the effect varies depending on the sound or patch you have chosen. Normally, higher
velocities result in louder and/or brighter-sounding notes. This parameter does not affect the velocity
that is stored for each note event. When the clip is displayed in other views, like the Piano Roll view,
Staff view, or Event List view, you will see the original velocities as they are stored in the file. You can
edit the velocity values in those views, or use the Process > Scale Velocity or Process > Find/
Change command. Velocity is different from volume in that it is an attribute of each event, rather
than a controller that affects an entire MIDI channel. Here’s an example of where this distinction
might be important. Suppose you have several tracks containing different drum parts. All of these
parts would probably be assigned to MIDI channel 10 (that’s the default channel for percussion in
General MIDI). If you change the volume setting for any track that uses channel 10, all the different
drum parts—regardless of what track they’re in—would be affected. If you change the note velocity
for one drum track, it will be the only one whose volume is affected.
To set the velocity offset for a track
1. Open the Track Inspector or Console view.
2. Select the track you want to edit.
3. Adjust the Vel+ knob at the top of the channel strip.
Adjusting the time alignment of a MIDI track (Time+)
Each event takes place at a known point in the project. On playback, the time offset (Time+)
parameter adjusts the times for MIDI events in the track by the designated amount. The value can
be as small as a single clock tick or as large as you want. This parameter can be used to make a
part play behind the beat or in front of it or to compensate for tracks that sound rushed or late. The
time shift can be used to create a chorus or slap-back echo effect by making a copy of a track and
then applying a small offset to the copy. You can use larger time offsets to shift a track earlier or later
by several beats or measures. Note that you cannot shift any event earlier than 1:01:000. For
example, if the first event in the track starts at 2:01:000, you cannot shift its start time earlier by more
than one measure.
This parameter does not affect the time that is stored for each note event. When the clip is displayed
in other views, like the Piano Roll, Staff, or Event List view, you will see the original times as they are
stored in the file.
To set the time offset for a track
1. Select the track and open the Track Inspector.
2. In the Track Inspector, click the Time+ control.
3. Enter a value, or press the + or – key until you reach the value you want.
232
Controlling playback
Changing track settings
Figure 58.
The Track Inspector contains advanced MIDI controls.
Other MIDI playback settings
Two other MIDI settings can affect what happens when you play back your project, as described in
the following table.
Option
How it works
Zero Controllers When Play If this option is enabled, SONAR zeros (resets) the pitch wheel, the pedal
Stops
Controller, and the modulation wheel Controller on all 16 MIDI channels
whenever playback is stopped. It also sends a “Zero All Continuous Controllers”
MIDI message, which turns off other continuous Controllers on newer
synthesizers. If you experience frequent stuck notes when playback stops, try
checking this option.
Patch/Controller
Searchback Before Play
Starts
If this option is enabled, SONAR searches for and sends the most recent patch
change, wheel, and pedal events on each output and MIDI channel before
starting playback. This ensures that all these settings are correct, even if you
start playback at an arbitrary point in your project.
Table 26.
To set these options, go to Edit > Preferences > Project - MIDI. If you have set up a playback loop,
enabling either of these options can cause an audible delay when the loop is restarted.
See:
“Controlling live MIDI playback—MIDI echo” on page 241
Controlling playback
Changing track settings
233
Customizing track/bus colors
Each channel strip in the Track view, Console view and Inspector can have a custom color tint,
which allows you to color-code your tracks and clips for better project organization.
When you change the track color, it affects the track strip in the Track view, Console view, Inspector,
and clip foreground color (waveform or MIDI data).
Figure 59.
Click a track’s Track Color bar to assign a custom track color.
A
A
A. Track Color bar
234
Controlling playback
Changing track settings
Figure 60.
Track colors affect the Track view, Console view, Inspector and clip foreground color.
Controlling playback
Changing track settings
235
To select a track color
1. Click the track’s Track Color bar, which is located at the far left in the Track view and the bottom
of the Console view.
Track view
Console view
2. In the track color palette, select the desired color. You can preview colors in real-time as you
point to different color swatches. To assign a custom color, click the Other button and select the
desired color. By default, tracks follow the color of the bus they are assigned to. If you do not
want to assign a custom color or follow the bus color, click and hold down the Follow Bus
button, then select Default on the pop-up menu.
Tip: You can use a Quick Group to change the color of multiple tracks simultaneously. To do so,
select the tracks you want to change, then hold down the CTRL key while you change any selected
track’s color. All selected tracks will be set to the same color settings. For more information, see
“Quick Groups” on page 954.
When a track color is set to Default, the track strip will not be tinted, and clips will revert to using the
track colors that are specified in the Preferences dialog box (Edit > Preferences > Customization
- Colors).
236
Controlling playback
Changing track settings
Figure 61.
Default track colors are defined in the Preferences dialog box.
Controlling playback
Changing track settings
237
Bus strip colors
If you assign a color to a bus strip, all non-colored tracks that are routed to that bus automatically
inherit the same color by default.
For example, in the following figure, all tracks are routed to the Master bus. Tracks 1 and 2 have
custom track colors, while tracks 3-8 use default track colors. If you assign a custom color to the
Master bus, tracks 1 and 2 remain unchanged, while tracks 3-8 inherit the same color as the Master
bus.
Figure 62.
The bus color also affects all non-colored tracks that are routed to that bus.
A
B
C
A. Tracks with custom colors B. Non-colored tracks inherit the bus color C. Bus
If you do not want tracks to inherit bus colors, go to Edit > Preferences > Customization - Colors
and click the Track Defaults button, then click and hold down the Follow Bus button and select
Default on the pop-up menu. You can also configure individual tracks to ignore bus colors (see “To
select a track color” on page 236).
Tip: If you want to visually verify which tracks are routed to a particular bus, temporarily assign a
custom color to a bus. All non-colored tracks that are routed to that bus automatically inherit the same
color.
To remove a track color
Click the track’s Track Color bar to open the color palette, then assign Color to Default.
To use a custom color
Click the track’s Track Color bar to open the color palette, then click Other and specify the desired
color.
238
Controlling playback
Changing track settings
To disable track strip colors
You can disable track strip colors if you only want to change the clip color (waveform or MIDI data),
but not the track strip background. To do so, go to Edit > Preferences > Customization - Colors
and clear the Show strip colors check box.
If Show strip colors is disabled, the current track is always highlighted.
Figure 63.
Clear the Show strip colors check box to disable track strip colors
Controlling playback
Changing track settings
239
To specify the default track and bus colors
You can specify a default color for all new tracks and buses. To do so, go to Edit > Preferences >
Customization - Colors and click the Track Defaults or Bus Defaults button.
Figure 64.
Specify a default color for all new tracks and buses
Tip: By default, clips share the same color as their parent track. However, you can use the Clip
Inspector to assign a custom color to selected clips, independent of the track color.
See:
“Customization - Colors” on page 1838
240
Controlling playback
Changing track settings
“Changing track settings” on page 209
“Track view” on page 1922
“Console view” on page 1971
“Properties Inspector - Clip Properties” on page 594
“Properties Inspector - Track Properties” on page 600
Controlling live MIDI playback—MIDI echo
When you play your MIDI keyboard or controller, the sound that SONAR produces is determined by
what hardware or software synth SONAR sends the incoming MIDI data to after SONAR receives
the data. This is called MIDI echo. By default, SONAR sends the data to the MIDI output or software
synth listed in the Output field of the current track. The current track is the one whose track name
background has the lighter color—press the up and down arrows on your computer keyboard and
watch each track turn lighter in succession as you change different tracks into the current track (you
can also click any of a track’s controls to make it current).
However, you can echo MIDI data to much more than just the current track, or turn echoing off on
the current track if you want. With a single keyboard or controller, you can echo MIDI data to as
many MIDI tracks as you want, meaning that you can simultaneously play as many hardware and
software synths as you can hook up to your MIDI interface or run on your computer. You can also
have multiple performers on different controllers sending MIDI data to either the same synth or
multiple synths. Each SONAR track allows you to select what MIDI input ports and channels the
track will respond to. The Output field of the track determines what instrument will sound when the
track receives the data. Each track’s Input Echo button determines whether the track echoes MIDI
data.
The Input Echo button
Each MIDI track has an Input Echo button, which controls whether the track will echo MIDI data or
not. The button has three states: On
, Auto
, and Off
. When the button is on, the track
echoes MIDI data. In Auto mode, the track echoes MIDI data because the track is the current track.
When the button is off, the track does not echo any data, even if it is the current track. The Off
position on a current MIDI track is only available if you disable the Always Echo Current MIDI
Track option in Edit > Preferences > MIDI - Playback and Recording. The Auto position becomes
unavailable with this setting.
There are several ways to turn Input Echoing on:
• Click a track’s Input Echo button so that it is on.
• Click a track to make the track the current track (if the Always Echo Current MIDI Track option in
Edit > Preferences > MIDI - Playback and Recording is enabled). In this situation (which is the
default), if the track’s Input Echo button is not on, the button appears as
track echoes data because it is the current track.
to indicate that this
• If the Always Echo Current MIDI Track option in Edit > Preferences > MIDI - Playback and
Recording is disabled, make a track the current track, and click the track’s Input Echo button
Controlling playback
Controlling live MIDI playback—MIDI echo
.
241
Storing favorite configurations
If you want a track to respond to more than one port or channel, you must create a preset input
configuration. If you create some favorite configurations of MIDI input options, not only will they be
stored with the project you created them in, but you can save each one as a preset to load in any
MIDI track in any project you want. Clicking the drop-down arrow in a track’s Input field displays the
Inputs drop-down menu, which has the Manage Presets choice that allows you to create and store
your favorite combinations of MIDI input choices.
To play one synth at a time from one or more MIDI keyboards
• Since this is SONAR’s default behavior, simply use the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW keys on
your computer keyboard to choose the current track (the current track has a lighter track name
background color), and use the Track Inspector or Console view to choose the synth you want to
play by using the track’s Output, Bank, Patch, and Channel fields. With the default behavior, all
MIDI input from all ports and channels is merged and sent through the current track. Notice that
the track’s Input field says Omni.
• If you’ve disabled the default behavior (see next procedure), you must make sure that the current
track’s Input Echo button is lit up (on) before you can play the synth that the track is patched to.
To disable the default MIDI echo setting
• If you want to turn off the automatic MIDI echoing of the current track, disable the Always Echo
Current MIDI Track in Edit > Preferences > MIDI - Playback and Recording. If you then turn
off the current track’s Input Echo button
sound.
and play your keyboard, SONAR will not produce
To play multiple synths from a MIDI keyboard
1. Choose a synth for each track that you want to play by using each track’s Output, Channel,
Bank, and Patch fields in the Track Inspector or Console view.
2. In the Input field of each track that you want to play, click the drop-down arrow and choose the
MIDI input port and channel that you want the track to respond to from the following options:
• None. This option actually sets the Input field to Omni. With this setting the track will
respond to any MIDI input coming in on any port (MIDI interface input driver) on any channel.
• (name of MIDI input driver) > MIDI Omni. Choosing this option causes the track to
respond to any MIDI channel coming from the named MIDI interface input driver.
• (name of MIDI input driver) > MIDI ch 1-16. Choosing this option causes the track to
respond ONLY to whatever MIDI channel you choose coming from the named MIDI interface
input driver.
• Preset. If you’ve created any preset collections of input ports and channels, you can select
one here.
• Manage Presets. If you want to create or edit any preset collections of input ports and
channels, you can select this option (see following procedure).
3. Make sure that the Input Echo button
242
on each track that you want to play is turned on.
Controlling playback
Controlling live MIDI playback—MIDI echo
To create or edit a preset input configuration
1. In the Input field of a track that you want to select inputs for, click the drop-down arrow and
choose Manage Presets from the drop-down menu.
The MIDI Input Presets dialog box appears.
2. In the Input Port column, find the input port that you want to use for this track (if you only use a
single-port MIDI interface, you’ll only see one choice).
3. To the right of the input port, select the MIDI channels that you want this track to respond to on
this MIDI port.
4. Select channels for any other MIDI port that’s listed, if you want to use channels on that port also.
5. If you want to save this configuration, type a name for it in the window at the top of the dialog
box, and click the Disk icon to save it.
Now, when you choose inputs for other tracks, you can choose the preset you saved by clicking the
Presets option in the track’s Input drop-down menu. If you want to edit a preset, select it in the top
window of the MIDI Input Presets dialog box, edit it, and click the Disk icon. If you want to delete a
preset, select it in the same dialog box and click the X button to delete it.
To use multiple performers on multiple tracks
1. For performer number 1, click the Input drop-down menu(s) of the track(s) you want that
performer to play, and choose the port and MIDI channel that performer 1’s keyboard is sending
data to SONAR on.
2. Repeat step 1 for all other performers.
3. If there is any track that you want more than one performer to play, create a preset of the input
ports and channels that you want that track to respond to (see previous procedure).
4. Make sure the Input Echo button
is on for each track you want to play.
To turn MIDI echo (and input monitoring) on or off for all tracks
Click the Input Echo On/Off All Tracks button
Figure 65.
in the Control Bar’s Mix module.
The Mix module.
See:
“Local control” on page 244
Controlling playback
Controlling live MIDI playback—MIDI echo
243
Local control
You should normally disable the Local Control setting on your master keyboard to prevent notes
from being doubled when you play your keyboard. If you disable Local Control, your keyboard sends
notes that you play to SONAR, which echoes them to the synthesizer, which plays them only once.
When SONAR starts, you can have it send a special MIDI message that attempts to disable Local
Control automatically. Most modern synthesizers respond to this message. If yours does not, you will
need to disable Local Control every time you turn it on for use with SONAR.
To automatically disable all local control whenever you launch SONAR
1. In the directory where SONAR is installed, double-click on the TTSseq.ini file to open it.
2. In the [Options] section, add the line:
SendLocalOff=1
3. Save the file and close it.
4. When you launch SONAR, it automatically sends a Local Off message to your keyboard.
Note: Not all keyboards respond to Local Off messages.
See:
“Playing files in sequence with the Play List” on page 245
244
Controlling playback
Local control
Playing files in sequence with the Play List
The Play List view allows you to automatically play multiple files in sequence. A Play List is a list of
projects arranged in the desired playback order, from top to bottom. You can use this feature in live
performance applications or just for fun.
Figure 66.
The Play List.
The Play List view lets you create and work with a series of project, MIDI, and bundle files. You can
create, edit, and save a Play List (or set) of up to 999 SONAR projects. As each file plays, SONAR
loads it and displays it in the Track view and other views like any other project file.
You can program the list to pause between songs for a fixed amount of time, or to wait for a
keystroke before proceeding. You can start playback from any project in the Play List by simply
double-clicking the desired project.
To create a new Play List, go to File > New, choose Play List Set from the list, and click OK.
See:
“The Play List interface” on page 246
“Using the Play List” on page 248
Controlling playback
Playing files in sequence with the Play List
245
The Play List interface
The Play List view contains a toolbar and a multi-column list. Each song occupies a single row in the
list.
Figure 67.
Play List.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A. Play List toolbar B. Status C. Play order D. Project
name E. Path F. Tempo G. Key H. Meter I. Length J. Created date K. Modified date L. Delay M. Notes
Figure 68.
A
B
Play List toolbar.
C
D
E
F
A. Enable Play List B. Next Song C. Repeat List D. Add Song E. Remove Song F. Delay G. Always on top
246
Controlling playback
Playing files in sequence with the Play List
G
Toolbar
The Play List toolbar contains the following controls.
Button
Table 27.
Command
Description
Shortcut
Enable Play List
Enable/disable the Play List.
E
Next Song
Skip to the next song.
N
Repeat List
Repeat the Play List continuously.
R
Add Song
Add one or more songs to the Play List.
A or INSERT
Remove Song
Remove the selected song from the Play List.
D or DELETE
Delay
Opens the Delay dialog box, which lets you specify a delay W
before the next song plays. The following options are
available:
• No Delay. The song starts immediately following the
previous song.
• Wait for Key Press. The song starts only after you press
a key on your computer keyboard.
• Wait “N” Seconds. The song starts after the specified
number of seconds.
Always on top
Keep the Play List on top of other views.
T
Play List toolbar
Columns
The Play List contains the following columns:
• Status. Current indicates which song is currently Open. Next indicates the next song to play.
• Order. The play order. Each song in the Play List gets a number representing when it will play.
Clicking the Order column header presents the following options:
• Original Order.
Reorders the songs to the order in which they were originally added.
• Revert Last Sort. Reverts to the previous sort order.
• Invert Order.
Inverts the current sort order.
• File Name. The song’s name. If a song has already been played, it is dimmed in the list.
• Path.
The location of the song file.
• BPM. The song’s initial tempo.
• Key.
The song’s initial key.
Controlling playback
Playing files in sequence with the Play List
247
• Meter.
The song’s initial meter.
• Length.
The song’s duration.
• Created.
Date Created.
• Modified. Date Modified.
• Delay. The wait mode before the next song plays. The delay can be a fixed amount of time or to
wait for a keystroke.
• Notes. Type an optional comment about the song.
You can resize and rearrange columns by dragging the column headers.
Note: The BPM, Key, Meter and Length columns only apply to projects that have been saved in
SONAR X2a or later. To enable these columns for older projects, resave the projects in SONAR
X2a or later.
Tip: Click a column header to sort the Play List playback order. Click again to toggle between
ascending or descending order.
See:
“Playing files in sequence with the Play List” on page 245
“Using the Play List” on page 248
Using the Play List
To create a new Play List
1. Choose File > New.
2. Choose Play List Set from the list.
3. Click OK.
To open an existing Play List
1. Choose File > Open.
2. Choose Play List from the Files of Type list.
3. Choose the file you want and click Open.
To add a song to the Play List
1. Do one of the following:
• Click the
button in the Play List view toolbar.
• Press A.
• Press INSERT.
248
Controlling playback
Playing files in sequence with the Play List
2. Choose a file from the Add Song to Play List dialog box.
3. Click Open.
You can use the CTRL and SHIFT modifier keys to add multiple songs in the Add Song to Play List
dialog box.
To specify a delay before playing the next song
1. Click on the song in the Play List.
2. Click the
button in the Play List view toolbar, or press W to open the Delay dialog box.
3. Specify the desired delay:
• No Delay. The song starts immediately following the previous song.
• Wait for Key Press. The song starts only after you press a key on your computer keyboard.
• Wait “N” Seconds.
The song starts after the specified number of seconds.
4. Click OK.
To change the order of songs
Do one of the following:
• To reorder and individual song.
Drag the song to the desired location in the Play List.
• To sort by columns. Click the desired column header. Click again to toggle between ascending
or descending order.
• Click the Order column header and select one of the following options on the pop-up menu:
• Original Order.
Reorders the songs to the order in which they were originally added.
• Revert Last Sort. Reverts to the previous sort order.
• Invert Order.
Inverts the current sort order.
The sort order impacts the order in which projects are played.
Note: The BPM, Key, Meter and Length columns only apply to projects that have been saved in
SONAR X2a or later. To enable these columns for older projects, resave the projects in SONAR
X2a or later.
To copy a song to another location in the Play List
Hold down the CTRL key and drag the file to a new location in the Play List.
To remove a song from the Play List
Select the song and click
or press the D or DELETE key.
To save the Play List
Choose File > Save or File > Save As, enter a file name, and click Save.
Play List files have the file extension .set.
Controlling playback
Playing files in sequence with the Play List
249
To activate the Play List
Click
in the Play List view toolbar, or press E, so that the button is pressed. If this button is not
pressed, only a single file will play when you start playback.
To specify the starting song
Double-click the file you want to start with. The project is opened and displayed as usual.
To start playback
Click
in the Control Bar or press the SPACEBAR.
If a song has already been played, it appears dimmed in the list.
To stop playback
Click
in the Control Bar or press the SPACEBAR.
To skip to the next song
Click
in the Play List view toolbar, or press N.
To repeat Play List continuously
Click the
button in the Play List view toolbar, or press R.
See:
“Playing files in sequence with the Play List” on page 245
“The Play List interface” on page 246
250
Controlling playback
Playing files in sequence with the Play List
Video playback, import, and export
Video files play in the Video view in real time as your project plays. You can also view your video on
an external DV device connected to an IEEE 1394 port (“FireWire”).
The File > Import > Video command lets you include the following video file types in your project:
• AVI (also called Video for Windows).
• MPEG.
• Windows Media Video.
• QuickTime (.mov files only). SONAR supports QuickTime 7, including H.264 support and the
ability to import AAC audio files. The File > Export > Video command lets you export your audio
tracks and your imported video as the following file types:
Note: Some .mov and .avi files contain no video. You can’t import these files with the File >
Import > Video command. You must use the File > Import > Audio command instead, and set
the Files of Type field to All Files.
• AVI (also called Video for Windows)
• Windows Media Video
• QuickTime
SONAR also has a Video Thumbnails pane at the top of the Track view, which shows individual
frames of your video at different places in your project (See “Using the Video Thumbnails pane” on
page 260 for more information).
You open the Video view by using the Views > Video command. The Video view displays the Now
time (as in the Big Time view) and the video itself. The display in the Video view is synchronized with
the Now time, giving you convenient random access to the video stream. This makes it easy to align
music and digitized sound to the video.
Commands in the Video view’s right-click pop-up menu let you set the time display format, the size
and stretch options for the video display, the video start and trim times, and other options.
QuickTime issues
In order to import/export QuickTime files in SONAR, you must install both the filters AND QuickTime.
The following are some other known QuickTime issues:
• It is presently only possible to export QuickTime videos on a 32-bit system. This is a limitation of
QuickTime, not SONAR.
• QuickTime Import/Export requires version 6.5.1 or higher of the QuickTime Player to be installed.
The QuickTime Player is not included with SONAR, but can be downloaded separately from
Apple's web site (www.apple.com/quicktime/download/win.html).
• Audio mixdown to QuickTime must be set to 16 bits stereo or mono, or the resulting export will
create a unusable file or abort with an error.
• Audio mixdown to QuickTime must be set to 48 KHz or less or the resulting export will create a file
that plays back incorrectly.
Controlling playback
Video playback, import, and export
251
• When exporting to QuickTime, the frame rate of the QuickTime video compressor will default to
“best possible”. Since not all movies in a SONAR video project correctly report their frame rate,
the best practice is manually enter the desired frame rate. This is done in the video settings of the
QuickTime video compressor.
• Exports to QuickTime from a SONAR video project created from an AVI using the Indeo video
compressor will create a movie with white frames.
• Exports to QuickTime may have an extra white frame on the last frame of the movie. This extra
frame can be removed with the QuickTime Pro Player or another QuickTime editing application.
See:
“Importing and playing back videos” on page 252
“Optimizing video performance” on page 259
Importing and playing back videos
Here are step-by-step procedures for inserting and playing back videos:
To load a video file into a project
1. Choose File > Import > Video, or choose Insert from the Video view’s pop-up menu.
The Import Video dialog box appears. In the Files of Type field, select the kind of video file
you’re looking for.
Tip: You can also drag a video file from the Browser and drop it on the Video Thumbnails pane.
2. Select a file.
3. Check the Show File Info option to display information about the file in the File Info section of
the dialog box.
4. Check the Import Audio Stream option if you want to load the file’s audio data.
5. Check the Import As Mono Tracks option if you want to import the file’s audio data as one or
more mono tracks.
6. Click Open.
SONAR loads the video file and displays it in the Video view. If you choose to import audio data,
SONAR inserts a new track above the currently selected track, and puts the audio data in a clip or
clips on the new track.
Note 1: When you save a project that contains video, SONAR saves the project’s video file by
reference only; the actual video data remains in the original file. Video data is not saved in
bundle files, so it must be backed up on its own.
252
Controlling playback
Video playback, import, and export
Note 2: After you load a video file into a project, you can play it back either in the Video view, or
on an external DV device through a FireWire port. See “Video playback on a FireWire DV
device” on page 262 for more information.
To play a video file in the Video view
1. Open the Video view by choosing Views > Video.
2. Press the SPACEBAR to play or stop video playback.
3. To change the display size of the video, right-click in the Video view and choose Stretch
Options > [desired size] from the pop-up menu.
Note: When you play a video file that has high temporal compression, such as movies optimized
for web delivery, playback may not be smooth unless you disable video thumbnails, (see “Using
the Video Thumbnails pane” on page 260 for more information).
To delete the video from the project
1. Open the Video view by choosing Views > Video.
2. Right-click in the Video view and choose Delete.
SONAR removes the video from the project. Note that imported audio data is not deleted.
To enable or disable video playback
1. Open the Video view by choosing Views > Video.
2. Right-click in the Video view and choose Animate.
If your computer is not fast enough to play back video efficiently, you can get better performance by
temporarily disabling video animation during playback.
To set the Time display format
• Click the time display to cycle between MBT, SMPTE, Frames and None
Or
• Right-click in the Video view and choose an option from the Time Display Format menu:
To do this
Do this
Select a time format
Choose MBT, SMPTE, Frames or None
Change font or font color
Choose Font and select new font characteristics
Turn off the time display
Choose None
Table 28.
Controlling playback
Video playback, import, and export
253
To adjust the SMPTE time
1. Move the Now time to the place where you want SMPTE time to be either 00:00:00:00, or a
number you can enter.
2. Use the Project > Set Timecode At Now command to open the Set Timecode At Now Time
dialog box.
3. If you want to set SMPTE time to 00:00:00:00 (the dialog’s default value) at the current Now
time, click OK to close the dialog box. If you want to set SMPTE time to some other value at the
current Now time, type that value into the SMPTE/MTC Time field, and click OK to close the
dialog box.
To choose a frame rate
Do one of the following:
• Go to Edit > Preferences > Project - Clock and choose the frame rate you want from the six
choices, then click OK.
• In the Control Bar’s Sync module, click the Timecode Format list and select the desired format.
For more information, see “SMPTE/MIDI time code synchronization” on page 1274).
To set the Video display format
Right-click in the Video view and choose an option from the Stretch Options menu:
To do this
Do this
Display the video in its original size
Choose Original Size
Stretch the video to fill the Video view
Choose Stretch to Window
Stretch the video as much as possible while preserving the
original aspect ratio
Choose Preserve Aspect Ratio
Make the video display as large as possible, but only enlarge by
integral multiples
Choose Integral Stretch
Display the video in full screen mode
Choose Full Screen
Table 29.
SONAR adjusts the video display according to the selected option. The stretch option is used to
recalculate the video display size whenever you resize the Video view.
To set the background color
• Right-click in the Video view and choose a color option from the Background Color menu.
254
Controlling playback
Video playback, import, and export
To set the Start and Trim times
1. Right-click in the Video view and choose Video Properties.
2. Set options as described in the table:
Option
What it means
Start Time
The time in your SONAR project at which you want the video file to start playing
Trim-in Time
The time in the video file at which you want video playback to start
Trim-out Time
The time in the video file at which you want video playback to stop
Table 30.
SONAR synchronizes the video to the project according to the specified Start and Trim times.
Note: The project’s video file is saved in the project by reference only, the actual video data
remains in the original file. Video data is not saved in bundle files, so it must be backed up on
its own.
See also:
“Exporting video” on page 256
“Optimizing video performance” on page 259
Controlling playback
Video playback, import, and export
255
Exporting video
After you’ve mixed your audio tracks the way you want them, you can export the inserted video file
together with your audio tracks to create a new video file.
When you export a video, any changes you’ve made to the Start, Trim-In, or Trim-Out times
determine how long your new exported video is compared to the original video that you inserted into
your SONAR project.
Note: If you’re exporting an AVI file, the No Compression option in the Video Codec field of
the AVI Encoder Options dialog box is a good choice. This choice does not change or
compress your source video material. If you want your exported AVI file to be compressed, the
Cinepak option will create an AVI file that plays back smoothly with decent quality. The MJPEG
option will create an AVI file that does not play back as smoothly, but is a high quality format to
archive a file in.
To export a video
1. Make sure your audio tracks are completely mixed, and your video Start time, Trim-In time, and
Trim-Out time are set the way you want them.
2. Use the File > Export > Video command.
The Export Video dialog box appears.
3. In the File Name field, type a name for your new video.
4. In the Files of Type field, choose the kind of video file you want the exported file to be.
5. Click the Encoding Options button to open a dialog box of encoding options for the kind of file
you’re creating. Some codecs do not work: click the Help button in the dialog box for help
choosing options.
Note: If you’re exporting an AVI file to either a 24-bit audio format or to a multi-channel (surround
sound) format, set the Audio Codec in the AVI Encoding Options dialog box to No
Compression.
6. Click the Audio Mixdown Options button to open a dialog box of audio mixdown options. Click
the Help button in the dialog box for help choosing options.
7. Click Save to export your video.
See also:
“Uploading your songs to YouTube” on page 257
256
Controlling playback
Video playback, import, and export
Uploading your songs to YouTube
You can publish audio and video directly to YouTube from within SONAR.
You must have an existing YouTube account before you can use this feature. If you do not already
have a YouTube account, you can sign up for a free account at www.youtube.com.
To publish audio to YouTube
1. Open the SONAR project you want to publish to YouTube.
2. Go to File > Export > Audio.
3. In the Files of type list, select YouTube Publish.
4. Enter a file name in the File name box.
5. Click Export.
Cakewalk YouTube Publisher opens.
6. Enter the required settings in Cakewalk YouTube Publisher (see “Cakewalk YouTube Publisher
interface” on page 258), then click Upload.
To publish video to YouTube
1. Open the SONAR project you want to publish to YouTube.
2. Go to File > Export > Video.
3. In the Files of type list, select YouTube Publish.
4. Enter a file name in the File name box.
5. Click Export.
Cakewalk YouTube Publisher opens.
6. Enter the required settings in Cakewalk YouTube Publisher (see “Cakewalk YouTube Publisher
interface” on page 258), then click Upload.
Controlling playback
Video playback, import, and export
257
Cakewalk YouTube Publisher interface
Figure 69.
Cakewalk YouTube Publisher
Cakewalk YouTube Publisher contains the following controls:
• Account (required). Enter your YouTube account name or e-mail address.
• Password.
Enter your YouTube account password.
• Save Login Credentials.
settings for future use.
Select this check box to remember the Account and Password
• Title (required). Enter a name for the video.
• Description. Type a description of the video.
• Private. Enable this option if you want your video to be private. A public video can be viewed by
anybody, while a private video can only be seen by you and up to 50 other people who you invite
to view the video. A private video will not appear on your channel, search results, or playlists and
will be invisible to other users.
258
Controlling playback
Video playback, import, and export
• Video preview image. The preview image shows a frame of the video. If you are uploading an
audio-only project, you can drag an image to the preview display in order to load a new image.
• Load Image (Only for audio export). When uploading an audio-only project, you can load a
static image to be used for video frames. This option is unavailable when uploading video
projects.
• Test Video. Click to show a preview of the video in the default media player.
• Upload.
Upload the video to YouTube.
• Cancel.
Cancel the operation and close Cakewalk YouTube Publisher.
Note: If you use Google two-step verification, you may need to assign Cakewalk YouTube
Publisher an “Application Specific Password”. For details, see https://support.google.com/mail/
answer/1173270?hl=en.
See:
“Preparing audio for distribution” on page 963
Optimizing video performance
Here are a few tips to optimize video performance:
• Viewing your video in on an external DV device will significantly decrease the processor load on
your computer if the video stream is a DV AVI file. See “Video playback on a FireWire DV device”
on page 262 for more information.
• If you intend to do a lot of seeking around or looping and editing while a video file is loaded, make
sure that your video file has sufficient keyframes. Since each frame has to be computed from the
last keyframe encountered, if you have very few keyframes in the video, performance may be
slow. To change the number of keyframes, you may recompress the file using the File > Export >
Video command and specify more frequent keyframes. Choose a suitable video compressor
such as Cinepak and change the KeyFrame Rate parameter to a number between 1-5. A value of
1 makes every frame a keyframe, and higher numbers insert a keyframe after that many frames.
• Changing the video properties of an AVI file, such as Trim and Start time, can make realtime
performance slightly slower. You can make these changes permanent (and thereby reduce the
load on your CPU) by using the File > Export > Video command, and then re-importing the file.
• Playing videos at a resolution (video size) of 320x240 is usually a high enough resolution to
monitor the video while you’re composing a soundtrack. You can still choose to stretch the video
to full screen at this resolution. You set the video size on the Render Quality tab of the Video
Properties dialog box. Using a higher resolution can bog down your computer if you’re
processing audio tracks at the same time.
See also:
“Using the Video Thumbnails pane” on page 260
Controlling playback
Video playback, import, and export
259
Using the Video Thumbnails pane
At the top of the Track view in SONAR is the Video Thumbnails pane, which displays individual
frames of your video at certain time intervals of your project. The time interval between displayed
frames is determined by the zoom level you choose. If you zoom in far enough, you can view each
individual frame of your video.
Note 1: If you’re playing back a highly compressed movie (not many keyframes in the file), it can
take about a minute to redraw video thumbnails when you’re playing the movie or resizing a
window.
Note 2: Some Windows Media videos do not report their frame rate to SONAR. SONAR can
play these files, but cannot create thumbnails from them, so no thumbnails appear in the
Thumbnail pane.
Figure 70.
The Video Thumbnails pane
A B
C
D
E
A. Show/hide frame numbers button B. Show/hide thumbnails button C. Video track strip D. Splitter
bar E. Frame number
Here are the various commands and functions of the Video Thumbnails pane:
• You can show or hide the pane.
• You can show or hide the video thumbnails.
• You can display absolute frame numbers.
• You can resize the thumbnails while preserving the aspect ratio by dragging the splitter bar.
• The video track strip at the top of the Track pane has display fields for Video File Name, Start
Time, Trim-In Time, Trim-Out Time, Duration, and Current Frame, as well as a toggle buttons
to show/hide the thumbnails (without hiding the Video Thumbnails pane), and to show/hide frame
numbers on individual frames. You can edit the Start Time, Trim-in Time, and Trim-Out Time
fields.
• SONAR saves the size and state of the Video Thumbnails pane on a per/project basis.
260
Controlling playback
Video playback, import, and export
• The Video Thumbnails pane zooms horizontally when you use the standard Track view
commands for horizontal zooming. You control the height of the Video Thumbnails pane by
dragging the splitter bar up or down that’s at the bottom of the Video Thumbnails pane.
For step-by-step instructions, see the following procedures:
To hide or show the Video Thumbnails pane
Do one of the following:
• Drag the splitter bar that separates the Video Thumbnails pane from the Clips pane.
• Click the Track view View menu and choose Video Thumbnail Show/Hide.
• Press the V key.
To turn Video thumbnails On or Off
Do one of the following:
• Right-click the Video Thumbnails pane or the Video Thumbnails track strip and choose Show/
Hide Thumbnails on the pop-up menu.
• Click the Show/Hide Thumbnails button
in the Video Thumbnail track strip.
To hide or show frame numbers on frames
• In the video track strip, click the Show/Hide Frame Numbers button
.
To open the Video Properties dialog
• Double-click the video track strip.
To open the Video view
• Double-click the Video Thumbnails pane.
To move the Now time to a thumbnail
• Click the thumbnail.
To change the Start time
• In the video track strip, click the Start field, type a new number in Measure/Beat/Tick format, and
press ENTER. The start time is the time in your SONAR project at which your video starts to play.
To change the Trim-In time
• In the video track strip, click the Trim-In field, type a new number in SMPTE format, and press
ENTER (you can press the SPACEBAR instead of typing colons, if you want, and you can type
single zeros instead of double zeros). The Trim-In time is the time in your video file at which you
want to start video playback.
Controlling playback
Video playback, import, and export
261
To change the Trim-Out time
• In the video track strip, click the Trim-Out field, type a new number in SMPTE format, and press
ENTER (you can press the SPACEBAR instead of typing colons, if you want, and you can type
single zeros instead of double zeros). The Trim-Out time is the time in your video file at which you
want to stop video playback.
To use the Video Thumbnails context menu
1. Right-click the Video Thumbnails pane or the Video Thumbnails track strip.
2. Choose any of these options from the pop-up menu that appears:
• Show/Hide Thumbnails
• Display Absolute Frames
• Open Video View
• Insert Video
• Delete Video
• Export Video
• Video Properties
Video playback on a FireWire DV device
You can view your video projects on an external FireWire DV device.
Note: This feature will decrease the processor load to your computer if the video stream is a DV
AVI file. If the stream is not DV AVI, the CPU load will significantly increase, compared to playing
back on-screen with SONAR’s Video view.
To convert a Video project to DV AVI format
1. Use the File > Export > Video command.
The Export Video dialog box appears.
2. In the File Name field, type a name for your new video.
3. In the Save as Type field, choose Video for Windows.
4. Click the Encoding Options button to open the AVI Encoder options dialog box, and choose
DV Video Encoder in the Video Codec field. Click OK.
5. Click the Audio Mixdown Options button to open a dialog box of audio mixdown options.
Choose the audio options you want, but remember that if you plan to save the project to DV tape,
choose the following audio format:
• Channel Format.
Choose Stereo.
• Sample Rate. Choose 48000.
• Bit Depth.
262
Choose 16.
Controlling playback
Video playback, import, and export
6. Click Save to export your video.
Once you save the video file, it can be re-inserted into a project (see “Importing and playing back
videos” on page 252). If the project will ultimately be exported to tape, that project will need to have
an audio sample rate of 48 KHz playing back at 16 bits.
To play video on an external DV device
1. Connect your external FireWire device. Make sure Windows recognizes the device, and displays
the device’s icon on the Windows taskbar.
2. Launch SONAR and open your video project.
3. In SONAR’s video view (Views > Video command), right-click the Video view and choose
External DV Output > <name of external DV device> from the pop-up menu.
4. Play your SONAR project.
The video disappears from the Video view and appears on your external monitor or camcorder.
Leave the Video view open so that you can move the Now Time frame-by-frame with the Video
view keyboard shortcuts.
If the Video view is the active window, you can use keyboard shortcuts to advance by a frame or a
frame increment. The +/-, and left/right arrow keys move forward/backwards by a single frame. If you
hold down the CTRL key, then the frame increment value is used (default = 5 frames). You can also
use the [ and ] keys to seek by the frame increment.
If your video does not play back in sync with your audio, see “Synchronizing external video playback
to audio” on page 264.
External DV output (IEEE 1394/FireWire)
SONAR relies on the Microsoft AV/C drivers to communicate with DV devices that are connected to
a IEEE 1394 FireWire bus on your computer, in order to control and preview video to digital video
devices.
If another software application overwrites or disables these drivers, the Preview to FireWire and
Print to Tape feature may not function correctly. If you are going to install a software application that
uses DV devices connected to the IEEE 1394 FireWire bus, please check with the software vendor
about DV device drivers it may install. Also, please check with the manufacturer of your DV device
for AV/C-compliance information. The following devices have been tested and known to work
properly with SONAR:
• ADS Pyro A/V Link DV transcoder
• Canopus ADVC-100 DV transcoder
• Canon ZR-85 MiniDV camcorder
Note: When using DV AVI movies, the transcoding unit must be set to the same format (NTSC
or PAL) as the video file, or Preview to FireWire and Print to Tape will fail to work properly. Also,
CPU consumption will be lower when the source material is in DV format, since the format is
native to the FireWire device and doesn't incur a CPU hit for transcoding video.
Controlling playback
Video playback, import, and export
263
Exporting a project to a FireWire DV device
Once your project sounds the way you want it to, you can export the video and audio together to an
external FireWire DV device. This is called “printing to tape,” if your external device uses tape.
To export a project to an external DV device
1. Use the File > Export > Video command to open the Export Video dialog box.
2. In the Save as Type field, choose AVC Compliant Device. You might see a different name in
the drop-down menu, depending on what type of external device you are using.
3. Click the Audio Mixdown Options button to open the Audio Mixdown Options dialog box.
4. In the Audio Mixdown Options dialog box, choose the following options, and then click OK:
• Channel Format.
Choose Stereo.
• Sample Rate. Choose 48000.
• Bit Depth.
Choose 16.
5. In the Export Video dialog box, click the Encoding Options button to open the property page of
your external device.
6. In the property page, use the transport controls to position the tape in your external device to a
blank area for recording.
7. Close the property page, and click the Save button in the Export Video dialog box to start
exporting. If you’re printing to a device that uses tape, the tape stops rolling when the export
process is finished.
Synchronizing external video playback to audio
Because there is more latency in FireWire video playback than in computer digital audio playback,
video playback on an external device will probably be playing back later than the audio tracks in
SONAR.
To sync external video to audio
1. Right-click the Video view and choose Video Properties from the pop-up menu to open the
Video Properties dialog box.
2. On the Render Quality tab of the dialog box, under External DV Output, enter an offset number
in the Video Sync Offset field. The number you enter here causes the Video to start playing
sooner than the audio. It’s helpful if your video has some pre-roll footage that contains a visual
sync point.
Note: The offset is accurate to 3 decimal places, e.g. 1 ms (a thousandth of a second). One
frame of video is approximately 33 ms long for NTSC and 40 ms for PAL; the offset will typically
be less than 1 second.
3. Click OK to close the dialog box. Play your video, and readjust the Video Sync Offset number
as needed.
264
Controlling playback
Video playback, import, and export
Locating missing audio
If you try to open a project and SONAR is unable to locate all the audio files that the project
references, the Find Missing Audio dialog box appears. The Find Missing Audio dialog box helps
you find any missing audio in your project.
See:
“The Find Missing Audio dialog” on page 265
“Restoring missing audio files” on page 265
“Managing shared and external files” on page 266
The Find Missing Audio dialog
Use the Find Missing Audio dialog box to find missing audio in your project. The following is a brief
description of the options you have in this dialog:
• Open. Click this button once you have searched for and found the missing audio file.
• Skip. Click this button to move to the next missing file. When you skip and audio file your project
opens without that piece of missing audio.
• Skip All. Click this button to skip all missing audio files. When you skip all missing audio files,
you project opens without those pieces of missing audio
• Search.
file.
Click this button to begin a search of all available hard drives for your missing audio
• After locating the file Options. You can choose to either move an audio file to the project’s
audio data folder, copy an audio file to the project’s audio data folder, or leave an audio file in its
current folder.
For more information, see “Find Missing Audio dialog” on page 1737.
Restoring missing audio files
When you open a project file that references audio files which SONAR can not find, the Find
Missing Audio dialog box appears. Use the following procedure to restore the missing audio files to
your project.
To restore missing audio files
1. In the Find Missing Audio dialog box, click the Search button.
The Search for Missing Audio dialog box appears and SONAR begins searching all available
hard drives for the missing file or files.
2. When SONAR is finished searching, the files that it has found appear in the dialog box.
3. Select the file or files that SONAR has found and click OK.
The Find Missing Audio dialog box appears.
Controlling playback
Locating missing audio
265
4. Select one of the following options:
• Move file to Project Audio Folder. Use this option if you are sure that no other projects are
referencing this file in its present location.
• Copy file to Project Audio Folder. Use this option if the missing file is shared with another
project and you want to keep all of your project’s audio files together.
• Reference file from present location. Use this option if you want to leave the missing file
in its current location now that SONAR knows where it is.
5. Click Open.
SONAR moves, copies or references the missing file or files as you instructed.
Managing shared and external files
You may want to share files between projects. The files you want to share may be frequently used
sound effects or drum loops. SONAR allows you to choose whether to copy imported audio files to
your project’s audio data directory or to link to them in their current (external) location.
Note: External files are defined as any file not in the project’s audio data folder (or a subfolder
within the project’s audio data folder).
To configure SONAR to always copy files to the project Audio Data folder
If you want to keep all of your project’s audio in one folder (your project’s audio data directory), go to
Edit > Preferences > File - Audio Data and select the Always Copy Imported Audio Files check
box.
To configure SONAR to share external files
SONAR allows you to share external files (files not in the project’s audio data directory). There are
some exceptions, however. Files that have a different sampling rate or bit depth are always copied to
the project’s audio data directory. Also, if the Always Copy Imported Audio Files option is selected
in Edit > Preferences > File - Audio Data, imported audio is always copied to your project’s audio
data directory.
Do the following to ensure that you are sharing files:
1. Go to Edit > Preferences > File - Audio Data and clear the Always Copy Imported Audio
Files check box.
2. In the Open dialog box, when importing audio, make sure the Copy Audio to Project Folder
option is unchecked.
266
Controlling playback
Locating missing audio
Recording
You can add sound or music to a SONAR project in many different ways. You can record your own
material using a MIDI-equipped instrument, use a microphone or another audio input to record digital
audio information, or import sound or music data from an existing digital data file. With the Input
monitoring feature, you can hear your audio instruments exactly how they sound in SONAR,
including any plug-in effects (effects are not recorded, however). When you record audio or MIDI
tracks, SONAR displays a wave preview of your recorded data as you record it.
You can also input new material using your computer keyboard or mouse using the Piano Roll view,
the Staff view, or the Event List view. For more information about entering music using these views,
see “The Staff view” on page 1180, “The Piano Roll view” on page 724, and “The Event List view” on
page 788.
See:
“Creating a new project” on page 268
“Preparing to record” on page 277
“Recording modes” on page 278
“Recording music from a MIDI instrument” on page 283
“Input quantizing” on page 284
“Arpeggiator” on page 286
“Recording audio” on page 293
“Confidence recording and waveform preview” on page 295
“Input monitoring” on page 296
“Loop recording” on page 303
“Punch recording” on page 305
“Step recording” on page 308
“Recording specific ports and channels” on page 316
“Importing music and sound” on page 318
“Saving your work” on page 325
267
Creating a new project
You can add music and sound to an existing project or to a new project. Just as in any Windows
program, you open an existing project file using the File > Open command, and create a new project
file using the File > New command.
When you create a new SONAR project, there are some additional parameters you can set to make
it easier to work on your project. These include:
• Meter and key signature
• Metronome and tempo settings
• Audio sampling rate
• MIDI timing resolution
See:
“Creating a new project” on page 268
“Setting the Meter and Key signatures” on page 270
“Setting the Metronome and Tempo settings” on page 272
“Setting the audio sampling rate and bit depth” on page 274
Using per-project audio folders
For ease of backing up your audio files in a project, SONAR allows you to use a separate audio
folder for each project. This feature is off by default.
To enable per-project audio
1. Go to Edit > Preferences > File - Audio Data.
2. Select the Use Per-Project Audio Folders check box and click OK.
Note: If you use the default project that is created when you open SONAR, you are not using
per-project audio. You must use the Copy All Audio with Project option in the Save As dialog
box to create a per-project audio folder. For more information, see “To save an existing project
using per-project audio” on page 1288.
268
Recording
Creating a new project
Creating a new project file
When you create a new project you are asked to choose a template to use for your new file. If you
have per-project audio folders enabled (for more information, see “Using per-project audio folders”
on page 268), you are also asked to specify a file name, the folder where you want to store the file,
and the folder where you want to store the file’s audio. You can override per-project audio by
unchecking the Store Project Audio in its Own Folder option.
SONAR includes a set of templates you can use to create a new project. These templates include
common types of ensembles, such as rock quartets, jazz trios, and classical full orchestras. When
you create a new project using one of these templates, SONAR creates a project that has MIDI
settings predefined so that one track is set up for each of the instruments in the ensemble. SONAR
also includes a template with two MIDI and two audio tracks (called the Normal template). If you are
creating a new project that will contain only audio material, use the Audio Only template. If you are
creating a new project that will contain only MIDI material, use the MIDI Only template.
You can create your own template files and use them as the basis for other new projects. For more
information, see “Templates” on page 1164.
To create a new project file
1. Choose File > New to display the New Project File dialog box.
Figure 71.
The New Project File dialog
2. If you have the per-project audio folders option enabled, enter a file name, set the folder where
you want to store the new file, and set the folder where you want to store the new file’s audio.
3. Choose a template from the list.
4. Click OK.
SONAR creates the new project file and displays it with the Track view open.
Recording
Creating a new project
269
Setting the Meter and Key signatures
By default, a new SONAR project is in 4/4 time and the key of C major. You can change these
settings to any desired “Meter” on page 2054 or key. These settings apply to all the tracks in a
project. You cannot set different meter or key signatures for different tracks.
The meter or key signature of a project can change at any measure boundary. To insert changes in
the meter or key signature, use the Views > Meter/Key command to display the Meter/Key view, or
use the Project > Insert Meter/Key Change command. You can also click the Meter display in the
Control Bar’s Transport module.
If you are creating a new project that will contain only audio material (no MIDI material), you do not
need to set the meter and key signature.
Note: Groove clips do not follow your project's key. Groove clips follow the project pitch that is
specified in Project > Set Default Groove Clip Pitch, in addition to any pitch markers in the
Time Ruler. For more information, see “Working with Groove Clip audio” on page 706.
The key signature controls how SONAR displays notes in the Staff view, the Event List view, and
elsewhere. The meter tells SONAR the number of beats per measure and the note value of each
beat. Common meters include:
• 2/4 (two beats per measure, each quarter note gets a beat)
• 4/4 (four beats per measure, each quarter note gets a beat)
• 3/4 (three beats per measure, each quarter note gets a beat)
• 6/8 (six beats per measure, each eighth note gets a beat)
The top number of a meter, the number of beats per measure, can be from 1 through 99. The bottom
number of a meter is the value of each beat. You can pick from a list of values ranging from a whole
note to a thirty-second note.
The meter determines the following:
• Where the metronome accents are placed
• How the Now time is displayed
• How the Staff view is drawn
• How grid lines are displayed in the Piano Roll view
270
Recording
Creating a new project
To Set the Meter and Key signature
1. Click the Views menu and choose Meter/Key.
2. Click
to open the Meter/Key Signature dialog box.
The Meter/Key Signature dialog box appears.
Figure 72.
The Meter/Key Signature dialog box
3. Enter the top and bottom meter values in the Beats per Measure and Beat Value fields.
4. Choose the key signature from the Key Signature list.
5. Click OK.
You can also set the meter and key signature in the Control Bar’s Transport module, or choose
Project > Insert Meter/Key Change.
Recording
Creating a new project
271
Setting the Metronome and Tempo settings
The metronome counts off each beat in a measure, so you can hear the tempo of your project. You
can choose to have the metronome sound during recording, during playback, both, or turned off.
When you start recording, SONAR can play any number of beats or measures of metronome clicks
before recording begins. This can help you “get in the groove” before you start performing. These
beats or measures are called the count-in. When you create a new project, you should set the
metronome to play during the count-in and while recording. If you are adding material to an existing
project, you might only need the metronome for the count-in. You can customize the metronome
sound to use audio or any note on a MIDI instrument. By default, SONAR uses a hi-hat cymbal
sound from a General MIDI drum kit for the MIDI metronome, but you can change this setting to
anything you like by changing the MIDI output, MIDI channel, and duration. You can also choose the
note and velocity (volume) to use for the first beat of each measure and for all other beats. The
metronome settings are stored separately with each project, so you can use different settings for
each one.
To enable or disable the metronome during playback or recording, click the Playback Metronome
on/off button
Figure 73.
or Record Metronome on/off button
in the Control Bar’s Transport module.
The Transport module.
A
B
C
A. Metronome during record B. Metronome during playback C. Click to open metronome settings
To configure metronome settings, click the metronome icon in the Control Bar, right-click the
Playback Metronome on/off button
Preferences > Project - Metronome.
or Record Metronome on/off button
, or go to Edit >
Note: If you are synchronized to an external clock source, you cannot use the count-in feature.
For more information, see “Synchronizing your gear” on page 1265.
To set the tempo and metronome for a new project
1. In the Control Bar’s Transport module, click the Playback Metronome on/off button
Record Metronome on/off button
.
2. Right-click the Playback Metronome on/off button
to show metronome settings.
3.
or Record Metronome on/off button
If you want to hear a count-in before recording begins, set the count-in to 1 or more. Select
either Measures or Beats for the count-in.
4. Select Use Audio Metronome or Use MIDI Metronome.
272
and
Recording
Creating a new project
5. Arm at least one track.
6. Press R or click
advance.
to start recording. The count-in will play, and the Now time will start to
7. If necessary, stop playback and adjust the tempo using the tempo control in the Transport
module, the restart playback. Repeat until the metronome plays the desired tempo.
8. Press the SPACEBAR or click
9. Press W, or click
to stop recording.
to rewind to the beginning of the piece.
Your tempo and metronome settings are now ready. When you save the project file, the metronome
and tempo settings will be saved as well.
To change your Metronome settings
1. Do one of the following to access metronome settings:
• Click the metronome icon
in the Control Bar’s Transport module.
• Press SHIFT+F3.
• Right-click the Playback Metronome on/off button
or Record Metronome on/off button
in the Control Bar’s Transport module.
• Go to Edit > Preferences > Project - Metronome.
2. Change the metronome settings as indicated in the following table.
To do this
Do this
Enable the metronome during playback
Select the Playback check box.
Enable the metronome during recording
Select the Recording check box.
Enable the count-in
Enter the number of clicks for the count-in in the Count-in
box, and select Measures or Beats.
Note: The Record count-in always applies if there is a
specified value, even if Playback and Record are not
selected.
Use the audio metronome
Select Use Audio Metronome.
Use a MIDI note as the sound
Select Use MIDI Note and choose the output, channel, and
other settings.
Enable beat subdivisions
Select the desired subdivision value in the Beat
Subdivision list. The selected value is the subdivision for
non-accented audible clicks.
Table 31.
Recording
Creating a new project
273
3. Click OK.
Your metronome settings will be saved with the project file.
To set the MIDI metronome sounds from your MIDI instrument
1. Select a track in the Track view that is assigned to the MIDI device you want to use for the
metronome sound.
2. Right-click the Playback Metronome on/off button
to show metronome settings.
or Record Metronome on/off button
3. Make sure that the settings in the Port and Channel fields match those for the track in the Track
view.
4. Click on the Key box in the First Beat or the Other Beats section.
5. Play a note on your MIDI instrument. The note number is entered automatically. The velocity is
not updated.
6. Click OK.
Your metronome settings will be saved with the project file.
For more information about the metronome, see “Project - Metronome” on page 1826.
Setting the audio sampling rate and bit depth
Each SONAR project has an audio “Sampling rate” on page 2057 and an audio driver “Bit depth” on
page 2048 that indicate the level of accuracy with which audio data are sampled and processed. The
same parameters are used for all the digital audio in a project. When you create a new project, if you
do not want to use the default setting, you must choose a sampling rate before you start recording
audio.
SONAR lets you choose from several different sampling rates: 11025 Hz, 22050 Hz, 44100 Hz,
48000 Hz, 88200 Hz, 96000 Hz, 176400Hz, and 192000 Hz. The default used by SONAR is 44100
Hz, the same rate as audio CDs. However, you may choose a higher rate and later mixdown to
44100. You can also enter any hardware-supported value in the Sampling Rate field. Consult your
hardware documentation for supported sampling rates.
A higher sampling rate produces better quality sound. However, a higher sampling rate also means
that each audio clip takes up more memory and disk space and requires more intensive processing
by your computer. If you have an older computer, or a slow hard drive, you might be better off with a
lower sampling rate. For more information, see “Improving performance with digital audio” on page
1302.
By default, the audio driver bit depth of audio data is 16 bits. If your sound card supports 18, 20, 22,
or 24 bit audio, you can choose to take advantage of these higher resolutions.
If you are creating a new project that will contain only MIDI material (no audio), you do not need to
set the audio sampling rate or bit depth. If you import audio from a Wave file or another digital audio
file, the sampling rate and audio driver bit depth of the wave file are converted to your default setting,
if necessary.
274
Recording
Creating a new project
To set the sampling rate and audio driver bit depth for new projects
Note: If you are planning to move your project to a Digital Audio Tape (DAT) or to some other
media via a digital transfer, set your sampling rate and bit depth to match the target unit. For
example, use 44,100Hz/16-bit for a project that will be mastered to a CD, so that no sample rate
conversion is required.
1. Go to Edit > Preferences > Audio - Driver Settings.
2. Select a value in the Sampling Rate drop-down menu, and a value from the Audio Driver Bit
Depth drop-down menu.
3. Click OK.
The sampling rate and audio driver bit depth are saved with the project file.
Sony Wave-64 support
SONAR fully supports reading and writing to the Sony Wave-64 format, which has a limit of
8,388,608 terabytes!
SONAR only creates Wave-64 file when needed. The Wave-64 format allows an application to
dynamically switch from classic RIFF WAVE to Wave-64 format even if the data was originally
created as a RIFF wave file. SONAR detects when a file will exceed 2GB and will dynamically switch
to the new Wave-64 format.
The following table shows the maximum duration for a stereo WAVE file before we hit the 2GB limit,
as well as the max duration for a stereo Wave-64 file before we hit the 8,388,608 terabyte limit.
Sample Rate
Bit Depth
RIFF-Wave
Sony Wave-64
44,100 Hz
16
3.38 hours
14,524,080,431 days
44,100 Hz
32
1.69 hours
7,262,040,215 days
44,100 Hz
64
50.7 minutes
3,631,020,108 days
192,000 Hz
16
46 minutes
3,335,999,724 days
192,000 Hz
32
23.3 minutes
1,667,999,862 days
192,000 Hz
64
11.65 minutes
833,999,931 days
Table 32.
Recording
Creating a new project
275
When Wave-64 Files are created
Wave-64 files are created behind the scenes automatically under the following usage scenarios:
• When the number of samples recorded exceeds the file size limit of a 32-bit RIFF WAV file
(approximately 2GB file size).
• When you export, bounce or freeze tracks or clips and the resultant wave size exceeds 2GB.
• When you destructively process audio effects on a SONAR clip whose duration exceeds 2GB.
• When you import audio and choose a wave file that exceeds 2GB in size (this could be a Wave64 file).
• When you save a CWB file and the size of any chunk in the CWB file exceeds 2GB, the entire
CWB is saved in the new Wave-64 format.
Note: 64-bit CWB files are incompatible with previous versions of SONAR.
64-bit CWB files
CWB files are RIFF files with multiple WAVE chunks. Therefore, CWB files in previous versions of
SONAR were subject to the same file size limitations of normal RIFF Wav files. This could potentially
result in a CWB file that failed to save because a chunk was too large.
SONAR will automatically use the Wave-64 format if a CWB file exceeds 2GB.
Note: 64-bit CWB files are incompatible with previous versions of SONAR.
Wave-64 file extension
Wave-64 files have a .w64 extension associated with them. Whenever a Wave-64 file is written,
SONAR saves it with an extension of w64.
CWP file persistence for 64-bit sample offsets
The SONAR project file format supports writing 64-bit sample offsets for regions and clips. When a
project containing 64-bit sample times is detected, saving that project automatically rewrites it in this
new format.
Note: Projects that contain 64-bit sample times are incompatible with SONAR 6 and earlier.
Setting the MIDI timing resolution
Each SONAR project has a setting for the timing resolution, or timebase, that indicates the
resolution of MIDI data. This resolution is measured in ticks or pulses per quarter note and is often
abbreviated as PPQ. The default resolution is 960PPQ, which is accurate enough for most
276
Recording
Creating a new project
applications. In this timebase, each quarter note is represented by 960 ticks, each eighth note by
480 ticks, each eighth-note triplet by 320 ticks, and so on.
In some projects you may need a different timebase. For example, if you wanted to use eighth-note
septuplets (7 eighth notes per quarter note) and represent them accurately, you would need to have
a timebase that is divisible by 7, such as 168PPQ. SONAR uses the timebase you choose for a
project to determine the range of tick values in the Now time.
To set the timebase for a project
1. Go to Edit > Preferences > Project - Clock.
2. Choose the timebase you want from the Ticks per Quarter Note list.
3. Click OK.
The timebase will be saved with the project file.
Preparing to record
To prepare for recording, you need to do the following:
• Set the recording mode.
• Choose your input(s).
• Arm one or more tracks for recording.
• Check your recording levels (audio only).
• Tune your instrument if necessary (audio only).
• Set the Now time to the point where recording should start.
• Start recording.
After you record, you can use the Edit > Undo command to erase the most recently recorded
material. You can use the Edit > Redo command to restore the recording and toggle between Undo
and Redo as many times as you like. If you are using MIDI Sync or time code sync for the clock
source, SONAR waits to receive external timing data before it begins recording. For more
information, see “Synchronizing your gear” on page 1265.
See:
“Recording modes” on page 278
“Choosing an input” on page 279
“Arming tracks for recording” on page 281
“Auto arming” on page 282
Recording
Preparing to record
277
Recording modes
Any material you record is stored in a new clip. If you record into several tracks at once, one clip is
created in each track. If you record into a track that already contains clips, you can choose one of
three recording modes to determine what happens to those clips. When you save your project, you
also save whatever recording mode you choose together with that project:
Recording mode
Record button
How it works
Comping
When recording, previously recorded material on the track is
not heard. When a recording is done, the newly recorded
material is heard and all other takes are time-muted for the
duration of the new material.
Overwrite
The new material replaces (overwrites) any existing material.
This means that portions of existing clips may be “wiped
clean” to make room for newly recorded material. While
recording, you will not be able to hear material from existing
clips.
Sound on Sound
The new material is merged with any existing material. This
means that any existing clips on the track are left unchanged
and all newly recorded material is stored in new clips. While
recording, you will be able to hear material from existing
clips.
Auto Punch
Recording only takes place between the punch-in and punchout times. You can use Auto Punch in either Comping,
Overwrite, or Sound on Sound mode.
Table 33.
To choose a recording mode
Do one of the following:
• Right-click the Record button
mode.
to open recording settings, then choose the desired recording
• Click the Record button
and keep the mouse button pressed for a brief moment, then choose
the desired recording mode on the pop-up menu.
• Go to Edit > Preferences > Project - Record, then choose the desired recording mode.
SONAR saves your recording options with each project, so you can save a different recording mode
with each of your projects.
278
Recording
Preparing to record
Choosing an input
To record into a track, you must choose an input for the music or sound to be recorded. Usually, you
choose All Inputs - Omni to record material from a MIDI instrument, or the left or right channel of a
digital audio device (such as a sound card) to record audio material, or stereo if you want to record
stereo audio in a single track. The input for each track is displayed in the track’s Input field and at
the top of each module in the Console view.
When you choose All Inputs > Omni as the input for a track, SONAR merges material from all MIDI
inputs and instruments. This means you don’t have to worry about input, channel, or other MIDI
settings. Sometimes, you may want to record different MIDI channels into different tracks. To learn
how to do this, see “Recording specific ports and channels” on page 316.
While each track can have a different input, it is also possible for several tracks to have the same
input.
To choose a MIDI input in the Track view
1. Click the drop-down arrow of an Input field of a MIDI track.
A drop-down menu of MIDI inputs appears.
2. Choose an input from the following:
• None. This option actually sets the Input field to Omni with this setting the track will record
any MIDI input coming in on any enabled port (MIDI interface input driver) on any channel.
• All Inputs > (MIDI Omni or MIDI ch 1-16). With this setting the track will record any MIDI
input coming in on any enabled port (MIDI interface input driver) on any channel, unless you
choose a particular MIDI channel instead of MIDI Omni. Then the track will only record input
that’s on the MIDI channel you chose.
• (name of MIDI input driver) > (MIDI Omni or MIDI ch 1-16). Choosing this option causes
the track to record any MIDI channel coming from the named MIDI interface input driver,
unless you choose a particular MIDI channel instead of MIDI Omni. Then the track will only
record input that’s on the MIDI channel you chose, from the named input driver.
• Preset. If you want to record multiple data from multiple ports and/or channels, you need to
select a preset collection of those ports and channels. You can select one here (to create
presets, see next line).
• Manage Presets. If you want to create or edit any preset collections of input ports and
channels, you can select this option (see “To create or edit a preset input configuration” on
page 317).
Recording
Preparing to record
279
To choose an audio input in the Track view
1. Click the drop-down arrow of the Input field of an audio track.
A drop-down menu of audio drivers appears.
2. Select the audio driver for the sound card you want to record with from these options:
• None.
This choice ensures that you do not record to the track in question.
• Left (name of your sound card).
channel of your sound card.
Choose this if you want to record a mono signal on the left
• Right (name of your sound card). Choose this if you want to record a mono signal on the
right channel of your sound card.
• Stereo (name of your sound card). Choose this if you want to record a stereo signal.
If your sound card has more than one pair of inputs, a pair of numbers appears after the name of
each audio driver to indicate which pair of inputs the driver is attached to.
Note: Inputs that are used by the External Insert plug-in (see “External Insert plug-in” on page
926) cannot be assigned to track inputs.
To choose an audio input in the Console view or Track Inspector
1. At the bottom of an audio channel strip, click the Input control. A pop-up menu of audio drivers
appears.
2. Select the audio driver for the sound card you want to record with from these options:
• None. This choice ensures that you do not record to the track in question. It also turns off
input monitoring for this track.
• Left (name of your sound card).
channel of your sound card.
Choose this if you want to record a mono signal on the left
• Right (name of your sound card). Choose this if you want to record a mono signal on the
right channel of your sound card.
• Stereo (name of your sound card). Choose this if you want to record a stereo signal.
If your sound card has more than one pair of inputs, a pair of numbers appears after the name of
each audio driver to indicate which pair of inputs the driver is attached to.
To choose a MIDI input in the Console view or Track Inspector
1. At the bottom of a MIDI channel strip, click the Input control. A pop-up menu of MIDI channels
appears.
2. Choose an input from the following:
• None. This option actually sets the Input field to Omni. With this setting the track will record
any MIDI input coming in on any enabled port (MIDI interface input driver) on any channel.
• All Inputs > (MIDI Omni or MIDI ch 1-16). With this setting the track will record any MIDI
input coming in on any enabled port (MIDI interface input driver) on any channel, unless you
choose a particular MIDI channel instead of MIDI Omni. Then the track will only record input
280
Recording
Preparing to record
that’s on the MIDI channel you chose.
• (name of MIDI input driver) > (MIDI Omni or MIDI ch 1-16). Choosing this option causes
the track to record any MIDI channel coming from the named MIDI interface input driver,
unless you choose a particular MIDI channel instead of MIDI Omni. Then the track will only
record input that’s on the MIDI channel you chose, from the named input driver.
• Preset. If you want to record multiple data from multiple ports and/or channels, you need to
select a preset collection of those ports and channels. You can select one here (to create
presets, see next line).
• Manage Presets. If you want to create or edit any preset collections of input ports and
channels, you can select this option (see “To create or edit a preset input configuration” on
page 317).
Arming tracks for recording
SONAR lets you record any number of tracks at one time. You indicate the tracks you want to record
by arming the tracks. You can arm a single track or several tracks at one time. Each track records
material received though its selected input. Whenever a track is armed, not only does the track’s R
button turn red, but the Clips pane that’s to the right of that track’s controls turns a reddish hue.
To arm one or more tracks for recording
Click the track’s Arm for Recording button
.
Note: To see the Arm for Recording button in the Track Inspector and Console view, make sure
the MSR module is visible.
To arm several tracks at the same time, select one or more tracks, then hold down the CTRL key
and click any selected track’s Arm for Recording button
.
A track’s Arm button turns red to indicate that the track is armed for recording.
To disarm all tracks at once
Click the Arm / Disarm All Tracks button
Figure 74.
in the Control Bar’s Mix module, or press CTRL+R.
The Mix module.
Recording
Preparing to record
281
Auto arming
You must arm tracks in order to record. To safeguard your data, there is no automatic arming of any
tracks.
If you want to record MIDI tracks without arming a track, go to Edit > Preferences > MIDI Playback and Recording and select the Allow MIDI Recording without an Armed Track check
box.
This feature lets you start recording a new track simply by making it the current track and pressing R
or clicking the Record button in the Transport module. Auto-arming makes it possible to
inadvertently record over existing material in the current track, however.
Arming tracks during playback/recording
SONAR is able to arm and disarm tracks during playback and recording. This allows you to record to
different tracks while the transport is rolling, without first having to stop playback in order to arm a
track for recording.
To allow arming during playback
Go to Edit > Preferences > Project - Record and select the Allow Arm Changes During
Playback/Record check box.
Note: The Allow Arm Changes During Playback/Record option is disabled by default. When
enabled, SONAR must keep all hardware input ports open so that it can dynamically arm tracks
on the fly. With some drivers in WDM mode, this can add significant overhead if there are many
input devices enabled in Edit > Preferences > Audio - Devices. This may lead to more
frequent drop outs. When using this option in WDM mode, it is recommended that you disable
all unused input drivers in Edit > Preferences > Audio - Devices to minimize this overhead.
Disabling unused inputs is not required when using ASIO mode.
SONAR has an option that can reduce CPU overhead when the Allow Arm Changes During
Playback/Record option is enabled.
When Allow Arm Changes During Playback/Record is enabled, SONAR must keep all hardware
input ports open so that it can dynamically arm tracks on the fly. With some drivers in WDM mode,
this can add significant overhead if there are many input devices enabled in Edit > Preferences >
Audio - Devices).
The new Only For Inputs In Project option instructs SONAR to only open hardware input ports that
are currently active in the project (i.e. assigned to a track).
282
Recording
Arming tracks during playback/recording
To only open active hardware input ports
Go to Edit > Preferences > Project - Record and select the Only For Inputs In Project check box.
Note: If this option is enabled, you will not be able to change inputs while recording.
Recording music from a MIDI instrument
Once you have set your tempo and metronome, and armed one or more tracks, you are ready to
start recording.
To record MIDI
1. Set the Now time to the point in the project where you want to start recording.
2. Click
or press R. If your metronome count-in is turned on, it will play the count-in.
3. Play or perform the material you want to record. As you record, SONAR displays a clip
containing the new material in the Clips pane (unless you have disabled the Display Waveform
Preview While Recording option in Edit > Preferences > Customization - Display).
4. Click
or press the SPACEBAR key to stop recording.
To listen to the new material, set the Now time to the start of the clip and press the SPACEBAR or
click
. If you’re not happy with the recording, use Edit > Undo or press CTRL+Z to erase the new
material.
When you stop recording, if you do not see a new clip in the Clips pane, you may have a problem
with MIDI input. See “Troubleshooting” on page 1363 for more information.
See:
“Recording specific ports and channels” on page 316
Recording
Recording music from a MIDI instrument
283
Input quantizing
Input quantizing allows you to automatically quantize MIDI input during recording. You can see the
results immediately, and hear the results as soon as a track is looped.
Note: Input quantizing does not destroy your original recording. If you press CTRL+Z after you
finish recording with input quantizing enabled, the quantized clip is deleted, and the original
unquantized clip appears, just as you recorded it. If you are using loop recording in Sound On
Sound mode, all the quantized clips are deleted.
You control input quantize settings in the Input Quantize section in the Track Inspector. For details,
see “Input Quantize section” on page 588.
Figure 75.
Input Quantize controls are available in the Track Inspector
To turn Input quantizing on or off
Click the track’s Enable/Disable Input button in the Track Inspector.
To set the resolution
Click the track’s Input Quantize resolution control in the Track Inspector, then choose a resolution
from the drop-down menu. You can also click Quantize Settings in the resolution menu to open the
Input Quantize dialog box, and type a number of ticks in the Resolution field.
Note: To quantize to a custom resolution value, open the Input Quantize dialog box, and type
a custom number of ticks in the Resolution field.
284
Recording
Input quantizing
To set options
Click the track’s Input Quantize resolution menu in the Track Inspector, choose Quantize Settings
to open the Input Quantize dialog box, select the desired settings, then and click OK.
Note: To get explanations of the options in the Input Quantize dialog box, press F1 when the
dialog box is open.
Visual indicators
You will see the following visual indicators when Input Quantizing is enabled:
• When the track is armed for recording, the track’s Arm button
circle.
displays Q instead of a red
• The red swath that appears in a track in the area where recording is taking place changes color.
You can choose a color for this in Edit > Preferences > Customization - Colors by choosing
Clips Pane in the Color Category menu, and changing the entry for Input Quantize Record
Preview Background.
For more information, see “Quantizing” on page 767.
Recording
Input quantizing
285
Arpeggiator
The arpeggiator lets you play intricate patterns of notes that would otherwise be extremely difficult or
impossible to play manually and at speeds and octave ranges that exist beyond the physical
limitations of the player or keyboard range.
Arpeggiated events are new events that are based on notes that you play on your controller
keyboard. The new events are rhythmically and harmonically specified by the arpeggiator’s preset,
allowing you to “play” an endless variety sophisticated musical passages with simple key pressing.
The most significant capability of the arpeggiator is its ability to apply algorithmic variations on your
input as well as MIDI-based patterns.
In addition to note events, the arpeggiator can send parameter automation such as pan, volume,
and even effects automation for the current track.
Each MIDI and instrument track has its own integrated arpeggiator, visually located in the Track
view. Running multiple arpeggiators across tracks can help realize exciting melodic and rhythmic
textures.
The arpeggiator controls are accessed in the Track Inspector.
Figure 76.
286
Arpeggiator controls are available in the Track Inspector
Recording
Arpeggiator
Arpeggiator controls
The following table describes the controls in the Arpeggiator.
Control
Description
Enable/Disable
Enables/disables the arpeggiator on a given track. This control can be assigned to MIDI
remote control and modified in real-time during project playback.
Preset Control
You can create and edit arpeggiator presets; all user parameters are stored in the preset.
• Arpeggiator settings are included in track templates.
• Arpeggiator presets can be saved to a file and exchanged with other users.
• Arpeggiator files are stored in a shared directory.
For details, see “Using patterns and presets” on page 289.
Rate
Adjusts the relative speed of the arpeggiator sequence by changing all the note durations by
a factor of the current tempo. This control can be assigned to MIDI remote control and
modified in real-time during project playback.
Octave Range
Sets the number of octaves through which the arpeggio will play. A value of 1 means that a
held chord will only arpeggiate the notes that are being held within the octave from which the
notes are being transmitted. A value of 2 means a held chord will arpeggiate for two octaves.
The held chord always represents the bass octave, meaning that the other octaves sound in a
higher register.
If you specify a range higher than the standard MIDI specifications, the Arpeggiator will
repeat the pattern in the highest available octave as necessary.
This control can be assigned to MIDI remote control and modified in real-time during project
playback.
Latch
Latch keeps the arpeggio playing after you let go of the keys.
This control can be assigned to MIDI remote control and modified in real-time during project
playback.
Swing
Sets the amount of swing applied to the selected pattern. You can make a pattern of 8th,
16th, or 32nd notes play back as swing notes instead of straight notes. The amount of swing
ranges from 0 (no swing) to 100% (maximum swing).
Velocity
An offset control that scales the arpeggiated note’s velocity to a percentage of the original
note velocity.
Duration
Controls whether the notes in the pattern are held to their full value, or are held for shorter or
longer durations.
Pitch Offset
A transposition control in half-steps, up or down a maximum of 2 octaves.
Flam Amount
If a pattern contains flams, this menu controls how big a difference there is between the
attack time of the flam and the note it is attached to.
Table 34.
Arpeggiator controls
Recording
Arpeggiator
287
Control
Description
Source Mix
When 0, simultaneously held notes arpeggiate as single notes. At 50%, simultaneously held
notes are heard as a chord in addition to the usual arpeggiated notes, both at equal levels. At
100%, only the held chord is audible.
Control: Knob (0 – 100%); this control can be assigned to MIDI remote control and modified in
real-time during project playback.
Ch
MIDI input and output menu—the Arpeggiator only affects input data that’s on the MIDI
channels listed on this menu. The arpeggiator always obeys the track’s assigned output
channel, plus any additional channels specified in the arpeggiators Ch menu.
Shapes
Choose a shape that specifies the direction in which currently held notes are to be
sequenced. The following shapes are available:
• Rhythm (implicit rhythm mode)
• Forward
• Reverse
• Forward Circle 1
• Reverse Circle 1
• Forward Circle 2
• Reverse Circle 2
• Inward
• Outward
• Inward Circle
• Outward Circle
• As Played
• As Played Circle
• Random
Table 34.
Arpeggiator controls (Continued)
Note: Most Arpeggiator parameters can be controlled via MIDI remote control, but automation
data can not be recorded into tracks. For details, see “To set up remote control for a knob,
button, or fader” on page 957.
See:
“Using the arpeggiator” on page 289
288
Recording
Arpeggiator
Using the arpeggiator
One arpeggiator device appears on every MIDI and instrument track, located in the Track Inspector.
To enable/disable the Arpeggiator
• Click the Enable/Disable Arpeggiator button in the Track Inspector.
Figure 77.
Arpeggiator controls are available in the Track Inspector
Using patterns and presets
Pre-authored patterns are used to apply rhythmic and melodic variations to the arpeggio. SONAR
includes many professionally-authored pattern files for you to experiment with. Pattern files have a
.ptn file extension.
An Arpeggiator preset stores a pattern along with the current Arpeggiator parameter settings. Preset
files have a .arp file extension.
You use the Arpeggiator’s Preset control to load patterns and load/save presets.
When playing back through the Arpeggiator, the first pitch in the pattern is moved to the lowest note
currently played.
Note: If the pattern file is a Free Mode pattern, the steps are quantized to the nearest 128th note
value in order to better preserve timing nuances.
To load an Arpeggiator pattern
1. Click the Preset control in the Arpeggiator and select Open Pattern from the drop-down menu.
2. Navigate to the folder that contains your Arpeggiator pattern files (.ptn) and select the desired
pattern.
A
A. Click to load a pattern
Recording
Arpeggiator
289
To load an Arpeggiator preset
• Click the Preset control in the Arpeggiator, point to Presets and select the desired preset.
A
A. Click to load a preset
To load the next/previous Arpeggiator preset
• Click the Next Preset or Previous Preset button in the Arpeggiator.
A
A. Click to load the next/previous preset
To save an Arpeggiator preset
• Click the Preset control in the Arpeggiator and select Save Pattern As from the drop-down
menu.
The current pattern is saved with the current Arpeggiator parameter settings.
A
A. Click to save a new preset
290
Recording
Arpeggiator
Using automation
You can automate the following arpeggiator parameters:
• Source Mix
• Enable/Disable
• Flam Amount
• Duration
• Latch
• Octave Range
• Pitch Offset
• Rate
• Shape
• Swing
• Velocity
To record arpeggiator automation
1. Right-click the desired arpeggiator parameter in the Track Inspector, and select Automation
Write Enable on the pop-up menu.
2. Click the Play button to start playback.
3. Adjust the arpeggiator control as desired. When you are finished recording automation, click the
Stop button to stop playback.
Automation (envelope) data appears in the Track view.
To create arpeggiator automation
• In the Track pane, click the track’s Edit Filter control, point to Track Automation > Arpeggiator
and select the desired arpeggiator parameter.
Automation (envelope) data appears in the Track view.
Tip: Existing envelopes can be reassigned to arpeggiator envelopes and vice versa. To do so, rightclick an envelope and select Assign Envelope on the context menu.
Recording
Arpeggiator
291
To record automation with a MIDI controller
1. Right-click the desired arpeggiator parameter and select Remote Control on the context menu.
The Remote Control dialog box appears.
2. Specify the MIDI message you want to use for MIDI remote control, then click OK to close the
Remote Control dialog box.
3. Right-click the desired arpeggiator parameter, and select Automation Write Enable on the
context menu.
4. Click the Play button to start playback.
5. Move the assigned MIDI controller widget (knob/slider, etc.). When you are finished recording
automation, click the Stop button to stop playback.
Automation (envelope) data appears in the Track view.
Recording and editing arpeggiator automation on an instrument track
You can not record or edit automation data on an instrument track. To use automation on an
instrument track, you must first split the instrument track into separate audio and MIDI tracks, create
or edit the automation data on the MIDI track, then recombine the tracks into an instrument track.
For details, see “Splitting an instrument track to separate audio and MIDI tracks” on page 859 and
“Converting an audio and MIDI track to a single instrument track” on page 858.
See:
“Arpeggiator” on page 286
292
Recording
Arpeggiator
Recording audio
Before you record audio, you should check your input levels. If the levels are too low, you may end
up with too much hiss and background noise in your recording. If the levels are too high, your
recording will be inaccurate or distorted. To check your audio levels, use the audio meters in the
either the Track view, Track Inspector or Console view. To adjust the input levels, you must use your
sound card’s software mixer program (or the Windows 7 mixer) or an external hardware mixer for
certain sound cards.
The audio meters indicate the volume at which the audio will be recorded, in units called decibels
(dB). The meter values range from -INF (silent) to 0dB (maximum volume). You can change many
options in the way SONAR’s meters display data: see “Metering” on page 899. To maximize the
dynamic range of your recording, you want to set the levels as high as possible without clipping.
When the audio level exceeds 0dB, some of the audio information is lost. This is known as
overload. Many sound cards use clipping to deal with an overloaded signal, but clipping can distort
the audio signal. As a result, you should avoid letting the meter level exceed 0dB.
Note: Because SONAR is a digital recorder, a level of 0dB indicates digital zero. Digital
distortion will occur at 0dB. You will not get analog compression or warmth from pushing the
input levels. If you are transferring data from a DAT or another device, you may want to calibrate
the input levels of your sound card with the output levels of other devices in your studio. This will
ensure that 0dB on one unit will appear as 0dB in SONAR.
To check the Input levels
1. In the Track view, choose the inputs for the tracks you want to record, and arm the tracks for
recording. The default meter range is from 0 dB to -60 dB. To change the range, right-click on the
meter and choose a new range from the menu.
2. Perform at the loudest level at which you plan to record.
3. Watch the meters respond. Increase the input volume as high as possible without ever letting the
meters move all the way to 0dB, even for an instant, or letting the Clipping indicator turn red. If
either of these things happen, reduce the input volume just enough to avoid them during the
entire performance. Note that some kinds of audio, such as percussive or plucked musical
instruments, can produce very short, high-level “transients” when struck or plucked aggressively,
which can lead to clipping if the input volume is set too high. Consider the possibility of these
transients when examining the meters and setting your record level.
Note: If the Clipping indicator is illuminated, click on it to reset.
Once you have set your sampling rate and input levels, you are ready to start recording. If the
meters do not move, check your sound card software’s mixer program and make sure that you have
the proper input enabled for recording.
Recording
Recording audio
293
When you record audio, SONAR stores each audio clip in a separate file. These files have the same
format as a Wave (.wav) file, but they have special names and are stored in a separate directory on
your hard disk. SONAR automatically manages these audio files for you, making it easier for you to
manage your projects. If you want to work with these files directly, or to learn more about how
SONAR stores audio data, see “System configuration” on page 1294.
To Record Audio
1. Choose the audio inputs for the track(s) you want to record.
2. Arm the tracks for recording. The Clips pane next to each armed track turns a reddish hue when
the track is armed.
3. Set the Now time to the point in the project where you want to start recording.
4. Click
or press R. If your metronome count-in is turned on, it will play the count-in measures
or beats.
5. Play or perform the material you want to record. As you record, SONAR displays a waveform
preview of the new material in the Clips pane (unless you have disabled the Display Waveform
Preview While Recording option in Edit > Preferences > Customization - Display). If you
have turned off the option, SONAR displays a red swath along the area of the Clips pane where
you are recording.
6. Click
or press the SPACEBAR to stop recording.
SONAR displays a clip containing the new material in the Clips pane. To listen to the new material,
set the Now time to the start of the clip and press the SPACEBAR or click
with the recording, use Edit > Undo to erase the new material.
. If you’re not happy
If you do not see a new clip in the Clips pane, you may have a problem with audio input. See
“Troubleshooting” on page 1363 for more information.
Important: Make sure you have enough space on your hard disk when recording digital audio.
Running out of hard disk space when recording can lead to unpredictable results.
294
Recording
Recording audio
Confidence recording and waveform preview
When you’re recording audio or MIDI data, SONAR gives you many visual cues that tracks are
armed and that SONAR is recording data.
When one or more tracks are armed:
• The Arm button in each armed track turns red.
• The Clips pane next to each armed track gets a reddish hue.
• The Arm / Disarm All Tracks button
the Control Bar’s Mix module is lit.
While you’re recording, SONAR displays these cues:
• Audio tracks display a waveform preview in the area in the Clips pane where you’re recording.
This is actually a visual record of the record meter’s progress. When you stop recording, SONAR
displays the actual waveform, which is slightly different from the preview. The preview is a
snapshot taken at certain time intervals, while the actual waveform represents all the data that is
recorded.
• MIDI tracks display the actual data that they record, both in the Clips pane and the Piano Roll
view (not the Staff view).
• Automation envelopes and nodes are drawn in real time as the automation data is being
recorded.
If you want to turn off the real-time display of audio clips, see the following procedure.
To turn off waveform preview for audio recording
Go to Edit > Preferences > Customization - Display and clear the Display Waveform Preview
While Recording check box.
Now when you record audio tracks, a red swath appears in the Clips pane in the area you’re
recording.
Recording
Confidence recording and waveform preview
295
Input monitoring
Being able to hear plug-in audio effects applied to a live signal is an exciting feature of SONAR.
However, there are two issues that users commonly stumble upon when using the input monitoring
feature. The first is that the monitored signal seems to have an echo associated with it. The second
is that live input monitoring can lead to nasty feedback problems, particularly if you have an
outboard audio mixer, or you record from a different sound card from the one you are playing back
with.
SONAR has several buttons to control input monitoring:
• Per-track Input Echo button. Each audio track has an Input Echo button
track’s input monitoring on or off.
that turns that
• Global Input Echo button. The Input Echo On/Off All Tracks button
in the Control Bar’s
Mix module turns input monitoring on or off on all audio tracks with one click.
• Audio Engine button. To disable all audio activity in SONAR, including input monitoring, click
the Audio Engine on/off button
in the Control Bar’s Mix module so it dims.
Note: When you use input monitoring, make sure that the track you’re playing through uses the
same audio interface (sound card) for both input and output. Using different audio interfaces for
a track’s input and output can produce distortion during input monitoring.
To understand the echo and feedback problems, let’s look at how audio signals travel through your
sound card, the drivers, and SONAR. The following diagram depicts a simplified version of this
signal flow.
SONAR
296
Recording
Input monitoring
The bottom block of the picture represents the sound card. The shaded area above it represents the
audio drivers. The unshaded area at the top represents the main environment of the operating
system.
As the diagram shows, analog audio flows into the card's line input (on the left), and is immediately
split in two. One branch goes up through the analog-to-digital converter (ADC), where the audio is
digitized, buffered and fed to the driver (labeled Wave In in the diagram).
The digital audio data buffers are read by SONAR from the Wave In driver, processed, and then sent
out to the Wave Out driver. The driver passes the digital audio buffers through a digital-to-analog
converter (DAC), where the audio data is converted back to an analog signal.
Finally, this analog output signal is mixed with the original branch of the input analog signal, and the
summed result is presented to the sound card's line output.
With this information in hand, let's follow a simple audio signal through the system to understand
how echoes get introduced into the input monitor path.
Suppose you are counting “1, 2, 3" into your sound card very quickly. When you say the first “1,” this
sound immediately appears in all the places indicated in the illustration above. In other words, the
analog audio signal is pure electrical signal traveling at the speed of light, so it is immediately
present across all analog audio paths inside the sound card.
say “1”
Recording
Input monitoring
SONAR
297
Next, you say “2.” In the time it takes you do that, the ADC has converted the “1” to digital form and
the Wave In driver has fed it to SONAR for processing. SONAR processes the buffer right away and
passes the processed data right back to the Wave Out driver.
say “2”
SONAR
Finally, you say “3.” By this time the original “1” has been converted back to analog audio by the
DAC, and that analog signal is mixed in with the “3” you have just said. The ultimate result is that you
hear a “1” and “3” mixed together at the line output of card—seemingly sounding like an echo, but
actually just an artifact of the signal flow through the system.
say “3”
SONAR
You can eliminate the echo by muting the line-in from playing back (see “To eliminate the echo from
input monitoring” on page 299); you’ll send only the processed signal to the sound card outputs. This
technique introduces a little extra latency to what you hear coming out of your sound card, but if you
use WDM or ASIO drivers with your sound cards, the latency is negligible.
The feedback problem results whenever you have a loop in your mixer path: the output of your mixer
is patched into the input of your sound card. Feedback can happen with or without input monitoring,
but since input monitoring can add several levels of gain to the signal flow, it’s of greater concern
when you have input monitoring enabled. Input monitoring is disabled by default when you install
SONAR, and you enable it with the following procedure.
298
Recording
Input monitoring
To enable input monitoring
• Turn your speakers down, and on an audio track that you want to monitor, click the Input Echo
button so that it’s lit up (on)
. To disable monitoring for this track, click the button off.
Or
• Turn your speakers down, then click the Input Echo On/Off All Tracks
button in the Control
Bar’s Mix module. This enables input monitoring on all tracks. To disable monitoring for all tracks,
click the button again.
Now you can hear your instrument in real time with any plug-in effects that you want to patch into the
current track. You might also hear an echo, because the dry signal is coming out of your sound card
slightly ahead of the processed signal. To eliminate the dry signal, see the next procedure.
To eliminate the echo from input monitoring
1. Open the Windows Volume Control window:
• Windows 7: Click the Windows Start button and go to Control Panel > Hardware and
Sound > Volume Control.
The Volume Control window appears.
2. In the Play Control window of the mixer, check the Mute check box in the Line-In column, or in
the column of whatever jack your instrument is plugged into, and close the mixer window.
Now you can hear only the processed sound when you use input monitoring. Using WDM or ASIO
drivers for your sound card keeps latency to a negligible amount.
Note: This procedure does not eliminate feedback from your system, only the echo. If you
experience feedback, you have a feedback loop somewhere in your mixer setup.
To enable input monitoring when arming tracks
Warning: Be extremely careful when enabling input monitoring on an armed track if you are
working in a room that contains both live microphones and studio monitors. In such a scenario,
enabling input monitoring on an armed track can result in an extremely loud feedback loop
between the microphones and monitors and can damage your ears and speakers.
SONAR makes it possible to automatically enable input monitoring when arming a track for
recording. To do so, hold down the SHIFT key while you click on a track’s Arm button
. Likewise,
holding down the SHIFT key while disabling record during playback will disable input monitoring.
Recording
Input monitoring
299
To automatically disable input monitoring during playback
Go to Edit > Preferences > Audio - Playback and Recording and clear the Disable Input
Monitoring during Playback check box.
When this option is enabled, input monitoring will be disabled on all tracks during playback but not
during recording.
See also:
“Live Input PDC override” on page 300
“Arming tracks for recording” on page 281
Live Input PDC override
While working with virtual instruments and live input monitored tracks, it is important for audio to be
streamed at low latency in order to minimize delay.
Although SONAR supports streaming audio at very low latency, there are cases where internal
buffering can cause additional latency. The most common scenario is when using plug-ins that
require Automatic Plug-in Delay Compensation (PDC). PDC is the process of delay compensating
other normal tracks so they are synchronized with the delayed audio produced by the plug-ins.
Whenever delay compensation takes place on a track that has a live input (an input monitored track
or synth track), it is delayed by the required amount to synchronize it with other tracks. In some
cases, the delay can be noticeable and make live tracking difficult.
The Live Input PDC Override toggle lets you disable delay compensation on live tracks, thereby
removing the latency during playback and recording of such tracks. Since it's a toggle, you can
quickly turn it on to complete your tracking at low latency, and turn it off when finished to hear the
track compensated as normal.
Regardless of whether Live Input PDC Override is enabled or disabled, recorded audio is placed
on the timeline at the correct position as recorded.
Live Input PDC Override is ignored during a bounce/export or freeze operations.
Tip: You can control which tracks are delay overridden by enabling input monitoring only for those
tracks. For more information, see “Input monitoring” on page 296.
To enable/disable live input PDC override
• Do one of the following:
• Click the Live Input PDC Override button
• Press SHIFT+E.
300
Recording
Input monitoring
in the Control Bar’s Mix module.
Figure 78.
The Mix module.
Delay compensation is enabled/disabled on all live input tracks in the project. All other tracks have
normal delay compensation applied.
Note: If the live track being monitored also contains track data (or MIDI data in the case of a
synth track), the streamed track data will not be delay compensated. As a result the recorded
track data will not be in sync with other tracks. You should either mute any clips on the live tracks,
work with an empty region of the track, or use an entirely new track while recording.
Some signal routings can cause tracks to be out of sync when Live Input PDC Override is enabled.
To prevent any potential sync problems, follow these suggestions:
• Output the live input tracks directly to the final bus in the signal flow.
• Send live tracks directly to a hardware main.
PDC re-sync
Some plug-ins, such as iZotope Ozone 4 and various UAD plug-ins, change their internal delay
(PDC) dynamically when certain parameters are modified, presets are changed or internal plug-in
routing is changed. When a plug-in changes its internal delay, SONAR will detect this and re-sync all
tracks in the project to this new delay value. While this is done you may hear a momentary
interruption in playing audio. This is normal and required in order to keep tracks in sync and delay
compensated.
See also:
“Input monitoring” on page 296
“Arming tracks for recording” on page 281
Recording
Input monitoring
301
The Audio Engine button
SONAR has a button in the Control Bar’s Transport module called the Audio Engine button
. This
button lets you turn SONAR’s audio engine off if you’re getting distortion or feedback and want to cut
the sound off. When playback or recording are in progress, SONAR enables the button
automatically—however, the button appears grayed-out during playback or recording because you
can’t control the button at that time.
If you experience feedback during input monitoring, you can click the Audio Engine button to turn
off the audio engine. However, if playback or recording are in progress, the button is unavailable,
and you should click the Reset button
that’s just to the right of it instead, or else stop recording or
playback first and then click the Audio Engine button.
You may experience slightly better playback and recording performance by turning the Audio
Engine button off before you press the Play or Record buttons. This happens if your computer’s
resources are already stretched to the limit. When you start recording or playback with the audio
engine already functioning, there is still some processing that SONAR has to do that’s left over when
you start the transport. This places an extra load on your system that can cause dropouts if your
system is already stretched thin. A more effective solution than disabling the audio engine before
starting the transport is to reduce the load on your system by hiding some meters, increasing latency
slightly, reducing the number of plug-ins and/or tracks, etc.
See also:
“Input monitoring” on page 296
302
Recording
The Audio Engine button
Loop recording
When recording a vocal or an instrumental section, you might want to record several different takes
so that you can choose the one you like best. You might even want to record several takes to double
a part or merge the best parts of each.
Normally, to record each take you would have to arm a track, start recording, perform the take, and
then stop recording. You can record multiple takes more easily using a feature called loop
recording. Loop recording lets you start recording and record as many takes as you like, all in a
single step.
SONAR loops between the loop start and loop end time, allowing you to record one take on each
pass. SONAR creates a clip for each take. You have three choices for where these clips are stored:
• All clips can be recorded in Sound on Sound mode and stored in a single track, where they are
stacked on top of one another. You can use Take lanes to display overlapping clips in separate
lanes.
• All clips can be recorded in Overwrite mode in a single track, where each take is successively
muted except the last one.
• Each clip can be recorded to a different track. SONAR automatically places each take into a new,
empty track. No existing tracks are changed in any way.
When you finish recording, you can use the Edit > Undo command or CTRL+Z to erase all your
takes in a single step.
To use loop recording
1. Choose the input for the track(s) you want to record, and arm the track(s) for recording.
2. Set the loop start and end times in the Control Bar’s Loop module.
3. Right-click the Record button
Recording
Loop recording
in the Transport module to access recording settings.
303
Figure 79.
The Record section
4. Choose to stack all takes in a single track or to store them in separate tracks.
5. If you choose to stack all takes in a single track, choose either Comping, Sound on Sound or
Overwrite mode.
If you use single track and Comping or Sound on Sound with Track Lanes enabled, selecting the
Create New Lanes on Overlap check box will create another Take lane if your new clip overlaps
an existing clip.
6. If you stack all takes in a single track, you can audition them later by using the Expand/collapse
Take Lanes button
in the bottom left corner of the Track pane (each take will have its own
Mute and Solo buttons).
7. Click OK to close the Preferences dialog box, and set the Now time to the point in the project
where you want to start recording.
8. Click
304
or press R. If your metronome count-in is turned on, it will play the count-in measure.
Recording
Loop recording
9. Play or perform the material you want to record. At the end of the loop, SONAR will return to the
start of the loop and you can record the next take.
10. Click
or press the SPACEBAR when you want to stop recording.
The takes are stored in the manner you requested.
Punch recording
Suppose you are happy with most of a track but want to replace some sound or add new material in
one small section—perhaps as small as a couple of notes. This is where punch recording comes in
handy, because it lets you record new material only within a specified range of times.
For example, suppose you recorded a 32-bar keyboard solo but made some mistakes in the 24th
and 25th bars. With punch recording, you can play the entire solo again, so you make sure you can
get the feel you want. However, only the bars you want to correct are actually recorded. That way,
you don’t have to worry about introducing new mistakes elsewhere in the recording.
To use punch recording, follow these steps:
• Enable punch recording.
• Set the start and end times of the punch.
• Choose Comping, Sound on Sound mode or Overwrite mode.
• Start recording by pressing R or clicking the
button on the Control Bar’s Transport module.
The Control Bar’s Punch module shows the punch settings, as shown here:
Figure 80.
The Punch module.
A
B
C
D
A. Auto-Punch On/Off B. Set Punch Time to Select C. Punch In Time D. Punch Out Time
When punch recording is enabled, the punch times are indicated by special markers in the Time
Ruler, which is at the top of the Clips pane:
A
B
A. Punch In B. Punch Out
After you punch record, choosing Edit > Undo both discards any new material you recorded and
restores the original material that had been deleted.
Recording
Punch recording
305
You can also combine loop and punch recording to record several takes of a punch. Say you are
working on that perfect take of a guitar solo and you need to hear a couple of bars of the project as
“pre-roll” before you punch in. By combining looping with punch, you can have each take begin
before you start to play and still have the solo cut in at the appropriate instant.
In the example mentioned previously, you could loop from bar 17 to bar 27 but record only bars 24
and 25. Here’s what this looks like:
B
A
A
B
A. The loop starts and ends here B. The punch starts and ends here
When punch recording, SONAR saves the entire recording while the transport is rolling, but the
recorded clip is cropped to only expose the punch region. By also recording the pre-roll and post-roll,
you have more flexibility later when it comes to slip-editing and cross-fading the clip because you
have access to audio data before and after the punch region instead of only silence.
If loop recording and punch recording are used simultaneously, only the first and last takes can be
slip-edited to expose hidden material.
Note: Although SONAR records while the transport is rolling, visual feedback (confidence
recording) is only shown within the punch region. If recording is stopped before the punch in
point is reached, SONAR discards the recorded data.
To punch record
1. Choose the input(s) for the track(s) you want to record, and arm the track(s) for recording.
2. Enable the Auto Punch on/off button
in the Control Bar’s Punch module.
3. Set the start and end times in one of the following ways:
• Enter the times directly in the Punch module.
306
Recording
Punch recording
• Select a range of time and click
in the Punch module.
• Select a range of time, then right-click in the Time Ruler and choose Set Punch Points
4. Right-click the Record button
to access recording settings, then choose the desired
recording mode: Comping, Sound on Sound or Overwrite.
5. Set the Now time to a point where you want to start playback.
6. Click
or press R to start recording. If your metronome count-in is turned on, it will play the
count-in measures or beats.
7. Play or perform the material you want to record.
8. Click
or press the SPACEBAR to stop recording.
The material you play during the punch time is recorded in the chosen track, either replacing any
existing material (Comping or Overwrite mode) or blending with it (Sound on Sound mode).
To use punch while looping
1. Choose the input for the track(s) you want to record, and arm the track(s) for recording.
2. Set the loop start and end times.
3. Set the punch start and end times, as described previously.
4. Right-click the Record button
to access recording settings.
5. Choose to stack all takes in a single track or to store them in separate tracks.
6. Set the Now time to the beginning of the loop.
7. Click
or press R to start recording. If your metronome count-in is turned on, it will play the
count-in measures.
8. Play or perform the material you want to record. At the end of the loop, SONAR will return to the
start of the loop and you can record the next take.
9. Click
or press the SPACEBAR when you want to stop recording.
The takes are stored in the manner you requested.
Recording
Punch recording
307
Step recording
Step recording is a method of recording MIDI notes one note or chord at a time. It’s a very easy and
precise way to record, but can sound mechanical if used in the wrong situation. You use step
recording in its typical form by choosing a step size, such as a quarter note, and then playing a note
on your MIDI keyboard. When you play the note, SONAR records the note, and moves the insertion
point forward by the distance of the step size (moving the insertion point every time you press a note
is the default behavior). You can then record more notes of the same duration by playing notes on
your keyboard, or you can change the step size while you’re recording and record different size
notes. You can also choose how long the notes you play will sound, as a percentage of the step size.
For example, even though you record some notes that have a step size of a quarter note, if you set
the Duration field to 50%, the notes will be recorded and displayed as a series of eighth notes, each
followed by an eighth rest. The insertion point for each recorded note in this example moves by a
quarter note (the step size) each time you record a note. If the duration is longer than the step size,
the notes will overlap with the notes recorded at the next step.
SONAR displays your step-recorded notes in the Staff view, Piano Roll view, Event List, and Clips
pane in real time as you step record them. SONAR also lets you:
• Use other commands while step recording
Note: SONAR doesn't respond to sync signals while the Step Record dialog box is open and
enabled.
• Change tracks while recording
• Add two step sizes together by pressing the + key between each step size selection
• Delete as many step-recorded notes as you want, while moving the insertion point back through
the steps you delete
• Configure step recording key bindings (see “Step record keyboard Shortcuts” on page 314)
• Make any kind of tuplet
• Create a custom step size lasting any number of ticks (ticks are divisions of a beat—SONAR uses
960 by default); SONAR will remember the custom step size until you change it
• Move the insertion point by beats, measures, or step size
• Link the position of the Now Time to the insertion point
• Offset the insertion point by the number of ticks that you specify
• Randomize duration
• Record notes with constant pitch, and/or velocity, and/or channel
• Hold notes across steps
Tip: By using keyboard shortcuts, you can leave your left hand on your MIDI keyboard to enter notes
with, and control most step recording functions with your right hand on the NumPad.
308
Recording
Step recording
MIDI data is recorded using step record even if the track is not armed. Loop markers are ignored.
And step recording always uses the Sound on Sound (blend) record mode, regardless of the
current record mode.
With Auto Advance disabled, you must click Advance each time you want to advance to the next
step. While this requires more effort, it also provides you with more flexibility. For example, with Auto
Advance disabled, you do not even need to play the notes at a single step at the same time! You
can play any number of notes one at a time, and they will all be recorded at the same step until you
click the Advance button. You can even record notes of different durations at the same step—simply
record the notes of one duration, change the duration, and play more notes, without clicking
Advance.
The Step Record dialog box has two modes: Basic (smaller with fewer options), and Advanced
(larger, more options). To use Basic mode, click the Bas./Adv. button so that the Adv. button is
displayed. To use Advanced mode, click the Bas./Adv. button so that the Bas. button is displayed.
Here’s a picture of Basic mode:
Figure 81.
The Step Record - Basic window
G
F
E
A
B
C
D
A. Insertion point location B. Position slider C. Basic/Advanced button D. Step Record Toggle button to enable/
disable step recording E. Click to move insertion point by step size F. Total step size display G. Custom tick size
field
Recording
Step recording
309
Here’s a picture of Advanced mode:
Figure 82.
The Step Record - Advanced window
A
B
D
C
A. Randomize durations field B. Step pattern recording field C. Click to move insertion point by single
beat D. Click to move insertion point by single measure
To use basic step recording
1. Click the Record button
and keep the button pressed for a brief moment until the pop-up
menu appears, then choose Step Record. The Record button changes to
2. Click the Step Record button
.
to open the Step Record dialog box.
3. Make sure that the Basic mode of the Step Record dialog box is displayed (the Adv. button will
be showing if the Basic mode is displayed; if the Bas. button is showing, click it).
4. Set the insertion point by doing one or more of the following:
• Click the Step Advance button
to move the insertion point forward by the current step
size, or click the Step Backwards button
to move the insertion point backward by the
current step size. SONAR displays the insertion point location in the Insertion point location
field (see Basic mode picture above).
• Drag the position slider left or right to move the insertion point one measure at a time.
• Type a location in MBT (Measure-Beat-Tick) format in the Insertion point location field.
5. Choose a step size by doing one of the following:
• For common step sizes, click one of the notehead icons to choose a step size as large as a
310
Recording
Step recording
whole note
or as small as a 64th note
. You can increase the step size you choose by
50% or 75% by clicking the dot icon
, or double-dot icon
, respectively. You can add
different step sizes together by holding down the CTRL key while you click extra icons, or by
pressing the + key on the NumPad.
• For a tuplet step size, click a notehead icon to choose the “tuplet unit” (for example, for eighthnote triplets, choose an eighth note). Then enable the Tuplet check box and fill in the “n” in
time of “n” fields. For example, if you want quarter-note triplets, click the quarter-note icon
, enable the Tuplet check box, and fill in 3 in the time of 2, which means 3 quarter notes in
the time of 2 quarter notes. If you want eighth-note triplets, click the eighth-note icon
,
enable the Tuplet check box, and fill in 3 in the time of 2. If you wanted 5 notes in one beat,
click the quarter-note icon, enable the Tuplet check box, and fill in 5 in the time of 1.
• If you want to create a custom step size, click the n button
the Ticks field.
, and fill in the number of ticks in
6. Choose a duration by doing one of the following:
• If you want duration and step size to be the same, enable the Follow Step Size check box.
• If you want duration and step size to be different, disable the Follow Step Size check box and
fill in a percentage value in the % of Note Value field.
7. Choose a destination track for your recording in the Destination Track field.
8. If you want the insertion point to advance automatically when you play your MIDI controller,
enable the Auto Advance check box.
9. Play a note or chord on your MIDI controller. When you release the note(s), the insertion point
moves by the step size, if the Auto Advance check box is enabled. If Auto Advance is not
enabled, you can release the notes and record more notes, or you can use the Navigation
controls to advance the insertion point. If you are still holding down a note or notes when you
advance the insertion point, the step size of the held notes is extended by the current step size.
10. Continue recording notes of the same step size and duration to the same track, or change any of
those parameters and continue recording. To create a rest, advance the insertion point without
playing any notes. To delete notes on previous steps, you can press CTRL+Z for each recorded
step. If you want to delete previous steps and move the insertion point back at the same time,
check the Delete on Back Step check box, and click the Step Backward button.
11. When you’re finished recording, close the dialog by clicking the X icon in the upper right corner,
or by pressing SHIFT+R.
You can press CTRL+Z during or after recording to undo your recording one step at a time.
Note: Options that you choose in Advanced mode, such as Link to Now Time, are still in force
when you use Basic mode.
Recording
Step recording
311
To use advanced step recording
The procedure for Advanced step recording is the same as for Basic, but with these extra options,
which become available when you click the Bas./Adv. button in the Step Record dialog box so that
it displays Bas.:
To do this
Do this
Randomize the note duration
Disable the Follow Step Size check box, enter a number
into the % of Note Value field (leave it at 100 if you want to
follow step size), and enter the maximum duration that the
step size should be randomized in the Randomize By field.
Choose a constant pitch and/or velocity and/or
MIDI channel for the recorded note(s)
To choose a constant value for pitch, velocity, or channel,
disable the Use Input check box next to the desired field,
and fill in the value you want to use for that particular
parameter.
Add two step sizes together
See “To add two step sizes together” on page 312
Link the insertion point to the Now Time
Enable the Link to Now Time check box.
Enter notes at an offset distance from the
displayed insertion point.
Enter a positive or negative number of ticks in the Offset
field.
Move the insertion point back or forward by one
beat.
Click the Beat Backward button
Move the insertion point back or forward by one
measure.
Click the Measure Backward button
Use step pattern recording.
See “Step pattern recording” on page 315.
or the Beat Advance
button.
Advance
or the Measure
button.
Table 35.
To add two step sizes together
1. Choose your first step size. If desired, use any combination of tuplet and dotted values.
2. Press the + key on the Num Pad.
A plus sign appears after the value in the Step Size “n” Ticks field.
3. Choose your second step size. If desired, use any combination of tuplet and dotted values.
The total step size appears in the Step Size “n” Ticks field.
4. Press the note on your MIDI keyboard that you want to enter.
The new note appears in your track, and the Now Time moves the distance of the two combined
steps that you entered. To toggle the plus sign on or off in the Step Size “n” Ticks field, press the +
key on the Num Pad. To clear a large value from the Step Size “n” Ticks field, click a smaller value,
or use a keyboard shortcut for a smaller value.
312
Recording
Step recording
To use other commands while step recording
• Use the mouse to click the command you want to use.
or
• Click the Activate Step Recording button
in the Step Record dialog box so that the button
is not red. This disables step recording, allowing you to use both the mouse, and any keyboard
shortcuts that the Step Record dialog box uses, for other commands.
By default, opening the Step Record window will automatically enable step recording. SHIFT+R is
the default shortcut to open the Step Record dialog box. Once the Step Record window is open,
you can enable/disable step recording at will without closing the Step Record window: just click the
Activate Step Recording button
in the Step Record dialog box, or press SHIFT+R.
See also:
“Step record keyboard Shortcuts” on page 314
“Step pattern recording” on page 315
Recording
Step recording
313
Step record keyboard Shortcuts
The default keyboard shortcuts for step recording are on the NumPad, so that you can keep one
hand on your MIDI keyboard to play notes with, and use the other hand on the NumPad to use
shortcuts.
You can use key bindings to configure your own shortcuts. Go to Edit > Preferences > Keyboard
Shortcuts, choose Step Record in the Area field, select a key and a function you want to bind, and
click the Bind button to bind them together. Bind additional keys and commands as needed.
Default setting or option
Default shortcut
Whole note
NumPad 1
Half note
NumPad 2
Quarter note
NumPad 4
Eighth note
NumPad 8
16th note
NumPad 6
32nd note
NumPad 3
64th note
NumPad 7
Custom step size
NumPad 9
Tuplet
NumPad /
Dot
NumPad *
Double dot
SHIFT+NumPad *
Add next step size to previous step size
NumPad PLUS key “+”
Toggle the Delete on Back Step option
NumPad MINUS key “-”
Follow step size
CTRL+Num Lock (does not change Num Lock state)
Step backward
NumPad 0
Step advance
NumPad ENTER
Beat backward
SHIFT+NumPad 0
Beat advance
SHIFT+NumPad ENTER
Measure backward
CTRL+NumPad 0
Measure advance
CTRL+NumPad ENTER
Auto Advance
NumPad PERIOD “.”
Toggle step recording
SHIFT+ R
Table 36.
314
Recording
Step recording
See:
“Step pattern recording” on page 315
Step pattern recording
The Pattern option lets you define a repeating rhythmic pattern of notes and rests so that you can
use step recording more efficiently. For example, suppose your project is in 4/4 time, and one track
has a pattern that is two measures long: quarter notes in the first measure and on the first two beats
of the second measure, followed by a half-note rest on the last two beats. This pattern has six
quarter notes followed by two quarter-note rests.
When you use step recording with Auto Advance, you can play the six quarter notes and SONAR
will automatically advance to the next step. However, to skip over the rests, you need to click the
Advance button two times.
With pattern recording, you define a pattern that indicates where the rests appear in the pattern.
SONAR will then skip over the rests automatically, so you don’t need to click the Advance button at
all.
SONAR displays patterns as a combination of digits (which represent beats that contain notes) and
dots (which represent beats that contain rests). The pattern described previously looks like this:
123456..
Here is another example:
12.4
This pattern automatically skips over every third beat; SONAR interprets this pattern as “one, two,
rest, four.”
Here is one final example based on 4/4 time, with a step size of eighth-note triplets (twelve steps per
measure):
1234.67.90.2
No matter how you enter a pattern, SONAR displays the digits in sequence, with periods replacing
digits at each step where a rest would occur. You can create patterns with up to 64 steps.
To use pattern-based step recording
1. Click the Record button
and keep the button pressed for a brief moment until the pop-up
menu appears, then choose Step Record. The Record button changes to
2. Click the Step Record button
.
to open the Step Record dialog box.
3. Set the insertion point where you want to start recording.
4. Click in the Pattern field.
5. Press any number key to indicate a beat at which notes will be played.
6. Press the SPACEBAR, period, or the letter R to indicate a beat on which there is a rest.
7. When the pattern is complete, click elsewhere in the dialog box.
Recording
Step recording
315
8. Step record as before.
From now on, after you record each step, SONAR automatically advances past all rests to the next
step on which notes will be played. If you change step sizes while recording, the size of each rest
changes also. To stop pattern-based step recording, simply delete the pattern from the Pattern box.
SONAR stores up to 10 patterns in the Pattern field.
Recording specific ports and channels
Most MIDI instruments are capable of sending information on several different channels at once. By
default, SONAR merges all incoming MIDI data and records it on whatever MIDI tracks are armed.
However, SONAR also allows you to control which MIDI input ports and channels each track will
record. Here are some examples of when this feature might be useful:
• There are several performers, each playing a different MIDI instrument. By setting each
instrument to transmit MIDI on a different channel and/or port, you can record each player’s
performance into a separate track, even though they are all playing at the same time.
• You are using a MIDI guitar controller and want to record the notes played on each string on a
separate track.
• Your electronic keyboard has a built-in auto accompaniment feature that plays a drum part and an
accompaniment while you play lead. You want to record each of these three parts into a different
track in a SONAR project.
• You have a MIDI sequence stored on your synthesizer’s built-in sequencer, and you want to
record each channel onto a different track.
You can use external MIDI synchronization to automate the process of loading multichannel
sequences from other MIDI devices. For more information, see “Synchronizing your gear”
on page 1265.
You select MIDI inputs for a track by using the Input control in the Track view, Track Inspector or
Console view.
SONAR allows you to filter MIDI input so that you can record only certain kinds of MIDI data (see
“Input filtering” on page 317), and also allows you to automatically turn off the Local On setting of
your master keyboard.
To assign input ports and channels to MIDI tracks
1. Click a track’s Input control to display the Input drop-down menu. Choose track inputs from
these choices:
• None. This option actually sets the Input field to Omni. With this setting the track will record
any MIDI input coming in on any enabled port (MIDI interface input driver) on any channel.
• All Inputs > (MIDI Omni or MIDI ch 1-16). With this setting the track will record any MIDI
input coming in on any enabled port (MIDI interface input driver) on any channel, unless you
choose a particular MIDI channel instead of MIDI Omni. Then the track will only record input
316
Recording
Recording specific ports and channels
that’s on the MIDI channel you chose.
• (name of MIDI input driver) > (MIDI Omni or MIDI ch 1-16). Choosing this option causes
the track to record any MIDI channel coming from the named MIDI interface input driver,
unless you choose a particular MIDI channel instead of MIDI Omni. Then the track will only
record input that’s on the MIDI channel you chose, from the named input driver.
• Preset. If you’ve created any preset collections of input ports and channels, you can select
one here.
• Manage Presets. If you want to create or edit any preset collections of input ports and
channels, you can select this option (see following procedure).
2. Click OK.
SONAR shows new track inputs in the Input fields in the Track pane.
To create or edit a preset input configuration
1. In the Input field of a track that you want to select inputs for, click the drop-down arrow and
choose Manage Presets from the drop-down menu (this menu is also available from the MIDI
Inputs button in the Track Inputs dialog).
The MIDI Input Presets dialog box appears.
2. In the Input Port column, find the input port that you want to use for this track (if you only use a
single-port MIDI interface, you’ll only see one choice).
3. To the right of the input port, select the MIDI channels that you want this track to respond to on
this MIDI port. Clicking the OMNI button in this row of MIDI channels clears or fills all the check
boxes in this row.
4. Select channels for any other MIDI port that’s listed, if you want to use channels on that port also.
5. If you want to save this configuration, type a name for it in the window at the top of the dialog
box, and click the disk icon to save it.
Now, when you choose inputs for other tracks, you can choose the preset you saved by clicking the
Presets option in the track’s Input drop-down menu. If you want to edit a preset, select it in the top
window of the MIDI Input Presets dialog box, edit it, and click the disk icon. If you want to delete a
preset, select it in the same dialog box and click the X button to delete it.
Input filtering
SONAR lets you filter out specific types of MIDI messages or filter the MIDI input stream channel by
channel. Any MIDI information that is filtered out is neither recorded nor echoed to any other MIDI
devices.
You can use the message type filter to screen out resource-intensive MIDI messages like key and
channel aftertouch. By default, SONAR records all types of events except these two.
You can use message-type filtering to record short System Exclusive (Sysx) messages in real-time.
These will end up in the track as Sysx data events, which can hold System Exclusive messages up
to 255 bytes. Leave the Buffers setting at 128 unless you experience data not being recorded. For
more information about Sysx, see “System exclusive data” on page 1251.
Recording
Recording specific ports and channels
317
To filter event types
1. Go to Edit > Preferences > MIDI - Playback and Recording.
2. Check the message types you want recorded.
3. Click OK.
From now on, SONAR records only the types of events you have chosen.
Importing music and sound
While recording is perhaps the most common way of adding material to a SONAR project, there are
several other methods you can also use. SONAR lets you import music into a project from several
different types of digital data files, including MIDI files; audio files in Wave, MP3, AIFF, and other
formats; audio CD tracks and other SONAR project files.
See:
“Importing audio CD Tracks” on page 321
“Importing audio CD Tracks” on page 321
“Importing material from another SONAR project” on page 321
“Importing MIDI files” on page 324
See also:
“Adding Browser objects to your project” on page 613
Importing audio files
SONAR lets you insert digital audio information into any track of a project. If the audio file you are
importing is in stereo, then it can be imported into a single stereo track, a pair of mono tracks or a
single mono track.
The File > Import > Audio command supports the following digital audio file types:
• Wave (extension .wav)
• MPEG (extensions .mpeg, .mpg, .mp2, and .mp3)
• Apple AIFF (extensions .aif and .aiff)
• Active Streaming (extension .asf)
• Next/Sun (extensions .au and .snd)
• REX (extensions .rex, .rx2, and .rcy)
• Sony Wave64 (extension .w64)
• FLAC (extension .flac)
318
Recording
Importing music and sound
• Sound Designer II (extension .sd2)
• Core Audio Format (extension .caf)
The sampling rate and bit depth for a project is set based on your default settings in Edit >
Preferences > Audio - Driver Settings. If the sampling rate from the Wave file does not match the
sampling rate in your project, then it will be converted to the current project’s sampling rate and bit
depth.
To import an audio file
1. Set the Now time and current track to indicate where the audio should be placed.
2. Choose File > Import > Audio to display the Open dialog box.
3. Choose the audio file you want to import. SONAR displays information about the file at the
bottom of the dialog box.
4. Click Play to listen to the audio file before importing.
5. If the new file is stereo, check the Stereo Split option if you want to insert the file into two
separate tracks.
6. Click Open.
SONAR loads the audio data from the audio file and places it in the selected track at the Now time.
Preview bus
Files in the Import Audio dialog box may be selected and previewed in any existing bus in SONAR.
To preview a file
1. Select the desired output bus in the Preview Bus combo box.
2. Click on the file in the file explorer pane.
3. Click the Play button.
4. During playback, the Play button becomes a Stop button. Click Stop to stop playback.
Recording
Importing music and sound
319
Broadcast Wave files
Broadcast Wave files are wave files with some additional information stored in them. Broadcast
Wave files have the following information:
• Description. A brief description of the contents of the Broadcast wave. Limited to 256
characters.
• Originator. The author of the Broadcast wave. This information is taken from the Author field in
the “File Info dialog” on page 1736.
• Originator Reference. A unique reference identifier created by SONAR.
• Origination Date.
The date the file was created.
• Origination Time.
The time the file was created.
• Time Reference. The SMPTE time stamp for the beginning of broadcast wave.
To import a Broadcast Wave file:
1. If you want SONAR to import Broadcast Wave files always at their timestamped location, go to
Edit > Preferences > File - Audio Data and select the Always Import Broadcast Waves At
Their Timestamp check box. Otherwise, set the Now Time and current track to indicate where
the audio should be placed.
2. Choose File > Import > Audio to display the Open dialog box.
3. Choose the audio file you want to import. SONAR displays information about the file at the
bottom of the dialog box.
4. Click Play to listen to the audio file before importing.
5. If the new file is stereo, check the Stereo Split option if you want to insert the file into two
separate tracks.
6. Click Open.
If the Always Import Broadcast Waves At Their Timestamp option is selected in Edit >
Preferences > File - Audio Data, the imported Broadcast Wave file appears at its timestamp on the
selected track. Otherwise, the file appears at the Now Time on the selected track.
Note: When importing Broadcast Wave files, you can hold down the SHIFT key to temporarily
toggle the behavior of the Always Import Broadcast Waves At Their Timestamp global
option.
320
Recording
Importing music and sound
Importing audio CD Tracks
The File > Import > Audio CD command lets you import tracks from audio CD’s into any track of a
project.
Audio tracks on a CD always have a bit depth of 16, but you can choose to import the tracks at a
higher bit depth if desired.
To import a track from an audio CD
1. Set the Now time and current track to indicate where the audio should be placed.
2. Insert an audio CD into the computer’s CD drive.
3. Choose File > Import > Audio CD to display the “Import Audio CD Tracks dialog” on page 1749
box.
4. Make sure the correct CD drive is selected in the Target Drive drop-down list.
5. Choose the audio track you want to import. SONAR displays the length and size of all audio
tracks.
6. Click Play to listen to the audio track before importing.
7. If you want to import the audio with a different bit depth than the original audio track, choose the
desired bit depth from the Import Bit Depth drop-down list.
8. Click OK.
SONAR loads the audio data from the audio CD and places it in the selected track at the Now time.
Importing material from another SONAR project
You use the Edit > Copy and Edit > Paste commands to import material from one project to another
using the Clipboard. The project that contains the material you want to import is the source project.
The project into which the material is imported is the target project.
Normally, if you copy material from several different tracks to the Clipboard, the information will be
pasted back into separate tracks. You can choose to paste all the material from the Clipboard into a
single destination track in the target project.
You can also copy material from one project to another by displaying the Track view for both projects
side by side, then using drag-and-drop editing.
Recording
Importing music and sound
321
To import material from another project
1. Open the source project, or click in the Track view for that project.
2. In the Track view, select the material you want to import.
3. Choose Edit > Copy Special to display the Copy dialog box.
4. Make sure that Events in Tracks is checked. If you don’t want to import tempo changes, meter/
key changes, or markers, uncheck those options. Click OK.
5. Open the target project, or click in the Track view for that project.
6. Set the Now time and current track to indicate where the material should be placed.
7. Choose Edit > Paste Special to display the Paste dialog box.
8. Check Paste to One Track if you want all material imported into the current track (not
recommended if you’re importing both MIDI and audio data).
9. Click OK.
SONAR imports the material and displays it in the Track view.
Importing OMF projects
With OMFI (Open Media Framework Interchange) support & Broadcast WAVE support SONAR lets
you collaborate and exchange project files with users of other programs and platforms. Support for
OMFI and Broadcast Wave files provides cross-platform compatibility with OMFI host applications
such as Pro Tools, Avid and Logic systems. SONAR also exports projects as OMF files that you can
open in Pro Tools and other audio software.
SONAR allows you to select sample rate and bit depth during OMF import.
A few general guidelines for preparing OMF files for import into SONAR:
• OMF version 2 is preferred.
• AIFC can take slightly longer to open, as the data must be converted to WAVE on read, so WAVE
is the best choice.
• If exporting from Avid Xpress DV, select “embed” (not “link”) when exporting the OMF file, and
don't include any video.
OMF explained
The OMF format, or OMFI (Open Media Framework Interchange, means the same as OMF), is a file
format that can be read by many professional-level audio programs. OMF files contain two basic
types of information:
• Audio and/or video files, referred to as media
• Information needed to put the media data in sequence—known as the Composition
The OMF file supplies the following data and information:
• Tracks
• Clip positions—an OMF file's EDL edit resolution can be either frame accurate or sample
322
Recording
Importing music and sound
accurate. SONAR can read either, but always writes sample accurate. The clip position is
specified in absolute samples.
• Slip edits
• Fades and crossfades (as destructive edits)—SONAR renders any fades when it writes OMFs,
creating separate clips for any fade-ins or fade-outs. SONAR slip-edits the original clip to make
room for the fade-in and fade-out clips. If you export to an audio program that supports slip
editing, the user can delete the fade clips and roll out the original clip to return to the original raw
audio (without fades) if desired.
• Sample rate and audio bit depth, but only if the media are embedded in the OMF
The OMF file does NOT supply the following data and information:
• Volume and pan envelopes—OMF does actually support limited automation. However, as with
Nuendo and most other OMF host programs, gains and pans are ignored (on both read and write)
in SONAR as they are only supported on MONO tracks (OMF limitation).
• Plug-in effects.
• MIDI data
• Tempo
Whoever supplies the OMF file that you want to open in SONAR should also send along a text file
containing all pertinent information about the project, especially tempo.
To open OMF files in SONAR
1. Use the File > Open command, which opens the Open dialog box.
2. In the Files Of Type field, select OMF File.
3. Navigate to the folder that contains your OMF files, select the OMF file you want to open, and
then click the Open button, which opens the Unpack OMF dialog box.
4. If you know the exact tempo of the file, enter it into the Initial Tempo field. It is always preferable
to know and enter the project tempo at this point. If you don't know the project tempo you can
open the file at the default tempo and then change the file's tempo later, but this will cause the
clips to move.
5. The Sample Rate field displays the sample rate of the imported audio (if the audio is embedded
in the OMF). Use this field to change the sample rate, if you need to.
6. The Bit Depth field displays the bit depth of the imported audio if the audio is embedded. If the
audio is external, the Bit Depth field defaults to the Original menu option, which will import the
audio at the bit depth the audio is currently using. If you want to import the audio at a different bit
depth, you can choose the bit depth in this field.
7. If you have previously enabled SONAR's Use Per-Project Audio Folders option in Edit >
Preferences > File - Audio Data, then the Store Project Audio In Its Own Folder check box is
already enabled, and the fields under it are available. If you want to use this option, fill out the
fields below the check box; otherwise, disable the check box.
8. Click OK.
SONAR opens the OMF file.
Recording
Importing music and sound
323
You can also export SONAR projects as OMF files (File > Export > OMF command).
See “Exporting OMF files” on page 972.
Importing MIDI files
You can create a new SONAR project from a MIDI file simply by opening the file. SONAR takes
material from the file and places it into one or more tracks in the Track view.
To import data from a MIDI file into a project
1. Open the MIDI file as a new, separate project.
2. Choose Edit > Select > All.
3. Choose Edit > Copy Special to display the Copy dialog box.
4. Make sure that Events in Tracks is checked. If you don’t want to import tempo changes, meter/
key changes, or markers, uncheck those options. Click OK.
5. Open the target project, or click in the Track view for that project.
6. Set the Now time and current track to indicate where the material should be placed.
7. Choose Edit > Paste Special to display the Paste dialog box.
8. Check Paste to One Track if you want all material imported into the current track.
9. Click OK.
SONAR imports the material and displays it in the Track view.
Importing audio / MIDI files from the Clips pane
It is possible to import audio and MIDI files via the Clips pane context menu. Imported files are
inserted at the Now time.
To import audio/MIDI files
1. In the Clips pane, right-click the track to which you want to import an audio or MIDI file.
The Clips pane context menu appears.
2. Do one of the following:
• Select Import Audio to import an audio file.
• Select Import MIDI to import a MIDI file.
See:
“Importing music and sound” on page 318
324
Recording
Importing music and sound
Saving your work
Like most Windows programs, SONAR has a File > Save command and a File > Save As
command to save your work. Normally, you save your projects in the standard project file format,
with a file extension of .cwp. This file contains all your MIDI data and all your project settings. Any
digital audio that is part of your project is stored in a separate file, as described in “System
configuration” on page 1294.
SONAR also lets you save files in several other formats, as described in the table:
File type
Format
Explanation
Standard MIDI
.mid
Used to transfer MIDI-only projects to other software products that support
Standard MIDI files.
Bundle
.cwb
A single file that includes all the material in your project: MIDI data, project
settings, and audio data. This format is used for projects that contain digital
audio, when you want to back up your work or transfer a project to a different
computer. See “Backing up projects with digital audio” on page 1290 for
more information.
Note: Bundle files do not save video data.
Template
.cwt
A file that is used as a pattern to create another. Templates make it easy to
create and configure new projects. See “Templates and key bindings” on
page 1163 for more information.
Table 37.
If you have made changes to a project and then attempt to close the project, either by closing the
Track view or by choosing File > Close, SONAR asks if you want to save the changes you have
made. This prevents you from accidentally losing your work. You can tell whether changes have
been made to a project by looking for an asterisk (*) after the project name in the SONAR title bar.
SONAR has an Auto Save feature that periodically saves your work into a special backup file. You
can request automatic backups at fixed time intervals or every time a certain number of changes
have been made to the file. When the limit is reached, the file is saved automatically. If your original
project is called MyProject.cwp, the Auto Save version is called Auto Save Version of
MyProject.cwp.
If there is a power failure or if you make a significant mistake, you can recover the last-saved version
of your project by opening this file. You should then save your project under a different name by
using the File > Save As command.
Recording
Saving your work
325
To Save a project
1. Choose File > Save As to display the Save As dialog box.
2. Choose the type of file you want to save from the Save as Type list.
3. Enter a file name and click Save.
SONAR saves the file. You can also use File Versioning instead of using Save As. For more
information, see “To use File Versioning” on page 326.
To change the Auto Save settings
1. Go to Edit > Preferences > File - Advanced to access Auto Save settings.
2. To enable Auto Save, set the number of minutes and/or the number of changes between saves.
3. To disable Auto Save, set both values to zero.
4. Click OK.
From now on, your projects are saved automatically according to the settings you entered.
Using File Versioning
SONAR can be enabled to keep previously saved versions of your project in a temporary file. You
can revert to any of these saved versions or use the default of the most recently saved version.
When file versioning is enabled, SONAR retains a list of previously saved project files in your project
folder. The most recent version retains the original name of the project. Previously saved versions
are saved with a time stamp following the original project name in order of most recently saved.
To use File Versioning
1. Go to Edit > Preferences > File - Advanced to access File Versioning settings.
2. Check the Enable Versioning Of Project (.CWP) Files check box.
3. Use the spinner to select the number of versions of your project you would like SONAR to keep.
Note: If you exceed the maximum number of saved file versions selected in Step 3, the oldest
version is discarded.
To revert to a previously saved file
1. Choose File > Revert.
A dialog box appears containing a list of dates and file sizes for all previously saved versions of
the current project.
2. Select the file version you want to work on.
3. Click OK.
Note: If the current project is unsaved at the time you choose File > Revert, you will be
prompted with a warning that reverting the project will cause all unsaved changes to be lost.
When the reverted project is loaded, the timestamp is stripped off, and the reverted project
assumes the project’s original name.
326
Recording
Saving your work
Labeling your projects
SONAR lets you attach subtitles, composer credits, copyright, and other information to your projects,
as shown in the following table.
Label
Description
Title
The title for your project; prints automatically at the top of a Staff view printout.
Subtitle
For a subtitle or dedication; prints directly below the title in a Staff view printout.
Instructions
Use for performance instructions; prints flush left in a Staff view printout.
Author
Put your name here if you are the composer. Prints flush right in a Staff view printout.
Copyright
Copyright information prints flush right, under the author name, in a Staff view
printout.
Keywords
Put keywords describing the project here for future reference.
Comments
Free text comments. Type as much as you like. You can enter approximately the
same amount of text as you can in Windows Notepad.
Table 38.
This information is shown in the “File Info dialog” on page 1736 box, which is displayed using the
Project > Info command. If the File Info window is open when you save a file, then this window is
displayed automatically the next time the file is opened. This is useful if you:
• Share files with others and want them to see special instructions when they open the file
• Want your copyright information to be displayed automatically
If the File Info window is closed when you save the file, it will not be automatically displayed the next
time the file is opened.
Although you cannot use Edit menu commands while working in the File Info window, standard
Windows hot keys like CTRL+X, CTRL+C, and CTRL+V can be used to cut, copy, and paste text.
To display and edit project information
1. Choose Project > Info to display the File Info window.
2. Edit the information as desired.
Recording
Saving your work
327
Figure 83.
The File Info window
3. If you want the File Info window to display automatically, save the file.
4. Click Stats to see statistics about the contents of the file.
5. Choose File > Print Preview if you want to print the project information
6. Close the File Info window.
File statistics
To open the File Statistics dialog box, select Project > Info and click the Stats button in the File
Info dialog box. The File Statistics dialog box displays the following information about the contents
of the project file:
Statistic
What it means
Created
The date the project was first saved.
Editing time
The total time you’ve had the project open, from the time it was created to the last
time it was saved. This does not include time spent editing the project since you
last saved it. If you want to update this value, save the project.
Revision
Each time you save a file that has been changed, this number is incremented. If
you open a project, make no changes, then save it, the revision number is not
changed.
Events
The total number of events in the project.
Sample rate
The sample rate for digital audio.
Bit depth
The audio driver bit depth of digital audio.
File version
The SONAR version number.
Table 39.
328
Recording
Saving your work
Arranging and editing
The Track view makes it easy to arrange and mix your projects from a single view. From one
location, you can select, copy, move, mix, and rearrange the parts of your project, using menu
commands or drag-and-drop tools.
You can add real-time audio and MIDI effects from the effects bin and buses.
Markers provide easy-to-use reference points and labels for the different parts of your project, and
the snap grid makes it easy to align your clips to the desired time points.
Slip-editing allows you to non-destructively change the start and/or end time of a clip, just by
dragging its borders.
With Groove clips, you can easily create repetitions of your clips using your mouse.
Both the Track view and Console view have a full set of record and playback meters, which you can
configure in several ways. SONAR also has a variety of tools and commands for changing the
tempo of your project.
Composite tracks allow you to keep all your takes in one track if you want, and selectively mute and
solo the various clips in the track. Track folders let you edit multiple tracks at once and conserve
screen space.
See:
“Arranging tracks” on page 330
“Working with track templates” on page 337
“Track icons” on page 338
“Arranging clips” on page 341
“Working with partial clips” on page 368
“Clip groups” on page 361
“Nudge” on page 366
“Markers and the snap grid” on page 369
“Working with linked clips” on page 377
“Splitting and combining clips” on page 379
329
“Take lanes” on page 381
“Clip muting and isolating (clip soloing)” on page 388
“Comping” on page 391
“Track folders” on page 414
“Adding effects in the Track view” on page 417
“Changing tempos” on page 418
“Undo, redo, and the undo history” on page 425
“Slip-editing (non-destructive editing)” on page 426
“Enhanced editing with keyboard” on page 434
Arranging tracks
SONAR provides a variety of commands that let you work with the tracks in your project. Here are
some of the things you can do.
You can
Here’s why
Rearrange the tracks in the Track
view so that they appear in a
different order
This makes it easier to see and work with a subset of tracks, like the
rhythm section, or the vocals and vocal backing tracks, or all muted tracks.
Hide individual tracks
This makes it easier to work in a large project. You can display only the
tracks you want to see at a given time.
Move tracks into a track folder
Lets you group tracks by function, edit several tracks at once, hide groups
of tracks easily, and mute, solo, archive, arm, or input monitor a group or
tracks with one click. See “Track folders” on page 414 for more
information.
Make copies of a track
Copying a track and then adding a time offset or changing the patch is an
easy way to double a part. You can also copy and then transpose a track to
add harmony.
Erase or delete a track
Tracks and clips that you are no longer using in your project are distracting
and take up space in your project file.
Table 40.
All the commands you use to arrange tracks work on selected tracks. The current track (the one with
the lighter track name background color) is always selected. You can select additional tracks as
shown in the following table.
330
Arranging and editing
Arranging tracks
To do this
Do this
Select a track
Click the track number in the Track view. The track is selected, and all
other tracks—except the current track—are deselected.
When a track is selected, both the track number and all the data in the
track appear highlighted.
Select several adjacent tracks
Click the track number for the first track in the group, drag the mouse to
the last track number in the group, and release the mouse button.
Select/deselect all tracks
Double-click a track number.
Add or remove a single track from
the selection
Hold the SHIFT key and click the track number to add it to the selection;
hold the CTRL key and click the track number to toggle its selection
status.
Select all buses that a track is routed Hold down the ALT key and click the track number.
to (via output or sends).
Table 41.
Note: Track selection gestures also apply to buses. For details, see “Bus selection” on page
893.
See:
“Changing the order of tracks” on page 331
“Configuring the display of tracks in the Track view” on page 334
“Inserting tracks” on page 333
“Copying tracks” on page 336
“Erasing tracks” on page 337
Changing the order of tracks
There are several ways you can change the order of tracks in the Track view:
• Drag a track to a new position in the Track view.
• Use the Track view Tracks > Sort Tracks command to rearrange the tracks in order based on the
track name, status, or other setting.
Arranging and editing
Arranging tracks
331
To drag a track to a new position
1. Position the mouse just to the right of the track number, over the track icon of the track you want
to move.
The cursor changes to an up/down arrow.
2. Drag the track to its new location, and release the mouse button.
SONAR rearranges and renumbers the tracks.
You can sort the tracks in a project based on several parameters, in either ascending or descending
order:
Sort by
What happens
Name
Ascending puts track in alphabetic order, descending puts them in
reverse order
Size, output, or channel
Ascending puts them in increasing numeric order, descending puts them
in decreasing numeric order
Muted, archived, selected
Ascending puts qualifying tracks at the end, descending puts them at
the beginning
Table 42.
No matter how you sort, blank tracks always go to the end of the list.
Note that track numbers are used for reference only. When you re-arrange the order of tracks, they
are automatically assigned sequential numbers based on the order in which they are displayed in
the Track view.
To sort the tracks
1. Click the Track view Tracks menu and choose Sort Tracks to open the Sort Tracks dialog box.
2. Choose the attribute by which to sort from the Sort By list:
Attribute
How it works
Name
If you choose this attribute, SONAR puts the tracks into alphabetical order, either ascending
or descending, depending on what you choose in the Order list.
Muted
If you choose this attribute, SONAR puts all the muted tracks at either the top or bottom of
the Tracks window, depending on whether you choose descending (top) or ascending
(bottom) in the Order list.
Archived
If you choose this attribute, SONAR puts all the archived tracks at either the top or bottom
of the Tracks window, depending on whether you choose descending (top) or ascending
(bottom) in the Order list.
Table 43.
332
Arranging and editing
Arranging tracks
Attribute
How it works
Selected
If you choose this attribute, SONAR puts all the selected tracks at either the top or bottom of
the Tracks window, depending on whether you choose descending (top) or ascending
(bottom) in the Order list.
Size
If you choose this attribute, SONAR puts the tracks in order by size, either in descending or
ascending order.
Output
If you choose this attribute, SONAR sorts the tracks by output number, either in descending
or ascending order. SONAR considers non-numbered outputs to have lower numbers than
numbered outputs.
Channel
If you choose this attribute, SONAR sorts the tracks by channel number, either in
descending or ascending order:
• If you choose ascending order, SONAR puts all MIDI tracks at the bottom of the Tracks
window, with the lower channel numbers first.
• If you choose descending order, SONAR puts all MIDI tracks at the top of the Tracks
window, with the higher channel numbers first.
Table 43.
3. Choose the order in which to sort from the Order list.
4. Click OK.
SONAR sorts the tracks according to the settings you chose.
Inserting tracks
You can insert new tracks by a variety of methods. When you insert multiple tracks, you can set track
output properties at the same time. If you want new audio tracks to always use the same output bus,
you can set that bus as the default bus.
For step-by-step instructions, follow these procedures:
To insert a single track
Do one of the following:
• Click the Insert menu and choose Audio Track or MIDI Track.
• Right-click in the Track pane at the place where you want to insert a track, and select Insert
Audio Track to add an audio track or Insert MIDI Track to add a MIDI track.
• Press INSERT to add a track of the same type (audio or MIDI) as the current track.
SONAR shifts the current track and all tracks below it down by one, and inserts a blank, new track at
the location of the highlight.
Arranging and editing
Arranging tracks
333
To insert multiple tracks
1. Use the Insert > Multiple Tracks command to open the Insert Tracks dialog box.
2. If you want to insert audio tracks, do the following:
• Fill in the number of audio tracks you want to insert in the Audio section’s Track Count field.
• Pick a main audio output for the tracks in the Main Destination field.
• If you want the main output that you chose to be the default output for new audio tracks,
enable the Set as Default Bus check box. You can also choose the default bus by rightclicking a bus, and choosing Set as Default Bus from the pop-up menu.
• If you want your new audio tracks to contain a Send module that outputs to a specific bus,
choose the bus in the Send field. If you choose None, the new audio tracks will not contain a
Send module.
3. If you want to insert MIDI tracks, do the following:
• Fill in the number of MIDI tracks you want to insert in the MIDI section’s Track Count field.
• Pick a MIDI output for the tracks in the Port field.
• Pick a MIDI output channel for the tracks in the Channel field.
4. Click OK to insert your tracks, or click Cancel to cancel the operation.
Your new tracks appear below any pre-existing tracks, with new audio tracks appearing above new
MIDI tracks.
Note: You can also choose the default output bus for new audio tracks by right-clicking a bus,
and choosing Set as Default Bus from the pop-up menu.
Configuring the display of tracks in the Track view
There are several commands in the Track view View menu and Track pane context menu that allow
you to configure the appearance of your tracks in the Track view. You can use these commands to
zoom in or out, show or hide any combination of tracks, and revert back to previous display settings.
The following table lists each of these commands and provides an explanation of each.
Command
Description
Show and Fit Selection
CTRL+ALT+H
This command hides all tracks which are not selected. The
remaining tracks are adjusted in size vertically and horizontally to
fit in the Track view, without scrolling if possible. All track
selections are lost after this command is executed.
Fit Tracks to Window
All currently displayed tracks are adjusted in size vertically to fit
in the Track view, without scrolling if possible.
F
Fit Project to Window
This command resizes all tracks both vertically and horizontally
to fit in the Tracks view.
SHIFT+F
Table 44.
334
Arranging and editing
Arranging tracks
Shortcut
Command
Description
Shortcut
Lock Height
This command maintains the track’s height when you use a
zoom or fit command. See “To lock or unlock the height of a
track” on page 335.
n/a
Show Only Selected
Tracks
This command hides all tracks which are not selected. The
remaining tracks are adjusted in size vertically.
CTRL+SHIFT+H
Hide Selected Tracks
Hides all selected tracks.
CTRL+H
Show All Tracks
Shows all tracks in your project, including these hidden using the
Track Manager.
SHIFT+H
Track Manager
Opens the Track Manager dialog box. For more information
about the Track Manager dialog box, see “Track Manager
dialog” on page 1896.
H
Undo View Change
This command restores the view to its previous state. There are
up to 16 levels of undo.
ALT+Z
Redo View Change
This command restores the view to the state prior to the Undo
View Change command.
ALT+SHIFT+Z
Table 44.
To lock or unlock the height of a track
1. Right-click an empty area in one of the desired track’s controls to display the Track pane context
menu.
2. Choose Lock Height from the menu.
When you lock the height of a track, its height does not change when you use a Zoom or Fit
command. When a track’s height is locked, you can still drag the track strip’s lower border to adjust
the track’s height. After you drag the border, the altered track height becomes the track’s locked
height.
Arranging and editing
Arranging tracks
335
Copying tracks
When you copy one or more tracks using the Track view Tracks > Clone Track(s) command, you
can choose any of the following options:
• What to copy: events, properties, effects, sends
• Repetitions: how many copies of each selected track
• Starting track: where you want the first new track to appear
To copy tracks
1. Select the tracks that you want to copy.
2. Click the Track view Tracks menu and choose Clone Track(s) to open the Clone Track(s)
dialog box.
3. Check the Clone Events, Clone Properties, Clone Effects, and/or Clone Sends boxes to
indicate which items you want to copy.
4. If you want copied events to become linked clips, check the Link to Original Clips check box.
5. Select the number of repetitions of each selected track that you want to create.
6. Select the track number where you want the first new track to appear. The other new tracks
appear right after it.
7. Click OK.
SONAR copies the tracks and pastes the selected tracks, with the first new track appearing at the
track number you selected. All tracks appear consecutively.
Note: When cloning an Instrument track, a new MIDI track is created and assigned to the same
soft synth as the cloned instrument track.
336
Arranging and editing
Arranging tracks
Erasing tracks
You can easily delete an entire track, including all of the track properties and all of its clips and
events. Sometimes, you only want to erase, or wipe, the contents of a track, leaving the track
properties as they are. If you delete or wipe a track by mistake, you can use Edit > Undo to restore
the deleted material.
When you delete or wipe a track, the track information is not placed on the Clipboard. To remove
material from a track and place it on the Clipboard, use the Edit > Cut command instead.
To delete tracks
1. Select the tracks you want to delete.
2. Click the Track view Tracks menu and choose Delete Track(s).
SONAR deletes the selected tracks. You can also right-click individual tracks and choose Delete
Track from the pop-up menu.
To wipe tracks
1. Select the tracks you want to wipe.
2. Click the Track view Tracks menu and choose Wipe Track(s).
SONAR deletes all clips and events from the selected tracks, but leaves the track properties intact.
Working with track templates
You can create an unlimited number of track templates for quickly recalling your most often used
track settings including the following:
• Track type (MIDI or Audio)
• Mute, Solo and Record state
• Hardware input
• Output destination
• Bus send settings
• Track parameters
• Track icons
• Effects and their settings
• Instrument and Bank/Patch
• Track name
Arranging and editing
Arranging tracks
337
To create a track template
1. Select the track or tracks you want to save as a preset.
2. Select File > Export > Track Template from the main menu.
The Save As dialog box appears.
3. Enter a name for the template and click Save.
Track templates use the file extension .cwx.
To insert a track or tracks from a template
• Select Insert > Track Template to open the Import Track Template dialog box, then select the
desired track template.
Or
• Right-click in the Tracks pane and select Insert From Track Template > [track template name]
or select More Track Templates.
This inserts tracks that are exactly like the template.
Track icons
Track icons allow you to quickly identify a track’s contents by instrument. You can assign a new track
icon, create your own track icons, and save an icon as part of a track template.
To show or hide track icons
• To show or hide Track Icons in all views, use the Views > Icons > Show Icons command.
• To show or hide Track Icons in a specific view, use the Views > Icons > [name of desired
view] > Show Icons command.
Or
• To hide a track icon, right-click a track icon in the desired view, and choose Show Icons from the
pop-up menu. This option is not available in Track view headers.
To configure Track view icons
• To show standard track icons in the header of each track in the Track view, use the Views >
Icons > Track View > Show in Header command.
• To show custom track icons in the header of each track in the Track view, use the Views >
Icons > Track View > Show Custom In Header command.
• To show track icons on the left side of the track controls of each track in the Track view, use the
Views > Icons > Track View > Show In Strip command.
To change the size of track icons
• Right-click a track icon in the desired view, and choose Small Icons or Large Icons from the
pop-up menu.
Or
338
Arranging and editing
Arranging tracks
• Select Views > Icons > [name of desired view] > Small Icons or Large Icons from the main
menu.
To change a track icon
1. Right-click on the icon you want to change.
2. Select Load Track Icon from the menu that appears.
The Open dialog box appears.
3. Select an icon and click Open.
Note: The right-click option is not available when you right-click a track icon in a track header in
the Track view. However, you can load a new track icon into a track header by ALT-clicking the
track icon to display the Open dialog box, and then choosing a new icon. You can ALT-click a
track icon in any view to display the Open dialog box.
To reset a track icon to its original icon
1. Right-click on the icon you want to reset.
2. Select Reset Track Icon from the menu that appears.
To create a track icon
1. Create or edit a graphics file in .bmp format, preferably 128 by 128 pixels.
You can use any image as a track icon. You can use any size image, but for best results scale
the image to 128 pixels square. Images must be in the .bmp format.
2. Save the image as a .bmp file in the Track Icons directory in your SONAR program folder.
Track icon size(s) and transparency
You can configure the size of small and large icons in Cakewalk.ini. By default, small icons are
32x32 pixels and large icons are 48x48 pixels. Use the following INI variables to change the default
size:
[WinCake]
SmallIconHeight=32
LargeIconHeight=48
If you want to create custom track icons, we recommend that you author them as 96x96 pixel 24-bit
bitmaps (.BMP).
The top left pixel in the BMP determines the transparent color. If you prefer to not have transparent
icons, add the following variable to Cakewalk.ini:
[WinCake]
IconTopLeftPixelTransparent=0
Arranging and editing
Arranging tracks
339
Configuring Track view controls
To configure track and bus control layouts
1. Click the Track Control button at the top of the Track pane and choose Track Control Manager
to open the Track Control Manager.
2. In the Preset field, choose the control preset that you want to configure, or choose <new>, and
type a name to create a new tab.
3. In each of the four Strip columns (Audio Strip, MIDI Strip, etc.), check all the controls you want to
see for the current preset.
4. To select all available controls, click Select All Controls; to select the default controls, select
Restore Defaults (this will delete any new presets you’ have created).
5. To configure a different preset, select it in the Preset field.
6. Click OK to implement your changes, or Cancel to delete them.
For more information about the Track Control Manager dialog box, see “Track Control Manager” on
page 1903.
To change the VU meter to horizontal or vertical display
• Click the Track view Options menu, point to Meter Options and choose Horizontal Meters or
Vertical Meters on the submenu.
340
Arranging and editing
Arranging tracks
Arranging clips
The Track view provides many ways for you to rearrange, copy, and paste clips to arrange your
music the way you want. The easiest is to select the clips or portions of clips you want to arrange
and then drag and drop them wherever you want. You can drag and drop clips in the Track view
even while playback is in progress. You can also arrange clips via the Clipboard using the Edit >
Cut, Edit > Copy, and Edit > Paste commands, which work like those in almost all Windows
programs.
The snap grid enables you to move clips to or by an exact amount of time, such as a quarter note or
whole measure. See “To change the snap options” on page 370.
See:
“Displaying clips” on page 341
“Opening views by double-clicking clips” on page 349
“Selecting clips” on page 350
“Moving and copying clips” on page 352
Displaying clips
Clips are displayed as rectangles in the Clips pane. Their position and length show you at a glance
their starting times and lengths. You can control four aspects of their appearance:
• Color. By default, each track’s clips are drawn in a different color. The clip colors restart at the
tenth track. You can customize the default colors of clips in Edit > Preferences > Customization
- Color, or change the color of any individual clip in the Clip Inspector.
Note: In audio clips, the waveform changes color, unless no clip contents are displayed. In MIDI
clips, the clip background changes color.
• Name. You can also assign each clip a descriptive name, which is displayed in the upper-left
corner of the clip.
• Contents. At your option, clips can be displayed with a graphical representation of the events in
the clip. The effect is slightly different for MIDI and audio information.
Arranging and editing
Arranging clips
341
A
B
C
A. A MIDI clip shows each event; by looking at the clips, you can “see” the notes that are being played B. An
audio clip shows the actual waveform C. Controller or automation data are also displayed
To inspect the clip contents more closely, use the zoom tools to increase the size in which clips are
displayed. Note that displaying the contents of each clip makes your computer work a little harder.
As a result, if your computer has an older, slower CPU you may want to turn off the display of clip
contents.:
Figure 84.
Zoom controls
A
B
C
D
E
F
I
H
G
A. Zoom Clips pane out vertically B. Vertical Zoom fader for Clips pane C. Zoom Clips pane in
vertically D. Zoom Bus pane out vertically E. Vertical Zoom fader for Bus pane F. Zoom Bus pane in
vertically G. Zoom in horizontally H. Horizontal zoom fader I. Zoom out horizontally
342
Arranging and editing
Arranging clips
Clip header indicators
Audio and MIDI clips show various information at the top of each clip. A standard clip shows only the
clip name, while clips that have been modified in various ways show additional information.
Figure 85.
A
Clip header indicators
B
C
D
A. Clip group number B. Clip name C. Indicators (FX, AudioSnap, Follow Project Tempo, Stretch, V-Vocal, MIDI
editor) D. Clip data (audio waveform or MIDI data)
Note: Clip headers automatically disappear if the track height is less than 36 pixels.
The following table describes the various clip header indicators.
Audio clip
MIDI clip
Description
The clip is a standard audio or MIDI clip.
The clip is assigned to a clip group. The number
identifies the group. For details, see “Clip groups” on
page 361.
The clip contains at least one clip effect. For details,
see “To insert an effect on a clip” on page 921.
n/a
Table 45.
The clip has AudioSnap enabled, which gives you
flexible rhythmic and tempo control over audio
transients. For details, see “AudioSnap (Producer
and Studio only)” on page 635.
Clip header indicators
Arranging and editing
Arranging clips
343
Audio clip
MIDI clip
Description
n/a
The clip is a Region FX clip, which lets you perform
pitch correction on notes and phrases, edit formants,
and add vibrato to monophonic sounds. For details,
see “Using Region FX” on page 1043.
n/a
The clip has been stretched from its original duration
by the displayed percentage value. For details, see
“Slip-stretching audio” on page 687.
n/a
The clip follows the global project tempo. For details,
see “To sync an audio clip to the project tempo” on
page 657 and “AudioSnap section” on page 598.
n/a
Double-click the clip to open the Piano Roll view. For
details, see “The Piano Roll view” on page 724.
n/a
Double-click the clip to open the Step Sequencer
view. For details, see “Step Sequencer view” on
page 1937.
n/a
Double-click the clip to open the Staff view. For
details, see “The Staff view” on page 1180.
n/a
Double-click the clip to open the Event List view. For
details, see “The Event List view” on page 788.
Table 45.
Clip header indicators (Continued)
To hide clip headers and maximize clip waveform display
To globally hide the clip headers, click the Track view View menu, point to Display, and select
Maximize Waveform Height. When this options is enabled, the waveform display spans the full
height of clips.
To zoom horizontally
Do one of the following:
• Click the horizontal zoom buttons to zoom in or out by a fixed percentage each time you click.
• Drag the horizontal zoom fader to zoom in or out by the amount you drag.
• Hold down the CTRL key and press the right arrow key (to zoom in) or the LEFT ARROW key (to
zoom out).
344
Arranging and editing
Arranging clips
• Point the mouse pointer at the top half of the Clips pane or Piano Roll view time ruler (the mouse
pointer should look like this:
), then drag up/down.
To zoom vertically
Do one of the following:
• Click the vertical zoom buttons to zoom in or out by a fixed percentage each time you click.
• Drag the vertical zoom fader to zoom in or out by the amount you drag.
• Hold down the CTRL key and press the UP ARROW key (to zoom out) or the DOWN ARROW
key (to zoom in).
• Point the mouse pointer at the top half of the Clips pane or Piano Roll view time ruler (the mouse
pointer should look like this:
), then click with the right mouse button and drag up/down.
To zoom into a selected area
• Use the Zoom tool to drag-select an area of a clip or clips that you want to zoom to. To activate
the Zoom tool, hold down the Z key. When you release the mouse, the area you selected expands
to fill the Clips pane window.
Zoom command keyboard shortcuts:
To do this
Use this shortcut
Zoom in vertically
CTRL+DOWN ARROW
Zoom in horizontally
CTRL+RIGHT ARROW
Zoom out vertically
CTRL+UP ARROW
Zoom out horizontally
CTRL+LEFT ARROW
Undo Zoom
ALT+Z
Redo Zoom
ALT+SHIFT+Z
Turn On Zoom tool (use the Zoom tool to select the area to
zoom to)
Hold down Z
Fit project to window
SHIFT+F
Fit tracks and buses to window
F
Full Screen mode
F11
Table 46.
Arranging and editing
Arranging clips
345
To zoom using the mouse wheel (Fast Zoom)
• Hold down the ALT key and roll the mouse wheel forward to zoom in, backward to zoom out.
• Hold down ALT+SHIFT to intensify mouse wheel zoom effect.
• Hold down ALT+CTRL to adjust track scale (Track View Clips Pane only)
To select Fast Zoom options
1. Click the Track view Options menu and choose Zoom Options.
2. Select the intensity of the Zoom effect in Zoom Factor by using the spinners or manually
entering a value.
3. Select the vertical and horizontal Zoom focus.
4. Check or uncheck Simultaneous Vertical and Horizontal Zoom.
The default is for Simultaneous Vertical and Horizontal Zoom to be checked. If you uncheck it,
Fast Zoom exhibits the following behaviors.
• ALT+Mouse Wheel zooms vertically
• ALT+SHIFT+Mouse Wheel zooms faster vertically
• CTRL+ALT+Mouse Wheel zooms horizontally
• CTRL+ALT+SHIFT+Mouse Wheel zooms faster horizontally
5. Click OK.
To display clip names and contents
1. Click the Track view Options menu, point to Display and choose Display Clip Names to show
clip names, or leave it unchecked to hide clip names.
2. Click the Track view Options menu, point to Display and choose Display Clip Contents to
show clip contents, or leave it unchecked to hide clip content.
SONAR modifies the clips pane to show the information you want.
To change clip names
1. Select the clips you want to rename.
2. Open the Clip Inspector and show the Properties section.
Figure 86.
The Clip Inspector.
3. Click the Clip Name field, type a name for the selected clips, then press ENTER
SONAR renames the selected clips.
346
Arranging and editing
Arranging clips
To change clip colors
1. Select the clips whose color you want to change.
2. Open the Clip Inspector and show the Properties section.
Figure 87.
The Clip Inspector.
3. Choose a color as follows:
To do this
Do this
Use the default color
Select the Use Track Colors check box.
Use a custom color
Click the Foreground or Background field and pick a color.
Table 47.
SONAR changes the color of the selected clips.
Arranging and editing
Arranging clips
347
Using the Navigator view
The Navigator view displays a large part of your project so you can see an overview of your song.
The Navigator view is a floating version of the Navigator pane found at the top of the Track view.
To open the Navigator view, click the Views menu and choose Navigator, or press ALT+SHIFT+8.
Figure 88.
The Navigator view.
A
A. Track rectangle
Track rectangle
The Track Rectangle appears as a green rectangle within the Navigator view. The Track Rectangle
indicates the section of your project which appears in the Clips pane of the Track view. You can
move the Track Rectangle or change its size.
To move the track rectangle
1. Position your cursor inside the Track Rectangle until the icon changes to look like this:
2. Click and drag the rectangle where you want and release.
To move the track rectangle when clicking
Right-click in the Navigator view and select the Left Click Positions Rectangle option.
To change the size of the track rectangle
1. Click one of the nodes on the rectangle border.
2. Drag to change the rectangle size.
To draw the track rectangle
Hold down the ALT key and drag.
348
Arranging and editing
Arranging clips
.
To change the Now time in the Navigator view
1. Hold down the CTRL key.
2. Click where you want the Now Time to be.
To change the track height in the Navigator view
Right-click in the Navigator view and select one of the following options:
• Track Height Short
• Track Height Medium
• Track Height Tall
To zoom the Navigator view
Right-click in the Navigator view and select one of the following options:
• Horz Zoom Level 1
• Horz Zoom Level 2
• Horz Zoom Level 3
• Horz Zoom Level 4
• Horz Zoom Level 5
• Horz Zoom to Project
Opening views by double-clicking clips
By default, double-clicking a MIDI clip in the Clips pane opens a Piano Roll view for that track, and
double-clicking an Audio clip opens the Loop Construction view for that track.
To specify which view should open when you double-click a clip, click the Track view Options menu,
point to Click Behavior > Double-Click and choose the desired view.
To open a view from a clip
1. Right-click in the Clips pane, and choose View from the pop-up menu.
2. Choose the type of view you want to work with from the submenu.
Arranging and editing
Arranging clips
349
Selecting clips
Before you move, copy, edit, or delete clips you need to select them. There are several ways to
select whole clips, as shown in the table:
To do this
Do this
Select a single clip
Click on the clip in the Clips pane.
Select several clips at once
With the right mouse button, drag in a rectangular pattern that
touches each clip.
Select all the clips in a track
Click on the track number in the Track view.
Select a portion of one or more clips
Use the Smart tool or Select tool and drag across the bottom part of
the clip(s). The Snap to Grid setting determines the size portion you
can select.
Add clips to the selection
Hold the SHIFT key and either click on the clips or drag a rectangle
around the clips.
Add or remove clips from the selection
Hold the CTRL key and either click on the clips or drag a rectangle
around the clips.
Add or remove all clips in a track from
the selection
Hold the CTRL key and click on the track number.
Table 48.
Using the Select tool
The Select tool
allows you to perform both time based selection and clip selection.
To enable the Select tool
• Do one of the following:
• Click the Select tool
in the Control Bar.
• Press F6.
350
Arranging and editing
Arranging clips
To select by time or by clip
You can use either the Smart tool or Select tool to select by time or by clip.
When using the Smart tool or Select tool, a clip is divided into two vertical zones. The mouse pointer
changes depending on which clip zone the pointer is over:
• Smart tool:
• Header.
Click to select the clip.
• Top/Bottom.
Drag to select by time.
• Top/Bottom.
Click to select the clip.
• Top/Bottom.
Drag with the right mouse button to lasso select.
• Select tool:
• Top/Bottom.
Click to select the clip.
• Top/Bottom. Drag with the left mouse button to select by time. Drag with the right mouse
button to lasso select.
The Smart tool and Select tool obey Snap to Grid.
To lasso select
Using the Smart tool
or Select tool
, drag with the right mouse button.
Lasso selection works across tracks, and selects the data type that is specified in each track’s Edit
Filter.
Arranging and editing
Arranging clips
351
Moving and copying clips
You can copy or move clips using drag-and-drop editing or the Cut, Copy, and Paste commands. If
you copy or move clips into tracks that contain existing material, you need to let SONAR know how
to combine the two.
You have these options:
Option
How it works
Blend Old and New
Events in the copied or moved clip are placed into a new clip that overlaps with
the existing clip. This is the same effect as sound-on-sound recording.
Replace Old with New
Events in the copied or moved clip are placed into a new clip, and any
overlapping events in the existing clip are erased. This is the same effect as
overwrite recording.
Slide Over to Make Room
The existing clips are shifted in time to make room for the new clips, so they will
not overlap. If you check the Align to Measures option, shifted clips are
always aligned to measure boundaries; otherwise, the clips are placed end to
end.
Table 49.
When you use the Edit > Paste Special command to add information to a track that contains
existing material, there is one final option you can choose.
Option
What it means
Paste as New Clips
New clips are created containing the events on the Clipboard,
exactly as described in the preceding table.
Paste into Existing Clips (MIDI clips only)
The events on the Clipboard are merged into any existing clips
that occupy the same region of time. This means you will never
end up with clips that overlap.
Table 50.
Note that if you copy or move clips to new, empty tracks, you don’t have to worry about these
settings. In this case, the track properties that go with the clips are automatically applied to the new
track.
When you use drag-and-drop editing:
• You can set the above options every time you perform an edit, or you can set them once and have
the same settings carry over automatically. Check or uncheck the Ask This Every Time box in
the Drag and Drop Options dialog box to indicate your preference. To open the Drag and Drop
Options dialog box, click the Track view Options menu and choose Drag and Drop Options.
• If you drag to the edge of the Clips pane, it will scroll automatically in the direction you drag.
• If you change your mind while dragging clips, press the ESC key to cancel the operation.
SONAR also lets you move and copy clips between projects.
352
Arranging and editing
Arranging clips
To move clips using drag and drop
1. Select the clips you want to move.
2. If you want to move the clips by an exact amount of time, enable the snap grid (see “To change
the snap options” on page 370 and “Aim Assist line” on page 357).
3. Select the Smart tool
or Move tool
in the Control Bar.
4. Position the mouse over one of the selected clips.
5. Press and hold down the left mouse button. A rectangle is displayed around the selected clips.
6. Drag the clips to their new location, and release the mouse button.
7. If necessary, choose the options you want from the Drag and Drop Options dialog box (go to
Edit > Preferences > Customization - Editing, or right-click in the Clips pane and select Drag
& Drop Options from the pop-up menu), and click OK.
Figure 89.
The Drag and Drop Options dialog box
SONAR moves the clips to their new location.
Note: Moving an audio clip (other than a Groove clip) to a part of your project that has a different
tempo changes the size of the clip.
Arranging and editing
Arranging clips
353
To move clips using cut and paste
1. Select the clips you want to move.
2. Choose Edit > Cut Special to display the Cut dialog box.
Figure 90.
The Cut dialog box
3. Choose the options you want and click OK. SONAR cuts the clips from the project and places
them on the Clipboard.
4. Click in the Track pane to set the current track to be the one where clips should be pasted.
5. Set the Now time to be the time at which the clips should be pasted.
6. Choose Edit > Paste Special to display the Paste dialog box.
Figure 91.
The Paste dialog box
7. Choose the options you want and click OK.
SONAR places the clips in their new location.
354
Arranging and editing
Arranging clips
To choose a specific start time and/or length for a clip
1. Select the clip you want to edit.
2. Open the Clip Inspector and select the Properties section.
3. In the Time Format field, choose the units you want to use for the new start time and/or length
by clicking one of the radio buttons:
• M:B:T.
Click this if you want the clip to begin and end on a specific measure, beat, or tick.
• Samples. Click this is you want the clip to begin and end on a specific sample.
• H:M:S:F. Click this is you want the clip to begin and end on a specific hour, minute, second,
or frame. This is also known as SMPTE time, and lets you start the clip at an absolute-timebased (as opposed to musical-time-based) point in your project.
• Seconds.
Click this is you want the clip to begin and end on a specific second.
4. In the Start and Length fields, enter a new start time and/or length, or use the spinners or
keyboard to change values.
5. Choose a value in the Time Base field—choose one of the two options in this section to control
what happens to the clip’s start time when you change the tempo:
• Musical (M:B:T). If the clip is set to the Musical time base, the clip’s M:B:T position stays
constant, and its Absolute (SMPTE) position shifts.
• Absolute (SMPTE). If the clip is set to the Absolute (SMPTE) time base, its Absolute
position stays constant, and its M:B:T position shifts.
Note: The length of a clip may also change when you change the tempo—audio clips maintain
their absolute (SMPTE) length, while a MIDI clip will follow the value in the Time Base field. If a
MIDI clip is set to use musical time, the clip maintains its M:B:T length. If a MIDI clip is set to use
absolute time, the clip maintains its absolute length.
SONAR adjusts the clip to the values you chose.
Note: The Snap Offset field is for audio clips only. The value of this field is the snap offset of
the selected clip, in samples. When you set a snap offset value for a clip, and then drag the clip,
the left edge of the clip does not snap to the current snap resolution--the clip snaps to a point on
the clip that is the distance from the left edge of the clip to the snap offset value. For example,
if you set the snap resolution to move to a measure, and the snap offset of a clip to 1500
samples, when you drag the clip, instead of the left edge of the clip moving to a measure line,
the spot on the clip that's 1500 samples right of the beginning of the clip moves to the measure
line.
Arranging and editing
Arranging clips
355
To copy clips using drag and drop
1. Select the clips you want to copy.
2. Enable the snap grid, if desired.
3. Select the Smart tool
in the Control Bar.
4. Position the mouse over one of the selected clips.
5. Press and hold the CTRL key and click and hold the left mouse button. A rectangle is displayed
around the selected clips.
6. Drag the clips to the new location, and release the mouse button.
7. If necessary, choose the options you want from the Drag and Drop Options dialog box, and
click OK.
SONAR copies the clips to their new location.
To copy clips using copy and paste
1. Select the clips you want to copy.
2. Choose Edit > Copy Special to display the Copy dialog box.
3. Choose the options you want and click OK. SONAR copies the clips to the Clipboard.
4. Click in the Track pane to set the current track to be the one where clips should be pasted.
5. Set the Now time to be the time the clips should be pasted.
6. Choose Edit > Paste Special to display the Paste dialog box.
7. Choose the options you want and click OK.
SONAR copies the clips to their new location.
To delete clips
1. Select the clips you want to delete.
2. Do one of the following:
• Choose Edit > Delete, which brings up a dialog box—choose options and click OK.
• Press the DELETE key.
SONAR deletes the selected clips.
See:
“Splitting and combining clips” on page 379
“Working with partial clips” on page 368
“Working with linked clips” on page 377
“Aim Assist line” on page 357
356
Arranging and editing
Arranging clips
Aim Assist line
Aim Assist is a vertical white line that shows the mouse pointer’s horizontal position in the Clips pane
and Piano Roll. The mouse pointer’s time position is also shown in the time ruler.
Aim Assist is a helpful guide when editing in the Clips pane and Piano Roll, making it easy to align
the mouse pointer with events on different tracks or markers in the time ruler.
Figure 92.
The Aim Assist line is a helpful guide when editing in the Clips pane
B
A
A. Vertical Aim Assist line B. Time position
When Snap to Grid is enabled, the Aim Assist line follows the current Snap to Grid settings rather
than the mouse pointer position.
The following rules apply when selecting and moving a clip with the Smart tool, Edit tool, Select tool
or Move tool:
Click the front/left portion of a clip. The Aim Assist line snaps to the start of the clip boundary
and travels with the clip as it is dragged.
Click the rear/right portion of a clip. The Aim Assist line snaps to the end of the clip boundary
and snap operates on the clip’s end. The Aim Assist line travels with the clip as it is dragged.
To enable/disable Aim Assist
• Do one of the following:
• Click the Edit menu and choose Aim Assist.
• Press X.
The vertical Aim Assist line is shown or hidden.
Tip: You can also toggle Aim Assist on/off with a key binding. For information about assigning key
bindings, see “Key bindings” on page 1167.
Arranging and editing
Arranging clips
357
To customize the Aim Assist color
1. Go to Edit > Preferences > Customization - Colors.
2. In the Color Category list, select Track View.
3. In the Screen Element list, select Aim Assist line.
4. Specify the desired color and click OK to close the Preferences dialog box.
See:
“Splitting and combining clips” on page 379
“Working with partial clips” on page 368
“Working with linked clips” on page 377
Reverting clip(s) to original time stamp
All audio and MIDI clips in SONAR have a Original Time property, which stores the original SMPTE
time stamp associated with a clip. The Original Time clip property is based on absolute time, not
tempo. This allows you to freely re-arrange clips and later revert them back to their original time.
SONAR automatically assigns the Original Time property during import or immediately after record.
When an audio clip containing a SMPTE time stamp is imported into SONAR (such as a Broadcast
Wave file), the Original Time field is populated with this time stamp. When opening previous
SONAR projects, existing clips will be populated with their current time.
Note: The Original Time property can not be edited. If a clip is bounced to a new clip, the
Original Time stamp will not propagate to the new clip.
Figure 93.
The Clip Inspector.
A. Original Time property; click to revert clip to the original time stamp
358
Arranging and editing
Arranging clips
To revert clip(s) to original time stamp
To revert selected clips to their original SMPTE time stamp, do one of the following:
• Right-click a clip and choose Revert Clip(s) to Original Time Stamp from the context menu.
• In the Clip Inspector, select the Properties section, click the Original Time field and choose
Revert to original time stamp on the pop-up menu.
Locking Clips
You can lock a clip so that it can’t be accidentally modified or deleted. You can lock the clip’s position
and/or its data.
To lock or unlock a clip’s position and/or data
• In the Clip Inspector, select the Properties section, click the Lock field and choose what clip
attributes you want to lock:
• Position and Data. This choice locks position and data, and causes a lock icon to appear
on the clip
.
• Position Only. This choice locks position only, and causes a yellow lock icon with the clasp
unlocked to appear on the clip
.
• Data Only. This choice locks data only, and causes a blue lock icon with the clasp unlocked
to appear on the clip
.
Figure 94.
The Clip Inspector.
Or
1. Right-click a clip.
2. From the pop-up menu, choose one of the following commands:
• Clip Lock > Lock Position. In lock mode, this choice locks position only, and causes a
yellow lock icon with the clasp unlocked to appear on the clip. If data is already locked, then
both position and data become locked, and a “locked” lock icon appears on the clip. In unlock
mode, if both position and data are locked, and you unlock position, then the blue “unlocked”
lock icon appears on the clip, meaning that only data is locked.
Arranging and editing
Arranging clips
359
• Clip Lock > Lock Data. In lock mode, this choice locks data only, and causes a blue lock
icon with the clasp unlocked to appear on the clip. If position is already locked, then both
position and data become locked, and a “locked” lock icon appears on the clip. In unlock
mode, if both position and data are locked, and you unlock data, then the yellow “unlocked”
lock icon appears on the clip, meaning that only position is locked.
Note: If a clip’s position is locked, and you change tempo, what happens to the clip’s position
depends on what option the Clip Properties Time Base field is set to: Musical (M:B:T), or
Absolute (SMPTE). If the clip is set to the Musical time base, the clip’s M:B:T position stays
constant, and its Absolute position shifts. If the clip is set to the Absolute time base, its Absolute
position does not move, but its M:B:T position shifts.
Auto scroll lock in Clips pane
While editing, you can prevent the Clips pane from scrolling horizontally during playback. This allows
you to focus on the edit location without worrying that the screen will eventually scroll away from the
edit location.
When the Left Click Locks Scroll option is enabled (default behavior), the Clips pane will not scroll
if you click any object in the Clips pane. When you are done with the edit and want the Clips pane to
scroll again during playback, click in the background of the Clips pane to clear auto scroll lock.
To enable/disable auto scroll lock
Click the Track view Options menu, point to Click Behavior and choose Left Click Locks Scroll
on the submenu.
360
Arranging and editing
Arranging clips
Clip groups
SONAR lets you treat multiple clips as a single unit. By grouping clips, you can select and edit an
entire group of clips by simply selecting or editing any group member. A group can contain both
audio and MIDI clips from a single track or from multiple tracks.
Clip groups are very useful, for example, when editing multitrack drums and you want to synchronize
edits on all clips from the same recording take.
You can instruct SONAR to automatically group clips after recording multiple tracks simultaneously,
or you can add and remove clips from a group after the clips have been recorded.
Grouped clips are indicated by a group number before the clip name.
Figure 95.
Grouped clips
A
A. The group number is displayed next to the clip name
To group clips during multitrack recording
You can specify how clips should be grouped when recording multiple tracks simultaneously.
1. Go to Edit > Preferences > Project - Record, or right-click the Record button to access
recording settings.
2. Under Multi-track grouping, select one of the following options:
• Group all clips.
All clips that are recorded at the same time are placed in a clip group.
• Group only clips in folders (default). All clips in folders are grouped. Different folders have
different groups. Tracks not in folders are not grouped.
• Do not group tracks.
enabled.
Each new take will belong to a different clip group if loop recording is
After recording is complete, all new clips are grouped together. When loop recording, each pass of
the loop gets placed in its own group.
Two discrete steps are placed in the Undo history. The first step is the actual recording and the
second step is for Create Clip Group. This allows you to undo the clip group, if desired, without
losing the recording.
Arranging and editing
Clip groups
361
The following example shows two takes of a five track loop recording. The first clip group is selected.
Note: The Group Clips Across Tracks setting is stored with each project.
362
Arranging and editing
Clip groups
To create a clip group
1. Select all the clips you want to group together.
2. Do one of the following:
• Press [ (square bracket).
• Right-click any selected clip, point to Add to Clip Group and choose New from the pop-up
menu.
A new clip group is created and the group number is displayed next to each clip name.
Note: A clip may only belong to one clip group at a time. If any of the selected clips already
belong to another clip group, they will be removed from the other group and placed in the new
group.
To add clips to an existing clip group
1. Click on any clip in the existing group.
All clips in the group are selected.
2. Hold down the CTRL key and click the clips that you want to add to the group.
3. Right-click any selected clip, point to Add to Clip Group and choose the desired group from the
pop-up menu.
All selected clips are placed in a new clip group.
Note: A clip may only belong to one clip group at a time. If any of the selected clips already
belong to another clip group, they will be removed from the other group and placed in the new
group.
To remove clips from a clip group
1. Select the clips you want to remove from the group.
Tip: To select only a single clip in a group, hold down the SHIFT key and click the clip that you want
to remove from the group.
2. Right-click any selected clip and choose Remove from Clip Group from the pop-up menu.
The selected clips are no longer grouped.
Arranging and editing
Clip groups
363
To remove all clip groups
1. Do one of the following:
• On the Edit menu, point to Select and choose All.
• Press CTRL+A.
All clips are selected.
2. Do one of the following:
• Press SHIFT+[ (square bracket).
• Right-click any selected clip and choose Remove from Clip Group from the pop-up menu.
The selected clips are no longer grouped.
Using editing tools on grouped clips
The Select, Mute and Split tools behave as follows when editing grouped clips:
• Select tool
:
• Clicking a clip in a group will also select all other clips in the same group.
• Lasso-selecting will select clips that are touched by the lasso as well as other clips in the
same group that intersect the lasso time range.
• Split tool
:
• Clicking an unselected clip will split that clip and all other clips in the same group that intersect
the split time.
• If a previous selection exists, clicking will split only the clips in the selection.
• Selecting a range will split all clips in the group that intersect that range.
• Mute tool
. The Mute tool has several modes of operation. The corresponding mode is
indicated in square brackets.
• [Mute Entire Clips mode] Clicking an unselected clip will mute that clip and all other clips in the
same group.
• [Mute Entire Clips mode] If a previous selection exists, clicking will mute only the clips in the
selection.
• [Mute Entire Clips mode] Lasso-selecting will mute clips that are touched by the lasso as well
as other clips in the same group that intersect the lasso time range.
• [Mute Time Ranges mode] Selecting a range will mute all clips in the group that intersect that
time range.
Note: Muting a time range is limited to one track or take lane at a time.
• [Isolate mode] Isolate mode does not follow clip groups for clips that live in the same track.
364
Arranging and editing
Clip groups
SONAR can automatically create a new clip group when splitting clips in an existing clip group. To
specify the split behavior, follow these steps:
1. Go to Edit > Preferences > Customization - Editing.
2. Under Clips, select the When splitting clips in groups, create new groups check box.
For more information about splitting clips, see “Splitting and combining clips” on page 379.
Copying and pasting grouped clips
When you copy and paste clips that belong to a clip group, you can specify if the pasted clips should
be placed in a new clip group or continue to be grouped with the original clip group. By default, a
new clip group is created. You can change the behavior by adding the following line to the [WinCake]
section of the Cakewalk.ini file:
[WinCake]
CreateNewGroupsOnPaste=1
The values are as follows:
0 = The pasted clips will belong to the same clip group as the clips that were copied.
1 = A new clip group is created for the pasted clips. This is the default behavior.
To view and edit the Cakewalk.ini file, go to Edit > Preferences > File - Initialization File.
For more information about the Cakewalk.ini file, see “Initialization files” on page 1401.
Arranging and editing
Clip groups
365
Nudge
Nudging is moving a clip or a MIDI note by a small amount to the left or right or up and down. There
are three customizable settings for the Nudge feature. You can also nudge clips (in the Track view)
or notes (in the Piano Roll view) up or down, and you can use keyboard shortcuts (see “To Nudge a
Clip Using Keyboard Shortcuts” on page 367).
See:
“Nudge settings” on page 366
Nudge settings
To configure the three nudge settings, go to Edit > Preferences > Customization - Nudge or
Process > Nudge > Settings.
To Nudge a Clip Left or Right
Use the following procedure to nudge a clip.
1. Select the clip you want to nudge.
2. Select Process > Nudge Left(1-3) from the menu to move the clip left or Process > Nudge
Right(1-3) to move the clip right.
The amount the clip or note moves is determined by the settings in Edit > Preferences >
Customization - Nudge.
To Nudge a Clip Up and Down
Use the following procedure to nudge a clip (in the Track view) or MIDI note (in the Piano Roll view)
up or down.
1. Select the clip or note you want to nudge.
2. Select Process > Nudge > Up to move the clip or note up or Process > Nudge > Down to
move a clip or note down.
Clips move up or down one track at a time. Notes move up or down one pitch at a time.
To Change Nudge Settings
1. Select Process > Nudge > Settings to access nudge settings.
2. In one of the three Nudge groups, select one of the following:
• Musical Time. Select a note length setting.
• Absolute Time.
366
Select one of the following absolute time options and a number in the first
Arranging and editing
Nudge
field:
Absolute time setting
Description
Seconds
Whole seconds.
Milliseconds
Thousands of a second.
Frames
Number of frames. The default frame count is 30 frames per second. The
number of frames varies depending on the setting in Edit > Preferences >
Project - Clock.
Samples
A very small amount of time. For CD-quality audio there are 44,100 samples
per second, so a value of 1 here would not move a clip by a perceptible
amount.
Ticks
The number of ticks per quarter note varies depending on the setting in
Edit > Preferences > Project - Clock. The default setting is 960.
Table 51.
• Follow Snap Settings. Moves the clip or note by the current snap setting.
To Nudge a Clip Using Keyboard Shortcuts
1. Select the clip you want to nudge.
2. If necessary, turn on Num Lock (press the Num Lock key on your keyboard).
3. Press the appropriate Num Key.
Nudge
Shortcut
Left 1
NumPad 1
Right 1
NumPad 3
Left 2
NumPad 4
Right 2
NumPad 6
Left 3
NumPad 7
Right 3
NumPad 9
Up
NumPad 8
Down
NumPad 2
Table 52.
Arranging and editing
Nudge
367
Working with partial clips
SONAR lets you select, copy, move, and delete portions of a project even if they do not match clip
boundaries. There are two ways to do this:
• Directly select portions of one or more clips.
• Select a range of times and one or more tracks. SONAR automatically selects the portions of clips
that are in both the selected time range and the selected tracks. You can then copy, move, or
delete the material the same way you do with whole clips. When you select portions of a clip,
SONAR may round off the start and end times of your selection based on the snap grid. For more
information, see “Defining and using the Snap Grid” on page 370.
To select a portion of a clip
Select the Smart tool
clip.
or Select tool
in the Control Bar and drag across the bottom half of a
SONAR highlights the selected portion of the clip. You can edit this portion of the clip using all the
normal editing commands.
To select a portion of several clips
Select the Smart tool
or Select tool
in the Control Bar, then click in the bottom half of a clip
and drag across several clips in adjacent tracks.
SONAR highlights the selected portions of all the clips. You can edit these portions of clips using all
the normal editing commands.
To select partial clips using time ranges and tracks
1. Select a range of time in one of the following ways:
• Drag the mouse in the Time Ruler.
• Click between two markers to select the time between the markers.
• Select a clip (SONAR selects the range of time covered by the clip).
• Choose Edit > Select > By Time, enter the start and end time, and click OK.
2. Select one or more tracks by clicking, SHIFT-clicking, or CTRL-clicking on the track numbers in
the Track view.
3. To adjust the start and end time of the selection, hold the SHIFT key while clicking on the Time
Ruler.
The relevant portions of clips in the selected tracks are highlighted. You can edit these portions of
clips using all the normal editing commands.
To clear the partial clip selection
You can clear the time-restricted selection in any of the following ways:
368
Arranging and editing
Working with partial clips
• Click in an empty area of the Clips pane to completely clear the selection.
• Choose Edit > Select > None or press CTRL+SHIFT+A to completely clear the selection.
• Click on a single clip in the Clips pane to clear the time selection and select the clip.
Markers and the snap grid
SONAR has a collection of features you can use to simplify and speed the work you do arranging
your projects. Here are a few of the most important things you can do:
• Show grid lines on measure boundaries in the Track view.
• Define and use the snap grid to make drag-and-drop editing more accurate.
• Create markers to identify and work with key time points in your project.
See:
“Showing grid lines” on page 369
“Defining and using the Snap Grid” on page 370
“Snap offsets” on page 372
“Creating and using markers” on page 372
Showing grid lines
Displaying grid lines, or vertical rules, in the Clips pane of the Track view makes it easy to see at a
glance how clips align with each other, how they align with measure boundaries, and when they start
and end.
To show/hide vertical grid lines
1. Click the Track view View menu, point to Display > Vertical Grid Lines and select one of the
following options:
• None.
No vertical grid lines are displayed
• Behind Clips. Vertical grid lines are displayed, but clips will draw on top of them, so clip
contents will not be obstructed.
• In Front of Clips. Vertical grid lines are displayed and drawn on top of clips, always visible.
SONAR displays the Track view as you requested.
Arranging and editing
Markers and the snap grid
369
Defining and using the Snap Grid
SONAR lets you define a snap grid that makes it easier to arrange clips, select time ranges, and
control envelope shape drawing. To use the snap grid, enable the Snap to Grid button
in the
Control Bar’s Snap module (or press N) and set the grid resolution to an interval of musical time,
such as a whole note, half note, or quarter note; a unit of absolute time: a number of frames,
seconds or samples; an event; the start or end of a clip; a marker; or audio transients. The grid can
use multiple resolutions at the same time, such as a whole note, and audio transients. When the
Snap to Grid button is enabled, if you move or paste clips or markers, items will be snapped to the
nearest point on the snap grid.
You can also use the snap grid to move clips by a certain interval, rather than snap them to the
interval. Moving by an interval can be useful during drag-and-drop operations, if your data are not
exactly aligned with measure or note boundaries. To set advanced Snap to Grid settings, go to
Edit > Preferences > Customization - Snap to Grid.
Magnetic snap. Cakewalk’s snap grid has an option called magnetic snap. This means that when
you’re dragging the boundary of an object, you can move the boundary freely until the boundary gets
within a certain number of ticks from the snap target. The closer the object gets to the snap target,
the more strongly the object is pulled to the target. You can set the strength of magnetic snap to low,
medium, high, or off. Note that if you are zoomed out a certain amount, the time boundary around
the snap target will appear to be quite small, and you might think that the snap grid is not functioning.
If this is the case, zoom in closer to enhance your editing experience. If you’re dragging a whole clip,
magnetic snap is not in effect.
To enable or disable the Snap Grid
Do one of the following:
• Click the Snap to Grid button
in the Control Bar’s Snap module.
• Press N.
To change the snap options
1. In the Control Bar’s Snap module, select one or more of the following resolution options:
• Time resolution. Snap to the selected musical or absolute time resolution. Click and hold
the mouse button pressed to select a different duration from the pop-up menu. For absolute
time resolutions (samples, frames, seconds), type the desired number of units. When Smart
Grid is selected, the snap resolution is dynamically determined by the horizontal zoom level,
and the M:B:T time rulers in the Clips pane and Piano Roll view are optimized to show
relevant snap locations.
Note: To exit Smart Grid mode, clear the Smart Grid check mark. If you manually select a new
resolution while Smart Grid is enabled, the new settings only apply until the focused view's
zoom level changes.
• Triplet
370
.
Reduces the duration of the selected Musical time resolution by 2/3 of its original
Arranging and editing
Markers and the snap grid
duration. When Triplet is enabled, three note events fit in the space of two.
• Dotted . Increase the duration of the selected Musical time resolution by half of its original
value (150%).
• Snap To. Align data to the snap grid.
• Snap By. Move data by the grid resolution.
• Landmark Events
. Snap to the selected landmarks, including markers, Now Time,
clips, audio transients, MIDI notes, and automation envelope nodes. To select the desired
landmarks, right-click the Snap to Grid button
to open the Preferences dialog, then
select the desired check boxes in the Landmarks section. SONAR will snap to landmarks on
tracks/lanes that are currently visible in the Clips pane.
2. Go to Edit > Preferences > Customization - Snap to Grid.
3. If you want to change the magnetic snap strength, or turn off magnetic snap, adjust the Snap
Intensity slider.
4. If you want to automatically snap edited audio clips to the nearest zero crossing of the waveform
(the point at which there is no volume, to minimize the glitches that can happen when waveforms
are spliced together) select the Snap to Nearest Audio Zero Crossings check box.
5. Click OK to close the dialog box.
All time selections and drag-and-drop editing operations use the new snap grid resolution(s).
To use a secondary Snap to Grid resolution
By default, SONAR uses the global Snap to Grid settings when snap is enabled. However, you can
also specify a secondary Snap to Grid resolution that is in effect when holding down the N key.
To assign the secondary Snap to Grid settings, hold down the N key while selecting the desired snap
settings in the Control Bar’s Snap module.
To momentarily apply the secondary Snap to Grid resolution, hold down the N key while dragging or
editing data that is snapping to the grid. When the N key is released, the main global snap settings
are restored.
To swap the primary and secondary Snap to Grid settings, press CTRL+SHIFT+N.
Note: To enable/disable Snap to Grid, press the N key quickly. To assign or use the secondary
Snap to Grid resolution, keep the N key pressed.
Tip: You can configure the secondary Snap to Grid resolution to effectively bypass snapping when
holding down the N key. To do so, hold down the N key while disabling the snap resolution and snap
landmarks in the Control Bar’s Snap module. Snapping will now be temporarily disabled while you
hold down the N key.
See also:
“Snap to Grid shortcuts” on page 1583
“Snap module” on page 544
Arranging and editing
Markers and the snap grid
371
Snap offsets
Snap offsets allow you to set a point other than the beginning of a clip as the “snap” point used by
the Snap to Grid. A snap offset is the number of samples from the beginning of the clip. Snap offsets
affect all edits that obey the Snap to Grid setting. Once the snap offset is added, you can set the
Timer Ruler to SMPTE or MBT time.
Note: You cannot set a snap offset for a Groove clip.
Creating a snap offset
Use the following to add a snap offset to a clip:
1. Locate the place in the clip where you want to put the snap offset, and set the Now Time to that
location. Use the Scrub tool if necessary.
2. Right-click on the clip and select Set Snap Offset to Now Time from the menu that appears.
Edits to that clip, when the Snap to Grid button is depressed, now snap to the snap offset rather
than the beginning of the clip.
Deleting a snap offset
1. Select the clip.
2. Open the Clip Inspector and select the Properties section.
3. Click the Snap Offset field and type 0.
Creating and using markers
Markers are a way of associating a name with a time point in your project. You use markers to name
sections of a project, to mark hit points in a film score, or simply to provide a shortcut for working with
any time point in a project. Markers make it easy to:
• Jump to a specific time point in a project.
• Select a portion of a project.
• Enter a time in any dialog box, by pressing G and choosing the marker you want.
You can see and work with markers in four ways:
• They are displayed in the Time Ruler at the top of the Track, Staff, and Piano Roll view.
• The Markers module in the Control Bar lets you add markers and jump to specific marker
locations.
• The Markers view displays all markers and lets you add, edit, and delete markers.
• You can press M while playback is in progress to add a marker on the fly.
The time associated with a marker can be expressed in musical time or as a locked SMPTE time. If
a marker has a musical time (measures, beats, and ticks), the marker stays at that musical time
372
Arranging and editing
Markers and the snap grid
regardless of changes in tempo. If a marker has a locked SMPTE time (hours, minutes, seconds,
and frames), the marker stays at the same time even when the tempo is changed. Locked markers
are useful for projects that require you to sync the music or sound with film scores or multimedia
presentations. See “To add a marker” on page 373.
SONAR takes the current snap grid settings into account when you move or copy markers. For
example, if the snap grid is set to even measure boundaries, any time you move or copy a marker,
the marker will be snapped to the beginning of the nearest measure. You are allowed to have any
number of markers at a single time point. To display the Markers view, choose Views > Markers.
From the Markers view, you can use the File > Print and File > Print Preview commands to print a
listing of markers.
Figure 96.
The Markers view
You can add markers while playback is stopped or while playback is in progress (on the fly). When
you add a marker while playback is stopped, you can enter a name for the marker and either use the
Now time or enter a different time. When you add a marker on the fly, the marker is named
automatically and assigned the Now time. Using the Markers view, you can edit the names and
times whenever you want.
To add a marker
1. Open the Markers dialog box in one of the following ways:
• Click
in the Control Bar’s Markers module.
• Press M.
• Choose Project > Insert Marker.
• Click
in the Markers view.
• Hold down the CTRL key and click the marker section of the Time Ruler.
• Right-click in the Time Ruler and select Insert Marker.
SONAR displays the Marker dialog box.
Arranging and editing
Markers and the snap grid
373
Figure 97.
The Marker dialog box
2. Enter a name for the marker in the Name box.
3. The time is set to the Now time. If you want, use the spinners to change the time or type in a new
marker time.
4. Check the Locked to SMPTE box if you want to lock the marker to the SMPTE time.
5. Click OK.
SONAR adds the marker and displays it in the Time Ruler, the Markers view, and the Control Bar’s
Markers module.
To add a marker on the fly
• Click
in the Control Bar’s Markers module, or press M.
SONAR adds a marker at the Now time and displays it in the Time Ruler, the Markers view, and the
Markers module.
To edit a marker
1. Either right-click on the marker in the Time Ruler, or choose a marker in the Markers view and
click
. SONAR displays the Marker dialog box.
2. Change the marker name, time, or other settings as desired.
3. Click OK.
SONAR updates the marker in the Time Ruler and the Markers view.
To copy a marker
1. Press and hold the CTRL key.
2. Drag a marker in the Time Ruler of the Track view, Staff view, Tempo view, or Piano Roll view.
SONAR displays the Marker dialog box.
3. Enter the desired marker settings and click OK.
SONAR copies the marker and displays it in the Time Ruler and the Markers view. You can also cut
and paste markers directly from the Markers view.
374
Arranging and editing
Markers and the snap grid
To lock or unlock several markers
1. In the Markers view, select one or more markers. Use the CTRL and SHIFT keys if necessary to
modify the selection.
2. Select or deselect
.
SONAR updates the markers.
To move a marker
• Drag the marker in the Time Ruler.
SONAR updates the marker time and shows it at the new location.
To delete a marker
1. Press and hold the left mouse button while pointing to a marker in the Time Ruler.
2. Press DELETE, and release the mouse button.
SONAR deletes the marker. You can use Edit > Undo if you make a mistake.
To delete markers from the Markers view
1. In the Markers view, select one or more markers. Use the CTRL and SHIFT keys if necessary to
modify the selection.
2. Click
or press DELETE.
SONAR deletes the selected markers. You can use Undo if you make a mistake.
To jump to a marker
There are many different ways to jump to a specific marker:
• Choose a marker from the drop-down list in the Control Bar’s Markers module.
• Press G twice to display a list of markers, choose the marker you want, and click OK.
• Click on a marker in the Markers view to set the Now time to that marker.
• Click the Next Marker button
or Previous Marker button
in the Markers module.
• Press CTRL+SHIFT+PAGE DOWN to jump to the next marker, or press CTRL+SHIFT+PAGE UP
to jump to the previous marker.
To select a time range using markers
You can select a range of times by clicking in the marker section of the Time Ruler:
• Click to the left of the first marker to select the time between the start of the project and the first
marker.
• Click to the right of the last marker to select the time between the marker and the end of the
project.
• Click between two markers to select the time between the markers.
• If looping is enabled, click to the right of the Loop Start marker to select the loop region
Arranging and editing
Markers and the snap grid
375
• If punch recording is enabled, click to the right of the Punch In marker to select the punch region
Tip: If you press TAB or right-click while holding down the left mouse button over the markers, you
can toggle through which of the overlaid markers you'd like to move.
For example, if the Now Time marker, a regular Marker, a Loop point, and a Punch point are all at
measure 5, pressing Tab (while holding down the left mouse button) toggles through T (Now Time),
M (regular), L (Loop), and P (Punch). If you want to change the regular marker, simply drag the
mouse when M is displayed; if you want to adjust the position of the Loop point, tab through to L, and
so on.
TAB to transients
You can use the TAB and SHIFT+TAB keys to jump to audio transients, and MIDI Note events.
Tabbing is only possible when the transport is not rolling.
TAB to transients is selection-based, which means tabbing will go to the next/previous transient
amongst all selected clips. If there is no selection, tabbing operates on the current track.
To move the Now time to the next transient
• Press TAB.
To move the Now time to the previous transient
• Press SHIFT+TAB.
TAB to transients landmarks
The following table shows how TAB to transients applies to different SONAR clip types.
Clip type
TAB target
Audio Groove clips.
Each slice.
“Stretch to tempo” clips (clips that are
not groove clip looped but use groove
clip for rendering).
Each slice.
Regular audio clips.
Each transient as detected by AudioSnap.
Slip stretched audio clips.
Each transient as detected by AudioSnap, scaled to the stretch
amount so tabbing continues to line up perfectly.
MIDI clips.
Each Note event (MIDI Controller data is ignored).
Note: If there are multiple Note events at the exact same tick
position, only one of the notes will be tabbed to.
Table 53.
376
TAB to transients landmarks
Arranging and editing
TAB to transients
Clip type
TAB target
MIDI Groove clips.
Each Note event.
Step Sequencer clips.
Each step that contains a note.
Table 53.
TAB to transients landmarks (Continued)
TAB to transients in the Piano Roll view
In addition to the Track view inline Piano Roll, TAB to transients also works in the Piano Roll view. If
multiple tracks are displayed in the Piano Roll view, tabbing only operates on the current track.
Working with linked clips
SONAR makes it easy to repeat a pattern over and over using a feature called linked clips. Linked
clips always have the same contents, name, and display color. Any change you make to the internal
contents of one of the clips, such as adding or editing notes or effects, automatically applies to all of
them. Any number of clips may be linked with each other. To create linked clips, copy the clips and
when pasting, check the Linked Clips option in the Paste dialog box or the Drag and Drop Options
dialog box. Linked clips are displayed with a dotted border, so they are easy to spot. You can also
identify linked clips from the Clip Inspector or by using the Select All Siblings command in the Clips
pane context menu. You can easily unlink linked clips, and then edit them individually. You have two
options when unlinking linked clips:
Option
How it works
New linked group
The clips you selected will still be linked to each other, but won’t be linked to any clips
that are not selected
Independent
Every selected clip will be completely independent
Table 54.
Once you have unlinked linked clips, you cannot re-link them except by using Edit > Undo.
If you attempt to copy only a portion of a linked clip, the copy will not be linked to the original. Copies
of a clip can be linked to the original only when you select and copy the entire clip.
To make linked copies of a clip using drag and drop
1. Click the Track view Options menu and choose Drag & Drop Options to display the Drag and
Drop Options dialog box.
2. Check the option labeled Copy Entire Clips as Linked Clips.
3. Click OK.
4. Select the clips you want to copy.
5. Position the mouse over one of the selected clips.
Arranging and editing
Working with linked clips
377
6. Press and hold down the CTRL key.
7. Press and hold down the left mouse button. A rectangle is displayed around the selected clips.
8. Drag the clips to their new location, and release the mouse button.
9. If necessary, confirm the options in the Drag and Drop Options dialog box, and click OK.
SONAR creates copies of the selected clips that are linked to the originals. Any change you make to
one of the clips is applied to all linked clips, including the original clip.
To make linked copies of a clip using copy and paste
1. Select the clips you want to copy.
2. Choose Edit > Copy Special to display the Copy dialog box.
3. Choose options as desired and click OK. SONAR copies the clips to the Clipboard.
4. Click in the Track pane to set the current track to be the one where clips should be pasted.
5. Set the Now time to be the time at which the clips should be pasted.
6. Choose Edit > Paste Special to display the Paste dialog box.
7. In the Paste dialog box, choose one of two options:
• Linked Repetitions. If you choose this option, only the new copies of the original clip are
linked together. Edits you make to the new copies do not affect the original, and vice versa.
• Link to Original Clip(s). If you choose this option, the new copies and the original clip are
linked together. Edits you make to any of the linked clips, including the original, affect all other
linked clips in the group.
8. Choose the other options you want and click OK.
SONAR creates copies of the selected clips that are linked in the way you chose.
To unlink linked clips
1. In the Clips pane, select the clips you want to unlink.
2. Right-click on any selected clip and choose Unlink from the pop-up menu. SONAR displays the
Unlink Clips dialog box.
3. Choose the unlink option you want, and click OK.
SONAR unlinks the clips and updates the Clips pane accordingly. From now on, any changes you
make to one of the clips are applied only to remaining linked clips, if any.
To select the clips that are linked to another clip
1. Select one or more clips in the Track view.
2. Right-click on any selected clip and choose Select All Siblings from the pop-up menu.
SONAR selects any clip that is linked to one of the currently selected clips.
378
Arranging and editing
Working with linked clips
Splitting and combining clips
SONAR provides several commands that are used to split and combine clips. Specifically, you can:
• Split a clip into several smaller clips
• Create a new clip from a selected portion of an existing clip
• Combine adjacent or overlapping clips into a single, longer clip
The following table summarizes the commands you can use.
To do this
Use this command
Notes
Split clips into parts
•
Works on all selected clips. You can also press the s
key to split all selected clips at the Now Time.
•
Combine several clips
into one
Right-click the clip and
choose Split on the
context menu
Press S
Click the Track view Clips If the selected clips are in separate tracks, one clip is
menu and choose Bounce created for each track. All clip automation is applied
destructively to the new clip.
to Clip(s)
Table 55.
Note: Combining a stereo and mono clip always produces a stereo clip.
The Split command lets you split clips four different ways.
Option
How it works
Split at Time
Splits selected clips at a specific point in time. By default, the split occurs at the
Now time, but you can choose any time you want.
Split Repeatedly
Splits selected clips at regular intervals, beginning at a specified time, with a
specified duration. For example, you could split a long clip into 4-bar clips starting
at measure 5.
Split at Markers
Splits selected clips at any marker location. This option is available only if your
project has markers.
Split when Silent
Removes “silent” stretches of one measure or more from selected clips. The
presence in a measure of any event—including those that make no sound, such as
a patch change or lyric event—will cause that measure to be retained.
Table 56.
Arranging and editing
Splitting and combining clips
379
While the Split command works for both MIDI and audio clips, for audio clips, the Split command
provides sample accurate editing and snap-to-zero capability. Note that the Edit > Undo and Edit >
Redo commands work with all three of these editing commands.
SONAR allows you to specify what is selected after a clip is split into two parts:
• Left portion (default). Only the left portion is selected.
• Right portion.
Only the right portion is selected.
• Both portions. Both the left and right portions are selected.
• None.
Neither portion is selected.
To specify the default split behavior
1. Go to Edit > Preferences > Customization - Editing.
2. Under Clips, select the desired option in the Selection after single split list.
To split clips into smaller clips
1. Select the clips you want to split.
2. Right-click on any selected clip, and choose Split from the pop-up menu. SONAR shows the
Split dialog box or press the S key to split the clip(s) at the Now Time.
3. Choose the Split option you want to use, and enter the settings you want to use.
4. Click OK.
Or
1. Select the clips you want to split.
2. Set the Now Time to the time you want to split the clips.
3. Press the S key.
SONAR splits the selected clips according to your instructions.
To combine clips
1. Select the clips you want to combine (the clips must be on the same track).
2. Right-click on of the clips and select Bounce to Clip(s) from the pop-up menu.
SONAR combines the selected clips into a single, new clip.
380
Arranging and editing
Splitting and combining clips
Take lanes
Take lanes provide an alternative method of viewing and editing overlapping clips on tracks.
Overlapping clips can occur when you record multiple takes on the same track. Take lanes can be
expanded or collapsed on each track. When expanded, Take lanes are indented below the parent
track. Take lanes can be created, hidden, and removed, and each track can have an unlimited
number of lanes.
Take lanes provide many benefits, including:
• Better visibility of clip data.
• Less screen clutter on track strips.
• Ability to quickly mute and solo individual takes.
• Better workflow for creating a final composite take out of many separate takes.
To show a track’s Take lanes, click the track’s Expand/collapse Take lanes button
Figure 98.
Take lanes collapsed.
Figure 99.
Take lanes expanded.
.
A
B
A. Parent track B. Take lanes
When you view clips in separate Take lanes, it’s easy to mute and solo them individually and
eventually come up with a composite take, with only the best clips playing back.
When you use loop recording, you can store all your takes in the same track, and then use the Mute
tool or “Audition (selection playback)” on page 389 to hear only the ones you want.
If you enable a track’s Expand/collapse Take Lanes button
separate lanes whenever any of the following happens:
Arranging and editing
Take lanes
, SONAR moves the track’s clips to
381
• You use loop recording in Comping or Sound on Sound mode, and choose to store takes in a
single track.
• You record over some pre-existing data while in Sound on Sound mode.
• The track contains at least one overlapping clip.
See:
“Take lane controls” on page 382
“Using Take lanes” on page 384
See also:
“Comping” on page 391
Take lane controls
Most of the controls in Take lanes are identical to the controls found in tracks.
Figure 100. Take lane controls.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G H
I
J
A. Expand/collapse Take lanes B. Select lane C. Delete Take lane D. Add Take lane E. Lane name F. Edit
Filter G. Mute H. Solo I. Arm for recording J. Comments
The following controls are shown in each Take lane:
• Delete Take Lane
.
Remove lane and all data in the lane.
• Add Take Lane . Add a new empty lane below the clicked lane. Each track can have an
unlimited number of lanes. New Take lanes are automatically named T1, T2, T3, etc.
• Select. Click to select the lane and its parent track. Lanes support the same selection gestures
as tracks.
382
Arranging and editing
Take lanes
• Edit Filter.
Use a track’s Edit Filter control to specify the type of data you want to edit.
• Clips. The selected tool operates on clips.
• Audio Transients. The selected tool operates on audio transients (only available for audio
tracks).
• Notes. The selected tool operates on MIDI Note events (only available for MIDI and
Instrument tracks).
• Clip Automation. The selected tool operates on clip automation envelopes. Select the
desired automation parameter from the submenu. Created envelopes are displayed in bold
text at the top of the menu.
• Name. Take lanes are automatically named with a sequential take number. You can rename
Take lanes, just like regular tracks.
• Solo.
track.
Solo the Take lane and temporarily mute all other Take lanes within the same parent
• Mute.
Mute the Take lane.
• Record Arm. Arms the Take lane for recording. New data will overwrite existing data,
regardless of the global record mode.
• Comments. Type a comment or description of the selected take.
Note: When using Quick Groups on Take lanes, the Quick Group affects Take lanes with the
same identical name in other selected tracks.
See:
“Using Take lanes” on page 384
“Take lanes” on page 381
See also:
“Comping” on page 391
Arranging and editing
Take lanes
383
Using Take lanes
To expand/collapse a track’s Take lanes
Click a track’s Expand/collapse Take Lanes button
.
Any existing clips are moved from the parent track to separate Take lanes.
Tip: To show/hide Take lanes in the current track, press SHIFT+T.
Figure 101. You can expand and collapse Take lanes on each track.
A
B
A. Take lanes expanded B. Take lanes collapsed
After Take lanes are expanded, you can move clips on top of each other without SONAR
automatically creating new Take lanes.
Note 1: If you want to move a clip to the exact same time placement in an adjacent lane, hold
the SHIFT key down while you drag.
Note 2: If the Track view Options > Auto Crossfade option is enabled, SONAR adds a
crossfade between any newly overlapped clips that are on the same Take lane.
Take lanes and Automation lanes can be displayed simultaneously. Take lanes are always displayed
immediately below the parent track, and Automation lanes are displayed below the Take lanes.
The Expand/collapse Take Lanes button has three states:
• Collapsed, with no existing lanes. The button is not highlighted
384
Arranging and editing
Take lanes
.
• Collapsed, with at least one existing lane. The button has a soft blue glow
• Expanded. The button is solid blue
.
.
To insert a new Take lane
1. Click a track’s Expand/collapse Take Lanes
2. Click the Add Take Lane button
button.
in an existing Take lane.
A new lane is created below the clicked lane. New Take lanes are automatically named T1, T2,
T3, etc.
To remove a lane
Click the lane’s Delete Take Lane button
deleted.
. The lane is removed, and any existing clips are
To remove all empty Take lanes in a track
1. Click a track’s Expand/collapse Take Lanes
button.
2. Right-click the Comp clip (see “Editing Comp clips” on page 408) and select Remove Empty
Take Lanes on the pop-up menu.
To reorder lanes
Click any empty space in a lane and drag the lane up or down to the desired location.
To resize lanes
Move the mouse pointer over the gap below a lane until the cursor looks like this
down to resize the lane to your liking.
, then drag up or
When you resize a lane, all other Take lanes and Automation lanes in the same track automatically
inherit the same height.
Figure 102. Drag the splitter bar up/down to resize lanes.
To mute or unmute a Take lane
Click the Take lane’s Mute button
Arranging and editing
Take lanes
.
385
To solo or unsolo a Take lane
Click the Take lane’s Solo button
.
You can only solo one Take lane at a time.
Note: When a Take lane is soloed, and clip mutes (partial clip mute) are ignored.
To arm a Take lane for recording
Click the Take lane’s Arm for Recording button
.
You can only arm one Take lane at a time.
Note: If a track’s Take lanes are expanded while recording into the parent track, the recorded
data will be moved to a new Take lane after recording is stopped.
To loop record multiple takes into separate Take lanes
1. Go to Edit > Preferences > Project - Record, or right-click the Record button to access
recording settings.
2. Under the Recording Mode options, choose Sound on Sound.
3. Under Loop Recording, choose Store Takes in a Single Track, and click OK.
4. Click the target track’s Expand/collapse Take Lanes button
so Take lanes are visible.
5. Click the parent track’s Arm for Recording button. Note: It is important that you arm the parent
track, not an existing Take lane.
6. Set your loop boundaries and start recording multiple passes through the looped area.
7. Stop recording.
To select a lane
Click the top left corner of the Take lane.
To select all Take lanes in a track, do one of the following:
• Double-click the top left corner in any Take lane.
• Click the parent track’s track number.
To edit clip automation in a Take lane
1. Click a track’s Expand/collapse Take lanes button
.
2. Click the Take lane’s Edit Filter, point to Clip Automation, and select the desired clip automation
parameter. Created envelopes are displayed in bold text at the top of the menu.
3. Use the global tools to edit automation envelopes. For details see “Tools” on page 441.
386
Arranging and editing
Take lanes
See:
“Clip muting and isolating (clip soloing)” on page 388
To edit a specific Take lane control across multiple tracks
Quick Groups allow you to effortlessly adjust identical controls across the same Take lane in different
tracks. For example, you can quickly mute all Take lanes named T2. You can Quick Group the Mute,
Solo, Arm for Recording and Edit Filter controls. Quick Groups can either affect all tracks, or only
selected tracks of the same type. You hold down the CTRL key to momentarily create a Quick
Group.
Quick Groups operate on lanes with the same original name across different tracks, not in lanes on
the same track. All Take lanes remember their original name, even if you rename the lanes. For
example, all Take lanes originally named T2 are grouped, even if some of them have been renamed.
Do one of the following:
• To adjust the same control in all tracks. Hold down the CTRL key and adjust a control in a
track that is not selected. SONAR automatically adjusts the same control in all other tracks.
• To adjust the same control in selected tracks. Select the tracks you want to adjust, then hold
down the CTRL key and adjust a control in any selected track. SONAR automatically adjusts the
same control in all other selected tracks of the same type.
For example, to change the Edit Filter on all Take lanes originally named T2, select the tracks you
want to include in the Quick Group, then hold down the CTRL key while you adjust the Edit Filter
control on any selected lane named T2.
When you adjust controls in a Quick Group, each affected control displays a temporary group color.
For more information about Quick Groups, see “Quick Groups” on page 954.
See:
“Take lanes” on page 381
“Take lane controls” on page 382
See also:
“Clip muting and isolating (clip soloing)” on page 388
“Comping” on page 391
Arranging and editing
Take lanes
387
Clip muting and isolating (clip soloing)
Together with Take lanes, clip muting and isolating (clip soloing) make it easy to build a composite
take from multiple takes.
The Mute tool
lets you mute/unmute entire clips, or only regions within clips. Click a clip to mute/
unmute the clip. Drag in the bottom half of the clip to mute a region, and drag in the top half to
unmute a region. A clip that is completely muted appears dimmed. In addition, you can also play
back only selected data if you want by pressing the SHIFT key and the SPACEBAR at the same
time.
To mute a time range
1. Select the Mute tool
in the Control Bar.
2. If you want to mute a precise amount of time, enable the Snap to Grid button
menu to an appropriate value.
and set its
3. Drag across the bottom half of the clip.
SONAR mutes the area you dragged through and displays the muted waveform or MIDI data as a
dotted line.
A
A. Muted area of clip
To unmute a time range
1. Select the Mute tool
in the Control Bar.
2. Drag across the top half of the clip.
To mute or unmute an entire clip
1. Select the Mute tool
in the Control Bar.
2. Click the clip.
A muted clip appears dimmed.
388
Arranging and editing
Clip muting and isolating (clip soloing)
Toggling a clip’s mute status
You can mute or unmute a clip without using the Mute tool if you want. Pressing K on your keyboard
toggles the mute status of all selected clips. Any muted time ranges remain muted.
See:
“Audition (selection playback)” on page 389
“Isolating (clip soloing)” on page 390
Audition (selection playback)
To audition the current selection, press SHIFT+SPACEBAR. Only the selected data plays back.
Note: If you are auditioning a take in a Take lane, you can use the UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT
ARROW keys to audition adjacent takes. Press the ENTER key when you identify your favorite
take, and SONAR will isolate the take and mute all other overlapping takes. For details, see
“Isolating (clip soloing)” on page 390.
See:
“Isolating (clip soloing)” on page 390
Arranging and editing
Clip muting and isolating (clip soloing)
389
Isolating (clip soloing)
Isolating works by muting all the clips in a track in the same time region except the ones that you
want to hear. To make it simpler to work with overlapping clips in the same track, click the track’s
Expand/collapse Take Lanes button
to show overlapping clips in separate lanes.
To isolate a region
1. Select the Mute tool
in the Control Bar.
2. Set the track’s Edit Filter control to Clips.
3. Hold down the CTRL key and drag across the region you want to isolate.
To isolate a clip
1. Select the Mute tool
in the Control Bar.
2. Set the track’s Edit Filter control to Clips.
3. Hold down the CTRL key and click the clip to isolate the entire clip/lane.
To isolate a take in a Take lane
1. Select the Smart tool
or Comping tool
in the Control Bar.
2. Set the track’s Edit Filter control to Clips.
3. Click the track’s Expand/collapse Take Lanes button
so Take lanes are visible.
4. Click the take to isolate the take and mute all other overlapping takes.
To isolate a take during audition
1. Select the Smart tool
or Comping tool
in the Control Bar.
2. Set the track’s Edit Filter control to Clips.
3. Click the track’s Expand/collapse Take Lanes button
so Take lanes are visible.
4. Select a take, then press SHIFT+SPACEBAR to audition the take.
5. Use the UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT ARROW keys to navigate between takes, then press ENTER
when you locate the take you want to isolate.
See:
“Take lanes” on page 381
“Clip muting and isolating (clip soloing)” on page 388
“Comping” on page 391
“Speed comping” on page 404
390
Arranging and editing
Clip muting and isolating (clip soloing)
Comping
There are various methods you can use to record your best performance. Comping refers to the
process of recording multiple takes, then assembling a final “composite” track by combining the best
parts from each take.
While some musicians can perform a flawless performance in a single take, most people typically
record several takes so they have a few alternative versions of the same performance in case there
are any mistakes they want to fix later.
Instead of using punch recording to painstakingly record multiple short “perfect” takes, it is often a
better approach to record multiple longer takes, even if they contain mistakes, then isolate the best
parts from each take. This approach is usually more relaxed and allows you to capture a better
performance.
SONAR makes comping very easy and transparent. You simply click or drag across the takes you
want to keep, and SONAR automatically mutes all other overlapping takes on the same track.
There are three primary methods you can use to comp in SONAR:
• Comping record mode. The default recording mode in SONAR is called Comping. When
recording, previously recorded material on the track is not heard. When a recording is done, the
newly recorded material is unmuted and all other takes are muted for the duration of the new
material. Each take appears on its own Take lane, with the newest take on top. For details, see
“Comping record mode” on page 397 and “Recording modes” on page 278.
• Manual comping. When Take lanes are visible on a track, you can use the Smart tool
or
to isolate overlapping takes. Simply click or drag across a take, and all other
Comping tool
overlapping takes in the same track are muted. For details, see “Comping with the Smart tool and
Comping tool” on page 400.
• Speed comping. After recording multiple takes, you can audition any individual take, use
keyboard shortcut keys to audition other takes and then select which take you want to use. For
details, see “Speed comping” on page 404.
You can use one or more of the different methods to create a perfect comp. SONAR will even apply
configurable crossfades between takes automatically, and you can quickly “flatten” the final comp to
a new Take lane and mute the original takes.
Arranging and editing
Comping
391
A
B
A. Comp clip B. Takes
See:
“Basic comping workflow” on page 393
“Recording takes” on page 394
“Auditioning takes” on page 396
“Comping methods” on page 397
“Comping with the Smart tool and Comping tool” on page 400
“Speed comping” on page 404
“Adjusting crossfades” on page 407
“Editing Comp clips” on page 408
“Finalizing the comp” on page 411
“Removing all unused takes and empty Take lanes” on page 413
See also:
“Take lanes” on page 381
392
Arranging and editing
Comping
Basic comping workflow
When comping, you will typically use a workflow that looks similar to this:
1. Record multiple takes to separate Take lanes. You can manually record to one Take lane at a
time, or set up loop recording to automatically create a new Take lane for each repetition. You
can also import loops. For details, see “Recording takes” on page 394.
2. Click the track’s Expand/collapse Take Lanes button
visible.
(or press SHIFT+T) so Take lanes are
3. Audition takes to identify which takes you want to keep or delete. You can mute and solo
individual Take lanes, or audition only the selected clips or time region by pressing
SHIFT+SPACEBAR. For details, see “Auditioning takes” on page 396.
4. Mute or delete any takes you are certain you don’t want to keep. When you are left with two or
more good takes, it’s time to pick the best parts from each take and combine them into a final
composite track.
or Comping tool
, click or drag across the takes you want to keep.
5. Using the Smart tool
SONAR automatically mutes all other overlapping takes on the same track. For details, see
“Comping with the Smart tool and Comping tool” on page 400.
You can also use speed comping for even faster workflow (see “Speed comping” on page 404).
6. Fine-tune the comp, if necessary by adjusting clip start/end times and cross-fades. For details,
see “Adjusting crossfades” on page 407.
7. Finalize the comp by right-clicking the Comp clip and selecting Flatten Comp on the pop-up
menu. For details, see “Finalizing the comp” on page 411.
Note: The original takes are still available after you flatten a comp. This allows you to experiment
freely and create unlimited alternative comps for each track.
8. Delete any unused takes or empty Take lanes. For details, see “Removing all unused takes and
empty Take lanes” on page 413.
See:
“Recording takes” on page 394
“Auditioning takes” on page 396
“Comping methods” on page 397
“Comping with the Smart tool and Comping tool” on page 400
“Speed comping” on page 404
“Adjusting crossfades” on page 407
“Editing Comp clips” on page 408
“Finalizing the comp” on page 411
“Removing all unused takes and empty Take lanes” on page 413
“Comping” on page 391
Arranging and editing
Comping
393
See also:
“Take lanes” on page 381
Recording takes
Before comping, you need to record multiple takes on a track. You can manually record to one Take
lane at a time, or set up loop recording to automatically create a new Take lane for each repetition.
A take is any new data brought into a track. It can be recorded audio or MIDI, dragged-in loops, or
imported files. If a track has data on it, it has at least one Take lane. A new Take lane is created for
each new take.
Note: In Overwrite record mode, a new Take lane is only created if there is no existing lane.
Otherwise, the new data overwrites existing data on the existing lane.
The following rules apply when recording new takes:
• Take lanes are named automatically. The first lane is named T1, the next lane is named T2, etc.
The lane number always stays with a lane, even if you reorder, insert or delete lanes.
• The newest (chronologically youngest) take is shown on top when displayed in lanes.
• Clips cannot overlap on the same Take lane. If you wish to overlap two clips, place each clip in a
separate Take lane. When a clip is moved, pasted or recorded to a lane, any clip data already in
that area will be cropped or removed to accommodate the new data.
Loop recording multiple takes to a single track
1. Go to Edit > Preferences > Project - Record, or right-click the Record button
recording settings in the Preferences dialog box.
to access
2. Under Recording Mode, select Comping.
3. Under Loop Recording, select Store Takes in a Single Track. Click OK to close the
Preferences dialog box.
4. Insert a new track or choose an existing track you want to record to.
5. Click the target track’s Expand/collapse Take Lanes button
so Take lanes are visible.
6. Click the track’s Record button
to arm the track for recording. Note: It is important that you
arm the parent track, not an existing Take lane.
7. Drag in the Track view time ruler to select the desired loop boundaries.
8. Right-click the time ruler and select Set Loop Points on the pop-up menu (or press SHIFT+L).
You can also click the Set Loop Points to Selection
module.
394
Arranging and editing
Comping
button in the Control Bar’s Loop
9. Click the Record button
in Control Bar’s Transport module.
10. When recording is complete, click the Stop button
.
Each repetition appears in its own Take lane.
Take lanes are named automatically. The first lane is named T1, the next lane is named T2, etc. The
newest (chronologically youngest) take is shown on top. The lane number always stays with a lane,
even if you reorder, insert or delete lanes.
Recording to a single Take lane
1. Insert a new track or choose an existing track you want to record to.
2. Click the track’s Expand/collapse Take Lanes button
visible.
3. Click the top lane’s Add Take Lane button
4. Click the new Take lane’s Record button
5. Click the Record button
(or press SHIFT+T) so Take lanes are
to create a new empty Take lane.
to arm the lane for recording.
in Control Bar’s Transport module.
6. When recording is complete, click the Stop button
.
Note: When recording on a Take lane, new data will overwrite existing data, regardless of the
global record mode.
See:
“Basic comping workflow” on page 393
“Auditioning takes” on page 396
“Comping methods” on page 397
“Comping with the Smart tool and Comping tool” on page 400
“Speed comping” on page 404
“Adjusting crossfades” on page 407
“Editing Comp clips” on page 408
“Finalizing the comp” on page 411
“Removing all unused takes and empty Take lanes” on page 413
“Comping” on page 391
Arranging and editing
Comping
395
See also:
“Recording” on page 267
“Recording modes” on page 278
“Looping” on page 194
“Take lanes” on page 381
Auditioning takes
There are several ways to audition takes in order to compare and find the best takes:
• Click the Take lane’s Solo button
.
Unlike track solo buttons, Take lane solo buttons are mutually exclusive, meaning you can only
solo one Take lane on a track at a time. This allows you to quickly audition or solo a single take
since there is no need to first unsolo other takes.When soloed, time mute (partial clip mute)
regions are ignored. You might want to enable looping in order to repeat a specific time region
while you audition different takes.
• Select the desired clip(s) or time region, then press SHIFT+SPACEBAR.
You can use the LEFT/RIGHT/UP/DOWN ARROW keys to audition adjacent takes, then press
the ENTER key to isolate the selected take. This is referred to as speed comping. For details,
see “Speed comping” on page 404.
Tip: If you want to audition takes in context with other tracks, enable Dim Solo mode in the Control
Bar’s Mix module. For details, see “Dim Solo mode” on page 205.
• Hold down the J key to enter Scrub mode, then drag across a take.
See:
“Basic comping workflow” on page 393
“Recording takes” on page 394
“Comping methods” on page 397
“Comping with the Smart tool and Comping tool” on page 400
“Speed comping” on page 404
“Adjusting crossfades” on page 407
“Editing Comp clips” on page 408
“Finalizing the comp” on page 411
“Removing all unused takes and empty Take lanes” on page 413
“Comping” on page 391
396
Arranging and editing
Comping
See also:
“Take lanes” on page 381
“Audition (selection playback)” on page 389
“Scrubbing” on page 836
“To solo or unsolo a Take lane” on page 386
“Looping” on page 194
Comping methods
There are three primary methods you can use to comp in SONAR:
• Comping record mode. The default recording mode in SONAR is called Comping. When
recording, previously recorded material on the track is not heard. When a recording is done, the
newly recorded material is unmuted and all other takes are muted for the duration of the new
material. Each take appears on its own Take lane, with the newest take on top. For details, see
“Comping record mode” on page 397 and “Recording modes” on page 278.
• Manual comping. When Take lanes are visible on a track, you can use the Smart tool
or
to isolate overlapping takes. Simply click or drag across a take, and all other
Comping tool
overlapping takes in the same track are muted. For details, see “Comping with the Smart tool and
Comping tool” on page 400.
• Speed comping. After recording multiple takes, you can audition any individual take, use
keyboard shortcut keys to audition other takes and then select which take you want to use. For
details, see “Speed comping” on page 404.
Comping record mode
The default recording mode in SONAR is called Comping. When recording, previously recorded
material on the track is not heard. When a recording is done, the newly recorded material is unmuted
and all other takes are muted for the duration of the new material. Each take appears on its own
Take lane, with the newest take on top.
1. Go to Edit > Preferences > Project - Record, or right-click the Record button
recording settings in the Preferences dialog box.
to access
2. Under Recording Mode, select Comping.
3. If you want to loop record multiple alternative takes, select Store Takes in a Single Track under
Loop Recording. Click OK to close the Preferences dialog box.
The Record button in the Control Bar’s Transport module looks like
enabled.
when Comping mode is
4. Insert a new track or choose an existing track you want to record to.
5. Click the target track’s Expand/collapse Take Lanes button
Arranging and editing
Comping
so Take lanes are visible.
397
6. Click the track’s Record button
to arm the track for recording. Note: It is important that you
arm the parent track, not an existing Take lane.
7. If you are loop recording multiple takes:
a) Drag in the Track view time ruler to select the desired loop boundaries.
b) Right-click the time ruler and select Set Loop Points on the pop-up menu (or press
SHIFT+L). You can also click the Set Loop Points to Selection
Bar’s Loop module.
8. Click the Record button
button in the Control
in Control Bar’s Transport module.
9. When recording is complete, click the Stop button
.
Each repetition appears in its own Take lane.
Take lanes are named automatically. The first lane is named T1, the next lane is named T2, etc. The
newest (chronologically youngest) take is shown on top. The lane number always stays with a lane,
even if you reorder, insert or delete lanes.
Figure 103. The most recent take is unmuted and on top.
The following tabled describes how the various record modes behave when recording new takes.
398
Arranging and editing
Comping
Hear existing
material while
recording?
Time-mute
existing
material?
Create new
Take lane for
How it works
each pass when
loop recording?
Comping
(default)
No
Yes
Yes
Overwrite
No
No (new material No (unless global
overwrites existing Store Takes in
Separate Tracks
material)
option is enabled in
Edit >
Preferences >
Project - Record)
The new material
replaces (overwrites) any
existing material. This
means that portions of
existing clips may be
“wiped clean” to make
room for newly recorded
material. While recording,
you will not be able to
hear material from
existing clips.
Sound on
Sound
Yes
No
The new material is
merged with any existing
material. This means that
any existing clips on the
track are left unchanged
and all newly recorded
material is stored in new
clips. While recording, you
will be able to hear
material from existing
clips.
Record
mode
Table 57.
Record
button
Yes
When recording,
previously recorded
material on the track is not
heard. When a recording
is done, the newly
recorded material is heard
and all other takes are
time-muted for the
duration of the new
material.
Record modes
You can use any combination of looping and Auto Punch in either Comping, Overwrite, or Sound on
Sound mode.
Arranging and editing
Comping
399
See also:
“Loop recording multiple takes to a single track” on page 394.
“Looping” on page 194
“Recording” on page 267
“Recording modes” on page 278
Comping with the Smart tool and Comping tool
SONAR’s Smart tool
or Comping tool
have an isolate function that allows you to select a
region on one Take lane and automatically mute the same region in all other Take lanes on the same
track.
The mouse pointer looks like
when comping operations are possible. Simply click a take to
isolate the take, or drag to make a time selection, and SONAR automatically mutes all other
overlapping takes in the same track. Clips are split, if necessary, in order to be isolated or muted.
Tip: When comping, enable Aim Assist (Edit > Aim Assist, or press X) so you can clearly see which
clips overlap at the position you click. When you click or drag to isolate a take, any other takes on the
same track that intersect the Aim Assist line will be muted.
Figure 104. Click the take you want to isolate.
When a clip is split, the two resulting clips contain identical data, but are cropped differently. SONAR
will intelligently create as few clips as possible when comping. If a clip has been split, it can later be
“healed” by removing the split. SONAR can heal split clips if two clips are abutting, and contain the
identical audio data, as long as the clips have not been moved relative to each other.
or Comping tool
to isolate and mute/unmute, SONAR will
When you use the Smart tool
automatically “heal” any split clips if possible in order to reduce the number of clips. You can simply
400
Arranging and editing
Comping
focus on identifying the regions you want to hear (isolate), and SONAR will automatically split, mute/
unmute, and heal clips.
Figure 105. Drag to select the region you want to isolate.
Figure 106. SONAR splits and mutes takes in order to define the isolate/mute regions.
Figure 107. Drag to isolate another region, and SONAR automatically heals previous splits, if necessary.
You can also manually heal abutting healable clips. To do so, select the clips, then hold down the
CTRL key and clip one of the selected clips.
Tip: You can mute/unmute individual clips if you want to have several overlapping takes unmuted. To
do so, right-click and select Clip Mute/Unmute on the pop-up menu, or select the clip and press K.
Arranging and editing
Comping
401
Isolate gestures work on the surrounding “zone”, using the following order of priority:
• Selection. If the clicked spot is within a selection region anywhere on that track, the entire
selection is isolated.
• Mute/Isolate regions. The boundaries of muted and unmuted regions are the zone boundaries.
All mute/unmute regions across all Take lanes are used.
• Clips. The cropped points of the clicked clip are the zone boundaries.
All comping gestures work across clips in clip selection groups, including isolating and healing.
The mouse pointer shows you which edit operation is available at the current mouse position.
Pointer
402
Edit operation
Smart tool
Comping tool
Isolate a clip or region.
x
x
Crossfade abutting clips.
x
x
Crop clip start (hold down the CTRL key to stretch).
x
x
Crop clip end (hold down the CTRL key to stretch).
x
x
Move data within clip (press ALT+SHIFT).
x
x
Select by time.
x
Move.
x
Fade in.
x
Fade out.
x
Split (press the ALT key)
x
Arranging and editing
Comping
Note: Only the Smart tool
changes its functionality when editing in a Take lane. The other
tools function in the exact same way as when Take lanes are hidden. The Comping tool
works when Take lanes are shown.
only
See also:
“Clip muting and isolating (clip soloing)” on page 388
“Using the Smart tool in Take lanes” on page 459
“Using the Comping tool in Take lanes” on page 481
Arranging and editing
Comping
403
Speed comping
You can quickly audition each take by itself and select only the takes you want to keep.
To do so:
1. Select a take you want to audition.
2. Press SHIFT+SPACEBAR to start audition playback. Audition will loop continuously. You will see
temporary Loop markers in the time ruler.
3. Press the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW key to audition the next or previous take. Take lanes
are numbered sequentially, with the most recent take on top.
4. When you identify your favorite take, press the ENTER key to isolate the take and mute all other
overlapping takes. SONAR will automatically split and mute other takes as necessary.
404
Arranging and editing
Comping
5. Press the LEFT ARROW or RIGHT ARROW key to move to other takes along the timeline.
6. Repeat steps 3-4 until you have completed the comping.
Tip: If you want to audition takes in context with other tracks, enable Dim Solo mode in the Control
Bar’s Mix module. For details, see “Dim Solo mode” on page 205.
Tip: Before speed comping, you may first want to use the Smart tool or Comping tool to drag across
each musical phrase in order to split the takes into smaller phrases. This makes it easier to quickly
mute/unmute shorter phrases while comping. For details, see “Comping with the Smart tool and
Comping tool” on page 400. Also see “Splitting clips” on page 146, “Split tool” on page 482 and
“Splitting and combining clips” on page 379.
Arranging and editing
Comping
405
The following table shows speed comping keyboard shortcuts.
Command
Shortcut
Audition the selected take
SHIFT+SPACEBAR
Audition the next or previous take
UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW
Isolate the currently auditioned take
ENTER
Audition the next or previous take along the timeline
RIGHT ARROW or LEFT ARROW
Table 58.
Speed comping keyboard shortcuts
See:
“Basic comping workflow” on page 393
“Recording takes” on page 394
“Auditioning takes” on page 396
“Adjusting crossfades” on page 407
“Editing Comp clips” on page 408
“Finalizing the comp” on page 411
“Removing all unused takes and empty Take lanes” on page 413
“Comping” on page 391
See also:
“Take lanes” on page 381
“Clip muting and isolating (clip soloing)” on page 388
“Using the Smart tool in Take lanes” on page 459
“Using the Comping tool in Take lanes” on page 481
406
Arranging and editing
Comping
Adjusting crossfades
When splitting clips as a result of comping, SONAR automatically adds a short crossfade between
abutting takes. In order to create a crossfade, clip boundaries must occur at the exact same position
on the time line. You can manually adjust the duration of each crossfade by dragging the crossfade
up/down in either the Comp clip or in a Take lane.
To adjust a crossfade duration, position the mouse pointer near the bottom where two clips abut.
When the mouse pointer looks like
, drag up or down to increase or decrease the crossfade
duration. Drag left or right to adjust the crossfade position.
To specify the default auto crossfade duration
1. Go to Edit > Preferences > Customization - Editing.
2. Under Clips, specify the Auto Crossfade Comps (0-25ms) value.
See:
“Basic comping workflow” on page 393
“Recording takes” on page 394
“Auditioning takes” on page 396
“Comping methods” on page 397
“Comping with the Smart tool and Comping tool” on page 400
“Speed comping” on page 404
“Editing Comp clips” on page 408
“Finalizing the comp” on page 411
Arranging and editing
Comping
407
“Removing all unused takes and empty Take lanes” on page 413
“Comping” on page 391
See also:
“Take lanes” on page 381
“Fades and crossfades” on page 430
Editing Comp clips
When showing multiple Take lanes, the parent track shows a Comp clip that is a visual
representation of all overlapping unmuted takes in the track, but no audio or MIDI data actually
exists in a Comp clip. A track can contain multiple Comp clips if there are time gaps between takes.
When you hide Take lanes, Comp clips are also hidden and the takes are shown as regular clips.
Each Comp clip has a blue unifying header bar, which allows you to select and move the takes as a
group, and the clip background color is slightly darker than regular clips.
In addition to editing individual takes, you can also perform various editing operations directly on a
Comp clip, and the edits will propagate down to the underlying takes.
Figure 108. The Comp clip is a visual representation of the track’s unmuted takes
A
B
A. Comp clip B. Takes
408
Arranging and editing
Comping
Figure 109. A Comp clip can contain multiple regions.
A
B
C
D
H
E
I
F
G
A. Isolated take region B. Empty region (no unmuted takes) C. Crossfade region D. Multiclip region E. Isolated
take F. Muted take G. Crossfade H. Comp clip unified header (click to select or move all takes as a
group) I. Multiclip region (multiple overlapping unmuted takes)
A Comp clip contains the following sections:
• Unified header. The solid blue header makes it easy to identify Comp clips. Click the header to
select all underlying takes, or drag to move all takes as a group.
• Isolated take region. Shows the clip data for a single isolated take. There are no other
overlapping unmuted takes.
• Multiclip region. If multiple unmuted takes overlap, the Comp clip automatically shows a
multiclip, which displays the combined waveform or MIDI data of the overlapping clips.
• Crossfade region. Shows the crossfade for abutting takes that are crossfaded. Drag left/right
to adjust position, or up/down to adjust the crossfade duration.
You can use the global editing tools on Comp clips to perform many of the same edit operations that
you can perform on regular clips. When you edit a Comp clip, you are essentially editing the
underlying takes. You can think of it as editing a clip group or a track folder. All edit operations on the
Comp clip will result in that edit being applied across all corresponding Take lanes. The following
table describes edit operations on Comp clips.
Arranging and editing
Comping
409
Edit
operation
Isolated clip region
Multiclip region
Crossfade region
Select
Selects the
corresponding time
region in all takes.
Selects the corresponding
time region in all takes.
Delete
Deletes region on all
takes.
Deletes region on all takes. Only deletes crossfade clip.
Crop
Equivalent to cropping
the corresponding take.
The clip region is
bounded by the
underlying clip, so you
cannot extend a clip
region further than the
corresponding take
boundaries.
Same, but applies to all
clips that are part of the
multiclip, and unmutes
instead of isolating.
Fade
Splits and applies fade
to all takes.
Splits and applies fade to
all takes.
Move
Splits region and moves
data.
Splits region and moves
data.
Copy
Copies all takes for
region.
Copies all takes for region.
Split
Splits all takes.
Splits all takes.
Mute
Mutes region on all
takes.
Mutes region on all takes.
Table 59.
Comp clip edit operations
See:
“Basic comping workflow” on page 393
“Recording takes” on page 394
“Auditioning takes” on page 396
“Comping methods” on page 397
“Comping with the Smart tool and Comping tool” on page 400
“Speed comping” on page 404
“Adjusting crossfades” on page 407
410
Arranging and editing
Comping
Only selects the crossfade
clip.
Shortens or extends
crossfade.
“Finalizing the comp” on page 411
“Removing all unused takes and empty Take lanes” on page 413
“Comping” on page 391
See also:
“Take lanes” on page 381
Finalizing the comp
After you have completed a comp, you might want to mix all the unmuted takes down to a new Take
lane as a single continuous take.
To flatten all isolated clips in a track
1. Click the track’s Expand/collapse Take Lanes
button to show Take lanes.
2. Right-click the Comp clip and select Flatten Comp on the pop-up menu.
The comp is mixed down to a new Take lane named Comp. The new take is locked to prevent
further editing, and the new Take lane is soloed.
To unlock the clip, select the clip, show the Clip Inspector, and set Lock to None. For details, see
“Locking Clips” on page 359.
Figure 110. Right-click a Comp clip and select Flatten comp.
Arranging and editing
Comping
411
Figure 111. The flattened comp is mixed down to a new soloed Take lane
See:
“Basic comping workflow” on page 393
“Recording takes” on page 394
“Auditioning takes” on page 396
“Comping methods” on page 397
“Comping with the Smart tool and Comping tool” on page 400
“Speed comping” on page 404
“Adjusting crossfades” on page 407
“Editing Comp clips” on page 408
“Removing all unused takes and empty Take lanes” on page 413
“Comping” on page 391
See also:
“Take lanes” on page 381
“Bouncing tracks” on page 958
“Bouncing to clips” on page 835
“Splitting and combining clips” on page 379
“Preparing audio for distribution” on page 963
“Locking Clips” on page 359
412
Arranging and editing
Comping
Removing all unused takes and empty Take lanes
During, or after finishing a comp, you might want to permanently remove all muted takes or empty
Take lanes if you are certain that you will not need them. SONAR has several convenient commands
to automate this process.
To delete all muted takes in a track
1. Click the track’s Expand/collapse Take Lanes
button to show Take lanes.
2. Right-click the Comp clip and select Delete Muted Takes on the pop-up menu.
To remove all empty Take lanes in a track
1. Click the track’s Expand/collapse Take Lanes
button to show Take lanes.
2. Right-click the Comp clip and select Remove Empty Take Lanes on the pop-up menu.
See:
“Basic comping workflow” on page 393
“Recording takes” on page 394
“Auditioning takes” on page 396
“Comping methods” on page 397
“Comping with the Smart tool and Comping tool” on page 400
“Speed comping” on page 404
“Adjusting crossfades” on page 407
“Editing Comp clips” on page 408
“Finalizing the comp” on page 411
“Removing all unused takes and empty Take lanes” on page 413
“Comping” on page 391
See also:
“Take lanes” on page 381
“To insert a new Take lane” on page 385
“To remove a lane” on page 385
“To reorder lanes” on page 385
Arranging and editing
Comping
413
Track folders
A track folder contains tracks in the Track pane of the Track view. Track folders make larger projects
much easier to manage—you can group different types of tracks in their own folder: vocals, soft
synths, ReWire instruments, drums, etc.
The main characteristics of a track folder are:
• You can edit all the tracks in the folder as if you were editing a single track—especially valuable
for drum tracks. The track folder displays a composite clip in the Clips pane of all the clips in the
folder. Selecting a time range in the composite clip selects data in all the enclosed tracks in the
same time range; now you can edit all the tracks in the folder by editing the selected area of the
composite clip.
• You can hide tracks in a folder, freeing up space on your screen.
• A folder can contain any type of track—you can put MIDI, audio, and synth tracks in the same
folder.
• You can archive, mute, solo, arm, or input monitor all the tracks in a folder with one click—just
click the Archive, Mute, Solo, Arm, or Input Echo button on the track folder.
E
F
G
D
C
H
B
A
A. The tracks in a track folder are indented B. Description box C. Track folder info D. Open/Close
folder E. Track folder—click here to select all data in track folder F. Archive, Mute, Solo, Arm, and Input Echo
buttons G. Selected area of composite clip H. Composite clip
414
Arranging and editing
Track folders
To create a track folder
• Right-click in the Track pane of the Track view, and choose Insert Track Folder from the pop-up
menu.
Or
• Use the Insert > Track Folder menu command.
Or
• Right-click a track that’s not in a track folder and select Move to Folder > New Track Folder from
the pop-up menu.
A new track folder appears in the Track pane.
To add a track to a track folder
• In the Track view, move the mouse cursor just to the right of the track number of a pre-existing
track until the cursor turns into a black, double-ended arrow, and then click and drag the track’s
title bar onto the track folder. Release the mouse.
Or
• Insert a track when a track within a track folder has focus.
Or
• Right-click a track that’s not in a track folder and select Move to Folder > Track Folder “n” from
the pop-up menu.
Or
• Select the tracks you want to add to the folder, right-click on the folder and select Add Track(s) to
Folder from the menu that appears.
The added track appears in the track folder, and is indented a little to show that it’s inside the track
folder.
To remove a track from a track folder
• In the Track view, move the cursor just to the right of the track number of a track until the cursor
turns into a black, double-ended arrow, and then click and drag the track’s title bar out of the
Track Folder. Release the mouse.
Or
• Right-click the track and select Remove From Folder from the pop-up menu.
To add multiple tracks to a track folder
1. Select the tracks you want to add.
2. Right-click a selected track and choose Move to Folder > Track Folder “n” from the pop-up
menu.
Arranging and editing
Track folders
415
To remove multiple tracks from a track folder
1. Select the tracks you want to remove.
2. Right-click a selected track and choose Remove From Folder from the pop-up menu.
To delete a track folder
1. In the Track view, right-click and select Delete Track Folder from the menu that appears.
2. SONAR asks you if you want to delete all the tracks in the folder along with the track folder—
click Yes or No.
SONAR deletes the track folder. If you didn’t choose to delete the tracks in the track folders, SONAR
moves these tracks to the top level.
To open or close a track folder
• Click the folder icon that’s just left of the track folder’s name.
To select or deselect all the tracks in a track folder
• Click just to the left of the folder icon.
To rename a track folder
• Double-click the track folder’s name, type a new name, and press ENTER.
To add a description to a track folder
• Double-click the Description box, type a description, and press ENTER.
To select all clips in a time range
• With the Smart tool
or Select tool
, drag across the bottom half of the composite clip.
Now you can edit, move, cut and paste all the selected clips by editing the selected part of the
composite clip.
416
Arranging and editing
Track folders
Adding effects in the Track view
You can add both MIDI and audio effects directly from the Track view. SONAR adds these effects in
real-time, preserving your track’s original data.
To add effects in the Track view
1. Right-click in the effects bin of the track you want to add effects to.
A
A. Right-click here to add an effect
An effects pop-up menu appears. SONAR displays MIDI effects if you are editing a MIDI track,
and audio effects for an audio track.
2. Select an effect from the menu.
The name of the effect appears in the effects bin and the effect’s property page appears. To
delete the effect, right-click the effect name and choose Delete from the pop-up menu.
3. Set the effects parameters or choose a preset.
Play your track and listen to the effect(s).
Note: If you use the same effects for more than one track, it’s more efficient to add the effects
to an bus. See “To patch a track through a bus” on page 893.
Arranging and editing
Adding effects in the Track view
417
Changing tempos
Your project can incorporate all kinds of tempo changes, including step changes from one tempo to
another, gradual increases (accelerandos) or decreases (ritardandos), and almost any other type of
change you can imagine. The tempo changes you add to your project become part of the project and
are saved with the project file.
You can add tempo changes to your project in the following ways:
• Clicking the tempo display in the Control Bar’s Transport module.
• Using the Project > Insert Tempo Change and Project > Insert Series of Tempos commands.
• By drawing tempo changes graphically in the Tempo view.
• Inserting tempo changes in the Tempo view’s Tempo List pane.
The Process > Fit to Time and Process > Fit Improvisation commands can also be used to
introduce tempo changes into your work file. For more information, see “Stretching and shrinking
events” on page 762 and “Fit Improvisation” on page 775.
When you change the tempo of a project that contains audio, SONAR allows you to stretch or shrink
audio clips when you have converted them to Groove clips and have enabled the Follow Project
Pitch option in the Loop Construction view. Otherwise, the MIDI tracks will speed up or slow down
while the audio tracks will play at the same speed. For more information about Groove clips, see
“Working with Groove Clip audio” on page 706. Audio clips that are not Groove clips change in size
when moved to a part of your project that has a different tempo.
Sometimes you don’t want to adjust the speed of your audio. Here are some examples:
• If your project contains background music and a voice-over, you might want to change the tempo
of the background music without altering the voice-over.
• If you’re trying to modify the speed of some MIDI tracks to match a sampled drum groove, you
want to leave the audio unchanged.
When you change the tempo of your project, clips having stretching enabled change tempo along
with the project, while those that do not have stretching enabled do not. For more information about
stretch-enabling clips, see “To set the tempo of a Groove Clip” on page 709.
Tempos set when the clock source is set to MIDI Sync do not have any effect, because SONAR
follows the external tempo. For more information, see “Synchronizing your gear” on page 1265.
See:
“Using the Transport module” on page 419
“Using the Tempo commands” on page 419
“Using the Tempo view” on page 421
“Automation time base” on page 1107
418
Arranging and editing
Changing tempos
Using the Transport module
The Transport module displays the current tempo and lets you change the tempo as shown in the
following figure.
Figure 112. The Transport module.
A
A. Click to enter a new tempo
When you enter a new tempo directly in the Transport module, you change the most recent tempo
setting in the project.
To change the current tempo in the Tempo toolbar
1. Enable Groove Clip Looping on any audio clips that you want to follow the tempo changes. Do
this by selecting one or more clips, right-clicking a selected clip, and choosing Groove > Clip
Looping from the pop-up menu. Each clip that has Groove Clip Looping enabled has beveled
edges instead of sharp corners. The same command disables Groove Clip Looping on any
selected clip that has Groove Clip Looping enabled.
2. Click the current tempo in the Transport module.
3. Type a new value and press ENTER, or use the spinners to change the tempo value.
SONAR changes the current tempo to the desired value.
Using the Tempo commands
The Project > Insert Tempo Change and Project > Insert Series of Tempos commands can be
used to change the existing tempo of a project or to introduce one or more tempo changes at various
points in a project. You can enter tempo values directly, introduce smooth increase or decreases in
tempo, or even use your mouse to tap out the tempo you want for some portion of a project.
To insert a tempo change
1. Enable Groove Clip Looping on any audio clips that you want to follow the tempo changes. Do
this by selecting one or more clips, right-clicking a selected clip, and choosing Groove > Clip
Looping from the pop-up menu. Each clip that has Groove Clip Looping enabled has beveled
edges instead of sharp corners. The same command disables Groove Clip Looping on any
selected clip that has Groove Clip Looping enabled.
2. Choose Project > Insert Tempo Change to display the Tempo dialog box.
Arranging and editing
Changing tempos
419
Figure 113. The Tempo dialog
3. Check the Insert a New Tempo box.
4. Enter a new tempo in one of the following ways:
• Type a value in the Tempo field.
• Click the arrows to change the value.
• Tap a new tempo in the space indicated in the dialog box.
5. Enter a starting time for the new tempo.
6. Click OK.
SONAR inserts a tempo change at the designated time.
To insert a series of tempos
1. Enable Groove Clip Looping on any audio clips that you want to follow the tempo changes. Do
this by selecting one or more clips, right-clicking a selected clip, and choosing Groove > Clip
Looping from the pop-up menu. Each clip that has Groove Clip Looping enabled has beveled
edges instead of sharp corners. The same command disables Groove Clip Looping on any
selected clip that has Groove clip Looping enabled.
2. Choose Project > Insert Series of Tempos to display the Insert Series of Tempos dialog box.
Figure 114. The Insert Series of Tempos dialog
3. Enter a starting tempo, ending tempo, and step size.
4. Enter a starting and ending time for the series of tempo changes.
5. Click OK.
420
Arranging and editing
Changing tempos
SONAR erases any existing tempo changes between the starting and ending time, and inserts a
series of tempo changes that change smoothly between the starting and ending time. This
command never inserts more than one tempo change on the same clock tick. Audio clips which you
want to follow tempo changes can also be converted to Groove clips in the Loop Construction view.
To modify the most recent tempo change
1. Enable Groove Clip Looping on any audio clips that you want to follow the tempo changes. Do
this by selecting one or more clips, right-clicking a selected clip, and choosing Groove > Clip
Looping from the pop-up menu. Each clip that has Groove Clip Looping enabled has beveled
edges instead of sharp corners. The same command disables Groove Clip Looping on any
selected clip that has Groove Clip Looping enabled.
2. Choose Project > Insert Tempo Change to display the Tempo dialog box.
3. Check the Change the Most Recent Tempo box.
4. Enter a new tempo in one of the following ways:
• Type a value in the Tempo field.
• Click the arrows to change the value.
• Tap a new tempo in the space indicated in the dialog box.
5. Click OK.
SONAR changes the most recent tempo to the new value.
Using the Tempo view
The Tempo view provides both a graphic display of the tempo and a list of all tempo changes in your
project. In the graphical display you can use your mouse to draw tempo changes directly onto the
graph. In the tempo list, you can insert, edit, and delete individual tempo changes. To open the
Tempo view, choose Views > Tempo or press ALT+SHIFT+5. Click the Tempo List button
to
display or hide the tempo list.
Figure 115. The Tempo view
If an entire project has a single tempo, the graph shows a straight horizontal line, and a single tempo
in the list.
Arranging and editing
Changing tempos
421
The Control Bar contains several tools you can use to add or modify tempo changes:
Tool
Name
What it’s for
Select
Drag the Select tool in either the Tempo list or graphic display to select tempos
to edit
Freehand
Draw a custom curve indicating changes in tempo
Line
Draw a straight line indicating a steady increase or decrease in tempo
Erase
Eliminate tempo changes already in place for some portion of a project
Snap grid
Controls how often you can insert tempo changes—for example, every
measure, every eighth note, every 3 samples, etc.
Table 60.
If you make a mistake using any of these tools, you can use Edit > Undo to correct the error. When
you use the Freehand tool, the speed with which you drag the mouse determines the density of
tempo events. To insert a larger number of relatively small tempo changes, move the mouse slowly.
To insert a smaller number of relatively large tempo changes, drag the mouse quickly.
The Tempo List Pane has its own tools for editing tempo changes:
Tool
Name
What it’s for
Tempo List
Displaying a list of all tempo changes in the project.
Insert Tempo
Insert a new tempo change
Delete Tempo
Delete a tempo change
Tempo Properties
Edit a tempo change
Table 61.
422
Arranging and editing
Changing tempos
To insert a tempo change in the Tempo view
1. Enable Groove Clip Looping on any audio clips that you want to follow the tempo changes. Do
this by selecting one or more clips, right-clicking a selected clip, and choosing Groove > Clip
Looping from the pop-up menu. Each clip that has Groove Clip Looping enabled has beveled
edges instead of sharp corners. The same command disables Groove Clip Looping on any
selected clip that has Groove Clip Looping enabled.
2. Select the Freehand tool
or the Line tool
in the Control Bar.
3. Click in the Tempo view at any desired time point and tempo level.
SONAR introduces a tempo change at the indicated point.
To steadily increase or decrease the tempo in the Tempo view
1. Enable Groove Clip Looping on any audio clips that you want to follow the tempo changes. Do
this by selecting one or more clips, right-clicking a selected clip, and choosing Groove > Clip
Looping from the pop-up menu. Each clip that has Groove Clip Looping enabled has beveled
edges instead of sharp corners. The same command disables Groove Clip Looping on any
selected clip that has Groove Clip Looping enabled.
2. Select the Line tool
in the Control Bar.
3. Drag a line in the graph from the starting time and tempo to the ending time and tempo.
SONAR introduces a linear series of tempo changes.
To draw a series of tempo changes in the Tempo view
1. Enable Groove Clip Looping on any audio clips that you want to follow the tempo changes. Do
this by selecting one or more clips, right-clicking a selected clip, and choosing Groove > Clip
Looping from the pop-up menu. Each clip that has Groove Clip Looping enabled has beveled
edges instead of sharp corners. The same command disables Groove Clip Looping on any
selected clip that has Groove Clip Looping enabled.
2. Select the Freehand tool
in the Control Bar.
3. Drag the cursor across the graph, adjusting the tempo level as you move left to right.
SONAR introduces a series of tempo changes.
To erase tempo changes in the Tempo view
1. Enable Groove Clip Looping on any audio clips that you want to follow the tempo changes. Do
this by selecting one or more clips, right-clicking a selected clip, and choosing Groove > Clip
Looping from the pop-up menu. Each clip that has Groove Clip Looping enabled has beveled
edges instead of sharp corners. The same command disables Groove Clip Looping on any
selected clip that has Groove Clip Looping enabled.
2. Select the Erase tool
in the Control Bar.
3. Drag the mouse over the graph to highlight the region you want to erase.
Arranging and editing
Changing tempos
423
4. Release the mouse button.
SONAR deletes all tempo changes in the area you marked. The last tempo setting prior to the
erased region is now in effect in that region.
To insert a tempo change in the Tempo list in the Tempo view
1. Enable Groove Clip Looping on any audio clips that you want to follow the tempo changes. Do
this by selecting one or more clips, right-clicking a selected clip, and choosing Groove > Clip
Looping from the pop-up menu. Each clip that has Groove Clip Looping enabled has beveled
edges instead of sharp corners. The same command disables Groove Clip Looping on any
selected clip that has Groove Clip Looping enabled.
2. Click the Tempo List button
to display or hide the tempo list.
3. Select any tempo change in the list.
4. Click Insert Tempo
to open the Tempo dialog box.
5. Set the tempo, time, and other properties.
6. Click OK.
SONAR inserts the new tempo into the list.
To edit a tempo change in the Tempo view
1. Enable Groove Clip Looping on any audio clips that you want to follow the tempo changes. Do
this by selecting one or more clips, right-clicking a selected clip, and choosing Groove > Clip
Looping from the pop-up menu. Each clip that has Groove Clip Looping enabled has beveled
edges instead of sharp corners. The same command disables Groove Clip Looping on any
selected clip that has Groove Clip Looping enabled.
2. Click the Tempo List button
to display or hide the tempo list.
3. In the tempo list, select the tempo change to be edited.
4. Click Tempo Properties
or double-click the tempo change to open the Tempo dialog box.
5. Edit the tempo properties as desired.
6. Click OK.
To delete a tempo change from the Tempo list in the Tempo view
1. Enable Groove Clip Looping on any audio clips that you want to follow the tempo changes. Do
this by selecting one or more clips, right-clicking a selected clip, and choosing Groove > Clip
Looping from the pop-up menu. Each clip that has Groove Clip Looping enabled has beveled
edges instead of sharp corners. The same command disables Groove Clip Looping on any
selected clip that has Groove Clip Looping enabled.
2. Click the Tempo List button
to display or hide the tempo list.
3. In the Tempo list, select the tempo change to be deleted.
4. Click Delete Tempo
, or press DELETE.
SONAR deletes the selected tempo change. You cannot delete the first tempo in the list.
424
Arranging and editing
Changing tempos
Undo, redo, and the undo history
SONAR provides very powerful Undo and Redo commands that let you move forward or backward
through any portion of an editing session. Every project has its own independent undo history. This
means you can return to any open project and use the Undo and Redo commands, even if you’ve
spent the last hour working on a different project. The undo history of a project is lost when you close
the project.
Remembering everything that is necessary to undo the changes you have made can use a lot of
memory. If a change you are about to make requires too much memory and cannot be undone, you
will be advised that the operation is too big to undo later and asked if you want to go ahead anyway.
If you do choose to perform the operation, you will not be able to undo it. Therefore, you may want to
save your project first.
The Edit > History command displays a complete history of the commands and actions you can
undo for the current project. The Undo History dialog box looks like this:
Figure 116. The Undo History dialog
A
B
C
A. Most recent change B. Click to clear the undo history C. Adjust the number of steps you can undo
The History command is grayed out until you make a change to the current project that can be
undone.
The History list is updated every time you make a change to a project. For example, if you insert a
new note into a project using the Piano Roll view, that action is added to the History list. This entry
remains on the list—even if you undo the change—so that you can redo the change later on. If you
delete the note, this change is added to the History list.
You can click the Clear button in the Undo History dialog box to erase the undo history for the
current project and free up some memory. If SONAR is low on memory, it may offer to erase the
History list. To revert to an earlier version of a project, highlight the entry in the History list that
represents the point to which you’d like to return, and click OK. SONAR performs the necessary
undo or redo actions to take you to that point. Once you edit the project (for example, by inserting a
note), the History list is truncated at that point. Then, as you do further work, the History list grows
again. Any events occurring before the event you highlighted remain on the list.
Arranging and editing
Undo, redo, and the undo history
425
By default, SONAR keeps a history of up to 128 editing actions for each open project. Once that limit
is reached, each new action pushes out the oldest item from the History list. You can raise or lower
that number in the Undo History dialog box.
Slip-editing (non-destructive editing)
Slip-editing allows you to non-destructively hide or reveal the beginning of a clip, the end of a clip, or
both. The hidden material in a clip is not heard during playback. All hidden material remains intact
and can be restored. All slip-editing movements correspond to the current snap to resolution. For
more information about the snap to grid, see “Defining and using the Snap Grid” on page 370.
A
B
A. Clip handle B. Slip-edit cursor
Important: Like any clips, slip-edited clips can be combined with other clips using the Track view
Clips > Bounce to Clip(s) command and slip-edited clips in a track can be mixed down to
another track. When a slip-edited clip is combined with another clip or an effect is applied to a
clip using the Process > Apply Effect > Audio Effects command, any slip-edited data (audio
clips or MIDI events that are cropped from view) is overwritten.
See also:
“Using slip-editing” on page 427
426
Arranging and editing
Slip-editing (non-destructive editing)
Using slip-editing
SONAR makes it easy to edit audio and MIDI clips by way of prominent clip handles that appear as
your cursor comes close to the edges of clips. The clip handles are easy to see and are equipped
with broad functionality for fade-ins, fade-outs, and crossfades, as well as non-destructive editing of
the beginning and end of clips.
To slip-edit a clip
1. Set an appropriate snap resolution in the Control Bar’s Snap module.
2. Select the Smart tool
or Edit tool
in the Control Bar.
3. If you are slip editing an audio clip, open the Clip Inspector, select the Groove Clip section and
make sure the Looping check box is unchecked.
4. Move the cursor over the beginning of the clip until the clip handle appears.
.
A
A. Clip handle
5. Click and drag the clip handle until the unwanted information has been removed.
The hidden information in the slip-edited clips remains intact but is not heard during playback.
Arranging and editing
Slip-editing (non-destructive editing)
427
To move data without moving its clip
1. Do one of the following:
• Using the Smart tool
to edit.
• Using the Edit tool
to edit.
, hold ALT+SHIFT move the pointer over the middle of the clip you want
, hold ALT+SHIFT move the pointer over the top third of the clip you want
The cursor changes to look like this
.
2. Click and drag the clip to the left or right as desired.
As in the case of slip-editing, the hidden information in the clip remains intact but is not heard
during playback.
To move data and the clip edge
1. Select the Smart tool
or Edit tool
in the Control Bar.
2. Hold down ALT+SHIFT and move the cursor to the edge of the clip you want to edit.
A clip handle appears at the edge of the clip you are editing.
428
Arranging and editing
Slip-editing (non-destructive editing)
3. Click and drag the edge of the clip to the desired location.
The hidden information in the clip remains intact but is not heard during playback.
To permanently delete slip-edited data
1. Select the clips that contain the slip-edited data you want to delete.
2. Select the Track view Clips > Apply Trimming command.
SONAR permanently deletes the slip-edited data from the clips you selected.
Slip-editing multiple clips
You can slip-edit multiple clips at the same time.
To slip-edit multiple clips at once
1. Make sure all clips are not loop-enabled.
2. Select the clips you want to slip-edit.
3. Move your cursor over the beginning or end range of the selected clips until the blue clip handle
appears.
4. Drag the boundary to the desired location and release.
Arranging and editing
Slip-editing (non-destructive editing)
429
Fades and crossfades
Fades are a gradual increase or decrease in volume at the beginning (fade-in) or end (fade-out) of a
clip. A crossfade is when one clip fades out while another fades in. There are two ways to create
fades and crossfades in SONAR: offline (destructive) and real-time (non-destructive). To create
fades and crossfades offline, see “Applying fades and crossfades offline” on page 843.
See:
“Using fades and crossfades in real-time” on page 430
Using fades and crossfades in real-time
You can create real-time fades and crossfades in the Track view’s Clips pane. Real-time fades and
crossfades do not change the data in the clip. SONAR reads the fade-in, fade-out, or crossfade in
the clip and adjusts the gain accordingly. You can edit the crossfade’s start time and end times. You
can set the type of fade-in or fade-out you want to use as a default:
• Linear.
A straight line, raising or lowering the volume at a steady rate.
• Slow Curve. A curved fade which starts to change the volume slowly at first and then rapidly
increasing (fade-in) or decreasing (fade-out) the volume.
• Fast Curve. A curved fade which starts to change the volume quickly at first and then rapidly
decreasing (fade-out) or increasing (fade-in) the volume.
To choose the fade type
Click the Track view Options menu, point to Crossfade Type and select the desired default FadeIn, Fade-Out and Crossfade curve types.
To create a real-time fade-in in a Clip
1. Select the Smart tool
or Edit tool
in the Control Bar.
2. In the Track view’s Clips pane, move your mouse over the top part of the beginning of a clip until
the cursor looks like this:
, and a red line appears at the edge of the clip.
A filled red triangle appears at the top of the red line indicating the fade marker is ready to be
dragged.
A
A. Filled red triangle
430
Arranging and editing
Fades and crossfades
3. When your cursor changes and the filled red triangle appears, click and drag to the right until you
reach your desired fade-in length.
As you drag your mouse, a fade-in appears on your clip, and the red line moves with the mouse
to mark the end of the fade-in.
To edit a fade-in in a Clip
• To move the entire fade-in to a later point in the clip, drag above the blue horizontal line located a
quarter of the way up the blue vertical line
.
A
B
A. Cursor above horizontal blue line B. Horizontal blue line
• To move only the starting point of the fade-in, drag below the horizontal blue line.
• To delete a fade-in from an audio clip, simply drag the triangular fade handle
of the clip.
to the front edge
The filled blue triangle at the top of the clip handle indicates that dragging the top edge of the clip
handle will move the fade along with the crop. The filled blue rectangle at the bottom of the clip
handle indicates that dragging the bottom of the clip handle will slip edit the edge, but leave the
end of the fade-in where it is.
Arranging and editing
Fades and crossfades
431
To create an automatic crossfade (real-time)
1. Click the Track view Options menu and choose Auto Crossfade.
2. Click the Track view Options menu, point to Crossfade Type > Default Crossfade Curves and
select the desired default crossfade curve types.
3. Select and drag an audio clip so that it overlaps another audio clip. You should overlap the clips
by the length you want the crossfade.
4. When you have the clip positioned where you want it, release the mouse button to drop the clip.
The Drag and Drop Options dialog box appears.
5. In the Drag and Drop Options dialog box, check the Blend Old With New check box and click
OK.
6. The two clips now overlap with a crossfade, looking something like this:
A
B
C
D
E
A. First clip B. Fade-out C. Fade-in D. Second clip E. Crossfade
You can edit fade-ins and fade-outs. You can change the start, end and position of a fade. The
following procedures all demonstrate edits to a fade-in, but fade-outs work exactly the same.
To change an existing fade
1. Move your cursor over the beginning of a fade-out or the end of a fade-in, until your cursor looks
like this:
.
2. Right-click to and select the desired fade type from the menu that appears.
To change an existing crossfade
1. Move your cursor over the region where the crossfade is.
2. Right-click and select the desired crossfade from the menu that appears.
432
Arranging and editing
Fades and crossfades
To edit or create fades from the Process menu
1. Select the clip or clips in which you want to create or edit fade-ins and/or fade-outs.
2. Select Process > Fade Selected Clips.
3. Click the Track view Clips menu and choose Fade Clips to open the Fade Selected Clips
dialog box.
4. Adjust parameters according to the following table.
Parameter
Description
Fade In (mS)
Select the number of milliseconds you want the fade-in to last.
Fade Out (mS)
Select the number of milliseconds you want the fade-out to last.
Fade In Curve
Choose a fade-in type. Options are linear, slow or fast curve.
Fade Out Curve
Choose a fade-out type. Options are linear, slow or fast curve.
Alter Existing Times
Select this option if you want to change the existing fade lengths. You don’t need
to check this option if you’re creating new fades.
Alter Existing Curves
Select this option if you want to change the existing fade types. You don’t need to
check this option if you’re creating new fades.
Only Show if Pressing
Shift
Select if you want to apply previous dialog box settings without opening the dialog
box. Hold shift when selecting command to override this option.
Table 62.
5. Click OK to close the dialog box.
SONAR creates or edits the fade(s) according to the options you chose in the dialog box.
Arranging and editing
Fades and crossfades
433
Enhanced editing with keyboard
SONAR supports advanced editing via the numeric keypad on standard QWERTY keyboards. You
can perform the following operations:
• Navigate (see “Navigating with a keyboard” on page 436):
• Scroll
• Zoom
• Select (see “Selecting with a keyboard” on page 438):
• Clip select
• Time select
• Edit (see “Editing with a keyboard” on page 439):
• Trim/crop
• Fade
To enable/disable editing with a QWERTY keyboard
1. On your QWERTY keyboard, press the NumLock key to enable NumLock mode.
2. On the numeric keypad, press 0.
3. Select the desired mode:
• Zoom/Scroll mode. Press 1.
• Select mode. Press 3.
• Edit mode. Press 9.
The keys on the numeric keypad are mapped as follows:
434
Arranging and editing
Enhanced editing with keyboard
Figure 117. Numeric keypad (NumLock mode)
CROP OR
FADE
LEFT
UP
EDIT
MODE
CROP OR
FADE
RIGHT
LEFT
CENTER
EDIT
CURSOR
RIGHT
DOWN
SELECT
MODE
ZOOM/
SCROLL
MODE
ENABLE
EDITING
Key
Function
0
Enable/disable keyboard editing (when NumLock is enabled)
1
Enable Zoom/Scroll mode
2
Down
3
Enable Select mode
4
Left
5
Center edit cursor
6
Right
7
--
8
Up
9
Enable Edit mode
Table 63.
Arranging and editing
Enhanced editing with keyboard
435
Key
Function
Volume knob (if
keyboard has a rotary
encoder)
Zoom/scroll/trim/crop depending on current mode
PLUS (+)
Crop or fade right in Edit mode
MINUS (-)
Crop or fade left in Edit mode
Table 63.
See:
“Navigating with a keyboard” on page 436
“Selecting with a keyboard” on page 438
“Editing with a keyboard” on page 439
Navigating with a keyboard
Scroll and Zoom are part of the same mode, which makes it fast to navigate around a project.
You can zoom both horizontally and vertically, in small or large steps.
You can scroll fast or slow in any direction, in small or large steps.
To zoom and scroll with a keyboard
1. On your QWERTY keyboard, press the NumLock key to enable NumLock mode.
2. On the numeric keypad, press 0 to enable keyboard editing.
3. On the numeric keypad, press 1 to enable Zoom/Scroll mode.
The numeric keypad is mapped as follows:
Key
Function
CTRL+
ALT+
SHIFT+
0
Enable/disable keyboard
editing (when NumLock is
enabled)
--
--
--
1
Enable Zoom/Scroll mode
--
--
--
2
Scroll down in large steps
Zoom out
vertically in large
steps (based on
selection)
--
--
3
Enable Select mode
--
--
--
Table 64.
436
Arranging and editing
Enhanced editing with keyboard
Key
Function
CTRL+
4
Scroll left in large steps
-Zoom in
horizontally in
large steps (based
on selection)
--
5
Center edit cursor
--
--
--
6
Scroll right in large steps
-Zoom out
horizontally in
large steps (based
on selection)
--
8
Scroll up in large steps
Zoom in vertically
in large steps
(based on
selection)
--
--
9
Enable Edit mode
--
--
--
Scroll vertically
Scroll in small
steps
Zoom (based on
selection)
Scroll horizontally
Volume knob (if
keyboard has a rotary
encoder)
ALT+
SHIFT+
Table 64.
The zooming behavior depends on the current Edit or Select mode:
• Zoom around the selection.
Will center and zoom on the mid-point of the selection.
• Zoom around the edit cursor. Will center and zoom around the cursor.
The most appropriate zoom method is used automatically based on the following logic:
• The default zoom method is Zoom around the selection.
• If there is no selection, the next zoom method is Zoom around the edit cursor.
Arranging and editing
Enhanced editing with keyboard
437
Selecting with a keyboard
In Select mode, you can select either clips or time.
To enable selecting with a keyboard
1. On your QWERTY keyboard, press the NumLock key to enable NumLock mode.
2. On the numeric keypad, press 0 to enable keyboard editing.
3. On the numeric keypad, press 3 to enable Select mode.
The numeric keypad is mapped as follows:
Key
Function
CTRL+
ALT+
2
Move edit cursor down
Move to closest clip on next
track
Select down
4
Move edit cursor left
Move to previous clip
Select left
5
Center edit cursor
--
--
6
Move edit cursor right
Move to next clip
Select right
8
Move edit cursor up
Move to closest clip on
previous track
Select up
Table 65.
To move the edit cursor
• In Select mode, do one of the following:
• To move to the left.
• To move to the right.
Press 4.
Press 6.
• To move to the previous lane or track. Press 8.
• To move to the next lane or track.
Press 2.
• To center the edit cursor. Press 5.
• To move to the previous clip.
• To move to the next clip.
Press CTRL+4.
Press CTRL+6.
• To move to the closest clip on the previous track.
Press CTRL+8.
• To move to the closest clip on the next track. Press CTRL+2.
To select time with a keyboard
1. Move the Now Time to where you want to start the selection.
2. In Select mode, hold down ALT and move the edit cursor left/right/up/down to make a time
selection.
438
Arranging and editing
Enhanced editing with keyboard
To select clips with a keyboard
• In Select mode, do one of the following:
• To select and edit clip under the edit cursor.
• To extend the current selection.
Press 9 to select clip and enable Edit mode.
Hold down SHIFT+ALT and press 2, 4, 6 or 8.
Editing with a keyboard
Edit mode lets you fade and crop all selected clips. If no clips are selected when you enter Edit
mode, SONAR will automatically select the clip that is under the edit cursor.
To enable clip editing with a keyboard
1. On your QWERTY keyboard, press the NumLock key to enable NumLock mode.
2. On the numeric keypad, press 0 to enable keyboard editing.
3. On the numeric keypad, press 9 to enable Edit mode.
The numeric keypad is mapped as follows:
Function
Key
Select fade out for editing
2
Select left clip edge for cropping
4
Select right clip edge for cropping
6
Select fade in for editing
8
Fade or crop selected clips
Volume knob (if keyboard has a rotary encoder)
Crop or fade right in Edit mode
PLUS (+)
Crop or fade left in Edit mode
MINUS (-)
Table 66.
Arranging and editing
Enhanced editing with keyboard
439
To fade clips with a keyboard
1. In Select mode, select the clips that you want to fade.
2. Press 9 to enable Edit mode.
3. Specify the clip property that you want to edit:
• Fade in.
• Fade out.
Press 8.
Press 2.
4. Do one of the following to adjust the selected fade:
• Turn the rotary encoder.
• Press PLUS (+) or MINUS (-).
Note: Fades do not obey Snap to Grid.
To crop clips with a keyboard
1. In Select mode, select the clips that you want to crop.
2. Press 9 to enable Edit mode.
3. Specify the clip edge that you want to crop:
• Left clip edge. Press 4.
• Right clip edge. Press 6.
4. Do one of the following to adjust the selected clip edge:
• Turn the rotary encoder.
• Press PLUS (+) or MINUS (-).
Note: Crop obeys Snap to Grid.
440
Arranging and editing
Enhanced editing with keyboard
Tools
SONAR has several different global tools that allow you to edit content in your projects. The global
tools live in the Tools module in the Control Bar, and allow you to edit content in the following views:
• Track view
• Piano Roll view
• Staff view
• Tempo view
The selected tool applies to whichever editing view has focus. There are several ways to select
tools:
• From the Tools module in the Control Bar. For details, see “Using the Control Bar to select tools”
on page 446.
• From the Tools HUD (Heads Up Display). For details, see “Using the Tools HUD to select tools”
on page 448.
• By pressing the tool’s keyboard shortcut. For details, see “Using keyboard shortcuts to select
tools” on page 448.
Figure 118. Global tools are accessed from the Tools module in the Control Bar.
Each tool serves a specific purpose, and the most suitable tool depends on the editing task you want
to accomplish. The default Smart tool can be used for most tasks, but there may be times when a
specific tool is either required or makes the editing task easier. For instructions about common
editing tasks, see “Using tools to perform common tasks” on page 513.
To use a tool in the Track view, first select the desired tool, then select the data type you want to edit
(clips, track automation, clip automation, audio transients, or notes). You can specify the desired
data type independently for each track. For details, see “Selecting the data type to edit” on page 450.
SONAR provides the following global tools.
441
Tool
Button Shortcut
Description
How to use
“Smart tool”
on page 456
F5
The Smart tool is the default tool in
SONAR. The Smart tool is a multifunction tool that combines functions
from several other tools. The function
is determined by where you click.
Using the Smart tool on:
• Audio clips
• MIDI clips
• Take lanes
• PRV notes
• Automation
• AudioSnap transients
“Select tool”
on page 464
F6
The Select tool lets you select data.
You can select a time range, or select
entire clips, MIDI notes, envelope
nodes and transients.
Using the Select tool on:
• Audio clips
• MIDI clips
• PRV notes
• Automation
• AudioSnap transients
“Move tool”
on page 469
F7
The Move tool lets you move selected
data. You can move entire clips,
partial clips, MIDI notes, envelope
nodes, transient markers and clip
tempo map markers.
Using the Move tool on:
• Audio clips
• MIDI clips
• PRV notes
• Automation
• AudioSnap transients
“Edit tool” on
page 473
F8 (cycle
through
Edit tools)
The Edit tool lets you adjust data. You
can slip-edit clips, adjust note start/
end times, adjust fades, and raise/
lower note velocity and automation
envelopes.
Using the Edit tool on:
• Audio clips
• MIDI clips
• PRV notes
• Automation
“Timing tool”
on page 478
F8 (cycle
through all
Edit tools)
The Timing tool lets you slip-stretch
audio clips, drag-quantize MIDI
notes, and stretch audio using
transient markers.
Using the Timing tool on:
• Audio clips
• PRV notes
• AudioSnap transients
“Comping
tool” on page
480
F8 (cycle
through all
Edit tools)
The Comping tool lets you isolate
clips in Take lanes.
“Using the Comping tool in Take lanes”
on page 481
“Split tool” on
page 482
F8 (cycle
through all
Edit tools)
The Split tool lets you split clips, cut
clips, split MIDI notes, and split clips
at transients.
Using the Split tool on:
• Audio clips
• MIDI clips
• PRV notes
• AudioSnap transients
Table 67.
442
Tools
Tools
Tool
Button Shortcut
Description
How to use
“Freehand
tool” on page
486
The Freehand tool lets you draw MIDI
F9 (cycle
through all notes and freehand automation
Draw tools) envelopes. You can also create and
promote transient markers.
Using the Freehand tool on:
• PRV notes
• Automation
• AudioSnap transients
“Line tool” on
page 490
The Line tool lets you draw straight
F9 (cycle
through all automation envelopes and “paint”
Draw tools) MIDI notes.
Using the Line tool on:
• PRV notes
• Automation
“Sine tool” on
page 492
The Sine Pattern tool lets you edit
F9 (cycle
through all automation envelopes by drawing
Draw tools) sine shapes.
“Using the Pattern tools on automation”
on page 493
“Triangle tool”
on page 492
The Triangle Pattern tool lets you edit
F9 (cycle
through all automation envelopes by drawing
Draw tools) triangle shapes.
“Using the Pattern tools on automation”
on page 493
“Square tool”
on page 492
The Square Pattern tool lets you edit
F9 (cycle
through all automation envelopes by drawing
Draw tools) square shapes.
“Using the Pattern tools on automation”
on page 493
“Saw tool” on
page 492
The Saw Pattern tool lets you edit
F9 (cycle
through all automation envelopes by drawing
Draw tools) sawtooth shapes.
“Using the Pattern tools on automation”
on page 493
“Random
tool” on page
493
The Random Pattern tool lets you edit “Using the Pattern tools on automation”
F9 (cycle
on page 493
through all automation envelopes by drawing
Draw tools) random shapes.
“Erase tool”
on page 495
F10 (cycle
through all
Erase
tools)
The Erase tool lets you delete clips,
partial clips, MIDI notes, automation
envelope nodes, and transient
markers.
Using the Erase tool on:
• Audio clips
• MIDI clips
• PRV notes
• Automation
• AudioSnap transients
“Mute tool” on
page 499
F10 (cycle
through all
Erase
tools)
The Mute tool lets you mute clips,
mute partial clips, mute MIDI notes,
and disable transient markers.
Using the Mute tool on:
• Audio clips
• MIDI clips
• PRV notes
• AudioSnap transients
Table 67.
Tools
Tools (Continued)
443
Tool
Button Shortcut
Description
How to use
“Scrub tool”
on page 503
None
J
The Scrub tool lets you play all
displayed tracks as you drag the
mouse pointer forward or backward
at the desired speed.
To scrub:
• A single track
• All displayed tracks
“Zoom tool”
on page 504
None
Z
“Using the Zoom tool” on page 504
The Zoom tool lets you change the
vertical and horizontal scale of a view.
You can lasso select a specific area
to zoom into.
Table 67.
Tools (Continued)
See:
“Selecting tools” on page 445
“Selecting the data type to edit” on page 450
“Snap to Grid settings” on page 505
“Specifying note durations” on page 507
“Mouse cursors” on page 508
“Tools” on page 441
444
Tools
Selecting tools
To select and use a tool
1. Do one of the following:
• Click the desired tool in the Control Bar’s Tools module. For details, see “Using the Control
Bar to select tools” on page 446.
• Press T on your computer keyboard to display the Tools HUD, then select the desired tool. For
details, see “Using the Tools HUD to select tools” on page 448.
• Press the tool’s keyboard shortcut. A tool’s keyboard shortcut is displayed in its tooltip. For
details, see “Using keyboard shortcuts to select tools” on page 448.
The selected tool is highlighted, and the mouse pointer changes to reflect the active tool. For
details, see “Mouse cursors” on page 508.
2. Click the desired track’s Edit Filter control and select the data type you want to edit:
• Clips
• Audio Transients (audio tracks only)
• Notes (MIDI tracks only)
• Track Automation (including ProChannel, Arpeggiator, plug-in parameters, and MIDI
continuous controllers)
• Clip Automation
Tip: To set all similar tracks to the same Edit Filter setting, hold down the CTRL key when you change
any track’s Edit Filter setting. To set all selected tracks to the same Edit Filter setting, first select the
tracks, then hold down CTRL when you change any track’s Edit Filter setting.
Figure 119. Use the Edit Filter control to specify what type of data the global tools should operate on.
A
A. Edit Filter
For details, see “Selecting the data type to edit” on page 450.
For instructions about performing common tasks, see “Using tools to perform common tasks” on
page 513.
Note: Some tools can only be used on certain types of data. The mouse pointer indicates if the
selected tool can be used at the current position. For details, see “Mouse cursors” on page 508.
Tools
445
Using the Control Bar to select tools
Figure 120. Global tools are accessed from the Tools module in the Control Bar.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
A. Smart tool B. Select tool C. Move tool D. Edit tools (Edit/Timing/Comping/Split) E. Draw tools (Freehand/
Line/Sine/Triangle/Square/Saw/Random) F. Erase tools (Erase/Mute) G. Draw resolution
To show/hide the Tools module
Right-click the Control Bar and select Tools Module.
For more information about the Tools module, see “Tools module” on page 541.
Accessing grouped tools
Related tools are grouped together in the Tools module. Several buttons in the Tools module display
a small triangle in the bottom right corner. The triangle indicates that you can click and keep the
mouse button pressed for a brief moment to access additional tools or options from a pop-up menu.
You can also right-click the button and choose an option on the pop-up menu.
The following groups are available:
• Edit tools:
• Edit tool
• Timing tool
• Split tool
• Draw tools:
• Freehand tool
• Line tool
• Sine tool
• Triangle tool
• Square tool
• Saw tool
• Random tool
• Erase tools:
• Erase tool
• Mute tool
446
Tools
If the tool you are looking for isn’t visible in the Tools module, chances are that another tool in the
same group is selected. To access the hidden tool, click the group the tool belongs to, then select
the tool from the pop-up menu. Figure Figure 122 on page 447 shows an expanded view of all tool
groups.
Figure 121. If a button displays a small triangle in the bottom right corner, click and keep the mouse button
pressed to access additional tools or options.
Figure 122. Tools module expanded view.
A
B
C
D
I
Q
E
J
R
F
K
S
G
L
H
M
N
O
P
A. Smart tool B. Select tool C. Move tool D. Edit tools E. Edit tool F. Timing tool G. Comping tool H. Split
tool I. Draw tools J. Freehand tool K. Line Tool L. Sine Pattern tool M. Triangle Pattern tool N. Square Pattern
tool O. Saw Pattern tool P. Random Pattern tool Q. Erase tools R. Erase tool S. Mute tool
Tools
447
Using the Tools HUD to select tools
Press the T to open the Tools HUD (Heads Up Display) at the current pointer position, then select
the desired tool.
Tip: You can press the middle mouse button to open the Tools HUD. While the Tools HUD is open,
use the mouse wheel to open the Edit Filter menu.
Figure 123. Press T to show the Tools HUD.
In the Track view, the Tools HUD also shows the Edit Filter control for whichever track is behind the
mouse pointer when the Tools HUD is opened.
Using keyboard shortcuts to select tools
Use the following keyboard shortcuts to select tools. Tools that belong to the same group share the
same shortcut. Press a shortcut repeatedly to cycle through all tools in a group.
Tool
Button Shortcut
Show Tools HUD
---
T
“Smart tool” on page 456
F5
“Select tool” on page 464
F6
“Move tool” on page 469
F7
Cycle through Edit tools (Edit/
Timing/Comping/Split)
---
F8
“Edit tool” on page 473
F8
“Timing tool” on page 478
F8
“Comping tool” on page 480
F8
Table 68.
448
Tool keyboard shortcuts
Tools
Tool
Button Shortcut
“Split tool” on page 482
Cycle through Draw tools
(Freehand/Line/Sine/Triangle/
Square/Saw/Random)
F8
---
F9
“Freehand tool” on page 486
F9
“Line tool” on page 490
F9
“Sine tool” on page 492
F9
“Triangle tool” on page 492
F9
“Square tool” on page 492
F9
“Saw tool” on page 492
F9
“Random tool” on page 493
F9
Cycle through Erase tools
(Erase/Mute)
---
F10
“Erase tool” on page 495
F10
“Mute tool” on page 499
F10
Snap on/off
---
N
“Scrub tool” on page 503
---
J (hold to
use)
“Zoom tool” on page 504
---
Z (hold to
use)
Table 68.
Tools
Tool keyboard shortcuts (Continued)
449
To temporarily invoke a tool
While using a specific tool, you can temporarily invoke another tool by holding down the new tool’s
keyboard shortcut. Release the shortcut to switch back to the previously selected tool.
For example, if you are using the Move tool and need to select some notes, press and hold down the
F6 key (shortcut for the Select tool), make a selection, then release the F6 key to return to the Move
tool.
For a list of tool shortcuts, see “Using keyboard shortcuts to select tools” on page 448.
Hotspots and modifier keys
Clips, note events, envelopes and AudioSnap transients have different “hotspots”. That is, a tool
may do something different depending on where you click. As you move the mouse pointer, the
current hotspot is shown as a shaded rectangle.
A modifier key, such as CTRL, ALT or SHIFT, may also be used in some cases to extend a tool’s
function.
See:
“Selecting the data type to edit” on page 450
Selecting the data type to edit
Use a track’s Edit Filter control to specify the type of data you want to edit.
Figure 124. Use the Edit Filter control to specify what type of data the global tools should operate on.
A
A. Edit Filter
The following data types can be selected:
• Clips. The selected tool operates on clips.
• Audio Transients. The selected tool operates on audio transients (only available for audio
tracks).
• Notes. The selected tool operates on MIDI Note events (only available for MIDI and Instrument
tracks).
• Track Automation. The selected tool operates on track automation envelopes, including
ProChannel, Arpeggiator, plug-in parameters and MIDI continuous controllers (CCs). Select the
desired automation parameter from the submenu. Color-coded squares and bold text are used to
450
Tools
indicate existing envelopes.
• Clip Automation. The selected tool operates on clip automation envelopes. Select the desired
automation parameter from the submenu. Color-coded squares and bold text are used to indicate
existing envelopes.
To change the current Edit Filter setting
Do one of the following:
• Click the Edit Filter control and select the desired data type. The Edit Filter control is available in
each track strip in the Track view and in the Tools HUD (see “Using the Tools HUD to select tools”
on page 448).
• Hold down the SHIFT key and click the clip or envelope you want to edit.
• Hold down the SHIFT key and click an automatable control (Volume, Pan, etc.) in a track strip.
• Hold down the SHIFT key and right-click to toggle between the two most recently selected data
types.
• Click the middle mouse button to show the Tools HUD, then scroll the mouse wheel to cycle
through the available data types.
Tip: To set all tracks to the same Edit Filter setting, hold down the CTRL key when you change any
non-selected track’s Edit Filter setting. To set all selected tracks to the same Edit Filter setting, hold
down the CTRL when you change any selected track’s Edit Filter setting.
Tip: You can quickly toggle between Track Volume and the last/previously shown data type on the
current track. To do so, press the PLUS (+/=) key. This only works on the current parent track, not in
Automation lanes.
To toggle between the two most recent Edit Filter settings, hold down the SHIFT key and right-click
in the Clips pane.
Tools
451
Data type ghosting
Although you can only edit one data type at a time, you can choose to always show clips and
automation envelopes simultaneously. All but the selected data type will be shaded, or “ghosted”.
This allows you to see all data types in context while editing a specific data type.
You can also hold down the SHIFT key and click any ghosted object to switch a track’s current Edit
Filter setting. This is a quick way to toggle between editing clips and automation envelopes.
Figure 125. Use the Edit Filter control to specify what type of data the global tools should operate on.
Clips
Audio Transients
Track Automation and Clip Automation
Notes
To enable/disable data type ghosting
Click the Track view Views menu, point to Display and choose Display Ghosted Data on the
submenu.
To switch between editing clips and automation envelopes
Hold down the SHIFT key and click the clip or envelope you want to edit.
452
Tools
Editing audio clips
• “Working with audio clips” on page 515
• “Using the Smart tool on audio clips” on page 457
• “Using the Select tool on audio clips” on page 464
• “Using the Move tool on audio clips” on page 469
• “Using the Edit tool on audio clips” on page 474
• “Using the Timing tool on audio clips” on page 478
• “Using the Erase tool on audio clips” on page 495
• “Using the Split tool on audio clips” on page 483
• “Using the Mute tool on audio clips” on page 499
• “To split a clip” on page 519
• “To scrub an audio clip” on page 517
• “To fade in/out an audio clip” on page 515
• “To crop a clip’s start/end” on page 515
• “To select audio clips” on page 516
• “To mute/unmute a clip” on page 517
• “To move a clip” on page 518
• “To stretch an audio clip” on page 518
• “To erase a clip” on page 518
Editing MIDI clips
• “Working with MIDI clips” on page 520
• “Using the Smart tool on MIDI clips” on page 460
• “Using the Select tool on MIDI clips” on page 465
• “Using the Move tool on MIDI clips” on page 470
• “Using the Edit tool on MIDI clips” on page 475
• “Using the Erase tool on MIDI clips” on page 496
• “Using the Split tool on MIDI clips” on page 483
• “Using the Mute tool on MIDI clips” on page 500
• “To split a clip” on page 524
• “To scrub a MIDI clip” on page 521
• “To crop a clip’s start/end” on page 520
• “To select MIDI clips” on page 521
• “To mute/unmute a clip” on page 522
Tools
453
• “To move a clip” on page 522
• “To erase a clip” on page 523
Editing notes in the Piano Roll
• “Working with MIDI notes” on page 525
• “Using the Smart tool on PRV notes” on page 461
• “Using the Select tool on PRV notes” on page 466
• “Using the Move tool on PRV notes” on page 470
• “Using the Edit tool on PRV notes” on page 476
• “Using the Timing tool on PRV notes” on page 479
• “Using the Freehand tool on PRV notes” on page 487
• “Using the Line tool on PRV notes” on page 490
• “Using the Erase tool on PRV notes” on page 497
• “Using the Split tool on PRV notes” on page 484
• “Using the Mute tool on PRV notes” on page 501
• “To split a MIDI note” on page 528
• “To scrub MIDI notes” on page 525
• “To adjust a MIDI note’s velocity” on page 525
• “To adjust a MIDI note’s start/end” on page 525
• “To select MIDI notes” on page 525
• “To mute/unmute a MIDI note” on page 526
• “To move a MIDI note” on page 526
• “To draw a MIDI note” on page 526
• “To drag-quantize MIDI notes” on page 527
• “To glue MIDI notes together” on page 527
• “To paint MIDI notes” on page 527
• “To erase a MIDI note” on page 527
Editing automation envelopes
• “Working with automation envelopes” on page 529
• “Using the Smart tool on automation” on page 462
• “Using the Select tool on automation” on page 467
• “Using the Move tool on automation” on page 471
• “Using the Edit tool on automation” on page 476
• “Using the Freehand tool on automation” on page 488
454
Tools
• “Using the Line tool on automation” on page 491
• “Using the Pattern tools on automation” on page 493
• “Using the Erase tool on automation” on page 497
• “To select automation” on page 529
• “To move automation” on page 529
• “To draw automation freehand” on page 530
• “To draw a straight line” on page 530
• “To draw automation shapes” on page 531
• “To erase automation” on page 532
• “To add envelope nodes” on page 532
• “To draw MIDI continuous controller envelopes” on page 533
Editing AudioSnap transients
• “Working with AudioSnap transients” on page 534
• “Using the Smart tool on AudioSnap transients” on page 463
• “Using the Select tool on AudioSnap transients” on page 468
• “Using the Move tool on AudioSnap transients” on page 472
• “Using the Timing tool on AudioSnap transients” on page 479
• “Using the Freehand tool on AudioSnap transients” on page 488
• “Using the Erase tool on AudioSnap transients” on page 498
• “Using the Mute tool on AudioSnap transients” on page 502
• “Using the Mute tool on AudioSnap transients” on page 502
• “To split an audio clip at transient markers” on page 535
• “To select transient markers” on page 534
• “To move transient markers (without stretching audio)” on page 534
• “To stretch transients” on page 534
• “To promote transient markers” on page 535
• “To erase transient markers” on page 535
• “To add transient” on page 535
See:
“Smart tool” on page 456
“Select tool” on page 464
“Move tool” on page 469
Tools
455
“Edit tool” on page 473
“Timing tool” on page 478
“Freehand tool” on page 486
“Line tool” on page 490
“Pattern tools” on page 492
“Erase tool” on page 495
“Split tool” on page 482
“Mute tool” on page 499
“Scrub tool” on page 503
“Zoom tool” on page 504
Smart tool
The Smart tool is the default tool in SONAR. The Smart tool is a multi-function tool that combines
functions from several other tools. The function is determined by where you click.
To select the Smart tool
Do one of the following:
• Click the Smart tool button
in the Control Bar.
• Press T to display the Tools HUD, then select the Smart tool.
• Press F5.
Clip headers and the Smart tool
Clips are drawn with a header, which can be clicked with the Smart tool to select and move the clip.
Clip headers automatically disappear if the track height is less than 36 pixels.
Figure 126. Clip headers are visible when clips are higher than 36 pixels.
See also “To hide clip headers and maximize clip waveform display” on page 344.
Note: The Smart tool behaves differently when editing takes in Take lanes. For details, see
“Using the Smart tool in Take lanes” on page 459 and “Comping with the Smart tool and
Comping tool” on page 400.
456
Tools
Smart tool
Using the Smart tool on audio clips
Figure 127. Smart tool hotspots on audio clips.
A
C
B
D
E
F
G
Hotspot
Default action
A
Adjust fade in
B
Adjust fade out
C
Crop clip start
Note: If the clip contains
a fade in, drag the top
half to crop clip start and
move the fade in, or drag
the bottom half to only
crop the clip without
moving the fade in (does
not apply when editing in
Take lanes).
Table 69.
+ALT
+CTRL
+ALT+SHIFT
Stretch clip
Crop clip start
and also move
clip data
Note: If the clip
contains a fade
in, drag the top
half to crop clip
start and move
the fade in, or
drag the bottom
half to only crop
the clip without
moving the fade
in.
Right-click
Using the Smart tool on audio clips
Tools
Smart tool
457
Hotspot
Default action
D
Crop clip end
Note: If the clip contains
a fade out, drag the top
half to crop clip end and
move the fade out, or
drag the bottom half to
only crop the clip without
moving the fade out
(does not apply when
editing in Take lanes).
E
Select by time
F
Click to set the Now time
and clear the selection;
drag to select by time
Split clip
Move data within Drag to lasso
clip
select
G
Click to set the Now time
and clear the selection;
drag to select by time
Note: Click the clip
header to select the clip,
or drag the header to
move the clip.
Split clip
Adjust clip gain Move data within Drag to lasso
clip
select
Table 69.
458
+ALT
Smart tool
+ALT+SHIFT
Stretch clip
Crop clip end
and also move
clip data
Note: If the clip
contains a fade
out, drag the top
half to crop clip
end and move
the fade out, or
drag the bottom
half to only crop
the clip without
moving the fade
out.
Right-click
Drag to lasso
select
Using the Smart tool on audio clips (Continued)
Tools
+CTRL
Using the Smart tool in Take lanes
Figure 128. Smart tool hotspots in Take lanes (two split clips shown).
A
B
Clip 1
Clip 2
C
D
E
F
G
Hotspot
Default action
A
Adjust fade in
B
Adjust fade out
C
H
+CTRL
+ALT+SHIFT
Crop clip start
Stretch clip
Crop clip start
and also move
clip data
D
Crop clip end
Stretch clip
Crop clip end
and also move
clip data
E
Drag the top half to
select by time.
Drag the bottom half to
isolate.
F
Split clip
Click to isolate clip.
Drag to split across lanes
and Isolate clip.
Click to toggle
clip mute
status
Move data within Drag to lasso
clip
select
G
Click the clip header to
select the clip, or drag
the header to move the
clip.
Split clip
Click to toggle
clip selection
status
Move data within Drag to lasso
clip
select
H (split
point)
Drag left/right to move
split point on all Take
lanes; if crossfade exists,
move the crossfade
Drag up/down to extend
overlaps with crossfades
Table 70.
+ALT
Right-click
Drag to lasso
select
Drag to lasso
select
Using the Smart tool in Take lanes
Tools
Smart tool
459
Using the Smart tool on MIDI clips
Figure 129. Smart tool hotspots on MIDI clip.
A
B
C
D
E
Hotspot
Default action
A
Crop clip start
Crop clip start
and also move
clip data
B
Crop clip end
Crop clip end and
also move clip
data
C
Select by time
D
Click to set the Now time
and clear the selection;
drag to select by time
E
Split clip
Click to set the Now time
and clear the selection;
drag to select by time
Note: Click the clip header
to select the clip, or drag
the header to move the clip.
Table 71.
460
+ALT
Smart tool
+ALT+SHIFT
Right-click
Drag to lasso
select
Split clip
Using the Smart tool on MIDI clips
Tools
+CTRL
Adjust clip
velocity
Move data within
clip
Drag to lasso
select
Move data within
clip
Drag to lasso
select
Using the Smart tool on PRV notes
Figure 130. Smart tool hotspots on PRV notes.
A
B
D
E
C
DoubleRight-click
click
Hotspot
Default action
A
Drag up/down to
adjust note
velocity
B
Adjust note start
C
Click to select
note; drag to
move note
D
Adjust note end
E
Insert a new note
(before releasing
mouse button,
drag left/right to
change duration,
and up/down to
change pitch)
Table 72.
Using the Smart tool on PRV notes
Tools
Smart tool
+ALT
+SHIFT
Open
Note
Propertie
s dialog
Erase note
Split
note
Add note
to
selection
Insert a
new note
Click to
deselect
Drag to lasso
select
Insert a
new note
with the
selected
duration
Change
the Event
Filter to
Clips
ALT+R CTRL+ALT+
CTRL+Rig
ightSHIFT+Right
ht-click
click
-click
Toggle
selection
Mute
note
Drag to Draw notes line
perform
the
alternat
e mode
of the
selected
Erase
tool
(either
lasso
Erase or
Mute)
461
Using the Smart tool on automation
Figure 131. Smart tool hotspots on automation.
A
B
D
E
C
Hotspot
Default action
Double-click
A
Move node
Reset node
B
Drag up/down to adjust
selected nodes
C
Drag left/right to select nodes
D
Insert a node
E
Time select nodes
Table 73.
462
Smart tool
+ALT
Right-click
Insert nodes
at the
selection
points
Drag to lasso
select
Add new node
Using the Smart tool on automation
Tools
+CTRL
Click or drag
to insert new
events
(Piano Roll
Controller
Pane only)
Drag to lasso
select
Using the Smart tool on AudioSnap transients
Figure 132. Smart tool hotspots on AudioSnap transients.
B
C
A
D
Hotspot
Default action
Double-click
A
Drag transient marker
line to stretch selected
transients (nonproportional stretch)
Select all adjacent transient
markers in other tracks
B
Drag transient marker
handle (diamond) to
move transient marker
(non-stretch)
C
Lasso select transients
D
Lasso select transients
across clips and tracks
Table 74.
+ALT
+CTRL
Drag transient marker
line to stretch selected
transients proportionally
Insert new transient
marker
Using the Smart tool on AudioSnap transients clips
See also:
“Tools” on page 441
“Smart tool” on page 456
“Select tool” on page 464
“Move tool” on page 469
“Edit tool” on page 473
“Timing tool” on page 478
“Freehand tool” on page 486
“Line tool” on page 490
“Pattern tools” on page 492
Tools
Smart tool
463
“Erase tool” on page 495
“Split tool” on page 482
“Mute tool” on page 499
“Scrub tool” on page 503
“Zoom tool” on page 504
Select tool
The Select tool lets you select data. You can select a time range, or select entire clips, MIDI notes,
envelope nodes and transients.
To select the Select tool
Do one of the following:
• Click the Select tool button
in the Control Bar.
• Press T to display the Tools HUD, then select the Select tool.
• Press F6.
Using the Select tool on audio clips
Figure 133. Select tool hotspots on audio clip.
A
C
B
Hotspot
Default action
Right-click
A
Select by time
Drag to lasso select
B
Click to select clip
B
Drag to select multiple clips
C
Select by time
Table 75.
464
Using the Select tool on audio clips
Tools
Select tool
Drag to lasso select
Using the Select tool on MIDI clips
Figure 134. Select tool hotspots on MIDI clip.
A
C
B
Hotspot
Default action
Right-click
A
Select by time
Drag to lasso select
B
Click to select clip
B
Drag to select multiple clips
C
Select by time
Table 76.
Drag to lasso select
Using the Select tool on MIDI clips
Tools
Select tool
465
Using the Select tool on PRV notes
Figure 135. Select tool hotspots on PRV notes.
A
B
Hotspot
Default action
A
Click to select note
A
Drag to lasso select
B
Lasso select
Table 77.
466
Using the Select tool on PRV notes
Tools
Select tool
Using the Select tool on automation
Figure 136. Select tool hotspots on automation.
A
B
C
D
Hotspot
Default action
A
+CTRL
+SHIFT
Right-click
Select node
Extend/toggle
selection
Extend
selection
Drag to lasso select
B
Time select nodes
Extend/toggle
selection
Extend
selection
Drag to lasso select
nodes across tracks
C
Select segment
D
Time select nodes
Table 78.
Double-click
Drag to lasso select
nodes across tracks
Using the Select tool on automation
Tools
Select tool
467
Using the Select tool on AudioSnap transients
Figure 137. Select tool hotspots on AudioSnap transients.
A
B
Hotspot
Default action
Double-click
+CTRL
+SHIFT
A
Select transient marker
Select adjacent transient
markers in other tracks
Extend/toggle
selection
Extend selection
B
Drag left/right to select
transient markers
Table 79.
Using the Select tool on AudioSnap transients
See also:
“Tools” on page 441
“Smart tool” on page 456
“Move tool” on page 469
“Edit tool” on page 473
“Timing tool” on page 478
“Split tool” on page 482
“Freehand tool” on page 486
“Line tool” on page 490
“Pattern tools” on page 492
“Erase tool” on page 495
“Mute tool” on page 499
“Scrub tool” on page 503
“Zoom tool” on page 504
468
Tools
Select tool
Move tool
The Move tool lets you move selected data. You can move entire clips, partial clips, MIDI notes,
envelope nodes, transient markers and clip tempo map markers.
To select the Move tool
Do one of the following:
• Click the Move tool button
in the Control Bar.
• Press T to display the Tools HUD, then select the Move tool.
• Press F7.
Using the Move tool on audio clips
Figure 138. Move tool hotspots on audio clip.
A
Hotspot
Default action
A
Drag clip to move clip
A
Drag selection to move selection
Table 80.
Tools
Move tool
+ALT
Using the Move tool on audio clips
469
Using the Move tool on MIDI clips
Figure 139. Move tool hotspots on MIDI clip.
A
Hotspot
Default action
A
Drag clip to move clip
A
Drag selection to move selection
Table 81.
+ALT
Using the Move tool on MIDI clips
Using the Move tool on PRV notes
Figure 140. Move tool hotspots on PRV notes.
A
Hotspot
Default action
+SHIFT
A
Move note freely
Constrain movement vertically or horizontally
Table 82.
470
Using the Move tool on PRV notes
Tools
Move tool
Using the Move tool on automation
Figure 141. Move tool hotspots on automation.
A
B
C
Hotspot
Default action
Double-click
+CTRL
+SHIFT
A
Move node
Reset node
Extend/toggle
selection
Extend selection
B
Move selected
segments/nodes
C
Move segment
Add new node
Extend/toggle
selection
Extend selection
Table 83.
Tools
Move tool
Using the Move tool on automation
471
Using the Move tool on AudioSnap transients
Figure 142. Move tool hotspots on AudioSnap transients.
A
B
Hotspot
Default action
Double-click
A
If no selection exists, move clicked transient
marker; if selection exists, move selected
transient markers
Reset transient marker
B
Move selected transient markers
Table 84.
Using the Move tool on AudioSnap transients
See also:
“Tools” on page 441
“Smart tool” on page 456
“Select tool” on page 464
“Edit tool” on page 473
“Timing tool” on page 478
“Split tool” on page 482
“Freehand tool” on page 486
“Line tool” on page 490
“Pattern tools” on page 492
“Erase tool” on page 495
“Mute tool” on page 499
“Scrub tool” on page 503
“Zoom tool” on page 504
472
Tools
Move tool
Edit tool
The Edit tool lets you adjust data. You can slip-edit (trim/crop) clips, adjust note start/end times,
adjust fades, and raise/lower note velocity and automation envelopes.
Note: The Edit tool does not work on AudioSnap transients.
To select the Edit tool
Do one of the following:
• Click the Edit tool button
in the Control Bar.
• Press T to display the Tools HUD, then select the Edit tool.
• Press F8.
Note: The F8 shortcut key cycles through all Edit tools (Edit/Timing/Split). If another Edit tool is
selected, press F8 again until the Edit tool is selected.
Tools
Edit tool
473
Using the Edit tool on audio clips
Figure 143. Edit tool hotspots on audio clip.
A
B
E
C
D
Hotspot
Default action
+CTRL
+ALT+SHIFT
A
Adjust fade in
B
Adjust fade out
C
Crop clip start
Note: If the clip contains a
fade in, drag the top 75% to
crop clip start and move the
fade in, or drag the bottom
25% to only crop the clip
without moving the fade in.
Stretch clip
Crop clip start and also
move clip data
D
Stretch clip
Crop clip end
Note: If the clip contains a
fade out, drag the top 75% to
crop clip end and move the
fade out, or drag the bottom
25% to only crop the clip
without moving the fade out.
Crop clip end and also
move clip data
E
Stretch clip
Table 85.
474
Using the Edit tool on audio clips
Tools
Edit tool
Move data within clip
Using the Edit tool on MIDI clips
Figure 144. Edit tool hotspots on MIDI clip.
C
A
B
Hotspot
Default action
A
Crop clip start and also move clip data
Crop clip start
Note: If the clip contains a fade in,
drag the top 75% to crop clip start and
move the fade in, or drag the bottom
25% to only crop the clip without
moving the fade in.
B
Crop clip end
Note: If the clip contains a fade out,
drag the top 75% to crop clip end and
move the fade out, or drag the bottom
25% to only crop the clip without
moving the fade out.
C
Table 86.
Tools
Edit tool
+ALT+SHIFT
Crop clip end and also move clip data
Move data within clip
Using the Edit tool on MIDI clips
475
Using the Edit tool on PRV notes
Figure 145. Edit tool hotspots on PRV notes.
A
B
C
Hotspot
Default action
A
Drag up/down to adjust note velocity
B
Adjust note start
C
Adjust note end
Table 87.
Using the Edit tool on PRV notes
Using the Edit tool on automation
Figure 146. Edit tool hotspots on automation.
A
B
C
476
Tools
Edit tool
Hotspot
Default action
Double-click
+CTRL
+SHIFT
A
Drag to move node
Click to select node
Reset node
Extend selection
Extend selection
B
Drag up/down to
adjust selected
nodes
C
Drag to move line
segment
Double-click to add
new node
Table 88.
Drag up/down to cycle
through the line’s
available curve types
(Fast, Current, Slow,
Jump).
Using the Edit tool on automation
See also:
“Tools” on page 441
“Smart tool” on page 456
“Select tool” on page 464
“Move tool” on page 469
“Timing tool” on page 478
“Freehand tool” on page 486
“Line tool” on page 490
“Pattern tools” on page 492
“Erase tool” on page 495
“Split tool” on page 482
“Mute tool” on page 499
“Scrub tool” on page 503
“Zoom tool” on page 504
Tools
Edit tool
477
Timing tool
The Timing tool lets you slip-stretch audio clips, drag-quantize MIDI notes, and stretch audio using
transient markers
Note: The Timing tool does not work on MIDI clips or automation.
To select the Timing tool
Do one of the following:
• Click the Timing tool button
in the Control Bar.
• Press T to display the Tools HUD, then select the Timing tool.
• Press F8.
Note: The F8 shortcut key cycles through all Edit tools (Edit/Timing/Split). If another Edit tool is
selected, press F8 again until the Timing tool is selected.
Using the Timing tool on audio clips
Figure 147. Timing tool hotspots on audio clip.
A
Hotspot
Default action
A
Stretch clip start
B
Stretch clip end
Table 89.
478
B
Using the Timing tool on audio clips
Tools
Timing tool
Using the Timing tool on PRV notes
Figure 148. Timing tool hotspots on PRV notes.
A
Hotspot
Default action
A
Drag up/down to drag quantize selected notes
Table 90.
Using the Timing tool on PRV notes
Using the Timing tool on AudioSnap transients
Figure 149. Timing tool hotspots on AudioSnap transients.
A
B
Hotspot
Default action
Double-click
+CTRL
A
Drag left/right to stretch audio at
selected transients
Reset transient
Drag to stretch proportionally
B
Drag left/right to stretch audio at
selected transients
Table 91.
Using the Timing tool on AudioSnap transients
Tools
Timing tool
479
See also:
“Tools” on page 441
“Smart tool” on page 456
“Select tool” on page 464
“Move tool” on page 469
“Edit tool” on page 473
“Split tool” on page 482
“Freehand tool” on page 486
“Line tool” on page 490
“Pattern tools” on page 492
“Erase tool” on page 495
“Mute tool” on page 499
“Scrub tool” on page 503
“Zoom tool” on page 504
Comping tool
The Comping tool lets you isolate clips in Take lanes.
Note: The Comping tool does not work on AudioSnap transients.
To select the Comping tool
Do one of the following:
• Click the Comping tool button
in the Control Bar.
• Press T to display the Tools HUD, then select the Comping tool.
• Press F8.
Note: The F8 shortcut key cycles through all Edit tools (Edit/Timing/Comping/Split). If another
Edit tool is selected, press F8 again until the Comping tool is selected.
480
Tools
Comping tool
Using the Comping tool in Take lanes
Figure 150. Comping tool hotspots in Take lanes (two split clips shown).
Clip 1
Clip 2
A
B
C
D
E
F
Hotspot
Default action
+CTRL
+ALT+SHIFT
A
Crop clip start
Note: If the clip contains a fade in,
drag the top half to crop clip start
and move the fade in, or drag the
bottom half to only crop the clip
without moving the fade in.
Stretch clip
Crop clip start and also move clip data
Note: If the clip contains a fade in, drag the
top half to crop clip start and move the
fade in, or drag the bottom half to only crop
the clip without moving the fade in.
B
Stretch clip
Crop clip end
Note: If the clip contains a fade out,
drag the top half to crop clip end
and move the fade out, or drag the
bottom half to only crop the clip
without moving the fade out.
Crop clip end and also move clip data
Note: If the clip contains a fade out, drag
the top half to crop clip end and move the
fade out, or drag the bottom half to only
crop the clip without moving the fade out.
C
Drag to isolate
D
Click or drag to isolate
E
F
Table 92.
Move data within clip
Stretch clip
Move data within clip
Drag left/right to move split point on
all Take lanes; if crossfade exists,
move the crossfade
Drag up/down to extend overlaps
with crossfades
Using the Comping tool in Take lanes
Tools
Comping tool
481
See also:
“Tools” on page 441
“Smart tool” on page 456
“Select tool” on page 464
“Move tool” on page 469
“Timing tool” on page 478
“Freehand tool” on page 486
“Line tool” on page 490
“Pattern tools” on page 492
“Erase tool” on page 495
“Split tool” on page 482
“Mute tool” on page 499
“Scrub tool” on page 503
“Zoom tool” on page 504
Split tool
The Split tool lets you split clips, cut clips, split MIDI notes, and split clips at transients. By splitting
clips, you can copy, move, and delete individual sections.
To select the Split tool
Do one of the following:
• Click the Split tool button
in the Control Bar.
• Press T to display the Tools HUD, then select the Split tool.
• Press F8
Note: The F8 shortcut key cycles through all Edit tools (Edit/Timing/Split). If another Edit tool is
selected, press F8 again until the Split tool is selected.
482
Tools
Split tool
Using the Split tool on audio clips
Figure 151. Split tool hotspots on audio clip.
A
B
Hotspot
Default action
A
Click to split clip
A
Drag to split selection
B
Table 93.
Lasso to split at lasso edges
Using the Split tool on audio clips
Using the Split tool on MIDI clips
Figure 152. Split tool hotspots on MIDI clip.
A
B
Hotspot
Default action
A
Click to split clip
A
Drag to split selection
B
Lasso to split at lasso edges
Table 94.
Tools
Split tool
Using the Split tool on MIDI clips
483
Using the Split tool on PRV notes
Figure 153. Split tool hotspots on PRV notes.
A
Hotspot
Default action
A
Split note
Table 95.
Using the Split tool on PRV notes
Using the Split tool on AudioSnap transients
Figure 154. Split tool hotspots on AudioSnap transients.
A
B
C
Hotspot
Default action
A
Split audio at transient marker
B
Drag over transient markers to split audio at transients
C
Table 96.
484
Lasso split at transient markers across clips and tracks
Using the Split tool on AudioSnap transients
Tools
Split tool
See also:
“Tools” on page 441
“Smart tool” on page 456
“Select tool” on page 464
“Move tool” on page 469
“Edit tool” on page 473
“Timing tool” on page 478
“Freehand tool” on page 486
“Line tool” on page 490
“Pattern tools” on page 492
“Erase tool” on page 495
“Mute tool” on page 499
“Scrub tool” on page 503
“Zoom tool” on page 504
Tools
Split tool
485
Freehand tool
The Freehand tool lets you draw MIDI notes and freehand automation envelopes. You can also
create and promote transient markers.
Note: The Freehand tool does not work on audio clips or MIDI clips.
When using the Draw tools to draw note events, use the Value control to specify the duration (whole,
half, etc.) of new note events. For details, see “Specifying note durations” on page 507.
Figure 155. Use the Value control to specify the duration of new note events.
A
A. Draw resolution (note value)
To select the Freehand tool
Do one of the following:
• Click the Freehand tool button
in the Control Bar.
• Press T to display the Tools HUD, then select the Freehand tool.
• Press F9.
Note: The F9 shortcut key cycles through all Draw tools (Freehand/Line/Sine/Triangle/Square/
Saw/Random). If another Draw tool is selected, press F9 again until the Freehand tool is
selected.
486
Tools
Freehand tool
Using the Freehand tool on PRV notes
Figure 156. Freehand tool hotspots on PRV notes.
A
B
Hotspot
Default action
+CTRL
A
Glue notes together
Modify velocity (only
when velocity is not
shown in the Controller
pane)
B
Draw a new note
Table 97.
+ALT
+CTRL+SHIFT
Draw velocity linearly
(only when velocity is
not shown in the
Controller pane)
Insert a new note
Using the Freehand tool on PRV notes
Note 1: To glue notes together, click one note, drag to another note of the same pitch, then
release the mouse button.
Note 2: Use the Value control in the Tools module to specify the duration for new note events.
You can also click an existing Note event to inherit its duration and apply it to new Note events.
For details, see “Use note duration value from last touched note” on page 507.
Tools
Freehand tool
487
Using the Freehand tool on automation
Figure 157. Freehand tool hotspots on automation.
A
Hotspot
Default action
A
Draw nodes/segments
Table 98.
Using the Freehand tool on automation
Using the Freehand tool on AudioSnap transients
Figure 158. Freehand tool hotspots on AudioSnap transients.
A
Hotspot
Default action
A
Promote transient marker
B
Insert transient marker
Table 99.
488
B
Using the Freehand tool on AudioSnap transients
Tools
Freehand tool
See also:
“Tools” on page 441
“Smart tool” on page 456
“Select tool” on page 464
“Move tool” on page 469
“Edit tool” on page 473
“Timing tool” on page 478
“Split tool” on page 482
“Line tool” on page 490
“Pattern tools” on page 492
“Erase tool” on page 495
“Mute tool” on page 499
“Scrub tool” on page 503
“Zoom tool” on page 504
Tools
Freehand tool
489
Line tool
The Line tool lets you draw straight automation envelopes and “paint” MIDI notes at defined
resolutions and intervals.
Note: The Line tool does not work on audio clips, MIDI clips or AudioSnap transients.
For additional draw settings, see “Specifying note durations” on page 507.
To select the Line tool
Do one of the following:
• Click the Line tool button
in the Control Bar.
• Press T to display the Tools HUD, then select the Line tool.
• Press F9.
Note: The F9 shortcut key cycles through all Draw tools (Freehand/Line/Sine/Triangle/Square/
Saw/Random). If another Draw tool is selected, press F9 again until the Line tool is selected.
Using the Line tool on PRV notes
Figure 159. Line tool hotspots on PRV notes.
A
Hotspot
Default action
+CTRL
+CTRL+SHIFT
A
Drag to paint multiple notes.
Modify velocity
(only when velocity
is not shown in the
Controller pane)
Draw velocity
linearly (only
when velocity is
not shown in the
Controller pane)
Table 100.
490
Using the Line tool on PRV notes
Tools
Line tool
Note: Use the Value control to specify the duration of each note, and use the Snap resolution
to specify the interval between each note.
Using the Line tool on automation
Figure 160. Line tool hotspots on automation.
A
Hotspot
Default action
A
Drag to add nodes at mousedown and mouseup points Insert nodes at the Snap to Grid value
without changing the value of the
envelope segments (limited to the track
the gesture is started on)
Table 101.
+SHIFT
Using the Line tool on automation
Note: To draw a line, click anywhere to set the line start point, move the mouse, then release
the mouse button to set the line end point.
See also:
“Tools” on page 441
“Smart tool” on page 456
“Select tool” on page 464
“Move tool” on page 469
“Edit tool” on page 473
“Timing tool” on page 478
“Split tool” on page 482
“Freehand tool” on page 486
“Pattern tools” on page 492
Tools
Line tool
491
“Erase tool” on page 495
“Mute tool” on page 499
“Scrub tool” on page 503
“Zoom tool” on page 504
Pattern tools
The various pattern tools let you draw automation envelopes that have a specific shape.
For additional draw settings, see “Specifying note durations” on page 507.
To select a pattern tool
Do one of the following:
• Click the desired pattern tool button in the Control Bar.
• Press T to display the Tools HUD, then select the desired pattern tool.
• Press F9.
Note: The F9 shortcut key cycles through all Draw tools (Freehand/Line/Sine/Triangle/Square/
Saw/Random). If another Draw tool is selected, press F9 again until the desired pattern tool is
selected.
Sine tool
The Sine Pattern tool
lets you edit automation envelopes by drawing sine shapes.
Triangle tool
The Triangle Pattern tool
lets you edit automation envelopes by drawing triangle shapes.
Square tool
The Square Pattern tool
lets you edit automation envelopes by drawing square shapes.
Saw tool
The Saw Pattern tool
492
Tools
Pattern tools
lets you edit automation envelopes by drawing sawtooth shapes.
Random tool
The Random Pattern tool
lets you edit automation envelopes by drawing random shapes.
Note: The pattern tools do not work on audio clips, MIDI clips, PRV notes or AudioSnap
transients.
For information about drawing shapes, see “To draw automation shapes” on page 531.
Using the Pattern tools on automation
Figure 161. Pattern tool hotspots on automation.
A
Hotspot
Default action
+SHIFT
A
Draw automation shapes
Insert nodes at the Snap to Grid value without changing the value of
the envelope segments (limited to the track the gesture is started on)
Table 102.
Using Pattern tools on automation
Note: To draw automation shapes, set the Snap to Grid resolution to the desired length of each
pattern cycle, then perform the following steps in one gesture:
1. Click to set the center position of the shape.
2. Drag up/down to set the vertical range of the shape.
3. Drag left/right to set the duration of the shape.
Tools
Pattern tools
493
See also:
“Tools” on page 441
“Smart tool” on page 456
“Select tool” on page 464
“Move tool” on page 469
“Edit tool” on page 473
“Timing tool” on page 478
“Split tool” on page 482
“Freehand tool” on page 486
“Line tool” on page 490
“Erase tool” on page 495
“Mute tool” on page 499
“Scrub tool” on page 503
“Zoom tool” on page 504
494
Tools
Pattern tools
Erase tool
The Erase tool lets you delete clips, partial clips, MIDI notes, automation envelope nodes, and
transient markers.
To select the Erase tool
Do one of the following:
• Click the Erase tool button
in the Control Bar.
• Press T to display the Tools HUD, then select the Erase tool.
• Press F10.
Note: The F10 shortcut key cycles through all Erase tools (Erase/Mute). If another Erase tool is
selected, press F10 again until the Erase tool is selected.
Using the Erase tool on audio clips
Figure 162. Erase tool hotspots on audio clip.
A
C
B
Hotspot
Default action
A
Drag to delete a time selection
B
Click clip to delete clip
B
Click a selection to delete the selection
C
Table 103.
Lasso to delete clips
+ALT
Delete by time
Using the Erase tool on audio clips
Tools
Erase tool
495
Using the Erase tool on MIDI clips
Figure 163. Erase tool hotspots on MIDI clip.
A
C
B
Hotspot
Default action
A
Drag to delete a time selection
B
Click clip to delete clip
B
Click a selection to delete the selection
C
Lasso to delete clips
Table 104.
496
Using the Erase tool on MIDI clips
Tools
Erase tool
+ALT
Delete by time
Using the Erase tool on PRV notes
Figure 164. Erase tool hotspots on PRV notes.
A
B
Hotspot
Default action
A
Click to delete note
A
Drag to delete multiple notes
B
Lasso delete notes
Table 105.
Using the Erase tool on PRV notes
Using the Erase tool on automation
Figure 165. Erase tool hotspots on automation.
B
A
C
D
Hotspot
Default action
A
Delete node
B
Drag to lasso delete nodes across tracks
C
Delete envelope segment
D
Lasso delete nodes across tracks
Table 106.
Using the Erase tool on automation
Tools
Erase tool
497
Using the Erase tool on AudioSnap transients
Figure 166. Erase tool hotspots on AudioSnap transients.
A
B
C
Hotspot
Default action
A
Delete clicked transient marker
B
Drag to delete multiple transient markers
C
Lasso delete transient markers across clips and tracks
Table 107.
Using the Erase tool on AudioSnap transients
Note: You can only erase user created transient markers.
See also:
“Tools” on page 441
“Smart tool” on page 456
“Select tool” on page 464
“Move tool” on page 469
“Edit tool” on page 473
“Timing tool” on page 478
“Split tool” on page 482
“Freehand tool” on page 486
“Line tool” on page 490
“Pattern tools” on page 492
“Mute tool” on page 499
“Scrub tool” on page 503
“Zoom tool” on page 504
498
Tools
Erase tool
Mute tool
The Mute tool lets you mute clips, mute partial clips, mute MIDI notes, and disable transient markers.
Mute events to prevent them from playing back.
Note: The Mute tool does not work on automation.
To select the Mute tool
Do one of the following:
• Click the Mute tool button
in the Control Bar.
• Press T to display the Tools HUD, then select the Mute tool.
• Press F10.
Note: The F10 shortcut key cycles through all Erase tools (Erase/Mute). If another Erase tool is
selected, press F10 again until the Erase tool is selected.
Using the Mute tool on audio clips
Figure 167. Mute tool hotspots on audio clip.
A
B
Hotspot
Default action
A
Click to unmute clip
Click to isolate Take lane
A
Drag to unmute by time
Drag to isolate by time
B
Click to mute clip
Click to isolate Take lane
Drag to mute by time
Drag to isolate by time
B
Table 108.
Tools
Mute tool
+ALT
+CTRL
Using the Mute tool on audio clips
499
Using the Mute tool on MIDI clips
Figure 168. Mute tool hotspots on MIDI clip.
A
B
Hotspot
Default action
A
Click to unmute clip
Click to isolate Take lane
A
Drag to unmute by time
Drag to isolate by time
B
Click to mute clip
Click to isolate Take lane
B
Drag to mute by time
Drag to isolate by time
Table 109.
500
Using the Mute tool on MIDI clips
Tools
Mute tool
+ALT
+CTRL
Using the Mute tool on PRV notes
On PRV notes, the Mute tool functions as a toggle. Click once to mute and click again to unmute.
Figure 169. Mute tool hotspots on PRV notes.
A
B
Hotspot
Default action
A
Click to mute/unmute
A
Drag to mute/unmute multiple notes
B
Lasso mute/unmute notes
Table 110.
Tools
Mute tool
Using the Mute tool on PRV notes
501
Using the Mute tool on AudioSnap transients
Figure 170. Mute tool hotspots on AudioSnap transients.
A
B
C
Hotspot
Default action
A
Disable transient marker
B
Disable transient markers
C
Lasso disable transient markers across clips and tracks
Table 111.
Using the Mute tool on AudioSnap transients
See also:
“Tools” on page 441
“Smart tool” on page 456
“Select tool” on page 464
“Move tool” on page 469
“Edit tool” on page 473
“Timing tool” on page 478
“Split tool” on page 482
“Freehand tool” on page 486
“Line tool” on page 490
“Pattern tools” on page 492
“Erase tool” on page 495
“Scrub tool” on page 503
“Zoom tool” on page 504
502
Tools
Mute tool
Scrub tool
The Scrub tool lets you audition all displayed tracks as you drag the mouse cursor forward or
backward at the desired speed. You can scrub a single track by dragging over the track, or all
displayed tracks by dragging in the Time Ruler.
Note: The Scrub tool does not work on automation.
To scrub a single track
Hold down the J key to temporarily enable Scrub mode and drag over the track.
To scrub all displayed tracks
Hold down the J key to temporarily enable Scrub mode and drag in the Time Ruler.
Note: The Scrub tool is invoked by pressing the J key. There is no Scrub tool button in the
Control Bar or Tools HUD.
See also:
“Scrubbing” on page 836
“Tools” on page 441
“Smart tool” on page 456
“Select tool” on page 464
“Move tool” on page 469
“Edit tool” on page 473
“Timing tool” on page 478
“Split tool” on page 482
“Freehand tool” on page 486
“Line tool” on page 490
“Pattern tools” on page 492
“Erase tool” on page 495
“Mute tool” on page 499
“Zoom tool” on page 504
Tools
Scrub tool
503
Zoom tool
The Zoom tool lets you change the vertical and horizontal scale of a view. You can use lasso to
select a specific area to zoom into.
Using the Zoom tool
Hold down the Z key to temporarily enable Zoom mode, then lasso to select the region you want to
zoom into.
To revert to the previous zoom level, press ALT+Z.
Note: The Zoom tool is invoked by pressing the Z key. There is no Zoom tool button in the
Control Bar or Tools HUD.
See also:
“Zoom controls” on page 85
“To undo/redo zoom with mouse buttons” on page 86
“Configuring the display of tracks in the Track view” on page 334
“Tools” on page 441
“Smart tool” on page 456
“Select tool” on page 464
“Move tool” on page 469
“Edit tool” on page 473
“Timing tool” on page 478
“Split tool” on page 482
“Freehand tool” on page 486
“Line tool” on page 490
“Pattern tools” on page 492
“Erase tool” on page 495
“Mute tool” on page 499
“Scrub tool” on page 503
504
Tools
Zoom tool
Snap to Grid settings
SONAR lets you define a snap grid that makes it easier to arrange clips, select time ranges, and
control envelope shape drawing. To use the snap grid, enable the Snap to Grid button
in the
Snap module and set the grid resolution to an interval of musical time, such as a whole note, half
note, or quarter note; a unit of absolute time: a number of frames, seconds or samples; an event; the
start or end of a clip; a marker; or audio transients. The grid can use multiple resolutions at the same
time, such as a whole note, and audio transients. When the Snap to Grid button is enabled, if you
move or paste clips or markers, items will be snapped to the nearest point on the snap grid.
Figure 171. Snap to Grid settings are available in the Snap module in the Control Bar.
A
B
D
C
E F
A. Snap on/off B. Snap To / Snap By C. Snap to landmarks D. Snap resolution (musical time or absolute
time) E. Triplet F. Dotted
The Snap module contains the following settings:
•
• Snap enable/disable
. Enable/disable snapping. When enabled, vertical grid lines that
correspond to the snap resolution are displayed in the Track view.
• Snap To. Align data to the snap grid.
• Snap By.
Move data by the grid resolution.
• Time resolution. Snap to the selected musical or absolute time resolution. Click and hold the
mouse button pressed to select a different duration from the pop-up menu. For absolute time
resolutions (samples, frames, seconds), type the desired number of units. When Smart Grid is
selected, the snap resolution is dynamically determined by the horizontal zoom level. When
Smart Grid is enabled, the M:B:T time rulers in the Clips pane and Piano Roll view are optimized
to show relevant snap locations.
• Triplet . Reduces the duration of the selected Musical time resolution by 2/3 of its original
duration. When Triplet is enabled, three note events fit in the space of two.
• Dotted . Increase the duration of the selected Musical time resolution by half of its original
value (150%).
Tools
Snap to Grid settings
505
• Landmark Events
. Snap to the selected landmarks, including markers, Now Time, clips,
audio transients, MIDI notes, and automation envelope nodes. To select the desired landmarks,
right-click the Snap to Grid button
to open the Preferences dialog, then select the desired
check boxes in the Landmarks section. SONAR will snap to landmarks on tracks/lanes that are
currently visible in the Clips pane.
Additional Snap to Grid settings
To access additional snap settings, go to Edit > Preferences > Customization - Snap to Grid (or
right-click the Snap to Grid button ).
The Snap section contains the following settings:
• Snap Intensity. Specify the magnetic strength when snapping, which determines how quickly
moved events are pulled towards the snap grid.
• Magnetic Test. Drag the event to test the current Snap Intensity setting.
• Snap to Nearest Audio Zero Crossings. Automatically snap edited audio clips to the nearest
zero crossing of the waveform (the point at which there is no volume) to minimize glitches that
can happen when waveforms are spliced together.
• Landmarks. Snap to the selected landmarks when the Events button is enabled in the Control
Bar’s Snap module:
• Markers.
Snap to any marker.
• Now Time. Snap to the current Now Time.
• Clips. Snap to the start or end of any clip.
• Audio Transients. Snap to transient markers in audio clips.
• MIDI Notes. Snap to note events in MIDI clips.
• Automation Nodes.
Snap to automation envelope nodes.
See also:
“Defining and using the Snap Grid” on page 370
“Tools” on page 441
506
Tools
Snap to Grid settings
Specifying note durations
When using the Smart tool or Freehand tool to draw new note events, use the Value control in the
Tools module to specify the note duration of new note events (whole, half, etc.).
Figure 172. Use the Value control to specify the duration of new note events.
A
A. Draw resolution (note value)
You can also use the following shortcuts to set the desired note duration.
Duration
Shortcut
Set whole note duration
CTRL+SHIFT+1
Set half note duration
CTRL+SHIFT+2
Set quarter note duration
CTRL+SHIFT+4
Set eight note duration
CTRL+SHIFT+8
Set sixteenth note duration
CTRL+SHIFT+6
Set thirty-second note duration
CTRL+SHIFT+3
Table 112.
Global note duration shortcuts
Use note duration value from last touched note
When inserting new Note events, you can choose to always apply the note duration from the last
touched Note event. To do so, select Last Touched in the Value control drop-down menu. Before
inserting a new Note event, select an existing Note event that already uses the duration you want to
apply to the new note, then insert the new note.
See also:
“Freehand tool” on page 486
“Line tool” on page 490
“Pattern tools” on page 492
“Tools” on page 441
Tools
Specifying note durations
507
Mouse cursors
When using global tools, the mouse cursor indicates which operation will be performed when you
click or drag. Valid operations depend on the selected tool, the Edit Filter setting, and where the
pointer is positioned.
The following table describes each cursor.
Cursor
Description
Select clip.
Lasso select.
Select by time.
Move.
Fade in.
Fade out.
Crop clip start.
Crop clip start, but don’t move fade in position.
Crop clip start and move fade in position.
Crop clip end.
Table 113.
508
Tool cursors
Tools
Mouse cursors
Cursor
Description
Crop clip end, but don’t move fade out position.
Crop clip end and move fade out position.
Mute event.
Mute by time.
Unmute by time.
Isolate Take lane (mute all other overlapping Take lanes in same track).
Erase clip.
Lasso erase.
Erase by time.
Split.
Scrub.
Move a single envelope node.
Move multiple selected envelope nodes.
Table 113.
Tool cursors (Continued)
Tools
Mouse cursors
509
Cursor
Description
Move an envelope line segment.
Adjust selected envelope region up/down.
Draw.
Draw line/pattern.
Draw automation line.
Draw automation sine pattern.
Draw automation triangle pattern.
Draw automation square pattern.
Draw automation sawtooth pattern.
Draw automation random pattern.
Move selected automation.
Lasso select automation.
Split automation (add node).
Table 113.
510
Tool cursors (Continued)
Tools
Mouse cursors
Cursor
Description
Erase automation.
Insert transient marker.
Lasso select transient markers.
Stretch transient marker.
Move transient marker.
Erase transient marker.
Disable transient marker.
Split audio at transient marker.
Glue MIDI note events together.
Move MIDI note events.
Adjust MIDI note velocity.
Trim MIDI note event.
Drag quantize selected MIDI note events.
Table 113.
Tool cursors (Continued)
Tools
Mouse cursors
511
Cursor
Description
Move data within clip (ALT+SHIFT).
Isolate a clip or region when comping in Take lanes.
Crossfade abutting clips in Take lanes.
Table 113.
Tool cursors (Continued)
See:
“Tools” on page 441
512
Tools
Mouse cursors
Using tools to perform common tasks
This section explains how to perform many common editing tasks.
See:
Working with audio clips
• “To fade in/out an audio clip” on page 515
• “To crop a clip’s start/end” on page 515
• “To select audio clips” on page 516
• “To scrub an audio clip” on page 517
• “To mute/unmute a clip” on page 517
• “To move a clip” on page 518
• “To stretch an audio clip” on page 518
• “To erase a clip” on page 518
• “To split a clip” on page 519
• “To raise/lower an audio Clip Gain envelope” on page 519
Working with MIDI clips
• “To crop a clip’s start/end” on page 520
• “To select MIDI clips” on page 521
• “To scrub a MIDI clip” on page 521
• “To mute/unmute a clip” on page 522
• “To move a clip” on page 522
• “To erase a clip” on page 523
• “To split a clip” on page 524
• “To raise/lower an audio Clip Gain envelope” on page 519
Tools
Using tools to perform common tasks
513
Working with MIDI notes
• “To adjust a MIDI note’s velocity” on page 525
• “To adjust a MIDI note’s start/end” on page 525
• “To select MIDI notes” on page 525
• “To scrub MIDI notes” on page 525
• “To mute/unmute a MIDI note” on page 526
• “To move a MIDI note” on page 526
• “To draw a MIDI note” on page 526
• “To drag-quantize MIDI notes” on page 527
• “To glue MIDI notes together” on page 527
• “To paint MIDI notes” on page 527
• “To erase a MIDI note” on page 527
• “To split a MIDI note” on page 528
Working with automation envelopes
• “To select automation” on page 529
• “To move automation” on page 529
• “To draw automation freehand” on page 530
• “To draw a straight line” on page 530
• “To draw automation shapes” on page 531
• “To erase automation” on page 532
• “To add envelope nodes” on page 532
• “To draw MIDI continuous controller envelopes” on page 533
Working with AudioSnap transients
• “To select transient markers” on page 534
• “To move transient markers (without stretching audio)” on page 534
• “To stretch transients” on page 534
• “To promote transient markers” on page 535
• “To erase transient markers” on page 535
• “To split an audio clip at transient markers” on page 535
• “To add transient” on page 535
514
Tools
Using tools to perform common tasks
Working with audio clips
To fade in/out an audio clip
1. Set the track’s Edit Filter control to Clips.
2. Do one of the following:
• With the Smart tool
, position the pointer in the top left (fade in) or top right (fade out)
corner of the clip, then drag to adjust the fade duration.
• With the Edit tool
, position the pointer in the top left (fade in) or top right (fade out) corner
of the clip, then drag to adjust the fade duration.
To crop a clip’s start/end
1. Set the track’s Edit Filter control to Clips.
2. Do one of the following:
• With the Smart tool
, position the pointer over the clip’s start or end point, then drag to
adjust the start/end position.
• With the Edit tool
, position the pointer over the clip’s start or end point, then drag to adjust
the start/end position.
Tip: When cropping clips, you can choose to also move clip fades proportionally, or retain the original
fade position. To move the fade position, click the top three quarters of the clip edge when cropping.
To retain the clip fade position, click the bottom quarter of the clip edge when cropping. You can also
hold down the ALT key while cropping in order to move a clip fade.
To move data and the clip edge
1. Set the track’s Edit Filter control to Clips.
2. Do one of the following:
• With the Smart tool
, position the pointer over the clip’s start or end point, then hold
ALT+SHIFT and drag to adjust the start/end position.
• With the Edit tool
, position the pointer over the clip’s start or end point, then hold
ALT+SHIFT and drag to adjust the start/end position.
Tools
Using tools to perform common tasks
515
To move data without moving its clip
1. Set the track’s Edit Filter control to Clips.
2. Do one of the following:
• With the Smart tool
, position the pointer within the clip, then hold ALT+SHIFT and drag
left/right to move the data within the clip boundaries.
• With the Edit tool
, position the pointer within the clip, then hold ALT+SHIFT and drag left/
right to move the data within the clip boundaries.
To select audio clips
1. Set the track’s Edit Filter control to Clips.
2. Do one of the following:
• With the Smart tool
, position the pointer over the clip, then click to select the clip.
• With the Smart tool
selection.
, position the pointer below the clip header, then drag to make a time
• With the Smart tool
selection.
, position the pointer outside any clips, then drag to make a time
• With the Smart tool
, drag with the right mouse button to lasso the clips you want to select.
It is sufficient to simply touch the clips you want to select; there is no need to fully enclose the
clips.
• With the Select tool
want to select.
, position the pointer outside any clips, then drag over the clips you
• With the Select tool
, position the pointer over the clip, then click to select the clip.
• With the Select tool
, position the pointer over the clip, then drag to make a time selection.
• With the Select tool
, drag with the right mouse button to lasso the clips you want to select.
It is sufficient to simply touch the clips you want to select; there is no need to fully enclose the
clips.
Tip: To modify a selection, hold down the CTRL key and click clips to toggle their selection state.
516
Tools
Using tools to perform common tasks
To scrub an audio clip
1. Set the track’s Edit Filter control to Clips.
2. Do one of the following:
• To scrub a single track, hold down the J key and drag across the track.
• To scrub all visible tracks, hold down the J key and drag in the time ruler.
To mute/unmute a clip
1. Set the track’s Edit Filter control to Clips.
2. Do one of the following:
• With the Mute tool
, drag across the bottom half of the clip to mute a time region, and drag
across the top half to unmute a time region.
• With the Mute tool
, click the bottom half of the clip to mute the entire clip, and click the top
half of the clip to unmute the clip.
• With the Mute tool
to mute/unmute.
, position the pointer outside any clips and drag over the clips you want
To isolate a Take lane
1. Set the track’s Edit Filter control to Clips.
2. Do one of the following:
• With the Mute tool
isolate.
, hold down the CTRL key and drag across the region you want to
• With the Mute tool
lane.
, hold down the CTRL key and click the clip to isolate the entire clip/
All other Take lanes in the same track are muted.
Tools
Using tools to perform common tasks
517
To move a clip
1. Set the track’s Edit Filter control to Clips.
2. Do one of the following:
• With the Smart tool
, position the pointer over the clip header, then drag the clip or
selection to the desired location.
• With the Move tool
, drag the clip or selection to the desired location.
To stretch an audio clip
1. Set the track’s Edit Filter control to Clips.
2. Do one of the following:
• With the Smart tool
, hold down the CTRL key and position the pointer over the clip’s first
half and drag to stretch the beginning, or position the pointer over the clip’s second half and
drag to stretch the end.
• With the Timing tool
, position the pointer over the clip’s first half and drag to stretch the
beginning, or position the pointer over the clip’s second half and drag to stretch the end.
• With the Edit tool
, hold down the CTRL key and position the pointer over the clip’s first
half and drag to stretch the beginning, or position the pointer over the clip’s second half and
drag to stretch the end.
A clip icon in the top right corner of the clip indicates the clip is stretched and shows the stretch
percentage.
To erase a clip
1. Set the track’s Edit Filter control to Clips.
2. Do one of the following:
• With the Erase tool
time selection.
, position the pointer over the top half of the clip, then drag to erase a
• With the Erase tool
the entire clip.
, position the pointer over the bottom half of the clip, then click to erase
• With the Erase tool
, position the pointer outside any clips, then drag over the clips you
want to erase. Hold down the ALT key and drag to erase by time.
518
Tools
Using tools to perform common tasks
To split a clip
1. Set the track’s Edit Filter control to Clips.
2. Do one of the following:
• With the Smart tool
, position the pointer where you want to split the clip, then hold down
ALT and click (or lasso to split a region).
• With the Split tool
, position the pointer where you want to split the clip, then click (or drag
to split one or more clips at the mousedown and mouseup points).
To raise/lower an audio Clip Gain envelope
1. Set the track’s Edit Filter control to Clips.
2. Select the Smart tool
.
3. Position the mouse pointer over the top half of the clip until the pointer looks like this
down the CTRL key and drag up/down.
, hold
Tip: For greater control over clip gain envelopes, set the Event Filter to Clip Automation > Gain.
Note: Clip envelopes can be adjusted in the parent track or in a Take lane.
See:
“Working with MIDI clips” on page 520
“Working with MIDI notes” on page 525
“Working with automation envelopes” on page 529
“Working with AudioSnap transients” on page 534
“Tools” on page 441
Tools
Using tools to perform common tasks
519
Working with MIDI clips
To crop a clip’s start/end
1. Set the track’s Edit Filter control to Clips.
2. Do one of the following:
• With the Smart tool
, position the pointer over the clip’s start or end point, then drag to
adjust the start/end position.
• With the Edit tool
, position the pointer over the clip’s start or end point, then drag to adjust
the start/end position.
To move data and the clip edge
1. Set the track’s Edit Filter control to Clips.
2. Do one of the following:
• With the Smart tool
, position the pointer over the clip’s start or end point, then hold
ALT+SHIFT and drag to adjust the start/end position.
• With the Edit tool
, position the pointer over the clip’s start or end point, then hold
ALT+SHIFT and drag to adjust the start/end position.
To move data without moving its clip
1. Set the track’s Edit Filter control to Clips.
2. Do one of the following:
• With the Smart tool
, position the pointer within the clip, then hold ALT+SHIFT and drag
left/right to move the data within the clip boundaries.
• With the Edit tool
, position the pointer within the clip, then hold ALT+SHIFT and drag left/
right to move the data within the clip boundaries.
520
Tools
Using tools to perform common tasks
To select MIDI clips
1. Set the track’s Edit Filter control to Clips.
2. Do one of the following:
• With the Smart tool
, position the pointer over the clip, then click to select the clip.
• With the Smart tool
selection.
, position the pointer below the clip header, then drag to make a time
• With the Smart tool
selection.
, position the pointer outside any clips, then drag to make a time
• With the Smart tool
, drag with the right mouse button to lasso the clips you want to select.
It is sufficient to simply touch the clips you want to select; there is no need to fully enclose the
clips.
• With the Select tool
select the clip.
, position the pointer over the bottom half of the clip, then click to
• With the Select tool
time selection.
, position the pointer over the top half of the clip, then drag to make a
• With the Select tool
selection.
, position the pointer outside any clips, then drag to make a time
• With the Select tool
, drag with the right mouse button to lasso the clips you want to select.
It is sufficient to simply touch the clips you want to select; there is no need to fully enclose the
clips.
To scrub a MIDI clip
1. Set the track’s Edit Filter control to Clips.
2. Do one of the following:
• To scrub a single track, hold down the J key and drag across the track.
• To scrub all visible tracks, hold down the J key and drag in the time ruler.
Tools
Using tools to perform common tasks
521
To mute/unmute a clip
1. Set the track’s Edit Filter control to Clips.
2. Do one of the following:
• With the Mute tool
, drag across the bottom half of the clip to mute a time region, and drag
across the top half to unmute a time region.
• With the Mute tool
, click the bottom half of the clip to mute the entire clip, and click the top
half of the clip to unmute the clip.
• With the Mute tool
to mute/unmute.
, position the pointer outside any clips and drag over the clips you want
To isolate a Take lane
1. Set the track’s Edit Filter control to Clips.
2. Do one of the following:
• With the Mute tool
isolate.
, hold down the CTRL key and drag across the region you want to
• With the Mute tool
lane.
, hold down the CTRL key and click the clip to isolate the entire clip/
All other Take lanes in the same track are muted.
To move a clip
1. Set the track’s Edit Filter control to Clips.
2. Do one of the following:
• With the Smart tool
, position the pointer over the clip header, then drag the clip or
selection to the desired location.
• With the Move tool
522
, drag the clip or selection to the desired location.
Tools
Using tools to perform common tasks
To erase a clip
1. Set the track’s Edit Filter control to Clips.
2. Do one of the following:
• With the Erase tool
time selection.
, position the pointer over the top half of the clip, then drag to erase a
• With the Erase tool
the entire clip.
, position the pointer over the bottom half of the clip, then click to erase
• With the Erase tool
, position the pointer outside any clips, then drag over the clips you
want to erase. Hold down the ALT key and drag to erase by time.
Tools
Using tools to perform common tasks
523
To split a clip
1. Set the track’s Edit Filter control to Clips.
2. Do one of the following:
• With the Smart tool
, position the pointer where you want to split the clip, then hold down
ALT and click (or lasso to split a region).
• With the Split tool
, position the pointer where you want to split the clip, then click (or drag
to split one or more clips at the mousedown and mouseup points).
To raise/lower a MIDI Clip Velocity envelope
1. Set the track’s Edit Filter control to Clips.
2. Select the Smart tool
.
3. Position the mouse pointer over the top half of the clip until the pointer looks like this
down the CTRL key and drag up/down.
, hold
Tip: For greater control over clip velocity envelopes, set the Event Filter to Clip Automation >
Velocity.
Note: Clip envelopes can be adjusted in the parent track or in a Take lane.
See:
“Working with audio clips” on page 515
“Working with MIDI notes” on page 525
“Working with automation envelopes” on page 529
“Working with AudioSnap transients” on page 534
“Tools” on page 441
524
Tools
Using tools to perform common tasks
Working with MIDI notes
To adjust a MIDI note’s velocity
1. Set the track’s Edit Filter control to Notes.
2. Do one of the following:
• With the Smart tool
down.
• With the Edit tool
, position the pointer near the top center of the note, then drag up/
, position the pointer near the top center of the note, then drag up/down.
To adjust a MIDI note’s start/end
1. Set the track’s Edit Filter control to Notes.
2. Do one of the following:
• With the Smart tool
, position the pointer over the note’s start or end point, then drag left/
right to adjust the start/end position.
• With the Edit tool
, position the pointer over the note’s start or end point, then drag left/
right to adjust the start/end position.
To select MIDI notes
1. Set the track’s Edit Filter control to Notes.
2. Do one of the following:
• With the Smart tool
, drag with the right mouse button over the notes you want to select.
• With the Smart tool
to select the note.
, position the pointer over the bottom half center of the note, then click
• With the Select tool
, click the note.
• With the Select tool
, drag over the notes you want to select.
To scrub MIDI notes
1. Set the track’s Edit Filter control to Notes.
2. Hold down the J key and drag across the notes.
Tools
Using tools to perform common tasks
525
To mute/unmute a MIDI note
1. Set the track’s Edit Filter control to Notes.
2. Do one of the following:
• With the Smart tool
, hold down the ALT key and right-click the note.
• With the Mute tool
, click the note to mute/unmute a single note, or drag over notes to
mute/unmute multiple notes.
To move a MIDI note
1. Set the track’s Edit Filter control to Notes.
2. Do one of the following:
• With the Smart tool
, position the pointer over the bottom half center of the note, then drag
the note to the desired location.
• With the Move tool
, drag the note or selection to the desired location.
Tip: When moving a note, hold down the SHIFT key to constrain vertical or horizontal movement,
depending on the direction you first move.
To draw a MIDI note
1. Set the track’s Edit Filter control to Notes.
2. Do one of the following:
• With the Smart tool
, click where you want to insert a new note. Before releasing mouse
button, drag left/right to change duration, and up/down to change pitch.
• With the Freehand tool
, click where you want to insert a new note.
Note: Use the Value control in the Tools module to specify the duration for new note events.
526
Tools
Using tools to perform common tasks
To drag-quantize MIDI notes
1. Set the track’s Edit Filter control to Notes.
2. Select the notes you want to quantize.
3. With the Timing tool
all selected notes.
, position the pointer over a selected note and drag up/down to quantize
To glue MIDI notes together
1. Set the track’s Edit Filter control to Notes.
2. Do one of the following:
• With the Smart tool
, hold down ALT+CTRL and drag across two or more notes of the
same pitch (click on the first note, drag to the second note and release the mouse button).
• With the Freehand tool
, drag across two or more notes of the same pitch (click on the first
note, drag to the second note and release the mouse button).
All touched note events of the same pitch are merged into a single note event.
To paint MIDI notes
1. Set the track’s Edit Filter control to Notes.
2. Do one of the following:
• With the Smart tool
, hold down ALT+CTRL and drag to insert multiple notes. Use the
Value control to specify the duration of each note, and use the Snap resolution to specify the
interval between each note.
• With the Line tool
, drag to insert multiple notes. Use the Value control to specify the
duration of each note, and use the Snap resolution to specify the interval between each note.
To erase a MIDI note
1. Set the track’s Edit Filter control to Notes.
2. Do one of the following:
• With the Smart tool
, right-click a note to erase a single note, or keep the right mouse
button pressed and drag over notes to erase multiple notes.
• With the Erase tool
multiple notes.
, click a note to erase a single note, or drag over notes to erase
Tools
Using tools to perform common tasks
527
To split a MIDI note
1. Set the track’s Edit Filter control to Notes.
2. Do one of the following:
• With the Smart tool
, position the pointer where you want to split the note, then hold down
ALT and click (or lasso to split a region).
• With the Split tool
, position the pointer where you want to split the note, then click (or
lasso to split a region).
To open the Note Properties dialog
1. Set the track’s Edit Filter control to Notes.
2. With the Smart tool
, double-click the note.
See:
“Working with audio clips” on page 515
“Working with MIDI clips” on page 520
“Working with automation envelopes” on page 529
“Working with AudioSnap transients” on page 534
“Tools” on page 441
528
Tools
Using tools to perform common tasks
Working with automation envelopes
To select automation
1. Set the track’s Edit Filter control to the desired automation parameter (Track Automation or
Clip Automation).
2. Do one of the following:
• With the Smart tool
or Select tool
, drag left/right to make a time selection.
• With the Smart tool
or Select tool
, drag with the right mouse button to lasso select.
• With the Select tool
, click the node. Hold CTRL or SHIFT to extend the selection.
• With the Edit tool
, click the node.
To move automation
1. Set the track’s Edit Filter control to the desired automation parameter (Track Automation or
Clip Automation).
2. Do one of the following:
• With the Move tool
, position the pointer over the envelope segment you want to move,
then drag the segment to the desired location.
• With the Edit tool
, position the pointer over the envelope segment you want to move, then
drag the segment to the desired location.
To move envelope nodes
1. Set the track’s Edit Filter control to the desired automation parameter (Track Automation or
Clip Automation).
2. Do one of the following:
• With the Smart tool
, drag the node to the desired location.
• With the Move tool
, drag the node to the desired location.
• With the Edit tool
, drag the node to the desired location.
When dragging an envelope node, the tooltip shows the current value and the delta value for the
change.
Tools
Using tools to perform common tasks
529
To reset envelope nodes
1. Set the track’s Edit Filter control to the desired automation parameter (Track Automation or
Clip Automation).
2. Do one of the following:
• With the Smart tool
, double-click the node.
• With the Move tool
, double-click the node.
• With the Edit tool
, double-click the node.
To raise/lower selected envelope nodes
1. Set the track’s Edit Filter control to the desired automation parameter (Track Automation or
Clip Automation).
2. Do one of the following:
• With the Smart tool
down.
• With the Edit tool
down.
, position the pointer near the top center of the track/clip, then drag up/
, position the pointer near the top center of the track/clip, then drag up/
To draw automation freehand
1. Set the track’s Edit Filter control to the desired automation parameter (Track Automation or
Clip Automation).
2. With the Freehand tool
, drag to insert envelope nodes and segments.
To draw a straight line
1. Set the track’s Edit Filter control to the desired automation parameter (Track Automation or
Clip Automation).
2. With the Line tool
, click to set the line start point, move the mouse, then release the mouse
button to set the line end point.
530
Tools
Using tools to perform common tasks
To draw automation shapes
1. Set the track’s Edit Filter control to the desired automation parameter (Track Automation or
Clip Automation).
2. Select the desired pattern tool: Sine Pattern tool
tool
, Saw Pattern tool
, Triangle Pattern tool
, or Random Pattern tool
, Square Pattern
.
3. Set the Snap to Grid to the desired length of each cycle of the shape you want to draw. For
example, if you want to draw sine curves, and you want each complete sine curve to last one
beat, set the Snap to Grid to a value of Quarter. If the Snap to Grid is disabled, the default cycle
is one measure.
4. Click and hold the mouse button in the Clips pane at the place where you want to draw the
envelope shape. The place where you click also sets the vertical midpoint of the shape.
5. Drag up or down to set the vertical range of the envelope, then drag to the right or left to set the
length of your edit. As you drag, the cursor’s vertical distance from the midpoint (the point where
you originally clicked) determines the amplitude of the shape. To create a series of identical
shapes, hold the SHIFT key down while you drag. To gradually increase or decrease the
amplitude, gradually move the pointer farther from or closer to the midpoint.
6. Release the mouse button when done. The shape you selected appears, repeating according to
the Snap to Grid setting.
Tip:
• To halve the cycle frequency (for example, if snap resolution = quarter note, make each
cycle a half note), hold down the ALT key while you draw.
• To double the cycle frequency (for example, if snap resolution = quarter note, make each
cycle an eighth note), hold down the CTRL key while you draw.
• To invert the phase of the pattern, drag the cursor below the zero-line/center (where you
initially clicked to start the pattern).
Tools
Using tools to perform common tasks
531
To erase automation
1. Set the track’s Edit Filter control to the desired automation parameter (Track Automation or
Clip Automation).
2. Do one of the following:
• With the Erase tool
multiple nodes.
, click a node to erase a single node, or drag over nodes to erase
• With the Erase tool
the segment.
, click an envelope segment to erase the nodes to the left and right of
• With the Erase tool
, position the pointer outside the clip, then drag to lasso erase nodes
across clips or tracks.
To add envelope nodes
1. Set the track’s Edit Filter control to the desired automation parameter (Track Automation or
Clip Automation).
2. Do one of the following:
• With the Smart tool
new node, then click.
, position the pointer over the envelope where you want to insert a
• With the Smart tool
selection boundaries.
, hold down the CTRL key and drag to insert two nodes at the
• With the Select tool
, position the pointer over the envelope where you want to insert a
new node, then double-click.
• With the Move tool
, position the pointer over the envelope where you want to insert a new
node, then double-click.
• With the Edit tool
node, then click.
, position the pointer over the envelope where you want to insert a new
• With the Line tool
, drag to add nodes at the mousedown and mouseup points. Hold down
the SHIFT key and drag to add nodes at the Snap to Grid value.
• With the Freehand tool
Grid value.
, hold down the SHIFT key and drag to add nodes at the Snap to
• With any pattern draw tools (Sine tool
532
, Triangle tool
Tools
Using tools to perform common tasks
, Square tool
, Saw tool
,
or Random tool
value.
), hold down the SHIFT key and drag to add nodes at the Snap to Grid
To draw MIDI continuous controller envelopes
1. Click the track’s Edit Filter control, point to Track Automation and choose MIDI to open the MIDI
Envelope dialog box.
2. Specify the desired MIDI envelope parameter settings (Type, Value, and Channel).
3. With the Freehand tool
, drag to insert envelope nodes and segments.
See:
“Working with audio clips” on page 515
“Working with MIDI clips” on page 520
“Working with MIDI notes” on page 525
“Working with AudioSnap transients” on page 534
“Tools” on page 441
Tools
Using tools to perform common tasks
533
Working with AudioSnap transients
To select transient markers
1. Set the track’s Edit Filter control to Audio Transients.
2. Do one of the following:
• With the Smart tool
, click the transient marker or drag left/right to make a time selection.
• With the Smart tool
, position the pointer outside the clip, then drag to lasso select
transients across clips or tracks.
• With the Smart tool
, double-click a transient marker to select all adjacent transient
markers in other tracks.
• With the Select tool
selection.
, click the transient marker. Hold CTRL or SHIFT to extend the
• With the Select tool
, drag left/right to select multiple transient markers.
• With the Select tool
, double-click a transient marker to select all adjacent transient
markers in other tracks.
To move transient markers (without stretching audio)
1. Set the track’s Edit Filter control to Audio Transients.
2. Do one of the following:
• With the Smart tool
, drag the transient marker handle (diamond) to the desired location.
• With the Move tool
, drag the transient marker handle (diamond) to the desired location.
To stretch transients
1. Set the track’s Edit Filter control to Audio Transients.
2. Do one of the following:
• With the Smart tool
, then drag the transient marker line to the desired location.
• With the Timing tool
, drag the transient marker line to the desired location. To stretch all
selected transients proportionally, hold down the CTRL key while you drag any selected
transient marker.
534
Tools
Using tools to perform common tasks
To promote transient markers
1. Set the track’s Edit Filter control to Audio Transients.
2. With the Freehand tool
, click the transient marker handle (diamond).
To disable transient markers
1. Set the track’s Edit Filter control to Audio Transients.
2. With the Mute tool
, click a transient marker handle (diamond) to disable a single transient
marker, or drag across transient markers to disable multiple transient markers.
To erase transient markers
1. Set the track’s Edit Filter control to Audio Transients.
2. With the Erase tool
, click the transient marker to erase a single transient marker, or drag
over transient markers to erase multiple transient markers.
Note: You can only erase user created transient markers.
To reset transients
1. Set the track’s Edit Filter control to Audio Transients.
2. With the Move tool
, double-click the transient marker.
To split an audio clip at transient markers
1. Set the track’s Edit Filter control to Audio Transients.
2. With the Split tool
, click the transient marker where you want to split the clip. Drag to split at
multiple transient markers.
To add transient
1. Set the track’s Edit Filter control to Audio Transients.
2. With the Freehand tool
, click on a clip where you want to add a new transient marker.
Tools
Using tools to perform common tasks
535
See:
“Working with audio clips” on page 515
“Working with MIDI clips” on page 520
“Working with MIDI notes” on page 525
“Working with automation envelopes” on page 529
“Working with AudioSnap transients” on page 534
“Tools” on page 441
See also:
“Comping” on page 391
536
Tools
Using tools to perform common tasks
Control Bar overview
Much of your time in SONAR is spent recording and listening to your project as it develops. The
Control Bar contains the most important tools and other pieces of information you will need to
record, edit and play back your project.
The Control Bar consists of several modules that each contain various related controls. You can rearrange and show/hide each individual module, which allows you to only show the functions you
need most often. By default, the Control Bar is docked at the top of SONAR’s screen, but can also
be undocked or docked at the bottom.
Figure 173. The Control Bar.
537
To show/hide the Control Bar
Do one of the following:
• On the Views menu, click Control Bar.
• Press C on your computer keyboard.
Control Bar modules
Figure 174. Control Bar modules.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
A. Screenset module B. Tools module C. Snap module D. Transport module E. Punch module F. Loop
module G. Select module H. Mix module I. ACT module J. Performance module K. Markers module L. Event
Inspector module M. Sync module N. Gobbler module
The Control Bar contains the following modules:
• Tools module. The Tools module lets you select a global tool and draw resolution. For details,
see “Tools module” on page 541.
• Snap module. The Snap module lets you configure Snap to Grid settings. For details, see
“Snap module” on page 544.
• Transport module. The Transport section contains standard controls for Record, Return to
Zero, Rewind, Stop, Play, and Fast Forward. For details, see “Transport module” on page 547.
• Loop module. The Loop module lets you configure loop settings. For details, see “Loop
module” on page 550.
• Mix module. The Mix module lets you configure Mute, Solo, Arm for recording, effects bypass
and automation playback/recording settings. For details, see “Mix module” on page 552.
• ACT module. The ACT module lets you configure how control surfaces interact with effect and
soft synth plug-ins. For details, see “ACT module” on page 554.
• Screenset module. The Screenset module lets you save and recall screenset presets (window
layouts). For details, see “Screenset module” on page 556.
• Performance module. The Performance module lets you monitor CPU, disk and memory
activity. For details, see “Performance module” on page 558.
• Punch module. The Punch module lets you configure punch record settings. For details, see
“Punch module” on page 560.
• Select module. The Select module lets you configure selection settings. For details, see
“Select module” on page 561.
• Markers module. The Markers module lets you navigate by markers. For details, see “Markers
module” on page 562.
• Event Inspector module. The Event Inspector module lets you modify selected clips and
538
Control Bar overview
M
N
events. For details, see “Event Inspector module” on page 564.
• Sync module. The Sync module lets you configure synchronization settings. For details, see
“Sync Module” on page 566.
• Gobbler module. The Gobbler module lets you back up and share projects via the cloud-based
Gobbler service. For details, see “Gobbler module” on page 568.
To show/hide modules
Do one of the following:
• To show/hide a specific module. Right-click the Control Bar and select <name> module.
• To hide a module. Right-click the module and select Hide Module.
• To show all modules. Right-click the Control Bar and select Show All.
Note: Depending on the video resolution, your computer monitor may not be wide enough to
display all Control Bar modules simultaneously. When you show a new module, other visible
modules get pushed to the right. If the right most module can not fit on screen, it will
automatically be hidden. Hidden modules have a “Offscreen” suffix in the Control Bar context
menu.
To re-arrange modules
Drag a module’s gripper to the desired location within the Control Bar.
Figure 175. Drag a module’s gripper to move the module.
A
A. Gripper
Control Bar overview
539
To dock/undock the Control Bar
Right-click the Control Bar and select one of the following commands:
• Dock Control Bar at Top. Select this option to dock the Control Bar above the Track view.
• Dock Control Bar at Bottom. Select this option to dock the Control Bar below the Track view.
• Undock Control Bar.
Select this option to undock the Control Bar.
Tip: You can click any blank area in the Control Bar and drag the Control Bar to the desired position.
See:
“Tools module” on page 541
“Snap module” on page 544
“Transport module” on page 547
“Loop module” on page 550
“Mix module” on page 552
“ACT module” on page 554
“Screenset module” on page 556
“Performance module” on page 558
“Punch module” on page 560
“Select module” on page 561
“Markers module” on page 562
“Event Inspector module” on page 564
“Sync Module” on page 566
“Gobbler module” on page 568
540
Control Bar overview
Tools module
The Tools module contains various tools that allow you to edit content in your projects. The current
tool applies to whichever editing view has focus.
Using menu buttons
Several buttons in the Tools module display a small triangle in the bottom right corner. The triangle
indicates that you can click and keep the mouse button pressed for a brief moment to access
additional tools or options. You can also right-click the button and choose an option on the pop-up
menu.
Figure 176. If a button displays a small triangle in the bottom right corner, click and keep the mouse button
pressed to access additional tools or options.
To show/hide the Tools module
Right-click the Control Bar and select Tools Module.
Figure 177. Global tools are accessed from the Tools module in the Control Bar.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
A. Smart tool B. Select tool C. Move tool D. Edit tools (Edit/Timing/Split) E. Draw tools (Freehand/Line/Sine/
Triangle/Square/Saw/Random) F. Erase tools (Erase/Mute) G. Draw resolution
The Tools module contains the following controls:
• Smart tool
. The Smart tool is the default tool in SONAR. The Smart tool is a multi-function
tool that combines functions from several other tools. For audio clips, automation and transients,
the Smart Tool is a combination of the Edit, Select and Move tools. For MIDI notes, the Smart Tool
is a combination of the Edit, Select, Move, Draw and Erase Tools. The function is determined by
where you click. For details, see “Smart tool” on page 456.
• Select tool
. The Select tool lets you select data. You can select a time range, or select
entire clips, MIDI notes, envelope nodes and transients. For details, see “Select tool” on page
464.
• Move tool
. The Move tool lets you move selected data. You can move entire clips, partial
Control Bar overview
541
clips, MIDI notes, envelope nodes, transient markers and clip tempo map markers. For details,
see “Move tool” on page 469.
• Edit tool
. The Edit tool lets you adjust data. You can slip-edit clips, adjust note start/end
times, adjust fades, raise/lower clip volume envelope, and raise/lower note velocity and
automation envelopes. For details, see “Edit tool” on page 473.
• Timing tool
. Select the Timing tool. The Timing tool lets you slip-stretch audio clips, dragquantize MIDI notes, and stretch audio using transient markers. For details, see “Timing tool” on
page 478.
• Split tool
. The Split tool lets you split clips, cut clips, split MIDI notes, split clips at
transients, and add envelope nodes. For details, see “Split tool” on page 482.
• Freehand tool
. The Freehand tool lets you draw MIDI notes and freehand automation
envelopes. You can also create and promote transient markers. For details, see “Freehand tool”
on page 486.
• Line Draw
. The Line tool lets you draw straight automation envelopes and “paint” MIDI
notes. For details, see “Line tool” on page 490.
• Sine tool
. The Sine Pattern tool lets you edit automation envelopes by drawing sine
shapes. For details, see “Sine tool” on page 492.
• Triangle tool
. The Triangle Pattern tool lets you edit automation envelopes by drawing
triangle shapes. For details, see “Triangle tool” on page 492.
• Square tool
. The Square Pattern tool lets you edit automation envelopes by drawing
square shapes. For details, see “Square tool” on page 492.
• Saw tool
. The Saw Pattern tool lets you edit automation envelopes by drawing triangle
shapes. For details, see “Saw tool” on page 492.
• Random tool
. The Random Pattern tool lets you edit automation envelopes by drawing
random shapes. For details, see “Random tool” on page 493.
• Erase tool
. The Erase tool lets you delete clips, partial clips, MIDI notes, automation
envelope nodes, and transient markers. For details, see “Erase tool” on page 495.
• Mute tool
. The Mute tool lets you mute clips, mute partial clips, mute MIDI notes, and
disable transient markers. For details, see “Mute tool” on page 499.
• Note value. The note duration that is used when drawing new Note events with the Smart tool
or Freehand tool. Click the button and keep the mouse button pressed for a brief moment to
542
Control Bar overview
access the note value menu. For details, see “Specifying note durations” on page 507.
Tip: You can quickly access the various tools from the Tools HUD by pressing T on your computer
keyboard.
See:
“Tools” on page 441
“Nudge” on page 366
“Zoom controls” on page 85
“Editing audio” on page 821
“Editing MIDI events and continuous controllers (CC)” on page 721
“Automation” on page 1101
“AudioSnap (Producer and Studio only)” on page 635
“Selecting clips” on page 350
“Moving and copying clips” on page 352
“Splitting and combining clips” on page 379
“Slip-editing (non-destructive editing)” on page 426
“Fades and crossfades” on page 430
“Clip muting and isolating (clip soloing)” on page 388
“Scrubbing” on page 836
See also:
“Snap module” on page 544
“Transport module” on page 547
“Loop module” on page 550
“Mix module” on page 552
“ACT module” on page 554
“Screenset module” on page 556
“Performance module” on page 558
“Punch module” on page 560
“Select module” on page 561
“Markers module” on page 562
“Event Inspector module” on page 564
“Sync Module” on page 566
“Gobbler module” on page 568
Control Bar overview
543
Snap module
SONAR lets you define a snap grid that makes it easier to arrange clips and note events, select time
ranges, and control envelope shape drawing. To use the snap grid, enable the Snap to Grid button
in the Snap module and set the grid resolution to an interval of musical time, such as a whole
note, half note, or quarter note; a unit of absolute time: a number of frames, seconds or samples; an
event; the start or end of a clip; a marker; or audio transients. The grid can use multiple resolutions
at the same time, such as a whole note, and audio transients. When the Snap to Grid button is
enabled, if you move or paste clips or markers, items will be snapped to the nearest point on the
snap grid.
Figure 178. Snap to Grid settings are available in the Snap module in the Control Bar.
A
B
D
C
E F
A. Snap on/off B. Snap To / Snap By C. Snap to landmarks D. Snap resolution (musical time or absolute
time) E. Triplet F. Dotted
The Snap module contains the following settings:
• Snap enable/disable
. Enable/disable snapping. When enabled, vertical grid lines that
correspond to the snap resolution are displayed in the Track view.
• Time resolution. Snap to the selected musical or absolute time resolution. Click and hold the
mouse button pressed to select a different duration from the pop-up menu. For absolute time
resolutions (samples, frames, seconds), type the desired number of units. When Smart Grid is
selected (the Snap to Grid button changes to
), the snap resolution is dynamically
determined by the horizontal zoom level, and the M:B:T time rulers in the Clips pane and Piano
Roll view are optimized to show relevant snap locations.
Note 1: To exit Smart Grid mode, clear the Smart Grid check mark. If you manually select a
new resolution while Smart Grid is enabled, the new settings only apply until the focused view's
zoom level changes.
Note 2: The Piano Roll view can use its own independent snap resolution. For details, see
“Piano Roll view snap resolution” on page 740.
544
Control Bar overview
• Triplet . Reduces the duration of the selected Musical time resolution by 2/3 of its original
duration. When Triplet is enabled, three note events fit in the space of two.
• Dotted . Increase the duration of the selected Musical time resolution by half of its original
value (150%).
• Snap To. Align data to the snap grid.
• Snap By.
Move data by the grid resolution.
• Landmark Events
. Snap to the selected landmarks, including markers, Now Time, clips,
audio transients, MIDI notes, and automation envelope nodes. To select the desired landmarks,
right-click the Snap to Grid button
to open the Preferences dialog, then select the desired
check boxes in the Landmarks section. SONAR will snap to landmarks on tracks/lanes that are
currently visible in the Clips pane.
Additional Snap to Grid settings
To access additional snap settings, go to Edit > Preferences > Customization - Snap to Grid (or
right-click the Snap to Grid button
).
The Snap section contains the following settings:
• Snap Intensity. Specify the magnetic strength when snapping, which determines how quickly
moved events are pulled towards the snap grid.
• Magnetic Test. Drag the event to test the current Snap Intensity setting.
• Snap to Nearest Audio Zero Crossings. Automatically snap edited audio clips to the nearest
zero crossing of the waveform (the point at which there is no volume) to minimize glitches that
can happen when waveforms are spliced together.
• Landmarks. Snap to the selected landmarks when the Events button is enabled in the Control
Bar’s Snap module:
• Markers.
Snap to any marker.
• Now Time. Snap to the current Now Time.
• Clips. Snap to the start or end of any clip.
• Audio Transients. Snap to transient markers in audio clips.
• MIDI Notes. Snap to note events in MIDI clips.
• Automation Nodes.
Snap to automation envelope nodes.
See:
“Defining and using the Snap Grid” on page 370
“Tools” on page 441
“Nudge” on page 366
Control Bar overview
545
See also:
“Tools module” on page 541
“Transport module” on page 547
“Loop module” on page 550
“Mix module” on page 552
“ACT module” on page 554
“Screenset module” on page 556
“Performance module” on page 558
“Punch module” on page 560
“Select module” on page 561
“Markers module” on page 562
“Event Inspector module” on page 564
“Sync Module” on page 566
“Gobbler module” on page 568
546
Control Bar overview
Transport module
The Transport module lets you control the transport and transport-related functions, such as Record
, Return to Zero
, Rewind
, Stop
, Play
, and Fast Forward
.
To show/hide the Transport module
Right-click the Control Bar and select Transport Module.
Figure 179. The Transport module.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
Q
R
S
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
A. Rewind B. Stop C. Play D. Pause E. Fast Forward F. Record G. Dropout indicator H. Current Now time
(this space is also used for progress bars and “Waiting for sync” messages) I. Return to zero
(RTZ) J. Position K. Jump to project end L. Audio Engine on/off M. Reset/Panic N. Sample rate and bit
depth O. Tempo P. Meter Q. Metronome during record R. Metronome during playback S. Click to open
metronome settings
The Transport module contains the following controls:
• Rewind
.
Gradually rewind the project.
• Stop
. Stop playback.
• Play
. Start/stop playback.
• Pause
. Pause/resume playback.
• Fast Forward
.
Gradually fast forward the project.
• Record
. Start recording (requires at least one track to be armed for recording). Right-click
to access global record options. Click and keep the mouse button pressed for a brief moment to
choose the desired record mode. The Record button indicates the current record mode (for
details, see “Recording modes” on page 278):
• Comping
. When recording, previously recorded material on the track is not heard.
When a recording is done, the newly recorded material is heard and all other takes are timemuted for the duration of the new material.
Control Bar overview
547
• Overwrite
. The new material replaces (overwrites) any existing material. This means
that portions of existing clips may be “wiped clean” to make room for newly recorded material.
While recording, you will not be able to hear material from existing clips.
• Sound on Sound
. The new material is merged with any existing material. This means
that any existing clips on the track are left unchanged and all newly recorded material is
stored in new clips. While recording, you will be able to hear material from existing clips.
• Step Record
308.
• RTZ
.
Open the Step Record window. For details, see “Step recording” on page
. Rewind to the start of the project.
• Progress Bar
• Go to End
.
.
Current position in the project. Drag to skip around in the project.
Skip to the end of the project.
• Time Display. The time display section shows useful information about the current project,
including the Now time, sample rate and bit depth, tempo and meter. The following information is
shown:
• Current Now Time. The Now time shows your current location in the project. For details,
see “The Now time and how to use it” on page 182. Click the time display to toggle between
the following time formats:
• MBT. Display time as Measure:Beat:Tick.
• HMSF. Display time as Hour:Minute:Second:Frame. This format is also referred to as
SMPTE time.
• Milliseconds. Display time in milliseconds.
• Samples. Display time in samples.
• Dropout Indicator
. Appears whenever your project requires more resources than your
CPU, main memory, and disk can supply. For details, see “Dropouts and other audio
problems” on page 1311.
• Audio Engine on/off
. Enable/disable the audio engine. The Audio Engine button lights
up if the audio engine stops running. To restart the audio engine, click the Audio Engine
button.
• Reset / Panic (Reset MIDI and Audio)
flashes if a MIDI note is stuck.
.
Reset any stuck MIDI notes. The Reset button
• Sample Rate / Bit Depth. The project’s sample rate and recording bit depth.
• Current Tempo.
tempo.
The current tempo at the Now time. Double-click to change the current
• Current Meter. The number of beats per measure and the note value of each beat at the
current Now time. Click to change the meter. For details, see “Setting the Meter and Key
548
Control Bar overview
signatures” on page 270.
The Time Display section also shows the following information:
• Horizontal progress bar when SONAR is performing certain operations.
• “Waiting for Sync” message when synchronizing SONAR to an external clock source. When
synchronized to an external clock source, the Time Display shows both the current Now time
and the SMPTE source time.
Figure 180. The display shows the current Now time, a progress bar or “Waiting for sync” message.
A
B
C
A. Now time B. Progress bar C. “Waiting for sync” message
• Metronome Record on/off
access Metronome settings.
. Enable/disable the metronome during recording. Right-click to
• Metronome Playback on/off
access Metronome settings.
• Metronome settings
. Enable/disable the metronome during playback. Right-click to
. Click the metronome icon to open the metronome preferences.
See:
“The Now time and how to use it” on page 182
“Controlling playback” on page 181
“Audition (selection playback)” on page 389
“Changing tempos” on page 418
“Setting the Meter and Key signatures” on page 270
“The Audio Engine button” on page 302
“Handling stuck notes” on page 193
“Dropouts and other audio problems” on page 1311
“Setting the audio sampling rate and bit depth” on page 274
“Step recording” on page 308
“Setting the Metronome and Tempo settings” on page 272
Control Bar overview
549
See also:
“Tools module” on page 541
“Snap module” on page 544
“Loop module” on page 550
“Mix module” on page 552
“ACT module” on page 554
“Screenset module” on page 556
“Performance module” on page 558
“Punch module” on page 560
“Select module” on page 561
“Markers module” on page 562
“Event Inspector module” on page 564
“Sync Module” on page 566
“Gobbler module” on page 568
Loop module
The Loop module lets you control loop settings.
To show/hide the Loop module
Right-click the Control Bar and select Loop Module.
Figure 181. The Loop module.
A
C
B
D
A. Loop On/Off B. Set Loop Time to Select C. Loop Start Time D. Loop End Time
The Loop module contains the following controls:
• Loop on/off
.
Enable/disable playback looping.
• Set Loop Points to Selection
. Set the Loop Start time to the start (From) time of the
selection, and the Loop End time to the end (Thru) time of the selection.
• Loop Start Time. The current Loop Start time. Click to modify.
550
Control Bar overview
• Loop End Time.
The current Loop End time. Click to modify.
Tip: If a numeric time field has focus, you can press the G key to access a list of marker positions.
See:
“Loop recording” on page 303
“Looping” on page 194
See also:
“Tools module” on page 541
“Snap module” on page 544
“Transport module” on page 547
“Mix module” on page 552
“ACT module” on page 554
“Screenset module” on page 556
“Performance module” on page 558
“Punch module” on page 560
“Select module” on page 561
“Markers module” on page 562
“Event Inspector module” on page 564
“Sync Module” on page 566
“Gobbler module” on page 568
Control Bar overview
551
Mix module
The Mix module lets you configure various playback settings. You can quickly mute/unmute, solo/
unsolo and arm/disarm all tracks. You can also configure automation settings and specify the solo
behavior.
To show/hide the Mix module
Right-click the Control Bar and select Mix Module.
Figure 182. The Mix module.
A
B
C
D
E
K
F
G H
I
J
A. Mute B. Solo C. Arm D. Input Echo E. Live Input PDC Override F. Bypass All Effects G. Exclusive
Solo H. Dim Solo I. Automation Read (playback) J. Automation Write (recording) K. Offset mode
The Mix module contains the following controls:
• Mute / Unmute All Tracks
track is muted.
. Click to mute/unmute all tracks. The button is lit if at least one
• Solo / Unsolo All Tracks
track is soloed.
. Click to solo/unsolo all tracks. The button is lit if at least one
• Dim Solo enable/disable . Enable/disable Dim Solo mode. Dim Solo is a mode in which
non-soloed audio tracks/buses are still audible but at a reduced level. For details, see “Dim
Solo mode” on page 205.
• Exclusive Solo enable/disable . Enable/disable Exclusive Solo mode. With Exclusive
Solo mode, you can only solo one track and one bus at a time. For details, see “Exclusive
Solo mode” on page 206.
• Arm / Disarm All Tracks
is armed.
. Click to arm/disarm all tracks. The button is lit if at least one track
• Input Echo On/Off All Tracks
• Bypass all Effects
on page 920.
552
. Enable/disable Input Monitoring on all tracks.
. Bypass all effects globally. For details, see “Bypassing effects globally”
Control Bar overview
• Live Input PDC Override
. Enable/disable delay compensation on live tracks, thereby
removing the latency during playback and recording of such tracks. Because it's a toggle, you can
quickly turn it on to complete your tracking at low latency, and turn it off when finished to hear the
track compensated as normal. For details, see “Live Input PDC override” on page 300.
• Allow Automation Writing
. Globally enable/disable the ability to write automation.
• Global Automation Playback
. Globally enable/disable all automation playback.
• Offset mode . Enable/disable Offset mode. In Offset mode, you “offset” the current
automation in a track using a parameter’s controls. For details, see “Envelope mode and Offset
mode” on page 1131.
See:
“Silencing tracks” on page 203
“To mute or solo a bus” on page 893
“Muting and soloing soft synth tracks” on page 863
“Soloing tracks” on page 204
“Dim Solo mode” on page 205
“Exclusive Solo mode” on page 206
“Arming tracks for recording” on page 281
“Input monitoring” on page 296
“To globally bypass all effects in a project” on page 920
“To globally bypass all track, bus or clip effects” on page 921
“Live Input PDC override” on page 300
“Automation Read and Automation Write buttons” on page 1108
“Recording individual fader or knob movements” on page 1109
“Creating and editing automation envelopes” on page 1119
“Automating individual effects parameters” on page 1136
“Recording automation data from an external controller” on page 1138
See also:
“Tools module” on page 541
“Snap module” on page 544
“Transport module” on page 547
“Loop module” on page 550
“ACT module” on page 554
Control Bar overview
553
“Screenset module” on page 556
“Performance module” on page 558
“Punch module” on page 560
“Select module” on page 561
“Markers module” on page 562
“Event Inspector module” on page 564
“Sync Module” on page 566
“Gobbler module” on page 568
ACT module
Active Controller Technology (ACT) allows you to use a control surface or MIDI controller to control
the plug-in effect or soft synth that has focus. SONAR communicates with control surfaces via
special control surface plug-ins (see “External devices” on page 1323). The ACT module lets you
configure ACT settings for a specific control surface plug-in.
To show/hide the ACT module
Right-click the Control Bar and select ACT Module.
Figure 183. The ACT module.
A
B
C
D
E
A. Controller/surface name B. Status display C. Open property page D. ACT Learn E. ACT Lock
The ACT module contains the following controls:
• Controller / Surface Name.
Select the control surface plug-in to control.
• Controller / Surface Status Display.
• Open Control Surface Plug-in
plug-in.
Status display for the selected control surface plug-in.
. Open the property page for the selected control surface
• ACT Learn
. Enable/disable ACT Learn. ACT Learn allows you to assign a specific effect/
synth parameter to a specific hardware control on your control surface. For more information, see
“To edit the default ACT mappings” on page 1347.
• ACT Lock
. Lock/unlock the current ACT context (the effect/synth that has focus). For more
information, see “ACT” on page 1346.
554
Control Bar overview
See:
“ACT” on page 1346
See also:
“Tools module” on page 541
“Snap module” on page 544
“Transport module” on page 547
“Loop module” on page 550
“Mix module” on page 552
“Screenset module” on page 556
“Performance module” on page 558
“Punch module” on page 560
“Select module” on page 561
“Markers module” on page 562
“Event Inspector module” on page 564
“Sync Module” on page 566
“Gobbler module” on page 568
Control Bar overview
555
Screenset module
A screenset is a snapshot of the current layout of various views and windows in a project, including
which windows are open, their size, position, zoom level and whether they are docked or floating.
You can create up to 10 screensets per project and freely switch between screensets at any time.
Screensets can be selected and edited from the Screenset module in the Control Bar, or with
number keys 1-0 on your computer keyboard.
To show/hide the Screenset module
Right-click the Control Bar and select Screenset Module.
Figure 184. The Screenset module.
A
B
A. Screenset list B. Screenset buttons 1-10
The Screenset module in the Control Bar contains the following controls:
• Screenset menu. The Screenset menu lets you select, revert, lock, rename, duplicate and
import screensets. The name of the current screenset is shown in the menu. The menu contains
the following commands:
• 1 [screenset 1 name] - 0 [screenset 10 name]. Select screenset 1 through 10.
• Revert Current Screenset. Revert the current screenset to its last saved state before the
project was saved. See “To revert the current screenset to its last saved state” on page 1158.
• Lock/Unlock Current Screenset. Lock the current screenset to prevent any modifications.
See “To prevent the current screenset from being modified” on page 1157.
• Rename Current Screenset. Rename the current screenset. See “To name or rename the
current screenset” on page 1157.
• Duplicate Current Screenset to. Copy the current screenset to another screenset location
(1 to 0). Select the target screenset location from the submenu. The selected target screenset
becomes the current screenset. See “To duplicate the current screenset” on page 1158.
• 1 [screenset 1 name] - 0 [screenset 10 name]. Duplicate the current screenset to
screenset 1 through 10.
• Import Screensets from <source file name>.cwp. Import screensets from another open
project. Any locked screensets in the current project are not overwritten. See “To import
screensets from another project” on page 1157.
• 1-10 buttons
- . Select screensets 1 through 10. You can also press the 1-0 keys on the
computer keyboard to select screensets 1 through 10. The active screenset button is highlighted.
556
Control Bar overview
See:
“Screensets” on page 1154
See also:
“Tools module” on page 541
“Snap module” on page 544
“Transport module” on page 547
“Loop module” on page 550
“Mix module” on page 552
“ACT module” on page 554
“Performance module” on page 558
“Punch module” on page 560
“Select module” on page 561
“Markers module” on page 562
“Event Inspector module” on page 564
“Sync Module” on page 566
“Gobbler module” on page 568
Control Bar overview
557
Performance module
The Performance module lets you monitor your computer’s performance, including CPU, disk and
memory activity.
To show/hide the Performance module
Right-click the Control Bar and select Performance Module.
Figure 185. The Performance module.
B
A
C
D
A. CPU meters (one per core) B. Disk Activity indicator C. Disk Space meter D. Memory Usage meter
The Performance module contains the following controls:
• CPU meters. Displays the time it takes to process a buffer full of audio data as a percentage of
the maximum time available to process that data and maintain uninterrupted playback. There is
one CPU meter for each core in your computer, up to 32 cores. There is some tolerance built into
the meter, so it is possible that it will exceed 100% at times (more so during recording than
playback).
Note: The width of the Performance module depends on the number of CPU cores available.
32 cores
4 cores
• Disk Activity indicator . Measures how much of the available time SONAR is using to
perform input/output functions on your hard disk. The size of your setup’s I/O buffer size (listed
under File System in Edit > Preferences > Audio - Sync and Caching) determines how much
time is allowed to perform disk operations and maintain uninterrupted playback. When SONAR
performs disk operations, the Disk Activity indicator changes color from yellow to red to indicate
the time SONAR is taking to complete each cycle of disk input/output. A red icon indicates very
high data activity.
• Disk Space meter. Shows the amount of available space on the drive where your wave data
directory is located. The tooltip shows the actual remaining disk space on your audio disk.
558
Control Bar overview
• Memory Usage (RAM) meter. Shows the total memory (RAM) usage by your computer, not just
by SONAR.
Note: If you experience a dropout or your CPU or Disk meters are reading high, there are steps
you can take to improve your audio performance. For more information, see “Audio dropouts or
crashes during playback” on page 1368.
See:
“CPU meter/Disk meter/Dropout indicator” on page 1307
“Improving audio performance” on page 1293
“Getting the most out of your computer” on page 1302
“Reduce GUI updates to improve playback performance” on page 1309
“Improving recording performance” on page 1319
See also:
“Tools module” on page 541
“Snap module” on page 544
“Transport module” on page 547
“Loop module” on page 550
“Mix module” on page 552
“ACT module” on page 554
“Screenset module” on page 556
“Punch module” on page 560
“Select module” on page 561
“Markers module” on page 562
“Event Inspector module” on page 564
“Sync Module” on page 566
“Gobbler module” on page 568
Control Bar overview
559
Punch module
The Punch module lets you control auto-punch settings.
To show/hide the Punch module
Right-click the Control Bar and select Punch module.
Figure 186. The Punch module.
A
C
B
D
A. Auto-Punch On/Off B. Set Punch Time to Select C. Punch In Time D. Punch Out Time
The Punch module contains the following controls:
• Auto-Punch on/off
. Enable/disable punch recording. Toggles punch recording on/off.
• Set Punch Time to Selection
. Set the Punch In time to the start (From) time of the
selection, and the Punch Out time to the end (Thru) time of the selection.
• Punch In Time. The current Punch In time. Click to modify.
• Punch Out Time. The current Punch Out time. Click to modify.
Tip: If a numeric time field has focus, you can press G to access a list of marker positions.
See:
“Punch recording” on page 305
See also:
“Tools module” on page 541
“Snap module” on page 544
“Transport module” on page 547
“Loop module” on page 550
“Mix module” on page 552
“ACT module” on page 554
“Screenset module” on page 556
560
Control Bar overview
“Performance module” on page 558
“Select module” on page 561
“Markers module” on page 562
“Event Inspector module” on page 564
“Sync Module” on page 566
“Gobbler module” on page 568
Select module
The Select module lets you control the selection From and Thru times.
To show/hide the Select module
Right-click the Control Bar and select Select module.
Figure 187. The Select module.
A
C
B
D
A. Set Select From = Now B. Set Select Thru = Now C. Select From Time D. Select Thru Time
The Select module contains the following controls:
• Set Selection From = Now
extends.
. Specify the Now time as the time from which a selection
• Set Selection Thru = Now
extends.
. Specify the Now time as the time through which a selection
• Select From Time. The current From time. Click to modify.
• Select Thru Time.
The current Thru time. Click to modify.
Tip: If a numeric time field has focus, you can press G to access a list of marker positions.
See:
“Selecting clips” on page 350
“Selecting and editing events” on page 757
Control Bar overview
561
See also:
“Tools module” on page 541
“Snap module” on page 544
“Transport module” on page 547
“Loop module” on page 550
“Mix module” on page 552
“ACT module” on page 554
“Screenset module” on page 556
“Performance module” on page 558
“Punch module” on page 560
“Markers module” on page 562
“Event Inspector module” on page 564
“Sync Module” on page 566
“Gobbler module” on page 568
Markers module
The Markers module lets you navigate by markers and insert new markers.
To show/hide the Markers module
Right-click the Control Bar and select Markers Module.
Figure 188. The Markers module.
A
B
C
D
A. Jump to previous marker B. Jump to next marker C. Insert marker D. Current marker
The Markers module contains the following controls:
• Previous Marker
• Next Marker
• Insert Marker
.
Jump to the previous marker.
. Jump to the next marker.
.
Insert a new marker.
• Current Marker Display. This list shows the current marker and lets you instantly jump to any
marker in the project.
562
Control Bar overview
See:
“Creating and using markers” on page 372
See also:
“Tools module” on page 541
“Snap module” on page 544
“Transport module” on page 547
“Loop module” on page 550
“Mix module” on page 552
“ACT module” on page 554
“Screenset module” on page 556
“Performance module” on page 558
“Punch module” on page 560
“Select module” on page 561
“Event Inspector module” on page 564
“Sync Module” on page 566
“Gobbler module” on page 568
Control Bar overview
563
Event Inspector module
The Event Inspector module lets you view and modify settings for selected clips and MIDI Note
events. If you select multiple notes, the Event Inspector module displays the note value if all
selected note values are the same. If the note values are different, the Event Inspector does not
display anything.
To show/hide the Event Inspector module
Right-click the Control Bar and select Event Inspector Module.
Figure 189. The Event Inspector module.
A
C
B
D
E
A. Time B. Duration C. Pitch D. Velocity E. Channel
The Event Inspector module contains the following controls:
• Time. Start time of the selected event(s), specified as a valid M:B:T time value. Separate values
with a colon or a space. For example, measure 2, Beat 3, Tick 720 would be written as 2:3:720.
• Duration. Duration of the selected event(s), specified as a PPQ value. You can also specify a
percentage of the current duration value. For example, to double the duration, type 200% and
press ENTER.
• Pitch. Pitch of the selected event(s), specified as note names (C0 through G10) or note
numbers (0 through 127). You can also use a modifier to raise or lower the value by a number of
half-steps. To raise the pitch by 2 half-steps, type +2 and press ENTER. To lower the pitch by 2
half-steps, type -2 and press ENTER.
• Vel. Velocity value of the selected event(s), specified as a value between 0 and 127. You can
also use a modifier to raise or lower the current velocity value (+/- 0 through 127). You can also
specify a percentage of the current velocity value. For example, to double the velocity, type 200%
and press ENTER.
• Channel. MIDI channel assigned to the selected events, specified as a value between 1
through 16.
564
Control Bar overview
See also:
“Tools module” on page 541
“Snap module” on page 544
“Transport module” on page 547
“Loop module” on page 550
“Mix module” on page 552
“ACT module” on page 554
“Screenset module” on page 556
“Performance module” on page 558
“Punch module” on page 560
“Select module” on page 561
“Markers module” on page 562
“Sync Module” on page 566
“Gobbler module” on page 568
Control Bar overview
565
Sync Module
The Sync module lets you configure synchronization settings.
To show/hide the Sync module
Right-click the Control Bar and select Sync Module.
Figure 190. The Sync module.
A
B
C
D
E
A. SMPTE/MTC format B. Incoming timecode C. Sync type D. Transmit MIDI Sync E. Transmit MTC Sync
The Sync module contains the following controls:
• SMPTE/MTC format. Select the time code format. The following frame rates are supported:
• 23.976 frames per second (FPS).
Typically used with H.264/MPEG-4 AVC video.
• 24 frames per second (FPS). Used for theatrical film worldwide. Any film in North America
or Japan uses this setting.
• 25 FPS. Used for PAL/SECAM video and some film in countries that use 50 Hz wall
electricity. This is the setting to use when synchronizing to any European video format.
• 29.97 FPS Drop. NTSC broadcast and long format video in North America and Japan. This
setting synchronizes the video perfectly with SONAR, but the sequencer position displayed in
the Now Time and Big Time displays will gradually drift and become incorrect over long
periods of time. The audio and MIDI synchronization to the external device will not be affected
by this discrepancy.
• 29.97 FPS Non Drop. NTSC non-broadcast and short length video in North America and
Japan. Used for some music projects. This setting synchronizes the video perfectly with
SONAR, but the sequencer position displayed in the Now Time and Big Time displays will
gradually drift and become incorrect over long periods of time. The audio and MIDI
synchronization to the external device will not be affected by this discrepancy.
• 30 FPS Drop. Not a standard type of timecode, used rarely for speed correction and transfer
problems in tape based systems.
• 30 FPS Non Drop. Most music projects and some film in North America. This is the best
choice for any music project and should be used unless the situation dictates otherwise.
• Incoming timecode. Shows the current time of incoming time code when synchronizing to an
external device.
566
Control Bar overview
• Sync type.
Select the sync type. The following sync types are supported:
• Internal Sync
• MIDI Sync
.
Timing is determined by the clock on the computer motherboard.
. Timing is determined by the clock on an external MIDI device.
• SMPTE/MTC Sync
. Timing is determined by a time code signal (in SMPTE or some
other format) recorded on some external medium or generated and sent by SONAR.
• Audio Sync
. Timing is determined by the clock on the computer’s audio interface.
• Transmit MIDI Sync
. Transmit MIDI Sync to external MIDI devices, such as drum
machines, stand-alone MIDI hardware sequencers, and sequencers built into MIDI keyboards
(only available when using the Internal or Audio clock). SONAR sends messages to all other
devices to start and stop playback and to keep all the devices in sync. SONAR can send MIDI
Sync on multiple MIDI output ports. For details, see “MIDI synchronization” on page 1270.
• Transmit MTC Sync
. Transmit MIDI Time Code (MTC) to external devices that can receive
MTC. SMPTE/MTC is a position and timing reference that indicates the current location in the
project and how quickly the project should be playing. SMPTE/MTC time code labels the position
in a project in hours, minutes, seconds, and frames. The speed of playback is indicated by a
frame rate. SONAR can send MTC on multiple output ports simultaneously. For details, see
“SMPTE/MIDI time code synchronization” on page 1274.
See:
“Synchronizing your gear” on page 1265
“MIDI synchronization” on page 1270
“SMPTE/MIDI time code synchronization” on page 1274
“Audio - Sync and Caching (Advanced)” on page 1793
See also:
“Tools module” on page 541
“Snap module” on page 544
“Transport module” on page 547
“Loop module” on page 550
“Mix module” on page 552
“ACT module” on page 554
“Screenset module” on page 556
“Performance module” on page 558
“Punch module” on page 560
“Select module” on page 561
“Markers module” on page 562
“Event Inspector module” on page 564
“Gobbler module” on page 568
Control Bar overview
567
Gobbler module
The Gobbler module lets you back up and share projects on the cloud-based Gobbler service.
To show/hide the Gobbler module
Right-click the Control Bar and select Gobbler Module.
Figure 191. The Gobbler module.
A
B
C
D
E
A. Connect to Gobbler B. Auto Backup current project C. Storage indicator D. Send project or
files E. Notifications from Gobbler
The Gobbler module contains the following controls:
• Connect to Gobbler
. Connect to the Gobbler cloud based service. Click again to
disconnect from Gobbler.
• Auto Backup
. Initiate an automated backup of the current project, unless the project has
already been backed up. This setting is per project. When Auto Backup is enabled, Gobbler will
continuously back up your project as you work. However, Gobbler is smart, so it won’t run any
CPU related tasks while you are working in SONAR. The color of the button indicates its state:
• Blue
• Yellow
: The project is presently on auto-backup.
: The project is already backed up, but paused (not active).
• Storage indicator. Shows the available remaining storage in your Gobbler account. Shows
Offline if Gobbler is not enabled.
• Send Project Using Gobbler
. Draft a message and send the current project to another
Gobbler user. SONAR will prompt you to save the project if it has been changed since the last
save. The Gobbler service will alert the recipients and grant them access to the files.
• Notifications from Gobbler
. This button lights up if another Gobbler user sends files to
you. Click the button to launch Gobbler and view messages.
568
Control Bar overview
See:
“Sharing and backing up your projects on Gobbler” on page 1089
See also:
“Tools module” on page 541
“Snap module” on page 544
“Transport module” on page 547
“Loop module” on page 550
“Mix module” on page 552
“ACT module” on page 554
“Screenset module” on page 556
“Performance module” on page 558
“Punch module” on page 560
“Select module” on page 561
“Markers module” on page 562
“Event Inspector module” on page 564
“Sync Module” on page 566
“Gobbler module” on page 568
Control Bar overview
569
570
Control Bar overview
Inspectors
When working on a project, you will frequently need to access track and clip parameters and mix
controls. The Track Inspector and Properties Inspector provide easy access to relevant settings for
the selected track(s) or clip(s).
Figure 192. Use the Track Inspector and Properties Inspector to configure track and clip settings.
A
B
A. Properties Inspector B. Track Inspector
The Inspector pane appears to the left of the Track view, but can also be moved to the right side.
There are three separate inspectors:
• Track Inspector. The Track Inspector shows mix settings for the current track, bus, or main,
and is essentially identical to a channel strip in the Console view. Advanced MIDI settings are also
available for MIDI tracks and Instrument tracks. For details, see “Track Inspector overview” on
page 576.
• Properties Inspector. The Properties Inspector shows properties for the selected clip(s),
track(s), or bus(es). For details, see “Properties Inspector overview” on page 592. The Properties
Inspector has several modes:
571
• Clip. The Clip Properties Inspector displays settings for the currently selected clip(s). For
details, see “Properties Inspector - Clip Properties” on page 594.
• Track. The Track Properties Inspector lets you type a track name, specify the automation
write mode and time base, specify an audio track’s AudioSnap render modes, specify the
default clip colors, and enter a text description. For details, see “Properties Inspector - Track
Properties” on page 600.
• Bus. The Bus Properties Inspector lets you type a bus name, specify the automation write
mode and time base, and enter a text description. For details, see “Properties Inspector - Bus
Properties” on page 603.
Note: Settings in the inspectors are non-destructive, and therefore do not destructively process
data in any way. Feel free to experiment with different settings without worrying that changes
are permanent.
• ProChannel (Producer only). ProChannel combines compression, equalization, and tube
saturation modeling in one convenient processor. ProChannel is available on each audio track,
Instrument track and bus. For details, see “ProChannel (Producer and Studio only)” on page 999.
Note: Due to technical limitations of the VST plug-in format, it is not possible to show more than
one instance of a ProChannel module. As a result, the same ProChannel instance can not be
displayed in the Inspector and Console view at the same time. If you open ProChannel in the
Inspector, the same ProChannel will close in the Console view, and vice versa.
572
Inspectors
Figure 193. The Track Inspector extends the full height of the Inspector pane, while the Properties Inspector is
shown in the top half when visible.
A
B
C
D
H
E
F
G
I
A. Dock/undock Inspector B. Show/hide Clip Properties Inspector C. Show/hide Track Properties
Inspector D. Show/hide ProChannel E. Display area for Properties Inspector F. Display area for Track
Inspectors G. Show/hide/configure Track Inspector modules H. Section header bars (click to show
controls) I. Show audio output or MIDI settings (Instrument tracks only)
Inspectors
573
To show/hide the Inspector pane
Do one of the following:
• On the Views menu, click Inspector.
• Press I on your computer keyboard.
• Click the Docking Options button in the top right corner of the Inspector pane and select
Collapse.
To expand/collapse the Inspector pane
When the Inspector is docked, do one of the following:
• Click the Expand/Collapse button at the top of the Inspector pane.
• Press I on your computer keyboard.
Figure 194. Use the Expand/collapse button to expand/collapse the Inspector.
A
Expanded
A. Expand/Collapse
574
Inspectors
Collapsed
To dock/undock the Inspector
Do one of the following:
• To dock the Inspector on the right side.
Right.
Click the Docking Options button and select Dock
• To dock the Inspector on the left side. Click the Docking Options button and select Dock
Left.
• To undock the Inspector. Click the Docking Options button and select Undock, or click to the
left of the Dock/Undock button and drag the Inspector to the desired location.
Tip: You can click any blank space at the top of the Inspector pane and drag the Inspector to the
desired position.
Figure 195. Use the Dock/Undock and Docking Options controls to change the position of the Inspector.
A B
A. Dock/Undock B. Docking Options
To enter values in inspectors
Do one of the following:
• Type a value in the text box and press ENTER.
• Drag the slider or use the mouse wheel.
• Select/clear the check box.
• Click the arrow buttons in the inspector to increase or decrease the value.
• Click the text box and then use the UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW keys to increase or
decrease the value.
• Select a value from the drop-down menu associated with the text box.
• Put focus on a slider or knob, press F2, then a value in the text box and press ENTER.
Inspectors
575
To edit multiple tracks/clips simultaneously
You can use the Track Properties and Clip Properties inspectors to modify multiple selected tracks
or clips simultaneously. The following rules apply when modifying multiple tracks/clips:
• If the selected tracks or clips share the same value for a parameter, that parameter will display
normally.
• If the selected tracks or clips have different values for a parameter, that parameter will display as
(Multi).
• If the selected Tracks or Clips are of a different type and it would not be appropriate or possible to
modify a parameter, that parameter will be unavailable.
See:
“Track Inspector overview” on page 576
“Properties Inspector overview” on page 592:
“Properties Inspector - Clip Properties” on page 594
“Properties Inspector - Track Properties” on page 600
“Properties Inspector - Bus Properties” on page 603
Track Inspector overview
The Track Inspector provides mixing controls for the currently selected audio track, MIDI track,
Instrument track, bus or main. The Track Inspector is essentially identical to a channel strip in the
Console view. Any changes you make in the Track Inspector are reflected in the corresponding
Console view channel strip, and vice versa. The Track Inspector modules can be shown/hidden
independently from the corresponding Console view modules.
The Track Inspector is divided in two. The left strip shows mix controls for the current track/bus/
main. The right strip varies depending on the current track type, as shown in the following table.
Current track type
Left strip
Right strip
Audio
Selected audio track
Output of selected track or send
MIDI
Selected MIDI track
Arpeggiator, Input Quantize, Snap to Scale settings,
MIDI chorus, MIDI reverb, Bank Select Method,
Key+ and Time+ for selected MIDI track
Instrument
Selected Instrument track
Audio tab: Output of selected track or send
MIDI tab: Arpeggiator, Input Quantize and Snap to
Scale settings for selected Instrument track
Table 114.
576
Track inspector controls
Inspectors
Track Inspector overview
Current track type
Left strip
Right strip
Bus
Selected bus
Output of selected bus or send
Main
Selected main
Blank
Table 114.
Track inspector controls (Continued)
Showing both the current track and its output destination side-by-side makes it fast and easy to
configure the desired audio routing.
Figure 196. The content displayed in the Track Inspector depends on the current track type.
Audio track
A
B
MIDI track and Instrument
track (MIDI tab)
C
D
Instrument track
(Audio tab)
E
F
Bus
G
Main
H
I
J
A. Current audio track B. Output of current audio track C. Current MIDI track or Instrument track D. Advanced
MIDI settings for current MIDI track or Instrument track (MIDI tab) E. Current Instrument track F. Output of
current Instrument track (Audio tab) G. Selected bus H. Output of selected bus I. Selected main J. The right
strip is blank when showing mains
Inspectors
Track Inspector overview
577
Note: When the current track is an Instrument track, you can show either audio output controls
or advanced MIDI settings in the right strip by selecting the Audio tab or MIDI tab at the bottom
of the Track Inspector.
To show a track/bus/main in the Track Inspector
Do one of the following:
• Click the desired track, bus or main in the Track view or Console view.
• Click the Track Name control in the Track Inspector to select any available track, bus or main.
To lock the Track Inspector to a specific track or bus
Be default, the Track Inspector dynamically updates to show the current track. However, you can
choose to always show a specific track or bus regardless of which track is current.
1. Click the track or bus you want to show in the Track Inspector.
2. Click the Track Name control in the Track Inspector and select Lock the current track or bus
from the drop-down menu.
To unlock the track or bus, select Lock the current track or bus from the menu again.
See:
“Track Inspector controls” on page 579:
“Audio track controls” on page 583
“Bus controls” on page 584
“MIDI track and Instrument track controls” on page 585
“Main controls” on page 590
“Properties Inspector overview” on page 592
578
Inspectors
Track Inspector overview
“Inspectors” on page 571
Track Inspector controls
The controls in the Track Inspector vary depending on the current track type.
Control
Description
Audio MIDI
track track
Instrument
Bus
track
Main
Clip
Show/hide the Clip Properties Inspector.
--
--
--
--
--
Track
Show/hide the Track Properties Inspector.
--
--
--
--
--
Dock/Undock
Dock/undock the Inspector pane.
--
--
--
--
--
Docking
Options
The Docking Options menu lets you dock/ -undock/float/collapse the Inspector pane.
--
--
--
--
Gain
Pre-fader input gain for fine tuning a track’s
volume or input level to a bus.
x
Velocity offset The change in velocity (volume) that will be
applied to notes in the track on playback;
ranges from –127 to +127.
x
x
Input pan
Sets the pan of the audio data sent to the
bus.
ProChannel
(Producer
only)
ProChannel is an extended channel strip
that provides high-quality Compressor,
Equalizer, and Tube saturation processing
for each channel. See “ProChannel
(Producer and Studio only)” on page 999.
Effects bin
The patch point for a track’s plug-ins or soft x
synths.
Send Enable
Activates a send module, which sends a
copy of the track signal to a bus.
Send Level
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Controls volume of audio data sent by the
send module.
x
x
x
Send Pan
Adjusts the send pan setting.
x
x
x
Send Pre/
Post switch
Pre (pre-fader) means that the Send signal
goes to the bus prior to the track’s volume
fader; post means the Send signal goes to
the bus after the volume fader.
x
x
x
Send
destination
Displays name of bus that the Send is
sending data to.
x
x
x
Channel
The MIDI channel through which the notes
will be played.
Table 115.
x
x
x
x
Track Inspector controls
Inspectors
Track Inspector overview
579
Audio MIDI
track track
Instrument
Bus
track
Control
Description
Bank
The set of patch names available for the
track.
x
x
Patch
The instrument sound that will be used for
playback.
x
x
Phase Invert
A switch that inverts the phase of the track. x
Mono/Stereo
A switch that determines whether a track’s x
signal enters an effect or chain of effects as
mono or stereo, regardless of the nature of
the track.
Read
Automation
Enable/disable automation playback.
x
x
x
x
Write
Automation
Enable/disable automation writing.
x
x
x
x
Mute
When enabled, mutes the track.
x
x
x
x
x
Main
x
x
Solo
When enabled, solos the track.
x
x
x
Arm for
recording
When enabled, arms the track for audio
recording.
x
x
x
Input echo
Turns input monitoring on or off.
x
x
x
Waveform
Preview
Display the waveform of the audio that’s
flowing through the bus.
Pan
The stereo distribution of the output,
ranging from 100% left (hard left) to 100%
right (hard right); a value of “C” indicates
sound that is centered left-to-right. On
stereo tracks, pan acts as balance.
x
x
x
x
Volume
The current volume level for the track,
ranging from -INF (silent) to +6 dB
(maximum volume). The recording and
playback levels are displayed in the
Playback and Record meters.
x
x
x
x
x
Meter
The recording and playback levels are
displayed in the Playback and Record
meters. For MIDI tracks, the meter shows
MIDI activity and velocity.
x
x
x
x
x
Track icon
Track icons allow you to quickly identify a
track’s contents by instrument. You can
assign a new track icon, create your own
track icons, and save an icon as part of a
track template.
x
x
x
x
x
Table 115.
580
Track Inspector controls (Continued)
Inspectors
Track Inspector overview
x
Audio MIDI
track track
Instrument
Bus
track
Track number A sequential track number used for
reference.
x
x
x
x
Track name
A name that you assign the track for easy
reference. Note that if you do not assign a
name to a track, the default name is the
track number. This track number will
change if you change the order of your
tracks. You can click the Track Name
control to select any available track, bus or
main to display in the Track Inspector.
x
x
x
x
Input
The input source for the track, used in
recording.
x
x
Output
The output bus through which the track is
played.
x
x
x
x
Link
Main out faders can be linked using the
Control
Description
Main
x
x
Link button
. This allows you to adjust
both the left and right channel at the same
time.
Chorus
Adds MIDI chorus effect to the track.
Reverb
Adds MIDI reverb effect to the track.
x
x
Bank Select
Method
The Bank Select Method used by your
sound module to switch back and forth
between banks of sounds.
See “Assigning the Bank Select method”
on page 1240.
x
x
Patch
Browser
Opens the “Patch Browser dialog” on page
1773 dialog box, which lets you search for
patches by name.
x
x
Key+
The number of half steps by which the
notes in the track are transposed on
playback (e.g., 12 to transpose up one
octave)
Time+
An offset applied to the start time of the
events in the track.
x
x
Arpeggiator
The Arpeggiator lets you play intricate
patterns of notes that would otherwise be
extremely difficult or impossible to play
manually and at speeds and octave ranges
that exist beyond the physical limitations of
the player or keyboard range. See
“Arpeggiator section” on page 589.
x
x
Table 115.
x
x
Track Inspector controls (Continued)
Inspectors
Track Inspector overview
581
Audio MIDI
track track
Instrument
Bus
track
Control
Description
Input
quantize
Input quantizing allows you to automatically
quantize MIDI input during recording. See
“Input Quantize section” on page 588.
x
x
Snap to scale When Snap to Scale is enabled, any notes
that you draw or move in the Piano Roll
view stay within the selected scale. See
“Snap to Scale section” on page 587.
x
x
Main
Display
The Display menu lets you show/hide
modules in the Track Inspector.
x
x
x
x
x
Module
Options
The Module Options menu lets you
configure settings for various modules.
x
x
x
x
x
Audio tab
Show audio output controls in the right side
strip.
x
MIDI tab
Show advanced MIDI controls in the right
side strip.
x
Table 115.
Track Inspector controls (Continued)
See also:
“Audio track controls” on page 583
“Bus controls” on page 584
“MIDI track and Instrument track controls” on page 585
“Main controls” on page 590
582
Inspectors
Track Inspector overview
Audio track controls
Figure 197. Track Inspector controls for audio tracks.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
A. Input gain B. ProChannel (Producer only) C. Effects bin D. Sends E. Mute, Solo, Arm, Input Echo, Phase
Invert, Stereo Interleave, Read Automation, Write Automation F. Pan G. Volume H. Meter I. Track icon J. Input
and output K. Track name and number L. Display menu
See also:
“Track Inspector controls” on page 579
Inspectors
Track Inspector overview
583
Bus controls
Figure 198. Track Inspector controls for buses.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
A. Input gain and pan B. ProChannel (Producer only) C. Effects bin D. Sends E. Mute, Solo, Waveform
preview, Read Automation, Write Automation F. Pan G. Volume H. Meter I. Bus Icon J. Output K. Bus
name L. Display menu
See also:
“Track Inspector controls” on page 579
584
Inspectors
Track Inspector overview
MIDI track and Instrument track controls
When the current track is a MIDI track, the left strip shows mix controls and the right strip shows
Snap to Scale, Input Quantize, Arpeggiator and other advanced MIDI settings. Instrument tracks can
show either audio or MIDI controls in the right strip, depending on whether the Audio or MIDI tab is
selected.
Figure 199. Track Inspector controls for MIDI tracks and Instrument tracks.
A
B
L
M
C
N
D
E
F
O
G
H
I
P
J
Q
R
K
S
A. Velocity trim B. Effects bin C. Channel/Bank/Patch Quantize D. Mute, Solo, Arm, Input Echo, Read
Automation, Write Automation E. Pan F. Volume G. Meter H. Track icon and number I. Input and
output J. Track name K. Display menu L. Chorus and Reverb M. Snap to Scale N. Input
Quantize O. Arpeggiator P. MIDI offset controls (Key+ and Time+) Q. Open Patch Browser R. Bank Select
Method S. Audio and MIDI tabs (Instrument tracks only)
See also:
“Track Inspector controls” on page 579
Inspectors
Track Inspector overview
585
Figure 200. Instrument tracks can show audio output or MIDI controls by selecting the Audio tab or MIDI tab.
A
B
Audio tab
MIDI tab
A. Audio output B. MIDI controls
Advanced MIDI Controls section
• Chorus.
Adds MIDI chorus effect to the track.
• Reverb. Adds MIDI reverb effect to the track.
• Key+. The number of half steps by which the notes in the track are transposed on playback
(e.g., 12 to transpose up one octave)
• Time+. The number of “Ticks” on page 2059 that the track’s playback timing is offset from the
other tracks.
• Patch Browser. Opens the “Patch Browser dialog” on page 1773 dialog box, which lets you
search for patches by name.
• Bank Select Method. Your synthesizer uses one of four bank select methods to switch back
and forth between banks of sounds. To find the method used for your instrument, check the
586
Inspectors
Track Inspector overview
instrument’s User’s Guide or the manufacturer’s web site. The four methods are as follows:
• Normal. Use for instruments that respond to Controller 0 or Controller 32 bank select
messages.
• Controller 0 only.
messages.
• Controller 32 only.
messages.
Use for instruments that only respond to Controller 0 bank select
Use for instruments that only respond to Controller 32 bank select
• Patch 100...127. Use for instruments that let you change banks by sending patch changes
between 100 and 127.
For more information about Bank Select Methods, see “Assigning the Bank Select method” on
page 1240.
Snap to Scale section
• Snap to Scale On/Off. Enables/disables Snap to Scale on the selected track.
• Scale. Displays current scale for Snap to Scale feature. The drop-down menu contains the
following options:
• <scale categories>. The pre-installed scales are organized into categories such as
Diatonic, Pentatonic, Exotic, etc. Point to the desired category and select a scale from the
submenu.
• Custom User Scales. This submenu lists all custom scales you have created.
• Scale Manager. Select Scale Manager to create new scales or edit existing scales. See “To
create a scale” on page 779 and “To edit or delete a scale” on page 780.
• Root Note. Use this field to specify the root note of the selected scale.
• Settings. Use this field to specify how you want SONAR to handle non-scale notes in the Piano
Roll view when Snap to Scale is enabled.
• Next, Higher Note. SONAR moves any non-scale note that you move to the next higher
note in the selected scale.
• Previous, Lower Note. SONAR moves any non-scale note that you move to the previous,
lower note in the selected scale.
• Nearest Note. SONAR moves any non-scale note that you move to the note that is closest
in pitch in the selected scale.
For more information about Snap to Scale, see “Snap to Scale” on page 778.
Inspectors
Track Inspector overview
587
Input Quantize section
• Input Quantize On/Off. Enables/disables Input Quantize on the selected track.
• Preset. Save or select settings that you use often in the drop-down menu. To save a new group
of settings, click the Preset list and choose Quantize Settings to open the Input Quantize dialog
box, then type a name in the Preset field and click the Save button. To delete a group, select it
and click the Delete button. The Input Quantize dialog box contains the following settings:
• Resolution. Set the note resolution in either standard note duration or tick value. The
resolution determines the size note or time value that you want your MIDI data to conform to.
• MIDI Event Start Times. Select this option to quantize MIDI event start times.
• Note Durations. Select this option to quantize Note Event durations to the size of the
Resolution value.
• Only Quantize Notes. If selected, SONAR will not modify other events, such as controllers.
• Strength. This value determines how closely SONAR moves the selected notes to the
resolution value, or “grid”. See “Strength” on page 768.
• Swing. Use this value to make groups of even eight notes (or whatever note you want to
enter in the Resolution field) “swing”, instead of playing with exact eighth note rhythm. A
value of 50 percent, or “50-50”, produces equal durations for both notes—no swing. A larger
value makes the first note longer, and vice versa. See “Swing” on page 768.
• Window. This value determines whether SONAR quantizes notes that are far from the
quantization points, or leaves them alone. A value of 100 percent quantizes every note. See
“Window” on page 769.
• Randomize. This value randomizes the three previous fields to introduce a more human
feel to the rhythm. The value you enter is the maximum amount of difference from the entered
values that the randomize feature can add.
For more information about Input Quantize, see “Input quantizing” on page 284.
588
Inspectors
Track Inspector overview
Arpeggiator section
• Arpeggiator On/Off. Enables/disables the Arpeggiator on the selected track. This control can
be assigned to MIDI remote control and modified in real-time during project playback.
• Preset. You can create and edit Arpeggiator presets; all user parameters are stored in the
preset. Arpeggiator settings are included in track templates.
• Rate. Adjusts the relative speed of the Arpeggiator sequence by changing all the note durations
by a factor of the current tempo. This control can be assigned to MIDI remote control and
modified in real-time during project playback.
• Octave Range. Sets the number of octaves through which the arpeggio will play. A value of 1
means that a held chord will only arpeggiate the notes that are being held within the octave from
which the notes are being transmitted. A value of 2 means a held chord will arpeggiate for two
octaves. The held chord always represents the bass octave, meaning that the other octaves
sound in a higher register.
If you specify a range higher than the standard MIDI specifications, the Arpeggiator will repeat
the pattern in the highest available octave as necessary.
This control can be assigned to MIDI remote control and modified in real-time during project
playback.
• Latch.
Latch keeps the arpeggio playing after you let go of the keys.
This control can be assigned to MIDI remote control and modified in real-time during project
playback.
• Swing. Sets the amount of swing applied to the selected pattern. You can make a pattern of 8th,
16th, or 32nd notes play back as swing notes instead of straight notes. The amount of swing
ranges from 0 (no swing) to 100% (maximum swing).
• Velocity. An offset control that scales the arpeggiated note’s velocity to a percentage of the
original note velocity.
• Duration. Controls whether the notes in the pattern are held to their full value, or are held for
shorter or longer durations.
• Pitch.
A transposition control in half-steps, up or down a maximum of 2 octaves.
Flam. If a pattern contains flams, this menu controls how big a difference there is between the
attack time of the flam and the note it is attached to.
• Mix. When 0, simultaneously held notes arpeggiate as single notes. At 50%, simultaneously
held notes are heard as a chord in addition to the usual arpeggiated notes, both at equal levels. At
100%, only the held chord is audible.
Control: Knob (0 – 100%); this control can be assigned to MIDI remote control and modified in
real-time during project playback.
• Channel. MIDI input and output menu—the Arpeggiator only affects input data that’s on the
MIDI channels listed on this menu. The Arpeggiator always obeys the track’s assigned output
channel, plus any additional channels specified in the Arpeggiator’s Ch menu.
• Shape. Choose a shape that specifies the direction in which currently held notes are to be
sequenced. The following shapes are available:
Inspectors
Track Inspector overview
589
• Rhythm (implicit rhythm mode)
• Forward
• Reverse
• Forward Circle 1
• Reverse Circle 1
• Forward Circle 2
• Reverse Circle 2
• Inward
• Outward
• Inward Circle
• Outward Circle
• As Played
• As Played Circle
• Random
For more information about the Arpeggiator, see “Arpeggiator” on page 286.
Main controls
Figure 201. Track Inspector controls for mains
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
A. Mute B. Link channels C. Volume D. Meter E. Icon F. Mains name G. Display menu
See also:
“Track Inspector controls” on page 579
590
Inspectors
Track Inspector overview
To show/hide modules
Click the Display control at the bottom of the Track Inspector and select the modules you want to
show/hide.
The following modules are available:
• Input Gain. Show/hide Input Trim/Gain/Pan controls.
• ProChannel (Producer only). Show/hide ProChannel controls, which includes Equalizer,
Compressor and Tube Saturation.
• FX Bin.
Show/hide effect bins.
• Sends/Bank/Patch. Show/hide Send controls for audio tracks and buses, or Bank/Patch/
Channel controls for MIDI tracks and Instrument tracks.
• MSR. Show/hide Mute, Solo, Arm for Recording, Input Echo, Phase Invert, Mono/Stereo, Read
Automation, Write Automation and Waveform Preview controls.
• Pan Control. Show/hide Pan controls.
• Volume. Show/hide Volume controls and meters (and Link controls for mains).
• Icon. Show/hide track icons.
• In/Out. Show/hide Input and Output controls
Figure 202. Use the Display menu to configure modules in the Track Inspector.
See:
“Track Inspector overview” on page 576
“Properties Inspector overview” on page 592
“Properties Inspector - Clip Properties” on page 594
“Properties Inspector - Track Properties” on page 600
“ProChannel (Producer and Studio only)” on page 999
“Inspectors” on page 571
“Arpeggiator” on page 286
“Input quantizing” on page 284
“Track-by-track playback” on page 200
“Changing track settings” on page 209
“Routing and mixing digital audio” on page 891
Inspectors
Track Inspector overview
591
Properties Inspector overview
The Properties Inspector shows properties for the selected clip(s) or track(s), depending on whether
the Clip or Track button is pressed:
• Clip. The Clip Properties Inspector displays settings for the currently selected clip(s). For
details, see “Properties Inspector - Clip Properties” on page 594.
• Track. The Track Properties Inspector lets you type a track name, specify the automation write
mode and time base, specify an audio track’s AudioSnap render modes, specify the default clip
colors, and enter a text description for the selected track(s). For details, see “Properties Inspector
- Track Properties” on page 600.
• Bus. The Bus Properties Inspector lets you type a bus name, specify the automation write mode
and time base, and enter a text description. For details, see “Properties Inspector - Bus
Properties” on page 603.
The Properties Inspector contains multiple sections that you can show/hide by clicking the section’s
header bar. By default, the Clip Properties Inspector and Track Properties Inspector are collapsed.
Only one section can be visible at a time.
592
Inspectors
Properties Inspector overview
Figure 203. The Track Inspector extends the full height of the Inspector pane, while the Properties Inspector is
shown in the top half when visible.
A
B
C
D
A. Dock/undock and expand/collapse Inspector B. Show/hide Clip Properties Inspector C. Show/hide Track/Bus
Properties Inspector D. Show/hide ProChannel
See:
“Properties Inspector - Clip Properties” on page 594
“Properties Inspector - Track Properties” on page 600
Inspectors
Properties Inspector overview
593
Properties Inspector - Clip Properties
The Clip Properties Inspector displays settings for the currently selected clip(s). The Clip Properties
Inspector contains the following sections:
• “Properties section” on page 595
• “Groove Clip section” on page 597
• “AudioSnap section” on page 598
• “Clip Effects section” on page 599
Figure 204. The Clip Properties Inspector displays settings for the currently selected clip(s).
A
B
C
D
A. Clip Properties section B. Groove Clip Looping section C. AudioSnap section D. Clip Effects section
Note: The preceding image shows all sections in the Clip Properties Inspector expanded for
illustration purposes only. You can only show one section at a time.
594
Inspectors
Properties Inspector overview
To show/hide the Clip Properties Inspector
Click the Clip button at the top of the Inspector pane, or press SHIFT+I.
Figure 205. Click the Clip button to show/hide the Clip Properties Inspector.
To show/hide a section in the Clip Properties Inspector
Click the section’s header bar in the inspector.
The section expands and the previously-displayed section collapses.
Figure 206. Click a section’s header bar to expand the section and show its controls.
Properties section
• Properties header bar.
Click to show/hide the Properties section.
• Clip Name. Use this field to assign a name to the selected clip. The name of a clip is used in the
Track view and Event List view. You can assign any name to help you remember the contents of
the clip.
• Time Format. Use the list to specify in which format to display the selected clip’s Start time and
Length. The options are as follows:
• MBT. Display the clip’s Start and Length properties in M:B:T (Measure:Beat:Tick) format.
• Samples. Display the clip’s Start and Length properties in number of samples format.
• HMSF. Display the clip’s Start and Length properties in H:M:S:F (Hour:
Minute:Second:Frame) format.
• Seconds.
Display the clip’s Start and Length properties in number of seconds format.
• Start. Use this field to move the selected clip forward or backward in the track by setting a new
start time.
• Length.
This field displays the length of the selected clip.
Inspectors
Properties Inspector overview
595
• Snap Offset (audio clips only). The Snap Offset field is for audio clips only. Snap offsets allow
you to set a point other than the beginning of a clip as the “snap” point used by the Snap to Grid.
A snap offset is the number of samples from the beginning of the clip. Snap offsets affect all edits
that obey the Snap to Grid setting. Clips without a snap offset always align at the very beginning
of a clip. For more information, see “Snap offsets” on page 372.
Note: You cannot set a snap offset for a Groove clip.
• Original Time. The Original Time property stores and shows the original SMPTE time stamp
associated with the clip. This is the SMPTE time stamp at which the clip was recorded or imported
into the project. The Original Time property can not be edited. See “To revert clip(s) to original
time stamp” on page 359.
• Time Base. Choose one of the two options in this section to control what happens to a locked
clip when you change the tempo:
• Musical (M:B:T). If the clip is set to the Musical time base, the clip’s M:B:T position stays
constant, and its absolute position shifts.
• Absolute. If the clip is set to the Absolute time base, its absolute position stays constant,
and its M:B:T position shifts.
• Mute.
Mutes the clip.
• Lock. Locks the clip’s data and/or position. The Lock drop-down menu contains the following
options:
• Position and Data. Locks position and data, and adds a lock icon on the clip
.
• Position Only. Locks position only, and adds a yellow lock icon (with the clasp unlocked) on
the clip .
• Data Only. Locks data only, and adds a blue lock icon (with the clasp unlocked) on the clip
.
• Automation Read. Allows the clip to respond to clip automation envelopes.
Note: Clip envelopes are only visible/editable when the parent track’s Edit Filter control is set to
Clip Automation. For details, see “Selecting the data type to edit” on page 450.
• Clips Linked.
• Foreground.
Shows how many clips are linked to the selected clip.
Specifies the waveform or note color of the selected clip.
• Background. Specifies the clip background color of the selected clip.
• Use Track Colors. Returns the selected clip’s color to the default, as defined in Edit >
Preferences > Customization - Color.
For more information about clip properties, see “Editing clip properties” on page 830 and
“Arranging clips” on page 341.
596
Inspectors
Properties Inspector overview
Groove Clip section
• Groove Clip header bar.
Click to show/hide the Groove Clip section.
• Looping. Convert the selected clip to a Groove Clip. You can drag the right edge of a Groove
Clip to create loop repetitions. Groove Clips can also obey pitch markers. For more information
about Groove Clips, see “Working with Groove Clip audio” on page 706 and “MIDI Groove Clips”
on page 715.
Note: If this control is not available, the selected clip is most likely an AudioSnap clip. A clip can
not have Groove Clip looping and AudioSnap enabled at the same time.
• Stretch to Tempo (audio clips only). Stretch or shrink the selected clip to fit the project’s
tempo. SONAR uses the Beats in Clip and Original Tempo parameters are used to make the
change.
• Beats in Clips.
The number of beats (quarter notes) in the clip.
• Original Tempo (audio clips only). The tempo at which the clip was recorded.
• Follow Pitch. Transposes the loop, if necessary, to the key of the project. A loop recorded in the
key of A, used in a project in the key of C, will be transposed up three semitones if the Follow
Pitch option is selected. You can also insert markers in the Time Ruler which change the project
pitch. These markers, called pitch markers affect only Groove clips with Follow Pitch enabled.
• Reference Note. Represents the key in which the loop was originally recorded. The Follow
Pitch feature uses this information, when checked, to transpose the loop to match the project’s
default project pitch and pitch markers.
• Pitch (semitones). Allows you to set the transposition of a clip independently from the project
pitch. A positive number transposes the clip up by that number of semitones. A negative number
transposes the clip down by that number of semitones. Remember, if Follow Pitch is enabled,
the clip follows the project’s pitch, so any transposition changes you make using this option are
changes to the project pitch, not the clip pitch.
• Fine Pitch (cents). Allows you to make tuning adjustments or to transpose the pitch of a clip up
to 50 cents. There are 100 cents in one semitone. A Fine Pitch setting of 1 adjusts the pitch up
one hundredth of a semitone. The Fine Pitch option can “fine tune” a slightly out of tune clip so
that it is in pitch with the remaining clips in a project.
For more information about Groove Clips, see “Working with loops and Groove Clips” on page
697.
Inspectors
Properties Inspector overview
597
AudioSnap section
• AudioSnap header bar. Click to show/hide the AudioSnap section.
• Enable. Enables or disables AudioSnap on selected audio clips.
Note: AudioSnap is automatically enabled on a clip if you stretch a transient marker on the clip.
• Average Tempo. Shows the average tempo candidates: original, 0.5x and 2x. SONAR will do
its best to detect the correct average tempo, but a clip can often have multiple potential tempos
(60 BPM, 120 BPM, 240 BPM, etc.). If SONAR is unable to detect a tempo, Average Tempo will
be set to Original, which is the project’s tempo at the location the clip was recorded or imported.
If you change the Average Tempo setting, all clip tempo changes are adjusted to scale.
• Follow Project Tempo. Forces the clip to follow the project’s global tempo map.
• Follow Options. Specifies at which resolution the clip should follow tempo changes when
Follow Project Tempo is selected. The options are as follows:
• Beats
• Measures
• Clip (default)
• Auto-Stretch
Note: The Follow Project Tempo option only works on clips that are configured to use musical
time (the Time Base property is set to Musical (M:B:T) in the Clip Properties Inspector.
• Filter Threshold. Disables AudioSnap transient markers based on their volume. This clears out
unwanted markers to make editing easier. Higher values create a bigger volume threshold, which
disables markers that are fall below that threshold.
• Filter Resolution. The selected Filter Resolution value lets you disable markers based on
their time location. This clears out unwanted markers to make editing easier. Larger values create
a bigger time window, based on musical time values, which preserves markers that are closest to
the displayed musical time value, and disables others.
• Online Render. This choice determines what stretch algorithm is used during real-time
playback. For more information about render modes, see “Algorithms and rendering” on page
692. The options are as follows:
• From Track. This uses the algorithm listed in the Online field in Edit > Preferences >
Project - AudioSnap.
• Groove clip. This mode works faster than Percussion render mode, using less processing
power.
• Percussion.
598
This mode works better than the Groove Clip render mode on percussive
Inspectors
Properties Inspector overview
material, especially if the stretching is by more than a few beats per minute.
Note: The Online render mode is for preview purposes only during playback. The final audio
quality will be greatly improved after the Offline render mode is applied during mixdown/export.
• Offline Render. This drop-down menu lets you choose the algorithm that is used when you
export or freeze stretched audio. The choices in the drop-down menu are as follows:
• From Track. This uses the algorithm listed in the Offline Rendering field in Edit >
Preferences > Project - AudioSnap.
• Radius Mix. Better for clips containing polyphonic, stereo data.
• Radius Mix Advanced. Similar to Radius Mix, but exposes a Smoothing slider that adjust
how much detail to preserve.
• Radius Solo. Better for clips containing monophonic, solo instruments.
• Radius Solo (Bass). Better for clips containing solo bass instruments.
• Radius Solo (Vocal).
Better for clips containing solo vocals.
• Same as Online. Uses the same choice as the Online field.
• Enable Stretch. Allows a clip to follow a project’s tempo as it changes. It instructs SONAR to
stretch or shrink the clip to fit the project’s tempo. SONAR uses the Original BPM parameters to
make the change.
• Stretch Amount (%).
• New Duration.
Specify by what percentage to stretch the clip.
Specify what duration to stretch the clip to.
• New Thru-Time. Specify the Thru Time to stretch the clip to.
For more information about AudioSnap, see “AudioSnap (Producer and Studio only)” on page
635.
Clip Effects section
• Clip Effects header bar. Click to show/hide the Clip Effects section. This sections lets you add
real-time effects to the selected clip.
• Effects bin.
Right-click to insert a plug-in, or drag a plug-in from the Browser.
For more information about clip effects, see “Effects on clips” on page 921 and “Adding effects in
the Track view” on page 417.
See:
“Properties Inspector overview” on page 592
“Properties Inspector - Clip Properties” on page 594
“Properties Inspector - Track Properties” on page 600
“Inspectors” on page 571
Inspectors
Properties Inspector overview
599
See also:
“Editing clip properties” on page 830
“Arranging clips” on page 341
“Effects on clips” on page 921
“Adding effects in the Track view” on page 417
“Working with loops and Groove Clips” on page 697
“AudioSnap (Producer and Studio only)” on page 635
“MIDI effects (MIDI plug-ins)” on page 796
“Snap to Scale” on page 778
Properties Inspector - Track Properties
The Track Properties Inspector lets you type a name, enter a text description, specify the AudioSnap
track render mode for audio tracks, and specify the default clip colors for the selected track(s).
Note: If the active channel strip is a bus, the Track Properties tab label shows Bus instead of
Track.
Figure 207. The Track Properties Inspector lets you specify settings for the selected track(s).
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
A. Dock/undock Inspector B. Show/hide Track Properties Inspector C. Track name D. AudioSnap track render
modes E. Automation Time Base F. Automation Write Mode G. Track strip color H. Text description
600
Inspectors
Properties Inspector overview
To show/hide the Track Properties Inspector
Click the Track button at the top of the Inspector pane, or press CTRL+SHIFT+I.
Figure 208. Click the Track button to show/hide the Track Properties Inspector.
The Track Properties Inspector contains the following sections:
Properties section
• Track Name. Assign a name to the selected track.
AudioSnap section (audio tracks only)
• Online Render. Specify the algorithm to use during real-time playback. For more information
about render modes, see “Algorithms and rendering” on page 692. The options are as follows:
• From Global. This uses the algorithm listed in the Online field in Edit > Preferences >
Project - AudioSnap.
• Groove clip.
Works faster than Percussion render mode, using less processing power.
• Percussion. Works better than the Groove Clip render mode on percussive material,
especially if the stretching is by more than a few beats per minute.
Note: The Online render mode is for preview purposes only during playback. The final audio
quality will be greatly improved after the Offline render mode is applied during mixdown/export.
• Offline Render. This drop-down menu lets you choose the algorithm that is used when you
export or freeze stretched audio. The choices in the drop-down menu are as follows:
• From Global. This uses the algorithm listed in the Offline Rendering field in Edit >
Preferences > Project - AudioSnap.
• Radius Mix. Better for clips containing polyphonic, stereo data.
• Radius Mix Advanced. Similar to Radius Mix, but exposes a Smoothing slider that adjust
how much detail to preserve.
• Radius Solo. Better for clips containing monophonic, solo instruments.
• Radius Solo (Bass). Better for clips containing solo bass instruments.
• Radius Solo (Vocal).
Better for clips containing solo vocals.
• Same as Online. Uses the same choice as the Online field.
Inspectors
Properties Inspector overview
601
Automation section
• Time Base. Choose one of the two options in this section to control what happens to
automation when you change the tempo:
• Musical (M:B:T). If the track is set to the Musical time base, the automation’s M:B:T position
stays constant, and its absolute position shifts.
• Absolute. If the track is set to the Absolute time base, its absolute position stays constant,
and its M:B:T position shifts.
• Write Mode.
This drop-down menu lets you choose the automation write mode:
• Touch. Touch mode overwrites any existing automation data for the currently armed
parameter only when the parameter is moved with the mouse or a MIDI controller. Automation
writing stops when the parameter is released, and the parameter returns to any previously
automated position.
• Overwrite. Overwrite mode overwrites any existing automation data for the currently armed
parameter while the transport is rolling, even if you don’t touch the parameter.
• Latch. Latch Mode is similar to Touch mode; new automation data overwrites existing
automation data when you move a control. However, when you release the parameter, it will
remain “latched” into its current position and continue to overwrite any existing automation
data until playback stops.
Colors section
• Strip Color. Specify the default channel strip color and the default waveform or note color of the
selected track. The color palette has two additional options, which can be accessed by holding
down the Follow Bus/Default button for a brief moment:
• Default.
to.
The track strip is not colored and does not inherit the color of the bus it is assigned
• Follow Bus. The track inherits the color of the bus it is assigned to.
Description section
• Description. Type a comment or description of the selected track.
See:
“Properties Inspector - Clip Properties” on page 594
“Properties Inspector - Bus Properties” on page 603
“Inspectors” on page 571
See also:
“To change a track name” on page 217
“AudioSnap (Producer and Studio only)” on page 635
“Screen colors and wallpaper” on page 92
“Customization - Colors” on page 1838
602
Inspectors
Properties Inspector overview
Properties Inspector - Bus Properties
The Bus Properties Inspector lets you type a name, specify the automation time base and write
mode, and enter a text description for the bus(es).
Figure 209. The Bus Properties Inspector lets you specify settings for the selected bus(es).
A
B
C
D
E
A. Dock/undock Inspector B. Show/hide Bus Properties Inspector C. Bus name D. Automation Time Base and
write mode E. Text description
To show/hide the Bus Properties Inspector
Click a bus in the Track view, then click the Bus button at the top of the Inspector pane, or press
CTRL+SHIFT+I.
Figure 210. Click the Bus button to show/hide the Bus Properties Inspector.
Note: If the active channel strip is a track, the Track Properties tab label shows Track instead
of Bus.
The Bus Properties Inspector contains the following sections:
Properties section
• Track Name. Assign a name to the selected bus.
Inspectors
Properties Inspector overview
603
Automation section
• Time Base. Choose one of the two options in this section to control what happens to
automation when you change the tempo:
• Musical (M:B:T). If the bus is set to the Musical time base, the automation’s M:B:T position
stays constant, and its absolute position shifts.
• Absolute. If the bus is set to the Absolute time base, its absolute position stays constant,
and its M:B:T position shifts.
• Write Mode.
This drop-down menu lets you choose the automation write mode:
• Touch. Touch mode overwrites any existing automation data for the currently armed
parameter only when the parameter is moved with the mouse or a MIDI controller. Automation
writing stops when the parameter is released, and the parameter returns to any previously
automated position.
• Overwrite. Overwrite mode overwrites any existing automation data for the currently armed
parameter while the transport is rolling, even if you don’t touch the parameter.
• Latch. Latch Mode is similar to Touch mode; new automation data overwrites existing
automation data when you move a control. However, when you release the parameter, it will
remain “latched” into its current position and continue to overwrite any existing automation
data until playback stops.
Description section
• Description. Type a comment or description of the selected bus.
See:
“Properties Inspector - Clip Properties” on page 594
“Properties Inspector - Track Properties” on page 600
“Inspectors” on page 571
604
Inspectors
Properties Inspector overview
Browser
The Browser lets you find and import various types of content into your projects, including audio and
MIDI files, track and project templates, track icons, Effects Chain presets, effect plug-ins and
instruments. You can drag content and plug-ins directly into tracks. The Browser consists of three
sections:
• Media Browser. Find audio, MIDI, video, projects, project templates, track templates, Effects
Chain presets and track icons that you want to import into a project. For more information, see
“Using the Media Browser” on page 610.
• Plug-in Browser. Organize plug-ins and drag effects to tracks and clips. You can access audio
effects (DirectX and VST), MIDI effects (MFX), instruments (DXi and VSTi) and ReWire devices.
For more information, see “Using the Plug-in Browser” on page 620.
• Synth Rack Browser. Manage all active instruments in a project. For more information, see
“Using the Synth Rack Browser” on page 628.
Objects in the Browser can be added to your project in two ways:
• Drag the object to an appropriate location.
• Double-click the object in the Browser.
605
By default, the Browser is docked on the right side of the screen. More detailed information is shown
in the Media Browser and Synth Rack Browser when the SONAR Browser is floating or docked at
the bottom of the screen. For more information, see “Docking/undocking and resizing the Browser
window” on page 608.
Figure 211. The Browser lets you import content into a project and manage effects and instruments.
A
B
C
D
A. Media Browser B. Plug-in Browser C. Synth Rack Browser D. Header bar
To show audio/MIDI content
Click the Browse Media button
.
To show plug-ins
Click the Browse Plug-ins button
.
To show the Synth Rack
Click the Browse Synth Rack button
.
See:
“Adding Browser objects to your project” on page 613
“Docking/undocking and resizing the Browser window” on page 608
“Using the Media Browser” on page 610
“Adding Browser objects to your project” on page 613
“To import an audio or MIDI file” on page 613
“To export audio or MIDI clips” on page 614
“To import a track template” on page 614
“To import a project template” on page 615
“To open or import a project file” on page 616
“To import a video file” on page 616
606
Browser
“To assign a track/bus icon” on page 616
“Using the Plug-in Browser” on page 620
“Adding effects and instruments to a project” on page 622
“To insert an effect in a track or bus” on page 622
“To insert an effect into a clip’s effects bin” on page 624
“To insert an instrument” on page 624
“To insert a ReWire device” on page 625
“Using the Synth Rack Browser” on page 628
“Managing instruments in a project” on page 632
“Keyboard navigation” on page 619
Browser
607
Docking/undocking and resizing the Browser window
By default, the Browser is docked on the right side of the screen. You can undock the Browser, or
dock it on the left side or at the bottom. You can also resize the width of the Browser.
More detailed information is shown in the Media Browser and Synth Rack Browser when the
SONAR Browser is floating or docked at the bottom of the screen.
Figure 212. Browser
A
A
Docked
Undocked
Collapsed
A. Header bar
Figure 213. Use the docking controls to change the position of the Browser.
A
B C D
A. Click here to drag the Browser B. Dock/Undock C. Docking Options D. Expand/Collapse
608
Browser
To dock the Browser
When the Browser is undocked, do one of the following:
• Double-click the Browser header bar.
• Click the Dock/Undock button in the Browser.
• Click the Docking Options button, and select one of the following menu commands:
• Dock at Left. Dock the Browser to the left of the Track view.
• Dock at Right. Dock the Browser to the right of the Track view.
• Dock in MultiDock.
view by default.
Dock the Browser in the MultiDock, which appears below the Track
To undock the Browser
When the Browser is docked, do one of the following:
• Double-click the Browser header bar.
• Click the Browser header and drag the Browser to the middle of the screen.
• Click the Dock/Undock button in the Browser.
More detailed information is shown in the Media Browser and Synth Rack Browser when the
SONAR Browser is floating or docked at the bottom of the screen.
To float the Browser or move it to a different monitor
Click the Docking Options button, and select Float.
To move the Browser to the left side
Do one of the following:
• Click the Docking Options button, and select Dock at Left.
• Click the Browser header and drag the Browser to the left side of the screen.
To dock the Browser in the MultiDock
Do one of the following:
• Click the Browser header and drag the Browser to the MultiDock.
• Click the Docking Options button, and select Dock in MultiDock.
To expand/collapse the Browser
Click the Expand/Collapse button in the Browser.
To resize the width of the Browser
Drag the Browser’s sidebar left/right.
Browser
609
To show the Browser
Select Views > Browser.
See:
“Using the Media Browser” on page 610
“Using the Plug-in Browser” on page 620
“Using the Synth Rack Browser” on page 628
“To import an audio or MIDI file” on page 613
“To import a video file” on page 616
“To import a track template” on page 614
“To insert an instrument” on page 624
“Keyboard navigation” on page 619
“Browser” on page 605
Using the Media Browser
The Media Browser allows you to browse and import various file types that can be used in SONAR,
including:
• Audio files (.wav, .mp3, .wma, .aif, etc.)
• MIDI files (.mid)
• Project5 patterns (.ptn)
• Step sequencer patterns (.ssp)
• REX loops (.rex)
• Video files (.avi, .mpg, .wmv, .asf, .mov)
• Track icons (.bmp)
• Track templates (.cwx)
• Project templates (.cwt, .tpl)
• Projects (.cwp, .cwb, .bun, .wrk)
• Effects Chain presets (.fxc)
You can preview audio and MIDI files before you import them into your project. If you preview a
Groove clip, it plays back at the tempo and in the key of your current project. Audio files can be
auditioned through any bus and MIDI files can be auditioned through any soft synth. You can
preview audio from a video file, but not the video itself.
You can save presets for your favorite content folders, which allows you to instantly jump to specific
folders on your hard disk.
610
Browser
Using the Media Browser
Media Browser interface
Figure 214. Media Browser
A
B
C
DE F
G
J
H
K
L
I
A. Show Media Browser B. Browser menu C. Content Location menu D. Dock/undock E. Docking
options F. Expand/collapse G. Move up one level to the parent directory H. Search filter I. File list J. Play/
Stop K. Delete content preset L. Save content preset
Figure 215. Media Browser (undocked)
A
A. Folder pane
• Show Media Browser
. Show the Media Browser.
• Browser menu. The Browser menu lets you choose how content files are displayed and
specify options for previewing audio and MIDI files. The menu contains the following commands:
• Views. The Views submenu lets you specify how files are displayed in the file list view. The
options are as follows:
• Icons. Icons view displays your files and folders as icons. The file name is displayed
under the icon.
• List.
List view displays the contents of a folder as a list of file or folder names preceded by
Browser
Using the Media Browser
611
small icons.
• Details. When the Browser is undocked or docked at the bottom, Details view displays the
file size, type and when the file was last modified.
• Folders. When the Browser is undocked or docked at the bottom, this option lets you
show/hide the Folders pane.
• Auto-Preview. When Auto Preview is selected, you can automatically previews loops and
files when you click on them in the Media Browser view. If the selected file is a Groove clip, it
plays back in the project tempo and key.
• Preview at Host Tempo. When Preview at Host Tempo is selected, audio and MIDI
groove clips follow the project’s tempo at the current Now time.
• Loop Preview.
preview.
Select Loop Preview to continuously loop the selected file(s) during
• Audio Preview Bus. The Audio Preview Bus submenu lets you select the output device
for previewing audio files.
• Synth Preview Output. The Synth Preview Output submenu lets you select the soft synth
for previewing MIDI files.
• Search filter. The search filter allows you to only show content that includes a specific text
string in the file name.
• Content Location menu. The Content Location menu allows you to quickly jump to favorite
content locations on your hard disk. You can save and recall your own Content Location presets.
• Save Content Location Preset
. Save the current folder as a Content Location preset. By
default, the folder name is used as the preset name, but you can type any desired name before
you click the Save Content Location Preset button.
• Delete Content Location Preset
• Move Up One Level
• Play
. Delete the selected Content Location preset.
. Open the folder one level above the active folder.
. Play the currently selected media file.
• Content List pane. The Content List pane shows all supported files in the active folder. Icons to
the left of file names indicate the file type, including if it is a Groove Clip. When pointing to a file,
the tooltip shows the full file name.
See:
“Adding Browser objects to your project” on page 613
“To import an audio or MIDI file” on page 613
“To export audio or MIDI clips” on page 614
“To import a track template” on page 614
“To import a project template” on page 615
“To open or import a project file” on page 616
612
Browser
Using the Media Browser
“To import a video file” on page 616
“To assign a track/bus icon” on page 616
“Keyboard navigation” on page 619
“Browser” on page 605
Adding Browser objects to your project
To show audio/MIDI content
Click the Browse Media button
.
To import an audio or MIDI file
1. In the Browser, click the Browse Media button
.
2. Navigate to the folder that contains the file you want to import.
3. Do one of the following:
• To insert into an existing track as a new clip. Double-click the file to add it to the selected
track at the current Now time, or drag the file to the desired location.
Note: A new track is created if the file type is not compatible with the selected track.
• To insert into a new track. Drag the file to en empty space in the Track view, below the last
track.
• To insert into a cell in the Matrix view. Make sure the Matrix view is visible, then drag the
file to the desired Matrix cell.
Valid destinations for audio files
You can drag audio files to the following locations:
• Audio track
• Audio clip
• MIDI track
• MIDI clip
• Audio clip inspector
• Empty Track view
• Empty Console view
• Instrument track
Browser
Using the Media Browser
613
Valid destinations for MIDI files
You can drag MIDI files to the following locations:
• Audio track
• Audio clip
• MIDI track
• MIDI clip
• MIDI clip inspector
• Empty Track view
• Empty Console view
• Instrument track
To export audio or MIDI clips
Drag the clip(s) to the desired location in the Media Browser.
Note: The Media Browser will appear automatically if you drag a clip over the Plug-in Browser
or Synth Rack Browser.
By default, audio clips are exported with the following settings:
• Format: Wave
• Bit depth: same as original clip.
• Sample rate: same as current project.
• Dithering: off
If you want to specify various options when exporting audio, you can use the File > Export > Audio
command instead.
To import a track template
1. In the Browser, click the Browse Media button
.
2. Navigate to the folder that contains the track template you want to import.
3. Do one of the following:
• To add tracks to the end. Drag the track template to an empty space below the last track,
or double-click the track template.
• To replace an existing track. Drag the track template onto the track you want to replace.
Note: If the target track and dropped track template are different track types, the target track will
be changed to match the track template.
614
Browser
Using the Media Browser
Valid destinations for track templates
You can drag track templates to the following locations:
• Audio track
• Audio clip
• MIDI track
• MIDI clip
• Audio track inspector
• MIDI track inspector
• Audio track effects bin
• MIDI Track effects bin
• Audio Console strip
• Audio Console effects bin
• MIDI Console strip
• MIDI Console effects bin
• Empty Track view
• Empty Console view
• Instrument track
• Instrument track inspector
• Instrument Console strip
To import a project template
1. In the Browser, click the Browse Media button
.
2. Navigate to the folder that contains the project template you want to import.
3. Do one of the following:
• To add tracks at the end of the current project. Drag the project template to the Track
view.
• To open the template as a new project.
Browser
Using the Media Browser
Double-click the project template.
615
To open or import a project file
1. In the Browser, click the Browse Media button
.
2. Navigate to the folder that contains the project you want to import tracks from.
3. Do one of the following:
• To open a project.
Double-click the desired cwp/cwb/wrk/bun file.
• To import the project into existing tracks. Drag the desired cwp/cwb/wrk/bun file into an
existing track.
• To import the project as new tracks. Drag the desired cwp/cwb/wrk/bun file to an empty
space in the Track view, below the last track.
To import a video file
1. In the Browser, click the Browse Media button
.
2. Navigate to the folder that contains the video file you want to import.
3. Do one of the following:
• Drag the video file to the Video Thumbnail pane or anywhere in the Track view.
• Double-click the video file.
To assign a track/bus icon
1. In the Browser, click the Browse Media button
.
2. Navigate to the folder that contains the icon you want to import.
3. Drag the icon to the desired track/bus in the Track view.
To preview audio content
1. In the Browser, click the Browse Media button
.
2. On the Browser menu, select Auto-Preview.
3. On the Browser menu, point to Audio Preview Bus, then select the bus you want to preview
audio through.
4. Navigate to the folder that contains the audio content you want to preview, then click the file you
want to preview.
Note: Auto-Preview is enabled by default. If you disable Auto-Preview, you must click the Play
button each time you want to preview the selected audio file.
Tip: To preview an audio file as a Groove Clip, hold down the ALT key and click the file. To preview
all selected files as Groove Clips, hold down the ALT and click the Play button
The Play button changes to a Stop button during preview.
616
Browser
Using the Media Browser
.
To preview MIDI content
1. In the Browser, click the Browse Media button
.
2. On the Browser menu, select Auto-Preview.
3. On the Browser menu, point to Synth Preview Output, then select the soft synth you want to
preview MIDI through.
Note: If there are no synths in the project, go to Insert > Soft Synths and insert the desired soft
synth.
4. Navigate to the folder that contains the MIDI content you want to preview, then click the file you
want to preview.
Note 1: Auto-Preview is enabled by default. If you disable Auto-Preview, you must click the
Play button each time you want to preview the selected audio file.
Note 2: MIDI Groove Clips loop indefinitely, but standard MIDI files play only once and do not
repeat.
The Play button changes to a Stop button during preview.
To rename media files in the Media Browser
1. In the Browser, click the Browse Media button
.
2. Do one of the following:
• Click the click the file you want to rename and press F2.
• Right-click the file you want to rename, and choose Rename on the pop-up menu.
To delete media files in the Media Browser
1. In the Browser, click the Browse Media button
.
2. Do one of the following:
• Right-click the file you want to delete, and choose Delete on the pop-up menu.
• Select the file you want to delete, and press the DELETE key.
To enable/disable Auto-Preview
1. In the Browser, click the Browse Media button
.
2. On the Browser menu, click Auto-Preview.
Browser
Using the Media Browser
617
See:
“Using the Media Browser” on page 610
“Using the Plug-in Browser” on page 620
“Using the Synth Rack Browser” on page 628
“Using Content Location presets” on page 618
“Keyboard navigation” on page 619
“Browser” on page 605
See also:
“To load an FX Chain preset” on page 626
Using Content Location presets
The Media Browser allows you to save and recall presets to quickly access your favorite folders.
Any folder that you can navigate to in the Media Browser can be saved as a Content Location
preset, which allows you to instantly return to a specific folder by simply selecting a preset from the
Content Location list.
As you navigate in the Media Browser, the Content Location box automatically displays the current
folder name or the first preset that matches the selected folder location.
To save a Content Location preset
1. In the Browser, click the Browse Media button
.
2. Navigate to the folder that you would like to save as a preset.
The selected folder name is displayed in the Content Location box.
3. If you want to specify a new friendly preset name, type the desired name in the Content
Location box.
4. Click the Save Content Location Preset button
.
The selected folder name is displayed in the Content Location box.
To select a Content Location preset
1. In the Browser, click the Browse Media button
.
2. In the Content Location box, select the desired preset.
The Media Browser automatically navigates to the appropriate folder location.
To delete a Content Location preset
1. In the Browser, click the Browse Media button
618
Browser
Using the Media Browser
.
2. In the Content Location box, select the preset you want to delete.
3. Click the Delete Content Location Preset button
.
To jump to a specific folder
In addition to navigating the Media Browser folder tree to go to a specific folder, you can also type in
any arbitrary folder path to instantly jump to a folder. To do so, double-click the Content Location
box and type a folder name, including the full path (for example, C:\Cakewalk Content).
See:
“Using the Media Browser” on page 610
“Using the Plug-in Browser” on page 620
“Using the Synth Rack Browser” on page 628
“Browser” on page 605
“Keyboard navigation” on page 619
Keyboard navigation
Standard key commands for navigating Windows Explorer also work in the SONAR Browser. The
following table lists keys for navigating the SONAR Browser.
Action
Shortcut key
Navigate between files
UP/DOWN ARROW
Navigate between directories
LEFT/RIGHT ARROW
Move to parent directory
BACKSPACE
Move to the selected directory or open the selected file
ENTER
Move to the first file in a directory
HOME
Move to the last file in a directory
END
Open a shortcut menu for the selected item
SHIFT+F10
Expand everything under the current selection (folder pane only)
Numeric Keypad *
Expand the current selection (folder pane only)
Numeric Keypad +
Collapse the current selection (folder pane only)
Numeric Keypad -
Table 116.
Shortcut keys for navigating the SONAR Browser
Browser
Using the Media Browser
619
See:
“Using the Media Browser” on page 610
“Using the Plug-in Browser” on page 620
“Using the Synth Rack Browser” on page 628
“To import an audio or MIDI file” on page 613
“To import a video file” on page 616
“To import a track template” on page 614
“To insert an instrument” on page 624
“Browser” on page 605
Using the Plug-in Browser
The Plug-in Browser lets you insert effects, instruments and ReWire devices into your projects. The
following plug-in types are supported:
• DirectX and VST audio effects.
• MFX MIDI effects
• DXi and VSTi instruments
• ReWire devices
Plug-ins are displayed according to their organization in the selected Plug-in Layout. Custom plug-in
layouts let you organize plug-ins any way you want: alphabetically, by vendor name, by effect type,
etc.
Effects can be added to tracks, buses and clips. Instruments can be added to audio tracks,
Instrument tracks and the Synth Rack.
620
Browser
Using the Plug-in Browser
Plug-in Browser interface
Figure 216. Plug-in Browser
A
B
CD E
F
G
H
A. Show Plug-in Browser B. Plug-in Layout menu button C. Dock/undock D. Docking options E. Expand/
collapse F. Plug-in Type buttons G. Search filter H. Plug-in list
• Show Plug-in Browser
• Audio.
• MIDI.
. Show the Plug-in Browser.
Show available DX and VST audio effect plug-ins.
Show available MFX MIDI effect plug-ins.
• Synth. Show available DXi and VSTi soft synths.
• ReWire. Show available ReWire devices.
• Plug-in Layout menu. The Plug-in Layout menu lets you specify how plug-ins are organized.
The menu contains the following commands:
• Manage Layouts. Opens Cakewalk Plug-in Manager, which lets you create, delete, and edit
plug-in layouts. For more information about Cakewalk Plug-in Manager, see the Cakewalk
Plug-in Manager online Help.
• Default All Plug-ins. The default layout, which lists all plug-ins by format (Built In, VST3,
VST2, and DirectX).
• Scan VST Folders. Scan to detect if any VST plug-ins have been added or removed.
• Sort VST3 Plug-Ins By Category. Organize VST3 plug-ins into category subfolders. If a plugin has more than one category, it will be listed in each category subfolder.
• Organized by Type. Select this layout to organize plug-ins by type (EQ, reverb, etc.).
Browser
Using the Plug-in Browser
621
• <list of layouts>. The Plug-in Layout menu lists all layouts stored by Cakewalk Plug-in
Manager. Select a layout to change the plug-in list.
• Search filter.
text string.
The search filter allows you to only show plug-in names that includes a specific
• Plug-in list. The Plug-Ins list is populated from the currently-selected layout from the Plug-in
Layout menu and the plug-in type selected from the Plug-in Type menu.
See:
“Adding effects and instruments to a project” on page 622
“To insert an effect in a track or bus” on page 622
“To insert an effect into a clip’s effects bin” on page 624
“To insert an instrument” on page 624
“To insert a ReWire device” on page 625
“Using the Media Browser” on page 610
“Using the Synth Rack Browser” on page 628
“Keyboard navigation” on page 619
“Browser” on page 605
Adding effects and instruments to a project
To show a specific plug-in type
1. In the Browser, click the PlugIn button
to show the Plug-in Browser.
2. Click the button that corresponds to the plug-in type you want to show:
• Audio FX
• MIDI FX
• Instruments
• ReWire
To select a plug-in layout
Click the PlugIn menu button
and select the desired layout. Click Manage Layouts if you want
to modify an existing layout or create a new layout.
To insert an effect in a track or bus
1. In the Browser, click the PlugIn button
to show the Plug-in Browser.
2. Click the button that corresponds to the plug-in type you want to show:
622
Browser
Using the Plug-in Browser
• Audio FX
• MIDI FX
3. Do one of the following:
• To insert the effect in a specific location in the effects bin.
position in a track/bus effects bin.
Drag the effect to the desired
• To insert the effect at the end of the effects bin. Drag the effect to an empty track space
in the Clips pane, or double-click the effect (only if the selected track type matches the effect
type).
Valid destinations for audio effects
You can drag audio effects to the following locations:
• Audio track
• Audio clip
• Audio track inspector
• Audio clip inspector
• Audio track effects bin
• Audio Clip effects bin
• Audio Console strip
• Audio Console effects bin
• Instrument track
• Instrument track inspector
• Instrument track effects bin
• Instrument Console strip
• Instrument Console effects bin
Valid destinations for MIDI effects
You can drag MIDI effects to the following locations:
• MIDI track
• MIDI clip
• MIDI track inspector
• MIDI clip inspector
• MIDI Track effects bin
• MIDI Clip effects bin
• MIDI Console strip
• MIDI Console effects bin
Browser
Using the Plug-in Browser
623
• Instrument track
• Instrument track inspector
• Instrument track effects bin
• Instrument Console strip
• Instrument Console effects bin
To insert an effect into a clip’s effects bin
1. In the Browser, click the PlugIn button
to show the Plug-in Browser.
2. Click the button that corresponds to the plug-in type you want to show:
• Audio FX
• MIDI FX
3. Drag the desired effect to a clip in the Clips pane.
To insert an instrument
1. In the Browser, click the PlugIn button
2. Click the Instruments button
to show the Plug-in Browser.
.
3. Do one of the following:
• To insert an instrument as a new Instrument track. Drag the desired instrument to an
empty space in the Track view or Clips pane, or double-click the instrument.
• To insert an instrument as a track effect. Drag the instrument to the desired track’s effects
bin, or drag the instrument to the desired track in the Clips pane.
Note: When you drag an instrument to an audio track or MIDI track, the following happens
automatically:
• If dropped on an audio track or inspector: add to Synth Rack, set audio track input and Synth
automation accordingly.
• If dropped on a MIDI track or inspector: add to Synth Rack, set MIDI track output and Synth
automation accordingly.
Valid destinations for instruments
You can drag instruments to the following locations:
• Audio track
• MIDI track
• Audio track inspector
• MIDI track inspector
624
Browser
Using the Plug-in Browser
• Audio Console strip
• MIDI Console strip
• Empty Track view
• Empty Console view
• Instrument track
• Instrument track inspector
• Instrument Console strip
To insert a ReWire device
1. In the Browser, click the PlugIn button
2. Click the ReWire button
to show the Plug-in Browser.
.
3. Drag the ReWire device to the Track view or Clips pane.
The ReWire device is added to the Synth Rack and a new Instrument track is created.
To rename a plug-in
1. In the Browser, click the PlugIn button
to show the Plug-in Browser.
2. Select the plug-in, then click the plug-in name again and type a name.
The plug-in is renamed and the plug-in layout is auto-saved.
Note: You can only rename plug-ins in a custom menu layout, not in the default menu layout.
See:
“Using the Media Browser” on page 610
“Using the Plug-in Browser” on page 620
“Using the Synth Rack Browser” on page 628
“Using FX Chain presets (.fxc)” on page 626
“Keyboard navigation” on page 619
“Browser” on page 605
Browser
Using the Plug-in Browser
625
Using FX Chain presets (.fxc)
You can save effect chains in SONAR, which can be used in any project. An FX Chain preset stores
all the settings of a specific effects bin. This allows you to effortlessly duplicate favorite effect
combinations and settings without having to manually insert one effect at a time. FX Chain presets
are saved as .fxc files that can be imported from the Plug-in Browser.
To save an FX Chain preset
1. Do one of the following:
• To save an effects bin as an FX Chain preset, right-click any blank space in the effects bin and
choose Save as FX Chain Preset on the pop-up menu. Specify a preset name and location in
the Save FX Chain Preset dialog box. All plug-ins in the effects bin are consolidated into a
single new FX Chain.
• To save an FX Chain container as a new FX Chain preset, right-click the FX Chain container
in an effects bin and choose Save as FX Chain Preset on the pop-up menu. Specify a preset
name and location in the Save FX Chain Preset dialog box.
• Click the Browse Plug-ins button
in the Browser, then drag the FX Chain container from
the Track view to the Audio FX section in the Browser. The FX Chain is added to the FX Chain
folder.
Note: FX Chain presets are stored as FX Chain Preset files (*.fxc). For track and bus effects
bins, the default name for the FX Chain preset is the track/bus name. For clip effects bins, the
default name is the clip name.
To load an FX Chain preset
Do one of the following:
• Right-click an effects bin and choose Load FX Chain Preset on the pop-up menu. Select the
desired FX Chain Preset file (*.fxc) in the Load FX Chain Preset dialog box and click Open.
• From the Plug-in tab of the Browser, under Audio, expand the FX Chain branch and drag the
preset to an effects bin.
Note: You can automatically extract plug-ins when loading an FX Chain preset. To do so, hold
down the SHIFT key while loading the preset. For more information about extracting plug-ins
from an FX Chain container, see “To extract plug-ins from an FX Chain container” on page 937.
Caution: If you load a SONAR X3 project in an older version of SONAR, SONAR will report the
FX Chain as a missing plug-in and the contents of the FX Chain will be unavailable. Resaving
the project will permanently remove the FX Chain.
626
Browser
Using the Plug-in Browser
To rename an FX Chain preset
1. In the Browser, click the PlugIn button
to show the Plug-in Browser.
2. Under Audio, expand the FX Chain branch.
3. Select the FX Chain, then click the FX Chain name again and type a name.
See:
“Effects chains” on page 932
“FX Chain module” on page 1031
“Using the Media Browser” on page 610
“Using the Plug-in Browser” on page 620
“Using the Synth Rack Browser” on page 628
“Keyboard navigation” on page 619
“Browser” on page 605
Browser
Using the Plug-in Browser
627
Using the Synth Rack Browser
The Synth Rack view lets you view, insert, delete, and configure your soft synths. You can also mute,
solo, and freeze any active instruments in your projects. Each time you insert a soft synth into your
project, a new row appears in the Synth Rack view with the name of the soft synth and its current
preset. You can select different presets directly from the Synth Rack.
When a synth is highlighted in the Synth Rack, the corresponding tracks in the Track View and
Console View are also highlighted.
You can insert as many copies of the same soft synth as you like; each new copy appears in a new
row and has the same name, but has a higher number after the name (ReWire soft synths can only
have one copy open). The new higher-numbered name also appears on the menus of Instrument
track inputs and MIDI track outputs.
When the Synth Rack is undocked, or docked at the bottom, additional controls become available.
These include synth icons and control knobs to control and/or automate parameters.
Synth Rack interface
Figure 217. Synth Rack Browser
A
B
C
D
E
FGH
J
I
A. Insert Synth B. Delete Synth C. Insert Synth Options D. Show Synth Rack Browser E. Synth Settings
menu F. Dock/undock G. Docking options H. Expand/collapse I. Instrument list J. Synth Automation menu
628
Browser
Using the Synth Rack Browser
Figure 218. Synth control bar
B
A
C
D E F
Docked
A
H
B
C
D E F
I
J K
Undocked
G
L
M
A. Connect/disconnect (only when floating or docked at top or bottom) B. Synth name C. Preset
picker D. Mute E. Solo F. Freeze/unfreeze G. Automated knobs H. Synth icon I. Automation
track J. Automation Read K. Automation Write L. Assign Controls M. Show/Hide Assigned Controls
• Show Synth Rack Browser
.
Show the Synth Rack Browser.
• Synth Settings menu. The Synth Settings menu lets you insert, delete and freeze the
selected soft synth, and specify other related options. The menu contains the following
commands:
• Insert Synths > Plug-in Layouts > Manage Layouts.
which lets you create, delete, and edit plug-in layouts.
Opens Cakewalk Plug-in Manager,
• Insert Synths > Plug-in Layouts > <list of layouts>. The Plug-in Layout menu lists all
layouts stored by Cakewalk Plug-in Manager. Select a layout to change the plug-in list.
• Insert Synths. This submenu lists all available soft synths. Click the desired soft synth to
insert it in the current project and add an Instrument track. You can also preview MIDI files
through any active soft synth in the Media Browser.
• Insert ReWire Devices. This submenu lists all available ReWire devices. Click the desired
ReWire device to insert it in the current project and add an Instrument track. You can also
preview MIDI files through any active ReWire device in the Media Browser.
• Insert Synth Options. Opens the Insert Soft Synth Options dialog box (see “Insert Soft
Synth Options dialog” on page 1754), which lets you specify what happens when you insert a
new soft synth.
• Synth Properties. Opens the user interface for the selected soft synth. You can also
double-click an empty space in the synth’s Synth Rack row to open the synths user interface.
• Replace Synth.
synth.
This submenu lets you replace the selected synth with any other available
Browser
Using the Synth Rack Browser
629
• Delete Synth. Deletes the selected soft synth or ReWire device from the current project.
Note 1: Always close any ReWire applications in their own interfaces before deleting them from
SONAR.
Note 2: Deleting a soft synth from the Synth Rack view does not delete the tracks associated
with the soft synth, but does change the associated MIDI track’s output to the next lowernumbered output.
• Enable MIDI Output. If the selected soft synth can create MIDI data from built-in
arpeggiators or other components, select Enable MIDI Output if you want to record or
redirect this new MIDI data.
• Freeze Synth . Freeze whichever soft synth currently has focus in the Synth Rack. Each
synth also has its own Freeze and Thaw buttons at the end of its individual control strip in the
Synth Rack. See “Freeze tracks and synths” on page 909 for more information. Right-click the
Freeze Synth button to access various freeze options on a pop-up menu.
• Unfreeze Synth.
Unfreeze whichever soft synth currently has focus in the Synth Rack.
• Quick Unfreeze Synth.
Synth Rack.
Quick unfreeze whichever soft synth currently has focus in the
• Freeze Options. Open the Freeze Options dialog box, which lets you specify what
happens when you freeze a synth.
• Unload Synth on Disconnect. When this option is selected, you can freeze a soft synth or
disconnect the synth in the Synth Rack view and free up the memory that the synth was using.
With some synths this can be a lot of memory, especially with synths that use samples. Of
course, if you remove the synth from your computer’s memory, reconnecting or unfreezing the
synth will take the same amount of time that it did when you originally loaded the synth.
• Force MIDI Echo Through Current Track. Select this option to force incoming MIDI data to
always echo through the current track, even if the current track’s Input Echo button is in the
Off position, and regardless of which synth has focus in the Synth Rack.
• Insert Synth
• Delete Synth
.
Insert a new soft synth.
. Delete the selected soft synth.
• Properties
. Open the selected soft synth’s property page (only visible when the Browser is
floating or docked in the MultiDock).
• Insert Synth Options
. Open the Insert Soft Synth Options dialog box, which lets you
specify options for new soft synths.
• Synth Automation menu. The Synth Automation menu lets you specify on which track to
display and record automation data for the selected soft synth.<name of track synth was
created with>. By default, automation data is displayed and recorded on the track the soft synth
630
Browser
Using the Synth Rack Browser
was created with.
• Audio Tracks. This submenu lets you choose any available track in the project to record
and display the selected synth’s automation data on.
• Instrument list. Each inserted instrument in a project appears in the Instrument list, and shows
the following controls:
Note: Certain controls in the Instrument list are only available when the Synth Rack is undocked
or docked at the bottom of the screen.
• Connect/disconnect. Disconnect a synth, mute all tracks associated with it, and free up
memory and CPU cycles.
• Synth icon. The synth icon provides a graphic representation of the soft synth. You can
right-click the icon to manage the assigned icon. This control is only available when the Synth
Rack is undocked or docked at the bottom.
• Synth name. The default name of the soft synth. To rename the synth, double-click the
name, type the desired name and press ENTER.
• Preset picker. The preset picker lets you select any available preset for the soft synth.
When the Synth Rack is undocked or docked on the bottom, you can also click the left/right
arrows to step through the available presets.
• Automation. The Automation list lets you specify on which track to display and record
automation data for the soft synth. This list is identical to the Synth Automation menu at the
top of the Synth Rack. This control is only available when the Synth Rack is undocked or
docked at the bottom.
• Mute.
Mute/unmute the synth, and all tracks associated with this instance of the synth.
• Solo.
Solo/unsolo the synth, and all tracks associated with this instance of the synth.
• Freeze/unfreeze. Freeze/unfreeze the soft synth.
• Thaw synth (Quick unfreeze / refreeze). Quick unfreeze/refreeze the soft synth. This
control is only available when the Synth Rack is undocked or docked at the bottom. You can
also hold down the SHIFT key and click the Freeze Synth button to perform Quick unfreeze /
refreeze.
• Read. Enable/disable automation read for the soft synth. This control is only available when
the Synth Rack is undocked or docked at the bottom.
• Write. Enable/disable automation write for the soft synth. This control is only available when
the Synth Rack is undocked or docked at the bottom.
• Assign Controls. Lets you choose which parameters in the synth’s interface to create
control knobs for. This control is only available when the Synth Rack is undocked or docked at
the bottom.
• Show/Hide Assign Controls. Show/hide any automated knobs you have created with the
Assign Controls command. This control is only available when the Synth Rack is undocked
or docked at the bottom.
Browser
Using the Synth Rack Browser
631
• Automated knobs. These are knobs you create by using the Assigned Controls button.
The knobs are displayed below the synth’s control bar in the Synth Rack. Automated knobs
are only available when the Synth Rack is undocked or docked at the bottom.
See:
“Managing instruments in a project” on page 632
“Using the Media Browser” on page 610
“Using the Plug-in Browser” on page 620
“Keyboard navigation” on page 619
“Browser” on page 605
“Software instruments” on page 849
“Using instrument tracks” on page 856
“ReWire” on page 870
Managing instruments in a project
To insert an instrument
1. In the Browser, click the Browse Synth Rack button
.
2. Click the Synth Settings button menu, point to Insert Synths and select the desired soft synth.
To remove an instrument
1. In the Browser, click the Browse Synth Rack button
.
2. In the Synth Rack, click the soft synth you want to remove.
3. Do one of the following:
• Click the Delete Synth button
.
• Click the Synth Settings button menu, then click Delete Synth.
A dialog box appears, asking you to confirm deletion of the instrument. You can also specify if
SONAR should delete any associated tracks.
To open an instrument’s property sheet
1. In the Browser, click the Browse Synth Rack button
.
2. Click on the desired synth in the Synth Rack to give it focus.
3. Click the Synth Settings button menu, then click Synth Properties.
Tip: You can also double-click an empty space in the synth’s control bar to open its user interface.
632
Browser
Using the Synth Rack Browser
To mute/solo/freeze an instrument
1. In the Browser, click the Browse Synth Rack button
.
2. Click the desired synths Mute, Solo, or Freeze button.
To select an instrument preset
1. In the Browser, click the Browse Synth Rack button
.
2. Click the desired synth’s preset picker.
To access assignable control knobs
1. Make sure the Browser is undocked or docked at the bottom of the screen.
2. In the Browser, click the Browse Synth Rack button
.
3. Click the desired synth’s Show/Hide Assigned Controls button.
To replace an instrument
1. In the Browser, click the Browse Synth Rack button
.
2. Do one of the following:
• Select the synth you want to replace, click the Browse Synth Rack button
menu and choose Replace Synth.
drop-down
• Click the PlugIns tab
followed by the Synths button
, then drag a synth onto an
existing track (audio, MIDI or Instrument) that is connected to the synth.
• In the Track view, right-click a track (audio, MIDI or Instrument) that is connected to the synth,
and choose Replace Synth on the pop-up menu.
SONAR automatically re-routes any Output and Input controls that were assigned to the old
synth.
Browser
Using the Synth Rack Browser
633
See:
“Using the Media Browser” on page 610
“Using the Plug-in Browser” on page 620
“Using the Synth Rack Browser” on page 628
“To import an audio or MIDI file” on page 613
“To import a video file” on page 616
“To import a track template” on page 614
“To insert an instrument” on page 624
“Keyboard navigation” on page 619
“Browser” on page 605
634
Browser
Using the Synth Rack Browser
AudioSnap (Producer and Studio only)
SONAR’s AudioSnap engine and tempo analysis features give you unprecedented rhythmic and
tempo control over your audio. Employing sophisticated transient detection technology, the
AudioSnap engine automatically analyzes all recorded and imported audio files for rhythmic content
to determine where the beats are in the music.
AudioSnap is completely non-destructive, similar to Groove clips and V-Vocal clips. AudioSnap,
V-Vocal, and Groove clips are mutually exclusive. Groove clip markers are typically placed at a zerocrossing point before a transient; AudioSnap transient markers are placed where musical changes
occur, but may not be exactly at a zero crossing.
What is AudioSnap?
AudioSnap is not a single feature, but rather a collection of different tools that can be used for
different tasks. The AudioSnap palette ties it all together in a task-oriented layout.
AudioSnap does several things, in a variety of ways:
• Stretches audio clips to fit project tempo or for quantizing.
• Changes project tempo to fit audio or MIDI clips.
• Copies audio rhythms for groove quantizing or doubling sounds.
Figure 219. The AudioSnap palette
635
How does it work?
AudioSnap works by finding the transients in audio clips. Transients are the areas in an audio clip
where the level increases suddenly. These make good locations to shrink, stretch, or split a clip,
without changing its sound quality too drastically. SONAR contains a variety of high-quality
stretching algorithms for different kinds of material. You can choose a lower-quality algorithm for
real-time playback of your edits, and then choose a better algorithm for mixdown or bouncing to
track (see “Algorithms and rendering” on page 692).
SONAR lets you define the default online and offline algorithms via the AudioSnap palette, and you
can override the default algorithm(s) on a clip-by-clip basis.
Note: The online algorithm is for preview purposes only during playback. The final audio quality
will be greatly improved after the offline algorithm is applied during mixdown/export.
The transients also make it possible for SONAR to calculate a clip’s tempo map (see “Editing a clip’s
tempo map” on page 659).
Figure 220. Audio clip.
Figure 221. Audio clip showing transient markers.
AudioSnap finds transients automatically, but the transient markers don’t always appear exactly
where you might want them for the kind of editing you want to do. You can edit the markers by
moving them to new locations, adding markers, filtering out markers, deleting markers, and
promoting markers (protecting them from being filtered). For information about editing transient
markers, see “Editing transient markers” on page 643.
636
AudioSnap (Producer and Studio only)
Why would I use it?
Here are some common uses for AudioSnap:
• Aligning measure lines and tempo to audio or MIDI tracks that were recorded without a
metronome (see “Synchronizing audio and the project tempo” on page 656).
• Fixing timing errors (see “Fixing timing problems in audio clips” on page 663).
• Synchronizing the rhythms of out-of-sync tracks (see “Making multiple clips/tracks groove
together” on page 670).
• Doubling existing sounds with other sounds (see “Extracting MIDI timing information from audio”
on page 679).
• Changing the tempo of existing projects (see “Changing a project’s tempo” on page 662).
• Snapping both audio and MIDI edits to audio beats (see “Snapping edits to audio beats” on page
681).
• Fixing timing errors in multi-track recordings while maintaining phase relationships (see “Adjusting
the timing of a multi-track performance while maintaining phase relationships” on page 665).
If you want to edit audio right away with AudioSnap, see “Synchronizing audio and the project
tempo” on page 656 and “Fixing timing problems in audio clips” on page 663. If you want to learn
more about all the AudioSnap tools and options, see the following links.
See:
“Using global tools on AudioSnap transient markers” on page 638
“Editing transient markers” on page 643
“Using the AudioSnap palette” on page 652
“Synchronizing audio and the project tempo” on page 656
“Fixing timing problems in audio clips” on page 663
“Extracting MIDI timing information from audio” on page 679
“General editing” on page 681
“Using the Pool” on page 689
“Algorithms and rendering” on page 692
AudioSnap (Producer and Studio only)
637
Using global tools on AudioSnap transient markers
At the heart of AudioSnap are transient markers. SONAR automatically detects transients for all
audio clips in your project. Although you can also edit transient markers with the Select tool, Move
tool, Timing tool, Split tool, Freehand tool, Erase tool and Mute tool, this chapter focuses on the
Smart tool since it is the easiest way to edit transient markers.
In order to edit audio transient markers, you must assign a track’s Edit Filter to Audio Transients
(see “Selecting the data type to edit” on page 450).
For more information about using different tools on AudioSnap transient markers, see:
“Using the Smart tool on AudioSnap transients” on page 463
“Using the Select tool on AudioSnap transients” on page 468
“Using the Move tool on AudioSnap transients” on page 472
“Using the Timing tool on AudioSnap transients” on page 479
“Using the Split tool on AudioSnap transients” on page 484
“Using the Freehand tool on AudioSnap transients” on page 488
“Using the Erase tool on AudioSnap transients” on page 498
“Using the Mute tool on AudioSnap transients” on page 502
To enable the Smart tool
1. Select the Smart tool
in the Control Bar.
2. Assign the desired track’s Edit Filter control to Audio Transients.
All audio clips show transient markers and the AudioSnap palette appears.
Note: Displaying transient markers does not mean that AudioSnap is enabled. AudioSnap is
only active on a clip when at least one transient marker has been stretched.
If you select another data type in the Edit Filter, transient markers will no longer be visible and
the AudioSnap palette closes.
The following table describes how the Smart tool behaves when interacting with transient markers
and clips.
Action
On transient marker
On clip
Click
Selects the transient marker.
Selects the clip and opens the
AudioSnap palette.
Right-click
Opens the transient marker context menu.
Opens the AudioSnap context menu.
Table 117.
638
Smart tool actions
AudioSnap (Producer and Studio only)
Using global tools on AudioSnap transient markers
Action
On transient marker
On clip
Double-click
-Selects transients from other tracks (from
selected clips) that fall within a certain window of
time of the transient the user is clicking on. If no
clips are selected, only non-hidden tracks are
affected.
Drag
Non-proportional stretch with selected
transients.
Note: You can drag a marker from either the
head or the line of the marker. Drag the line to
stretch a marker and drag the head to move a
marker.
Lasso selects transient markers.
Hold down the
Proportionally stretches selected transients.
CTRL key and drag
Lasso selects transients to add to the
current selection.
Hold down the
Adds transient marker to current selection.
CTRL key and click
--
Hold down the
CTRL key and
double-click
Like double-click, but adds transients to the
current selection.
--
Hold down the
CTRL and SHIFT
keys and doubleclick
Like double-click, but extends the range of
selected transients.
--
Hold down the ALT
key and click
--
Inserts a new transient marker.
Table 117.
Smart tool actions
Figure 222. Smart tool hotspots on AudioSnap transients.
B
C
A
D
AudioSnap (Producer and Studio only)
Using global tools on AudioSnap transient markers
639
Hotspot
Default action
Double-click
A
Drag transient marker
line to stretch selected
transients (nonproportional stretch)
Select all adjacent transient
markers in other tracks
B
Drag transient marker
handle (diamond) to
move transient marker
(non-stretch)
C
Lasso select transients
D
Lasso select transients
across clips and tracks
Table 118.
+ALT
+CTRL
Drag transient marker
line to stretch selected
transients proportionally
Insert new transient
marker
Using the Smart tool on AudioSnap transients clips
For more information about editing transient markers, see “Editing transient markers” on page 643.
Transient marker context menu
The transient marker context menu gives you quick access to commands related to time stretching
and tempo mapping. The following menu commands are available when you right-click a transient
marker:
• Select markers. Use this submenu to select transient markers that meet specific criteria.
• Set project tempo from clip. This command copies the clip’s tempo map to the project’s global
tempo map. This allows the project’s measure boundaries to align with the audio clip. Whenever
the project’s tempo map is generated from a clip, the clip’s Lock Position property is enabled
automatically.
• Set clip tempo from project. This command copies the project’s tempo map to the clip’s tempo
map. This allows the project’s measure boundaries to align with the audio clip.
• Clips follow project tempo.
map.
This command forces the clip to follow the project’s global tempo
Note: The Clips follow project tempo command only works on clips that are configured to use
musical time (the Time Base property is set to Musical in the Clip Inspector).
• Edit clip tempo map. Each audio clip has an internal tempo map. This command exposes
controls that allow you to edit a clip’s tempo map. For details, see “Editing a clip’s tempo map” on
page 659.
• Merge and Lock Markers. This command combines all transient markers on all selected
tracks, so that all selected tracks share identical transient markers. The clip positions are also
640
AudioSnap (Producer and Studio only)
Using global tools on AudioSnap transient markers
locked. This will ensure that phase relationships are maintained when quantizing or moving clips
across multiple tracks. When using the Smart tool to drag transient markers, all transient markers
at exactly the same point in time on selected clips move together as a group.
• Save as Groove. This command opens the Define Groove dialog box, which lets you save the
groove to a file. The groove can then be applied to other audio or MIDI clips.
• Copy as MIDI. This command saves the selected audio as a MIDI clip, which you can paste
from the Clipboard into a MIDI track. You select the MIDI note that the transients in the audio clip
will be converted to in the AudioSnap Options dialog box, which opens when you click the
Options button.
• Quantize. This command opens the Quantize dialog box, which has options to quantize
AudioSnap Beats and Audio Clip Start Times, and also to set automatic crossfade options.
• Groove Quantize. This command opens the Groove Quantize dialog box, which has an option
to quantize AudioSnap Beats, and controls to set automatic crossfade options.
• Pool > Add MBT to pool. The Track view Time Ruler can be added to the Pool (see “Using the
Pool” on page 689). This command adds the current Musical Time snap resolution to the pool,
and also displays dotted pool lines in the Clips pane. This can be useful as either a basic visual
guide, or for adding the Musical Time to an extracted groove, or to fill in any transients that may
be “missing” in a syncopated or sparse section. In the Control Bar’s Snap module, set the
Musical Time value to the resolution you would like to add to the Pool.
• Pool > Add clip to pool. This command adds or deletes the clip’s transient markers from the
Pool. The markers do not have to be visible to be added to the Pool. See “Using the Pool” on
page 689 for more information.
• Pool > Show pool lines. This command hides or shows the Pool lines.